JP7754563B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), slot machines, enclosed gaming machines, and medal-less slot machines.

Conventionally, slot machines are known as one type of gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-296354

Improved maintenance is desired for this type of gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine equipped with a certain substrate having a first surface and a second surface, wherein the base material of the certain substrate is light transmissive, the second surface is the surface opposite the first surface across the base material, the first surface has a first region where a wiring pattern is not formed and a third region where the wiring pattern is formed, the second surface has a second region where a wiring pattern is not formed and a fourth region where the wiring pattern is formed, and the wiring pattern is not light transmissive, and in the first case, a certain region of the first region that overlaps with the second region when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the second surface and the first surface (hereinafter, In a certain region of the first region (hereinafter referred to as the "fifth region"), when viewed from the first surface, at least a portion of the light traveling from the second surface toward the second surface is visible; in the first case, in a region of the first region (hereinafter referred to as the "sixth region") that overlaps with the fourth region when viewed from the second surface and a direction perpendicular to the first surface, at least a portion of the light traveling from the second surface toward the second surface is visible when viewed from the first surface; in the first case, the brightness of the fifth region is higher than the brightness of the sixth region; and when the certain board is installed, the brightness of the sixth region is lower than the brightness of the third region.

The object of the present invention is to provide an amusement machine that is easy to maintain.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a pay line of the slot machine 100. 1 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. This is a diagram showing the arrangement of the symbols on each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) laid out in a flat plane. 10 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations, the names of the condition devices, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the payout amounts, and remarks. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) A flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (b) A flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. (c) A flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. (a) A flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (b) A flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (c) A flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (d) A flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 600. (a) is a side view of the rear cover 620. (b) is a top view of the rear cover 620. (c) is a side view of the speaker 610. (d) is a top view of the speaker 610. 1A is a top view of the speaker unit 600. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the speaker unit 600 shown in FIG. 1A taken along line AA. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a correct mounting method for the speaker unit 600. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an incorrect mounting method for the speaker unit 600. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating another example of an incorrect installation method of the speaker unit 600. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a speaker unit 700 according to a first modified example. (a) is a side view of the rear cover 720. (b) is a top view of the rear cover 720. (c) is a side view of the speaker 710. (d) is a top view of the speaker 710. 1A is a top view of the speaker unit 700. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the speaker unit 700 shown in FIG. 1A taken along line BB. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of a method for installing the speaker unit 700 in chronological order. 10A is an exploded perspective view of a speaker unit 800 according to Modification 2. FIG. 10B is an external perspective view showing two speaker units 800 attached to the rear surface of the front door 102. FIG. (a) is a side view of the rear cover 820. (b) is a top view of the rear cover 820. (c) is a side view of the speaker 810. (d) is a top view of the speaker 810. 8 is a plan view of the speaker 810 housed in the inner space of the rear cover 820, seen from the underside of the speaker 810. FIG. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of a method for attaching the speaker unit 800 in chronological order. 10A is an exploded perspective view of a speaker unit 850 according to Modification 3. FIG. 10B is an external perspective view showing two speaker units 850 attached to the lower rear surface of the front door 102. FIG. (a) is a side view of the rear cover 870. (b) is a top view of the rear cover 870. (c) is a side view of the speaker 860. (d) is a top view of the speaker 860. 10 is a rear view of the front door 102 from the rear side, showing the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 positioned relative to the front door 102. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the state after the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 are attached to the front door 102 with screws, as seen from the rear of the front door 102. FIG. (a) A side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, as seen from the left side when viewed from the rear. (b) A side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, as seen from the right side when viewed from the rear. 10 is a rear view of the state after the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 are attached to the front door 102 with screws, as seen from the rear of the front door 102. FIG. 1A is a plan view showing a state in which the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1B is a side view showing a state in which the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1C is a side view showing a state in which the reel relay board unit 700 is removed from the power supply relay board unit 600. 1A is a front view of the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1B is a rear view of the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 10 is an exploded front view of the components constituting the power supply relay board unit 600. 10 is an exploded view of the components constituting the power supply relay board unit 600, as seen from the rear. FIG. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged view showing a main-side board accommodating portion 612 of the board support member 610. (a) is a front view of a main-side board accommodating section 631 according to a modified example. (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z-Z in (a). (c) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to (b), showing a state in which a main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodating section 631. (a) is a front view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodation section 612 of the board support body 610. (b) is a plan view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 has been moved leftward as viewed from the front in the main board accommodation section 612. (c) is a plan view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 has been moved downward as viewed from the front in the main board accommodation section 612. 1A is a front view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodation portion 612 of the board support body 610 and a mounting screw 646 is attached. FIG. 1B is a view seen from the direction of the symbol A in FIG. 1A, and is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the mounting screw 646. 36(a) is a partially enlarged view showing a state before a mounting screw 647 according to a modified example is mounted to a board loose-fit boss 625. (b) is a partially enlarged view showing a state after a mounting screw 647 according to a modified example is mounted to a board loose-fit boss 625, and is a drawing corresponding to FIG. (a) is a front view of the reel relay board unit 700 as seen from the front side, (b) is a side view of the reel relay board unit 700 as seen from the right side, and (c) is an exploded side view of the components constituting the reel relay board unit 700 as seen from the right side. (a) A front view of the main-side reel relay board 742 as seen from the front side, (b) A plan view of the main-side reel relay board 742 as seen from above, and (c) A bottom view of the main-side reel relay board 742 as seen from the bottom side. (a) is a front view of the main-side housing 744 as seen from the front side, (b) is a plan view of the main-side housing 744 as seen from above, and (c) is a front perspective view of the main-side housing 744 as seen from diagonally above the front. (a) is a front view of the main-side lid body 746 as seen from the front side, (b) is a plan view of the main-side lid body 746 as seen from above, and (c) is a front perspective view of the main-side lid body 746 as seen from diagonally above the front. 7A is a front view of the sheet metal member 710 as seen from the front side, FIG. 7B is a plan view of the sheet metal member 710 as seen from above, and FIG. 7C is a rear view of the sheet metal member 710 as seen from the rear side. (a) is a front view showing the state in which the main-side housing 744 is fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as viewed from the front side; (b) is a rear view showing the state in which the main-side housing 744 is fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as viewed from the rear side; and (c) is a side view showing the state in which the main-side housing 744 is attached to the sheet metal member 710. 10A is a side view showing a procedure for attaching a main-side housing 744 and a main-side reel-side relay board 742 to a sheet metal member 710. FIG. 10B is a side view showing a procedure for attaching a main-side cover 746 to the sheet metal member 710 to which the main-side housing 744 and the main-side reel-side relay board 742 have been attached. This is a plan view showing the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 side by side. 1 is a front view showing the inside of the main body 101, illustrating the connection relationship between the reel relay board unit 700 and the reels 110 to 112. FIG. (a-1) is a front view of the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 as viewed from the front side. (a-2) is a bottom view of the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 as viewed from the direction (bottom) indicated by the symbol D in the front view of (a-1). (b-1) is a front view of the reel main board 742 and the reel sub-board 772 as viewed from the front side. (b-2) is a plan view of the reel main board 742 and the reel sub-board 772 as viewed from the direction (top) indicated by the symbol U in the front view of (b-1). 1A is a side view showing a state before the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1B is a side view showing a state after the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. (a) is a side view of a speaker 910. (b) is a side view of a speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 930 is held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910. (c) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 931 is held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910 through a speaker cover 920. 9A is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a sheet metal member 710 is held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910. FIG. 9B is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 935 and a washer 936 are held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910. 9A is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 937 having a setting key 938 hooked thereon is held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910. FIG. 9B is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing a plurality of examples in which screws 940 to 942 having a setting key 938 hooked thereon are held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910. FIG. 9 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screws of the circuit board are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910. FIG. 9 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which two boards connected by a connector are held by screws using a yoke 914c of the speaker 910. 9 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 944 that falls from a predetermined position is held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910. FIG. 9A is a plan view of the speaker unit 950. FIG. 9B is a side view of the speaker unit 950, showing an example in which the screws 945 to 948 are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910. 10A is a diagram showing a state in which the power supply main board 640 is placed horizontally on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which the reel main board 742 is placed vertically on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. 10A is a diagram showing a state in which the power supply main board 640 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state in which the reel main board 742 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a power supply main board 640 and a reel main board 742 connected board-to-board are placed obliquely on a bottom plate 264 of a main body 101. FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 1B is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram schematically showing a state in which light from a light source with a first light intensity is transmitted through the substrate, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram showing a state in which light from a light source with a second light intensity is transmitted through the substrate, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram showing a state in which dust adheres to the substrate when there is no light source, and FIG. 1B is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram showing a state in which dust adheres to the substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present, and FIG. 1B is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram showing a state in which dust adheres to the substrate when a light source with a second light intensity is present, and FIG. 1B is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram showing a schematic view of a scratched substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is used, and FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the top lamp unit 11 as seen obliquely from above. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating the structure of a lamp unit. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams illustrating the structure of a modified example of the lamp unit. A diagram showing the entire first movable performance body 161 and second movable performance body 162 shown in Figure 65. 69. (A) is a view of the first sheet member 1610 shown in FIG. 69 seen from below, and (B) is a view of the second sheet member 1620 shown in FIG. 69 seen from below. A diagram showing an example of a combination of performance actions of the first movable performance body 161 on the left and the second movable performance body 162 on the right. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the rear side of the performance device 16. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship between sensor units SU1 and SU2 and light-shielding pieces C1 and C2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a right side view of the performance device 16. FIG. 73 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the sensor unit SU1 in FIG. 72 (the area circled by a dotted line). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a sensor unit SU1 and a rib RB. This is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front side (player side). This is an external view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear side. FIG. 2 is a simplified front view of the game board. 1 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 1 shows a block diagram of a gaming machine. (a) An example of the special stop pattern. (b) An example of the decorative stop pattern. (c) An example of the regular stop display pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) A flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU of the first sub-control unit. (b) A flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (c) A flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (a) A flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit. (b) A flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit. (c) A flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit. (a) A flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit, (b) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit, (c) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit, and (d) A flowchart of VDP image control processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the position of a lighting unit equipped with a lighting board. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line aa in Figure 88. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a wiring example. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a liquid crystal control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a liquid crystal control board. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompt structure. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment with the front door open. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the arrangement of the symbols on each reel in a flat layout, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the activation or payout of each winning role. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing of the first sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit, and (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing of the second sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, and (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit. 1A is a plan view of the circuit board, FIG. 1B is a bottom view of the circuit board, and FIG. 1C is a side view of the circuit board. 1A and 1B are side views of a circuit board. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating the function of a circuit board. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating an example of use of a circuit board. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating an example of use of a circuit board. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating examples of soldering on a circuit board. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of use of a modified circuit board. 1A is a plan view of another circuit board, FIG. 1B is a bottom view of another circuit board, and FIG. 1C is a side view of another circuit board. FIG. 10 is a side view of another circuit board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of use of another circuit board. 10A is a plan view of yet another circuit board, FIG. 10B is a bottom view of yet another circuit board, and FIG. 10C is a side view of yet another circuit board. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of use of yet another circuit board.

<<Embodiment 1>>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 1. Figure 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in Figure 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 100. These reels 110-112 are driven to rotate by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 110-112 (see Figure 4). From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through symbol display windows 113 provided in front of each reel 110-112, allowing a total of nine symbols to be seen.

By spinning each of the reels 110-112, the combination of symbols visible to the player will change. In other words, each of the reels 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays a variety of symbol combinations. Note that in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside and at the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A backlight 264 (see Figure 18) is located on the back of each reel 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 (details will be described later). Furthermore, an optical sensor (also called an index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 110-112 inside the slot machine 100, and a light-blocking piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection results of this sensor, the rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, special combination 1 or special combination 2) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress (special combination 1 or 2 game state). The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

BET buttons (first operating means) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time BET button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when BET button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when BET button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, BET button 132 is also referred to as the MAX BET button. The game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The effect button 156 is an operating means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, it is configured as a button that can be pressed by the player and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects is not limited to buttons, and may be configured as, for example, a lever or touch panel, or multiple operating means may be provided.

The medal slot 141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (by inserting) into the medal slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during bonus play) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing push order effects. In this example, the stored number display 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever (second operating means) 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started spinning by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

Hereinafter, operations performed on stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, second stop reel, and third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the spinning reels 110 to 112 is referred to as the operation order (or push order).

If the left stop button 137 is represented as "Left or R," the middle stop button 138 as "Middle or C," and the right stop button 139 as "Right or R," there are six possible operating sequences (press orders) for the stop buttons 137-139: (1) left-to-middle-to-right operating sequence (Left-to-Right or LCR), (2) left-to-right-to-middle operating sequence (Left-to-Right-Centre or LRC), (3) middle-to-left-to-right operating sequence (Middle-to-Left-Right or CLR), (4) middle-to-right-to-left operating sequence (Middle-to-Right-Left or CRL), (5) right-to-left-to-middle operating sequence (Right-to-Left-Centre or RLC), and (6) right-to-middle-to-left operating sequence (Right-to-Centre-Left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed. Below the title panel 162 are a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from the speaker installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 installed on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps that add excitement to the game. A performance device 160 is installed above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is installed above the performance device 160.

This effect device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image display device) disposed behind this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

Note that the display device does not have to be an LCD display device; any display device capable of displaying various presentation images and various game information may be used, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. The display screen is rectangular and is configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Decorations (not shown) may be provided around the edges of the display screen, causing part of the edges of the display screen to be hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

The main body 101 also includes a setting key that can be turned on and off by rotating it, and a setting switch that can be pressed to change settings (change setting values) or check settings. The setting key is an operating means for starting to change or check setting values (Settings 1 to 6 in this example), and the setting switch is one of the setting means that can set one of multiple setting values.

<Winning line>
Next, the pay lines will be described with reference to Figure 2. Figure 2 is a diagram showing an example of the pay lines of the slot machine 100.

As explained using Figure 1, when viewed by the player, the symbols on reels 110-112 are displayed in roughly three rows vertically through symbol display windows 113 provided in front of each reel 110-112, allowing a total of nine symbols to be seen.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the top row of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is called the left reel top row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 in the figure; also called symbol position 2) is called the left reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the left reel 110 (position 3 in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is called the left reel bottom row symbol.

Furthermore, the symbol displayed on the top row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 4) is called the middle reel upper row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 5) is called the middle reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is called the middle reel lower row symbol.

Furthermore, the symbol displayed on the top row of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 7) is called the right reel top row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is called the right reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure; also called symbol position 9) is called the right reel bottom row symbol.

In this embodiment, the only winning line provided is the middle winning line L1 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "winning line L1"), which is made up of the middle symbol on the left reel (symbol position 2), the middle symbol on the middle reel (symbol position 5), and the middle symbol on the right reel (symbol position 8).

Here, a winning line is a line set at the stop position of symbols visible through the symbol display window 113, and is the line that determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination, as described using Figure 5, is displayed (whether or not it is complete). The winning line that is active (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as an "active line") is predetermined based on the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-coin bet-only machine. When fewer than three medals are inserted, no pay line is active. When three medals are bet, pay line L1 is active. When a pay line is active, play can begin by operating the start lever 135.

Hereinafter, within the symbol display window 113, symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 on the winning line L1 may be referred to as "winning positions," and other symbol positions, i.e., symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9, may be referred to as "non-winning positions." In other words, a winning position is a position on the winning line where a symbol that makes up a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination stops.

The number of winning lines is not limited to one. For example, in addition to winning line L1, an upper winning line consisting of the upper symbols on the left reel, the upper symbols on the middle reel, and the upper symbols on the right reel, and a lower winning line consisting of the lower symbols on the left reel, the lower symbols on the middle reel, and the lower symbols on the right reel, for a total of three lines, may be set as valid winning lines. Alternatively, a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of medals bet may be set as valid winning lines.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 3. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 (first control means) that mainly controls gameplay, a first sub-control unit 400 (second control means) that mainly controls presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 (second control means) that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery for winning combinations, reel stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500 described below.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits drive pulses in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data in the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generation circuit 316 (which has two random number generation circuits built in) that derives a number in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 begins game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers to be used by the basic circuit 302. There are two main methods for generating random numbers in this random number generation circuit 316: counter mode and random number mode. In counter mode, a number that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired and this number is derived as a random number. There are two further methods in random number mode. The first method in random number mode uses a random number seed to perform a calculation using a predetermined function (e.g., a modulus function) and derives the result as a random number. The second method reads a number from a random number table in which numbers ranging from 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read number as a random number. The random number generation circuit 316 acquires irregular values by utilizing white noise superimposed on the signals input to the sensor circuit 320 from the various sensors 318. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the value thus obtained as the initial value for a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the start position for reading from the random number table.

The main control unit 300 also has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, optical sensor for reel 110, optical sensor for reel 111, optical sensor for reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects that the start lever sensor is at an H level, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. Stop button 137 sensors, stop button 138 sensors, and stop button 139 sensors are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are installed on each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The optical sensors for reel 110, reel 111, and reel 112 are installed in predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each reel 110-112, and go low every time a light-shielding piece attached to the reel frame passes by. When CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation and resets the reel rotational position information to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored medal number indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 via this information output circuit 334 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power management unit (not shown). If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a sound source IC 418, which is connected to speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 144, title panel 162 lamps, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to commands from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 also has a sensor circuit 426, which is connected via the input interface to a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 and an effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the pressing of the effect button 156. The CPU 404 monitors the status of the shutter sensor 428 and effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157 (hereinafter also referred to as the "liquid crystal display device 157"). The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 also has a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and other data stored in the ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a planar view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112).

Each reel 110 to 112 has a predetermined number of symbols (20 symbols numbered 0 to 19) of the multiple types (9 symbols in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the diagram arranged on it. The numbers 0 to 19 shown on the left side of the diagram indicate the position of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the symbol numbered 0 on the left reel 110 is a watermelon symbol, the symbol numbered 1 on the center reel 111 is a bell symbol, and the symbol numbered 0 on the right reel 112 is a replay symbol.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations, the names of the condition devices, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the payout amounts, and remarks.

Winning roles on the slot machine 100 include special roles (Special Role 1, Special Role 2) and general roles (Replay Roles 1-3, Small Roles 1-5). Note that the types of winning roles are not limited to these roles and can be any role; some winning roles are not shown in Figure 5.

<Types of winning roles/special roles>
Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combinations 1 and 2 are combinations that transition to a special game state in which a predetermined benefit is awarded to the player. Furthermore, the replay combination is a combination that allows a replay without inserting a new medal (a combination that awards a replay). These winning combinations are sometimes called "activation combinations."

In addition, "winning" in this embodiment also includes cases where a symbol combination of an activated role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on a winning line, including, for example, winning Special Role 1, Special Role 2, and Replay Role.

Special Role 1 and Special Role 2 are winning roles that transition the game state to the Special Role 1/2 Internal Win State (RT3) upon internal win, and transition the game state to the Special Role 1/2 Game State (RT4) upon winning. Note that if more than the specified number of medals (e.g., 200 medals) are paid out in the Special Role 1/2 Game State (RT4), the game state transitions to the Low Replay Probability State (RT1). Each game state (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combination corresponding to Special Role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1 symbol - Seven 1 symbol - Seven 1 symbol" or "Seven 2 symbol - Seven 2 symbol - Seven 2 symbol," and the symbol combination corresponding to Special Role 2 (RB) is "BAR symbol - BAR symbol - BAR symbol."

When special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won, the special role internal win flag corresponding to this internally won role is set to ON (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag remains ON until the internally won role is won, making it easier to win that internally won role in subsequent games. In other words, in a game in which special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in subsequent games, making it easier to win the symbol combination corresponding to the special role.

<Types of winning roles/replay roles>
Replay roles 1 to 3 are winning roles (operating roles) that allow you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media), and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in Figure 5.

A replay role may be any role that allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a replay role is won, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in the medal insertion number memory area), or medals inserted in a game that wins a replay role may be carried over and used in the next game. Special replays, which will be described later, are also one type of replay role.

<Types of winning roles/small roles>
Small wins 1 to 5 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a payout number).

Small win 1 (Watermelon) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination "Watermelon - Watermelon - Watermelon" is displayed stationary on the winning line L1, and five medals are paid out.

Minor win 2 (Cherry) is a winning combination in which the "Cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" symbol combination is displayed stationary on the winning line L1, and two medals are paid out. For the "Cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" symbol combination, the symbol on the left reel 110 must be a "Cherry symbol," and the symbols on the center reel 111 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

Hereinafter, these minor prizes 1 (watermelon) and 2 (cherry) may be collectively referred to as "rare prizes", but rare prizes are not limited to these winning prizes, and may be either one of the winning prizes, or may include other winning prizes.

Note that if you win a rare role in the AT state, which will be described later, a lottery will be held to add to the number of games or sets (making it easier to win the lottery). On the other hand, even if you win a rare role in the ED state, a lottery will not be held to add to the number of games or sets.

Small win 3 (push order bell) is made up of six types of winning roles: small win 3a to small win 3f. In this example, a lottery is drawn to select one of the winning roles, small win 3a to small win 3f, with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/6 in this example, common to all settings). If the operation sequence (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to stop the play matches the sequence corresponding to the winning role that has been internally selected, the player wins and 12 medals are paid out. In other words, small win 3 (push order bell) is an operation pattern result (winning role) whose degree of advantage varies depending on the operation sequence of the stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139.

Minor win 4 (common bell) is a winning combination in which the "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" combination is displayed on the winning line L1, regardless of the order (press order) or timing of the stop operations using stop buttons 137-139, and 12 medals are paid out.

Small win 5 (1 coin win) is a winning combination in which the "replay symbol - replay symbol - blank 1 symbol" combination is displayed stopped on the winning line L1, regardless of the order (press order) or timing of the stop operations using stop buttons 137-139, and 1 medal is paid out.

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of the RT game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is the default RT-type game state (hereinafter also referred to as the "normal game state") that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is turned on, and is a game state that is relatively more disadvantageous to the player than other game states.

In this example, if replay role 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay role 3 (promotion replay 2) is won in this low replay probability state (RT1), the game will transition to the high replay probability state (RT2) described below. Also, if special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won in this low replay probability state (RT1), the game will transition to the special role 1/2 internal win state (RT3) described below.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, if an internal win for Special Role 1 or Special Role 2 occurs in this high replay probability state (RT2), the game will transition to the internal win state for Special Role 1/2 (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special Role 1 & 2 Internal Winning State (RT3)>
The special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is set to ON, and the player can display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag by performing a stop operation at a predetermined timing.

In this example, if special role 1 or special role 2 is won in this special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3), the game will transition to the special game state (RT4) described below.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player among all gaming states. In this example, when a specified number of coins (for example, 200 coins) is paid out in the special gaming state (RT4), the game transitions to the low re-play probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may be, for example, when a predetermined combination is internally won, when a predetermined number of wins (e.g., eight wins) occur, or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., six games) have been played.

<AT system game state transition>
Next, the gaming state of the AT system will be explained.

AT-type game states are broadly divided into low-navigation states and high-navigation states. The low-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also called the normal mode, non-advantageous zone, or normal zone. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called the AT mode or advantageous zone.

Here, operation navigation refers to a presentation that notifies the stop operation mode of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, the correct operation sequence or the timing of the stop operation) in order to acquire medals or maintain an advantageous gaming state. For example, this includes a presentation that notifies the correct operation sequence for a push order role (for example, minor role 3 (push order bell LCR)) (for example, a presentation that displays the characters "left → center → right").

When a player performs a stop operation in accordance with the operation content of the operation navigation, the player will achieve a favorable result, so the high navigation state is a more favorable gaming state for the player than the low navigation state. Here, "favorable" specifically means that the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine during a specified period of play, known as the payout rate (ball payout rate), is favorable.

In this example, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the probability of the operation navigation being executed is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the probability of the operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low navigation state. However, the low navigation state may also be defined as a state in which the operation navigation is not executed, and the high navigation state as a state in which the operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and these are called presentation states. In more detail, the presentation state of the low navigation state is the normal game state, and the presentation state of the high navigation state includes the normal state, confirmation notification state, judge state, pullback state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ED (ending) state. In principle, the AT1 state, AT2 state, and ED state are states in which the number of balls released increases.

In this embodiment, if a certain condition is met in the normal game mode in the low navigation state (for example, if a winning combination other than a miss is won), the game will transition to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, the game will transition, for example, in the order of confirmation notification state → AT1 state → judge state. From this judge state, there are routes to transition to the normal game mode or AT2 state via the pullback state, or routes to transition directly from the judge state to the AT2 state.

The AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a state in which AT play is possible a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games per set), and is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal play state in a low navigation state or the normal state in a high navigation state.

In this AT game, at the start of the AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a 1/4 chance of winning) is held to determine whether or not to continue the AT game. If the set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games (in this example, one set of 30 games) are awarded, and the AT state is extended. Also, if the conditions for transitioning to the normal game state are met in the AT state (in this example, when all games in the AT state have been played), the game will transition to the normal game state from the next game.

Furthermore, when the number of games remaining in the high navigation state falls below a predetermined number (for example, 20 games), the state transitions to the ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) effect is executed, suggesting the end of the high navigation state.

The condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to the number of games remaining in the high navigation state being a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 games) or less; for example, the predetermined number of games may be more or less than 20 games, or "Number of coins acquired + expected difference in number of coins acquired > 2000".

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in Figure 6 in accordance with the control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, various initial settings are first performed in step S101. These initial settings include setting the stack initial value in the CPU 304 stack pointer (SP), disabling interrupts, initializing the I/O 310, initializing various variables stored in RAM 308, and enabling operation and setting initial values for the WDT 314.

In step S102, the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, a check is made to see if medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted. If a replay role was won in the previous game, the process inserts the same number of medals as inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals. A check is also made to see if the start lever 135 has been operated, and if so, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined and a win line determination process is performed to determine the valid win lines.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and a winning role internal lottery process is performed. In the winning role internal lottery process, the winning role lottery table stored in ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the obtained random number value, and preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating the result of this internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. If the result of the internal lottery is an internal win for any winning role (including an activated role), the flag for that winning role is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the results of the internal lottery process for winning combinations. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In addition, in step S105, preparations are made to send a reel stop data command containing information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, a presentation state control process related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, presentation processing is executed. This presentation processing controls various presentation effects, etc.

In step S108, the reel rotation start process is executed, causing all reels 110 to 112 to start spinning.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control processing, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of reel stop data is referenced to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and one of reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of reel pull-in frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In step S109, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button acceptance command related to the stop button 137-139 that was operated to stop (more specifically, a stop button acceptance 1 command for the first stop operation, a stop button acceptance 2 command for the second stop operation, and a stop button acceptance 3 command for the third stop operation), and for each reel stop, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stopped reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop 3 command for the third stop operation).

In step S110, a winning determination process is performed to determine whether a win has been made. In this winning determination process, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that minor role 3 (Bell) has been won. In addition, in step S110, preparations are made to send a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, the medal awarding process is performed. During the medal awarding process, if a winning combination that results in a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In this game state control processing, processing related to the transition of each RT-system game state is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start or end conditions are met. In addition, preparations are made to send a game state command containing information indicating the current RT-system game state.

In step S113, the presentation state control process related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed. In step S114, the high-navigation state termination process related to the termination of the high-navigation state is executed.

This completes one game. From then on, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S206 in Figure 7) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, WDT314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update processing, detection signals from the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored, and the detection signals are stored in signal status storage areas in RAM 308 partitioned for each of the various sensors 318.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processing is performed according to the interrupt status. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting and transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 334 to an information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal status of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal status storage area in step S203 is first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game status.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S211; if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. This timer interrupt end process involves setting the values of each register that were temporarily saved in step S2001 back into their original registers. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in Figure 7.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for restoring the system to the state it was in when power was restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power-off processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the system then returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in Figure 7.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 8. Figure 8(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 8(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 8(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, we will explain the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 using Figure 8 (a).

When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. This initialization process involves initializing the input/output ports and initializing the memory area in RAM 408. During this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information indicating the results of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information indicating the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S304, command processing is performed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300.

In step S305, effect control processing is performed. Here, effect preparation is performed in accordance with the effect reservation information stored in the effect reservation area in RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, reading effect data from ROM 406 and updating the effect data if it needs to be updated.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command for the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command for the various lamps 420, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S309, information output processing is performed to set up sending a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, this control command is set up to be output, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, using Figure 8 (b), we will explain the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the first sub-control unit 400 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, using Figure 8 (c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 of the first sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 8 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S502, commands set in step S309 are sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number value for presentation is updated, etc.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using Figure 9. Figure 9(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 9(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 9(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 9(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in Figure 9(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S601. This initialization processing includes initial setting of input/output ports, initialization processing of memory areas in RAM 508, initialization processing of memory areas in VRAM 536, etc.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, processing proceeds to step S603. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read effect data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other effect data from ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, processing to update the effect data is also executed.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail below) is performed based on the processing results of step S605. For example, if the performance data read in step S605 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (announcement image, background image) is executed. When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, using Figure 9 (b), we will explain the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the second sub-control unit 500 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using Figure 9 (c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 of the second sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 9 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S802, processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Next, we will explain the image control processing of step S606 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 using Figure 9(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (source address in ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (destination address in VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 534 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 on image data information (VRAM 536 coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) that constitutes the display image in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901. The VDP 534 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 534 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S906; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

<Speaker mounting structure>
Next, the speaker mounting structure in the slot machine 100 will be described.

Figure 10 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by a top panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a bottom panel 264, and a back panel 242, and is open at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is located in a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and three reels 110 to 112 are located below this main control board storage case 210. To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and reels 110 to 112, i.e., on the left side panel 260 as viewed from the front, a sub-control board storage case 220 containing a sub-control board is located. Additionally, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information from the slot machine 100 to an external device.

The medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264. Above this medal payout device 180, i.e., below the reels 110 to 112, is disposed a power supply device 252 having a power board, with a power switch 244 disposed on the front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied externally to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300 and sub-control units 400 and 500, which will be described later. It also has a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) that supplies power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

To the right of the medal payout device 180 is located the auxiliary medal storage 240, with an overflow terminal (not shown) located behind it. The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 264, which extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls this performance device 160, and an upper speaker 272. Below the symbol display window 113 are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. Furthermore, a speaker unit 600 is provided in a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker unit configuration>
Next, the configuration of the speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to Fig. 11. Fig. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 600.

As explained using Figure 10, the speaker unit 600 is screwed to the lower left side of the back surface of the front door 102, and as shown in Figure 11, it is composed of a bass output speaker 610 (first component) with a large diaphragm and a rear cover 620 (second component) that covers the rear side of the speaker 610, and is attached to a speaker pedestal 630 (base) formed on the back surface of the front door 102.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker base>
The speaker base 630 (base) comprises an outer frame 631 formed to fit the roughly rectangular outer shape of the flange 614 of the speaker 610, mounting sleeves 632 formed at each of the four inner corners of the outer frame 631 for screwing the speaker 610 and rear cover 620 to the front door 102, and a circular inner frame 633 against which the front peripheral edge of the frame 612 of the speaker 610 abuts.

A sound hole 161 consisting of multiple holes is formed inside the inner frame portion 633 of the speaker base 630, and the low-pitched sounds output from the speaker 610 are output to the outside of the slot machine 100 through this sound hole 161.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker, rear cover>
Next, the speaker 610 and rear cover 620 that constitute the speaker unit 600 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

Figure 12(a) is a side view of the rear cover 620, and Figure 12(b) is a top view of the rear cover 620. Also, Figure 12(c) is a side view of the speaker 610, and Figure 12(d) is a top view of the speaker 610. Also, Figure 13(a) is a top view of the speaker unit 600, and Figure 13(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker unit 600 shown in Figure 13(a) taken along line A-A.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker>
The speaker 610 (first member) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in Figures 12(c) and 13(b), is generally composed of an electromagnetic circuit 611 that consists of a voice coil and a magnet and vibrates a diaphragm 613 (described later) in response to an electric signal, a frame 612 that supports the electromagnetic circuit 611, the diaphragm 613 that vibrates to generate sound, and a flange 614 to which the diaphragm 613 is fixed so that it can vibrate.

Frame 612 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 615 (see Figure 11) formed circumferentially on its side to allow air around diaphragm 613 to escape. That is, multiple openings 615 are formed circumferentially on the side of frame 612, and struts 612a are formed between openings 615 in the front-to-rear direction. Diaphragm 613 is formed in a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

As shown in FIG. 12(d), dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) for screwing the speaker 610 to the front door 102 are formed in the upper left and lower right corners of the flange 614. Furthermore, shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) for screwing the speaker 610 and rear cover 620 to the front door 102 are formed in the lower left and upper right corners of the flange 614.

In this example, two dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the flange 614, and two shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the flange 614. As a result, the dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) and shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval around the periphery of the flange 614.

According to this example, when the speaker 610 (first member) is fixed to the front door 102 (base) using the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through-hole) for positioning, or when only the rear cover 620 (second member) is removed from the front door 102 (base), the speaker 610 (first member) can be stably fixed, thereby improving safety and workability.

The positions and numbers of the "first through holes" and "second through holes" according to the present invention are not limited to this example. For example, one dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) may be located in only one of the upper left or lower right corners of the outer edge of the flange 614, and one shared screw hole 616b (second through hole) may be located in only one of the lower left or upper right corners of the outer edge of the flange 614. Furthermore, three or more dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) may be located on the outer edge of the flange 614, and three or more shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) may be located on the outer edge of the flange 614. The number of dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) and shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) does not have to be the same.

The flange 614 also functions as a member that supports the diaphragm 613 so that it can vibrate, and the outer edge 613a (see Figure 13(b)) of the diaphragm 613, which passes through the opening in the flange 614 and appears on the back side of the flange 614, is fixed to the back side of the flange 614. The thickness of the flange 614 is designed to be greater than the maximum vibration amplitude of the diaphragm 613 so as not to inhibit the vibration of the diaphragm 613.

In this example, a rear cover 620 is placed on the rear of the speaker 610, but when the rear cover 620 is fixed to the speaker base 630 of the front door 102, the minimum distance between the rear cover 620 and the front door 102 is designed to be longer than the thickness of the flange 614 so as not to impede the vibration of the diaphragm 613.

<Speaker mounting structure/rear cover>
Rear cover 620 (second member) is a resin member that houses most of speaker 610. More specifically, rear cover 620 has a circular opening 621 formed on the rear side that exposes the rear end of speaker 610 (part of electromagnetic circuit 611), and is provided with a stepped cylindrical side wall portion 622 that widens slightly toward the front.

As shown in Figure 12(b), the rear cover 620 has two protruding pieces 623a and two protruding pieces with screw holes 623b that protrude circumferentially outward from one front end of the side wall portion 622. The protruding pieces with screw holes 623b, located diagonally at the lower left and upper right corners (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal), each have a screw hole 624 (third through hole) formed in them for screwing the speaker 610 and rear cover 620 together to the front door 102.

With this configuration, the shared screw hole 616b (second through-hole) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 and the screw hole 624 (third through-hole) in the screw-hole-equipped protrusion 623b of the rear cover 620 are aligned with the holes in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker pedestal 630 (base), and then fastened with screws (fixing means), thereby affixing the speaker unit 600 to the rear surface of the front door 102 as a single unit. The method for attaching the speaker unit 600 will be described later.

Furthermore, the protruding pieces 623a, which are located diagonally at the upper left and lower right corners of the rear cover 620 (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal), are thicker than the protruding piece 623b with a screw hole, as shown in the side view of Figure 12(a), and inside thereof are formed screw head accommodation spaces 623a1 that can accommodate the heads (screw heads) of screws (fixing means).

With this configuration, by aligning the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 with the hole in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker pedestal 630 (base) and fastening with a screw (fixing means), the speaker 610 alone can be fixed to the back surface of the front door 102, and even when the rear cover 620 is positioned relative to the back surface of the speaker 610, the protruding piece 623a of the rear cover 620 does not interfere with the screw (fixing means) attached to the dedicated screw hole 616a of the speaker 610, allowing the rear cover 620 to be attached to the back surface of the speaker 610.

Furthermore, the rear cover 620 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 630 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees, which simplifies the installation process of the rear cover 620 (second member).

A box-shaped space 622S protrudes from part of the side wall 622 to house the lead wires connected to the electromagnetic circuit 611 and to lead the lead wires out of the speaker unit 600. Additionally, the side wall 622 has a plurality of ventilation holes 625 formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, which are openings that allow air around the diaphragm 613 to escape.

<Speaker installation structure/correct installation method>
Next, the correct method of mounting the speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 14(a) is a diagram showing a schematic example of the correct installation method for the speaker unit 600.

When attaching the speaker unit 600 to the speaker base 630 (base), first attach the speaker 610 (first component) to the speaker base 630 (base) as shown in Figure 14 (a-1), and then attach the rear cover 620 (second component) to the speaker base 630 (base) as shown in the same figure (a-2).

More specifically, as shown in Figure 14 (a-1), the two dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 are aligned with the holes in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker base 630 (base), and then fastened with screws 634 (fixing means), thereby attaching only the speaker 610 to the speaker base 630 (base).

Next, the rear cover 620 is positioned relative to the speaker base 630 (base) so that it covers the rear of the speaker 610. However, the protruding piece 623a of the rear cover 620 has a screw head accommodating space 623a1 formed therein, so the rear cover 620 does not interfere with the screws 634 (fixing means) attached to the dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) of the speaker 610. This allows the rear cover 620 to be securely positioned on the rear of the speaker 610, as shown in Figure 14 (a-2).

Finally, with the rear cover 620 positioned on the rear of the speaker 610, the screw holes 624 (third through holes) in the screw-hole protrusion 623b of the rear cover 620 are aligned with the two shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 and the holes in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker base 630 (base), and the rear cover 620 is attached to the speaker base 630 (base) by fastening with screws 634 (fixing means). This allows the speaker unit 600 to be integrated and fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102.

According to this example, when the speaker 610 (first member) and rear cover 620 (second member) are fixed to the speaker base 630 (base) with screws (fixing means), they can be fixed in one go with a single screw 634 (fixing means) via the shared screw hole 616b (second through-hole) of the speaker 610 (first member) and the screw hole 624 (third through-hole) of the rear cover 620 (second member), simplifying the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods. Furthermore, once the speaker 610 (first member) has been fixed and positioned to the base using the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through-hole), the rear cover 620 (second member) can be fixed to the speaker base 630 (base). This eliminates the need to position the two members simultaneously, improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, when the speaker unit 600 is correctly attached, as shown in Figure 14 (a-2), the protruding piece 623a of the rear cover 620 (second member) covers the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) in the speaker 610 (first member). This makes it possible to visually confirm that it is not necessary to use the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) when fastening the rear cover 620 (second member), ensuring reliable attachment of the components.

The rear cover 620 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 630 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees, which simplifies the installation process of the rear cover 620 (second member).

<Speaker installation structure/incorrect installation method>
Next, an incorrect method of mounting the speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 14(b) is a diagram showing a schematic example of an incorrect installation method for the speaker unit 600.

The example shown in Figure 14 (b-1) shows an example in which the speaker 610 is attached to the speaker base 630 (base) by mistakenly aligning the two shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 with the holes in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker base 630 (base) instead of the two dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) and fastening them with screws 634 (fixing means).

In this example, as shown in Figure 14 (b-2), when rear cover 620 is positioned relative to speaker base 630 (base) so that it covers the rear of speaker 610, the bottom of screw-hole protrusion 623b on rear cover 620 interferes with screw 634 (fixing means) that has been mistakenly attached to shared screw hole 616b (second through-hole) on speaker 610, making it impossible to position rear cover 620 on the rear of speaker 610 and therefore impossible to attach rear cover 620.

This example makes it easy to recognize if the speaker 610 (first component) has been installed incorrectly, preventing work errors before they occur.

Figures 15(a) and 15(b) are schematic diagrams showing another example of an incorrect installation method for the speaker unit 600.

The example shown in Figure 15(a) is an example in which the speaker 610 (first component) and rear cover 620 (second component) are attached in the wrong order, with the rear cover 620 (second component) being attached to the speaker base 630 (base) first.

The speaker 610 (first component) cannot be accommodated in the rear cover 620 (second component) when it is attached to the speaker base 630 (base). This makes it easy to recognize if the speaker 610 (first component) has been attached incorrectly, preventing work errors.

The example shown in Figure 15(b) is an example in which the rear cover 620 (second member) was mistakenly rotated 90 degrees in an attempt to position it relative to the speaker pedestal 630 (base).

The rear cover 620 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 630 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees. However, because it does not have an axisymmetric shape, it cannot be positioned relative to the speaker base 630 (base) when rotated 90 degrees.

Furthermore, because the position of the box-shaped space 622S in the rear cover 620 is shifted by 90 degrees, it is not possible to house the speaker 610 in the rear cover 620. This makes it easy to recognize that the rear cover 620 (second component) has been installed incorrectly, preventing work errors from occurring.

<Speaker mounting structure/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 610 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can be fixed to a base (for example, the speaker base 630 of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11) and a second member (for example, the rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can cover at least a part of the first member, and the first member has a plurality of through holes for fixing the first member to the base, and the plurality of through holes are connected to one or more first through holes (for example, 12(d)) and one or more second through holes different from the first through hole (for example, shared screw hole 616b shown in FIG. 12(d)), the second member has one or more through holes (hereinafter referred to as "third through holes"; for example, screw hole 624 shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 14) for fixing the second member to the base, the first member is fixed to the base using the first through hole, and the second member is fixed to the base using the third through hole and the second through hole.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the first and second members are fixed to the base with a fixing means, they can be fixed at once with a single fixing means via the second through-hole of the first member and the third through-hole of the second member, simplifying the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods. Furthermore, since the second member can be fixed to the base after the first member has been fixed and positioned to the base using the first through-hole, there is no need to position the two members simultaneously, improving work efficiency.

The "first member" and "second member" according to the present invention are not limited to a speaker and a rear cover, but may also be, for example, a circuit board and a circuit board case, a connector and a connector cover, a movable body and a movable body cover, etc. In other words, the "first member" according to the present invention may be any member that can be fixed to a base, and the "second member" according to the present invention may be any member that can cover at least a portion of the first member.

Furthermore, after the first member is fixed to the base using the first through hole, when the second member is fixed to the base using the third through hole and the second through hole, the first through hole in the first member may be covered by the second member.

This configuration makes it possible to visually confirm that the first through-hole does not need to be used when fastening the second component, ensuring reliable component installation.

Furthermore, the first member may have a plurality of the first through holes and the second through holes, and the plurality of first through holes and the plurality of second through holes may be arranged alternately in the circumferential direction of the first member.

With this configuration, when the first member is fixed to the base using the first through-hole for positioning, or when the second member is removed from the base, the first member can be stably fixed, improving safety and workability.

The plurality of first through holes and the plurality of second through holes may be arranged alternately in the circumferential direction of the first member, and the plurality of first through holes may be located at diagonal positions on the first member, and the plurality of second through holes may be located at diagonal positions on the first member.

Furthermore, when the first member is fixed to the base via the second through-hole with a fixing means (e.g., screw 634 shown in Figure 14(b)) and then the second member is positioned to be fixed to the base, the third through-hole of the second member may interfere with the fixing means.

With this configuration, it is easy to recognize if the first component has been attached incorrectly, preventing operational errors before they occur.

Furthermore, a gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 610 shown in FIGS. 11 and 14) that can be fixed to a base (for example, the speaker base 630 of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11) and a second member (for example, the rear cover 620 shown in FIGS. 11 and 14) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a plurality of first through holes and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes, the second member has a plurality of third through holes, the first through holes are through holes used to fix the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through holes and the third through holes are through holes used to fix both the first member and the second member to the base, and the plurality of first through holes and the plurality of second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first member (e.g., the speaker 610 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base portion 630 of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11) and a second member (e.g., the rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a plurality of first through holes and a plurality of second through holes that are different from the first through holes, the second member has a plurality of third through holes, and the first through holes are formed by connecting the first member and the second member. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first through hole is a through hole used to secure the first member to the base, and the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to secure both the first member and the second member to the base, the multiple first through holes and the multiple second through holes are arranged alternately around the outer periphery of the first member, and a rectangle is formed when straight lines connect the multiple first through holes with the second through holes on either side of the multiple first through holes, and the multiple first through holes are arranged on the diagonals of the rectangle (the vertices at the ends of the diagonals).

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first member (e.g., the speaker 610 shown in FIGS. 11 and 14) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 630 of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11) and a second member (e.g., the rear cover 620 shown in FIGS. 11 and 14) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a plurality of first through holes and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes, and the second member has a plurality of third through holes. The gaming table has through holes, the first through hole being a through hole used to secure the first of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole being through holes used to secure both the first and second members to the base, the multiple first through holes and the multiple second through holes being alternately arranged around the outer periphery of the first member, and the base having a frame portion formed to match the outer shape of the first member.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the first and second members are fixed to the base with a fixing means, they can be fixed at once with a single fixing means via the second through-hole of the first member and the third through-hole of the second member, simplifying the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods. Furthermore, since the second member can be fixed to the base after the first member has been fixed and positioned to the base using the first through-hole, there is no need to position the two members simultaneously, improving work efficiency.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 1)/Speaker Unit Configuration>
Next, the configuration of a speaker unit 700 according to Modification 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 700 according to Modification 1.

As shown in Figure 16, the speaker unit 700 of variant 1 is composed of a low-frequency output speaker 710 (first member) with a large diaphragm and a rear cover 720 (second member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 710, and is attached to a speaker pedestal 730 (base) formed on the back surface of the front door 102 of the slot machine.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker base>
The speaker pedestal 730 (base) is configured to include an annular frame support 731 that supports the frame 714 of the speaker 710, a cylindrical cover support 735 that supports the bottom of the rear cover 720, four mounting sleeves 732 for screwing the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to the front door 102, and a circular sound hole plate 734 that is attached to the inside of the frame support 731. The detailed configuration of the speaker pedestal 730 (base) will be described later using FIG. 19 .

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 1)/Speaker, Rear Cover>
Next, the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 that constitute the speaker unit 700 according to the first modification will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

Figure 17(a) is a side view of the rear cover 720, and Figure 17(b) is a top view of the rear cover 720. Figure 17(c) is a side view of the speaker 710, and Figure 17(d) is a top view of the speaker 710. Figure 18(a) is a top view of the speaker unit 700, and Figure 18(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker unit 700 shown in Figure 18(a) taken along line B-B.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 1)/Speaker>
The speaker 710 (first component) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in Figures 17(c) and 18(b), is generally composed of an electromagnetic circuit 711 (electrical component) consisting of a voice coil and a magnet, and vibrating a diaphragm 713 (described later) in response to an electric signal, a frame 712 that supports the electromagnetic circuit 711, the diaphragm 713 that vibrates to generate sound, a flange 714 to which the diaphragm 713 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a pair of lead terminals 716 arranged on the right and left sides of the flange 714 when viewed from above, and lead wires (wiring) 717 detachably connected to the lead terminals 716.

Frame 712 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 715 (see Figure 16) formed circumferentially on its side to allow air around diaphragm 713 to escape. That is, multiple openings 715 are formed circumferentially on the side of frame 712, and struts 712a (see Figure 16) are formed between openings 715 in the front-to-rear direction. Diaphragm 713 is formed in a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

As shown in FIG. 17(d), dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) for screwing the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730 (base) are formed in the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the flange 714. Furthermore, shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) for screwing the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730 (base) are formed in the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the flange 714.

In this example, two dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the flange 714, and two shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the flange 714. As a result, the dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) and shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the flange 714.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 17(d), when a plurality of dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) and the shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) on either side of these dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) are connected by an imaginary straight line VL, a virtual rectangle VQ is formed, and the dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) are arranged on the diagonals of the virtual rectangle VQ (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal), and the shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) are arranged on the diagonals of the virtual rectangle VQ (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal).

Furthermore, when focusing on the distance between the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 716b (second through hole), as shown in FIG. 17(d), the shortest distance L1 from the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to one of the shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) (for example, the shared screw hole 716b located in the upper right corner) is substantially the same as the shortest distance L2 from the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to a second through hole of the shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) other than the one (for example, the shared screw hole 716b located in the lower left corner).

According to this example, when the speaker 710 (first member) is fixed and positioned to the speaker pedestal portion 730 (base) of the front door 102 using the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through-hole), or when only the rear cover 720 (second member) is removed from the speaker pedestal portion 730 (base), the speaker 710 (first member) can be stably fixed, thereby improving safety and workability.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 1)/Rear Cover>
Next, the rear cover 720 (second member) will be described in detail.

The rear cover 720 (second member) is a colored, transparent resin member capable of housing the speaker 710 (first member) inside, and is made of a material that allows the speaker 710 (first member) to be visible from the outside when the speaker 710 (first member) is housed inside.

In this example, at least a portion of the speaker 710 (first member) can be seen through the rear cover 720 (second member), making it possible to visually confirm the fixed position of the speaker 710 (first member) relative to the speaker base 730 (base) and the relative positions of the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member), thereby improving convenience when installing the members.

The rear cover 720 (second member) may be any member that is transparent, and its material is not limited to colored, transparent resin, but may also be, for example, colorless, transparent (or translucent) plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, glass, metal, etc.

As shown in Figures 17(a) and (b), the rear cover 720 has a circular cover portion 721 formed on the rear side that covers the rear end of the speaker 710, and a cylindrical side wall portion 722 that widens slightly toward the rear, with this cover portion 721 as its base.

The cover portion 721 is formed with a plurality of rectangular ventilation holes 725, which are openings for allowing air to escape from the electromagnetic circuit 711 of the speaker 710, and has predetermined markings 726 (in this example, the part number and material) printed on the top surface. There are no particular limitations on the manner in which the predetermined markings 726 are printed, but in this example, the surface of the cover portion 721 is engraved with a part number marking indicating the part number of the rear cover 720 (in this example, the character string "SPxxxx") and a material marking indicating the material of the rear cover 720 (in this example, the character string "PC").

In this example, the rear cover 720 is provided with a predetermined marking 726, which makes it easy to identify the correct orientation (installation direction) of the rear cover 720 based on the orientation of this marking 726, thereby improving convenience when installing the rear cover 720, etc.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 17(b), the rear cover 720 has two protruding pieces 723a and two protruding pieces 723b with screw holes that protrude outward from the outer edge of the side wall portion 722.

In this example, two protrusions 723a are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the side wall portion 722, and two protrusions 723b with screw holes are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the side wall portion 722. As a result, the protrusions 723a and the protrusions 723b with screw holes are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the side wall portion 722.

In other words, as shown in Figure 17(b), when the vertices of the multiple protrusions 723a and the screw hole protrusions 723b on either side of these multiple protrusions 723a are connected by an imaginary straight line VL2, an imaginary rectangle VQ2 is formed, and the multiple protrusions 723a are arranged on the diagonals of the imaginary rectangle VQ2 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonals), and the multiple screw hole protrusions 723b are arranged on the diagonals of the imaginary rectangle VQ2 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonals).

Screw holes 724 (third through holes) are formed in the protruding pieces 723b with screw holes, located diagonally at the bottom left and top right corners (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal), at positions slightly off-center toward the cover part 721 (towards the center of the rear cover 720) relative to the center of the protruding pieces 723b with screw holes, for integrating the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 and screwing them to the speaker base part 730 (base).

With this configuration, the speaker unit 700 is integrated and fixed to the speaker base 730 (base) by fastening the common screw hole 716b (second through-hole) of the speaker 710 and the screw hole 724 (third through-hole) of the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730 (base) with a screw 740 (fixing means; see Figure 16). The method for attaching the speaker unit 700 will be described later.

A thin-walled screw hole identification recess 724a, consisting of an annular recess with a larger outer diameter than the screw hole 724, is formed around the screw hole 724 (third through hole) in the screw hole protrusion 723b. Due to the screw hole identification recess 724a formed around this screw hole 724, the thickness of the rear cover 720 around the screw hole 724 (third through hole) is made thinner than the thickness of other parts of the rear cover 720.

In this example, when the rear cover 720 (second member) is positioned, the presence of the screw hole protrusion 723b makes it easy to identify the fixed position (screw hole 724 (third through hole)) of the rear cover 720 (second member), and the screw hole protrusion 723b can also function to reinforce the thin-walled portion (screw hole identification recess 724a) around the screw hole 724 (third through hole).

The side wall portion 722 also has a screw hole identification groove 722a, which is a linear groove that connects to the screw hole identification recess 724a and extends from the bottom to the top of the side wall portion 722.

In other words, in this example, a screw hole identification recess 724a and a screw hole identification groove 722a are formed around the screw hole 724 (third through hole), making it possible to identify the screw hole 724 (third through hole).

In this example, at least one of the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole), shared screw hole 716b (second through hole), and screw hole 724 (third through hole) (in this example, screw hole 724 (third through hole)) is configured to be identifiable. This makes it easy to determine whether each through hole is used to secure only the first member to the base, or whether it is used to secure both the first member and the second member to the base, thereby improving the efficiency of the member installation work. Furthermore, the through hole type can be used as a clue to easily identify the correct orientation (installation direction) of the rear cover 720, improving convenience when installing the rear cover 720, etc.

In this example, a screw hole identification recess 724a and a screw hole identification groove 722a are formed near the screw hole 724 (third through hole) as a configuration to make the screw hole 724 (third through hole) identifiable. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the screw hole identification recess 724a and the screw hole identification groove 722a may be formed, or a sticker or the like that can identify the screw hole 724 (third through hole) may be affixed near the screw hole 724 (third through hole), or a marking, printing, engraving, or the like that can identify the screw hole 724 (third through hole) may be applied.

In addition, a part that allows the screw hole 724 (third through-hole) to be identified may be formed on a member other than the rear cover 720 (second member) (for example, the speaker base 730 (base) or the speaker 710 (first member)), a sticker or the like that allows the screw hole 724 (third through-hole) to be identified may be affixed, or a marking, printing, engraving, or the like that allows the screw hole 724 (third through-hole) to be identified may be applied.

Furthermore, while a configuration that makes it possible to identify the screw hole 724 (third through-hole) of the rear cover 720 has been exemplified, a configuration that makes it possible to identify the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through-hole) and/or the shared screw hole 716b (second through-hole) of the speaker 710 (first member) may instead (or in addition) be employed.

Therefore, for example, a portion may be formed on mounting sleeve 732 of speaker base portion 730 (base) that allows at least one of the dedicated screw hole 716 a (first through hole), the common screw hole 716 b (second through hole), and the screw hole 724 (third through hole) to be identified, a sticker or the like that allows at least one of the through holes to be affixed, or at least one of the through holes may be marked, printed, engraved, or the like that allows it to be identified; or a portion may be formed on flange 714 of speaker 710 (first member) that allows the dedicated screw hole 716 a (first through hole) and/or the common screw hole 716 b (second through hole) to be identified, a sticker or the like that allows the dedicated screw hole 716 a (first through hole) and/or the common screw hole 716 b (second through hole) to be affixed, or the dedicated screw hole 716 a (first through hole) and/or the common screw hole 716 b (second through hole) may be marked, printed, engraved, or the like that allows it to be identified.

Furthermore, by making the shape of the screw hole protrusion 723b of the rear cover 720 different from the shape of the protrusion 723a, it may be possible to identify that the through hole formed in the screw hole protrusion 723b is the through hole used to secure both the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) to the speaker base 730 (base); conversely, by making the shape of the screw hole protrusion 723a of the rear cover 720 different from the shape of the screw hole protrusion 723b, it may be possible to identify that the through hole in the speaker 710 covered by the protrusion 723a is the through hole used to secure only the speaker 710 (first member) to the speaker base 730 (base).

This configuration makes it possible to visually identify the function of the through-holes based on the shape of the protruding pieces on the rear cover 720, thereby improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, the protruding pieces 723a, located diagonally at the upper left and lower right corners of the rear cover 720 (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal), are thick, two-stepped sections that are taller from the bottom surface of the rear cover 720 than the screw-hole protruding piece 723b, as shown in the side view of Figure 17(a). Inside the protruding piece 723a, a screw accommodating space 723a1 large enough to accommodate a portion (head) of the screw 740 is formed.

With this configuration, even if the rear cover 720 is positioned relative to the rear of the speaker 710 after the speaker 710 alone is fixed to the speaker base 730 by fastening the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) of the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730 (base) with a screw 740, the head of the screw 740 attached to the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710 is accommodated in the screw accommodating space 723a1, so the screw 740 does not interfere with the rear cover 720 and the rear cover 720 can be securely attached to the rear of the speaker 710.

In addition, the rear cover 720 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 730 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees, which simplifies the installation process of the rear cover 720 (second member).

As mentioned above, the rear cover 720 is provided with a specified marking 726. Therefore, when attaching the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730, it is preferable to attach it in the correct orientation, with the side with the specified marking 726 facing up, so that the specified marking 726 is easily visible. However, even if the rear cover 720 is rotated 180 degrees from the correct orientation, the specified marking 726 will be upside down, but it will still be possible to attach it to the speaker base 730 (base).

As shown in Figure 17(b), box-shaped spaces 722S (space portions) are protrudingly formed on the outer edges of the right and left sides of the rear cover 720 when viewed from above, respectively, to accommodate a pair of lead terminals 716 and to lead the lead wires 717 to the outside of the speaker unit 700.

As shown in Figures 17(a) and (b), this box-shaped space 722S (space) is composed of a first space 722S1 in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped that extends from the upper part of the side wall 722 to near the lower part of the side wall 722, and a second space 722S2 in the shape of a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped that is connected to the first space 722S1 and has a width slightly larger than that of the first space 722S1. The first space 722S1 and the second space 722S2 are located radially outward of the rear cover 720 (second member) relative to the screw hole 724 (third through hole).

With this configuration, when the speaker 710 (first member) and rear cover 720 (second member) are fixed to the speaker base 730 (base), a space is formed between the speaker 710 (first member) and rear cover 720 (second member), and as shown in Figure 18 (b), the lead wires 717 (wiring) of the speaker 710 can be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 710 (first member) and rear cover 720 (second member) through this space.

In this example, even if the rear cover 720 (second member) covers part of the speaker 710 (first member), the lead wire 717 (wiring) of the speaker 710 (first member) can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

In addition, when fixing the rear cover 720 (second member) to the speaker base 730 (base), a wider area can be secured other than the area where the speaker base 730 (base) and rear cover 720 (second member) come into contact (around the through-hole), thereby preventing wiring from becoming pinched between the speaker base 730 (base) and rear cover 720 (second member).

Furthermore, the horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped second space 722S2 provides a wide area for pulling out the wiring from between the rear cover 720 (second member) and the speaker base 730 (base), and the vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped first space 722S1 partially restricts the area for guiding the wiring, allowing the speaker 710 wiring to be smoothly guided to the second space 722S2 and preventing the wiring from bunching up near the through-hole when the rear cover 720 (second member) is fixed, which would interfere with the installation process.

In this example, two box-shaped spaces (spaces) 722S are formed in the rear cover 720, but the number of box-shaped spaces (spaces) 722S is not limited to this example. If the speaker 710 has only one lead terminal, only one box-shaped space (space) 722S that can accommodate this lead terminal may be formed. Furthermore, a notched recess or the like may be formed below the box-shaped space (space) 722S to guide the lead wire to the outside.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 1)/Speaker Base>
Next, the speaker pedestal 730 (base) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figures 19(a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of how to install the speaker unit 700 in chronological order, with Figure 19(a) showing the speaker base 730 with the sound hole plate 734 removed.

As explained using Figure 16, the speaker base 730 (base) is composed of an annular frame support portion 731 that supports the frame 714 of the speaker 710, a cylindrical cover support portion 735 that supports the bottom of the rear cover 720, four mounting sleeves 732 (732a, 732b) for screwing the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to the front door 102, and a circular sound hole plate 734 that is attached to the inside of the frame support portion 731.

As shown in Figure 19(a), the sound hole plate 734 has multiple circular sound holes 734a formed therein for outputting sound from the speaker 710, and four locking portions 734b are formed at a predetermined interval along the circumferential direction on the outer edge of the sound hole plate 734, which can be locked onto the sound hole plate locking portion 736 of the frame support portion 731.

In contrast, four sound hole plate locking portions 736, which can lock onto the locking portions 734b of the sound hole plate 734, are formed at predetermined intervals along the inner periphery of the frame support portion 731 on the inside of the frame support portion 731. Furthermore, the height of the frame support portion 731 (height from the back of the front door 102) is designed to be higher than the maximum vibration amplitude of the diaphragm 713 of the speaker 710 so as not to inhibit the vibration of the diaphragm 713.

The sound hole plate 734 has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the frame support part 731. After fitting inside the frame support part 731, the four locking parts 734b are respectively locked into the four sound hole plate locking parts 736, thereby fixing the sound hole plate to the inside of the frame support part 731, as shown in Figure 19 (b).

Of the four mounting sleeves 732, the first mounting sleeves 732a, located at the upper left and lower right corners when viewed from above, are the mounting sleeves to which the dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) of the speaker 710 are fastened with screws 740, as shown in Figure 19(c).

On the other hand, of the four mounting sleeves 732, the second mounting sleeves 732b, located at the bottom left and top right corners when viewed from above, are mounting sleeves to which the shared screw hole 716b (second through-hole) of the speaker 710 and the screw hole 724 (third through-hole) of the rear cover 720 are fastened with screws 740, as shown in Figure 19(d).

A first rectangular boss 737a is erected on the outside of the frame support portion 731, surrounding the periphery of the first mounting sleeve 732a, and a second rectangular boss 737b is erected on the outside of the frame support portion 731, surrounding the periphery of the second mounting sleeve 732b. In addition, arc-shaped through-hole identification bosses 738 are erected near the first mounting sleeve 732a, located at the upper left and lower right corners when viewed from above.

This through-hole identification boss 738 is a boss that stands upright to identify that the two first mounting sleeves 732a of the four mounting sleeves 732 are mounting sleeves that are to be fastened to the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through-hole) of the speaker 710, and is not formed near the second mounting sleeve 732b.

In this example, of the four mounting sleeves 732, two first mounting sleeves 732a have upright through-hole identification bosses 738. Using these through-hole identification bosses 738 as a guide, the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 can be attached to the speaker base 730 in the correct orientation, preventing work errors and improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, arc-shaped mounting direction identification bosses 739 are erected between the first rectangular boss 737a, located in the upper left corner when viewed from above, and the second rectangular boss 737b, located in the lower left corner when viewed from above, and between the second rectangular boss 737b, located in the upper right corner when viewed from above, and the first rectangular boss 737a, located in the lower right corner when viewed from above.

This mounting direction identification boss 739 is an upright boss that allows the mounting direction of the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to be identified, and is not formed between the first rectangular boss 737a, which is located in the upper left corner when viewed from above, and the second rectangular boss 737b, which is located in the upper right corner when viewed from above, nor between the second rectangular boss 737b, which is located in the lower left corner when viewed from above, and the first rectangular boss 737a, which is located in the lower right corner when viewed from above.

In this example, mounting direction identification bosses 739 are provided that allow the mounting direction of the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to be identified. Therefore, when mounting the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730, the speaker 710 can be mounted in the correct orientation on the speaker base 730 by aligning the position of the lead terminals 716 of the speaker 710 with the mounting direction identification boss 739. When mounting the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730, the box-shaped space 722S of the rear cover 720 can be aligned with the mounting direction identification boss 739, allowing the rear cover 720 to be mounted in the correct orientation on the speaker base 730. This prevents errors when mounting the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 and improves work efficiency.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 1)/Mounting Method>
Next, a method for mounting the speaker unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG.

When attaching the speaker unit 700 to the speaker base 730, first attach the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730 as shown in Figures 19(b) and (c), and then attach the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730 as shown in Figures 19(c) and (d).

More specifically, when attaching the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730, the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710 is aligned with the first mounting sleeve 732a using the through-hole identification boss 738 and first rectangular boss 737a of the speaker base 730 as guides, and the position of the lead terminal 716 of the speaker 710 is aligned with the mounting direction identification boss 739, thereby positioning the speaker 710 relative to the speaker base 730.

Next, as shown in Figure 19(c), the two dedicated screw holes 716a on the speaker 710 are aligned with the holes in the mounting sleeve 732a on the speaker base 730, and the speaker 710 is attached to the speaker base 730 by fastening with screws 740.

The speaker 710 has a nearly point-symmetrical shape, and can be attached to the speaker base 730 even when rotated 180 degrees, making it easy to install the speaker 710.

Furthermore, because the lead terminal 716 and lead wire 717 of the speaker 710 are configured to be detachable, even if the wiring of the lead wire 717 to the speaker base 730 is complete, the speaker 710 can be rotated 180 degrees and attached to the speaker base 730, and the lead terminal 716 and lead wire 717 can be connected later. Even if the speaker 710 is attached to the speaker base 730, the wiring of the lead wire 717 can be changed and the lead terminal 716 and lead wire 717 can be connected later.

Next, when attaching the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730, the screw holes 724 on the rear cover 720 are identified using the screw hole identification recesses 724a and screw hole identification grooves 722a as markers, and then aligned with the second mounting sleeve 732b using the second rectangular boss 737b on the speaker base 730 as a marker. Also, while aligning the position of the box-shaped space 722S on the rear cover 720 with the mounting direction identification boss 739, the rear of the speaker 710 is covered with the rear cover 720, thereby positioning the rear cover 720 relative to the speaker base 730.

Next, as shown in Figure 19(d), the screw holes 724 of the rear cover 720 are aligned with the shared screw holes 716b of the speaker 710 and the holes in the mounting sleeve 732b of the speaker base 730, and the rear cover 720 is attached to the speaker base 730 by fastening with screws 740. This allows the speaker unit 700 to be integrated and fixed to the back surface of the front door 102.

In this example, when fixing the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730 with screws 740, they can be fixed at once with a single screw 740 via the shared screw hole 716b of the speaker 710 and the screw hole 724 of the rear cover 720, simplifying the work of attaching the components compared to conventional methods. Furthermore, once the speaker 710 has been fixed and positioned on the base using the dedicated screw hole 716a, the rear cover 720 can be fixed to the speaker base 730, eliminating the need to position the two components simultaneously and improving work efficiency.

The rear cover 720 has a nearly point-symmetrical shape, and even when rotated 180 degrees, it can be attached to the speaker base 730 with the lead terminals 716 and lead wires 717 of the speaker 710 housed in the box-shaped space 722S, making it easier to attach the rear cover 720.

Furthermore, when the speaker unit 700 is correctly installed and the speaker 710 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 720 (second member), as shown in FIG. 19(d), the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) in the speaker 710 (first member) is configured to be covered by the protruding piece 723a (a certain portion) of the rear cover 720 (second member). This makes it possible to visually confirm that it is not necessary to use the dedicated screw hole 716a when securing the rear cover 720, and it is also possible to easily position the rear cover 720 (second member) relative to the speaker 710 (first member), ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

Furthermore, a screw accommodating space 723a1 (accommodating space) having a predetermined space is formed in the protruding piece 723a (a certain portion) of the rear cover 720 (second member). Therefore, even when the rear cover 720 is positioned relative to the rear surface of the speaker 710, the head of the screw 740 (fixing means) attached to the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) of the speaker 710 (first member) is accommodated in the screw accommodating space 723a1 (space portion). This means that the screw 740 (fixing means) does not interfere with the rear cover 720 (second member), and the rear cover 720 (second member) can be securely attached to the rear surface of the speaker 710 (first member).

In particular, when screws are used as the fixing means, if the screws are not tightened enough when fixing the speaker 710 (first member) to the speaker base 730 (base), there is a possibility that the screw head will protrude more than necessary from the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through-hole). However, because the rear cover 720 (second member) is formed with a screw accommodating space 723a1 (accommodating space) that can accommodate at least a portion of the screw 740 (fixing means), the risk of interference between the rear cover 720 (second member) and the screw head can be avoided.

Furthermore, the thickness of the area surrounding the screw hole 724 in the rear cover 720 is thinner than the thickness of other portions of the rear cover 720. This reduces the stroke of the screw 740 (fixing means) that fastens both the shared screw hole 716b (second through-hole) in the speaker 710 (first member) and the screw hole 724 (third through-hole) in the rear cover 720 (second member), improving work efficiency. Furthermore, a portion of the head of the screw 740 (fixing means) can be accommodated in the screw hole identification recess 724a formed around the third through-hole, making the screw 740 (fixing means) less likely to come loose. This allows the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) to be stably fixed to the speaker base 730 (base). Furthermore, the screw hole identification recess 724a (around the third through-hole) also functions as a positioning device when attaching the screw 740 (fixing means).

Furthermore, common screws 740 (screws of the same length and thickness) can be used to attach the speaker 710 and rear cover 720, eliminating the need to use multiple types of screws, improving convenience and eliminating screw installation errors, ensuring reliable attachment of the components.

In order to use a common screw 740 when attaching the speaker 710 and rear cover 720, the length of the screw 740 must be at least as long as the combined thickness of the screw hole 724 in the rear cover 720 and the common screw hole 716b in the speaker 710.

For this reason, if a common screw 740 were used to fasten the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710, the screw would be excessively long by the thickness of the rear cover 720. However, in this example, the screw 740 attached to the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710 is configured to be accommodated in the screw accommodating space 723a1. This prevents the screw 740 from interfering with the rear cover 720, and by covering the screw 740 with the screw accommodating space 723a1, deterioration of the screw 740 and tampering with the screw 740 can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 19(d), when the rear cover 720 is attached to the speaker base 730, the bottom of the rear cover 720 is supported not only by the four mounting sleeves 732 but also by a cylindrical cover support 735 located on the right side when viewed from above. In other words, when the speaker 710 (first member) and rear cover 720 (second member) are fixed to the speaker base 730 (base), a portion of the rear cover 720 (second member) abuts against the mounting sleeves 732 and cover support 735 of the speaker base 730 (base), creating a space between the speaker base 730 (base) and the rear cover 720 (second member).

Furthermore, as explained using Figure 18 (b), even when the speaker 710 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 720 (second member), a space is formed between the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member).

This configuration creates spaces between the speaker base 730 (base) and the rear cover 720 (second member), and between the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member), allowing the lead wires 717 (wiring) of the speaker 710 to be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) through these spaces.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 710 shown in FIGS. 16, 17(c), and 17(d)) that can be fixed to a base (for example, the speaker base 730 shown in FIGS. 16 and 19), and a second member (for example, the back cover 620 shown in FIGS. 16, 17(a), and 17(b)) that can cover at least a part of the first member, wherein the first member includes a first through-hole (for example, the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through-holes (for example, the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)) that are different from the first through-hole, and the second member includes a plurality of third through-holes (for example, the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), and the second member includes a plurality of third through-holes (for example, the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)). The gaming machine is characterized in that one through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, a convex portion (for example, a protruding piece with a screw hole 723b shown in Figure 17(b)) is formed near the third through hole in the second member, and a concave portion (for example, a screw hole identification groove 722a shown in Figure 17(b)) is formed in the convex portion near the third through hole.

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are arranged around the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through-hole, the first through-hole, and the second through-hole. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes located on both sides of the first through-hole. Furthermore, a convex portion is formed in the second member near the third through hole, and a concave portion is formed in the convex portion near the third through hole (i.e., the third through hole is provided with an identification means that allows it to be identified), making it easy to determine whether each through hole is the through hole used when fixing to the base, or the through hole used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, thereby improving the efficiency of the member installation work.

Furthermore, each of the plurality of second through holes may be provided at the outer end of the second member.

This configuration allows the second member to be stably fixed to the base.

The base may also be formed with a portion that allows the first member to be positioned (for example, the first mounting sleeve 732a, second mounting sleeve 732b, and frame support portion 731 shown in Figure 19(b)).

With this configuration, even if the second member is removed from the base, the first member can be stably fixed to the base.

Furthermore, the shortest distance from the first through hole to one of the plurality of second through holes (e.g., shortest distance L1 shown in FIG. 17(d)) and the shortest distance from the first through hole to another of the plurality of second through holes (e.g., shortest distance L2 shown in FIG. 17(d)) may be substantially the same.

This configuration allows the first member to be stably fixed to the base, improving safety and workability.

Here, "substantially the same" does not mean that the shortest distance from the first through hole to one of the plurality of second through holes and the shortest distance from the first through hole to another of the plurality of second through holes are "the same," but also means that the two shortest distances are "substantially the same" (for example, when the ratio of the shortest distances is 4:6 or 6:4, or when the first through hole is located approximately in the middle between the second through holes located on either side of it).

The shortest distance between the two may also vary depending on the shape, weight, etc. of the first member. For example, the first through hole may be located between the second through holes located on either side of it, near the center of gravity of the first member. If the first member is polygonal, the second through hole may be located diagonally on the first member (at the vertex at the end of the diagonal), or may be located at a non-diagonal position on the first member, near the vertex, along the side, or at a position other than the outer edge.

The first member may also be a member including an electrical component (e.g., electromagnetic circuit 711 shown in FIG. 19(b)) to which wiring (e.g., lead wire 717 shown in FIG. 19(b)) is connected, and may be configured such that a space is formed between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, and such that the wiring can be drawn out to the outside of the first member and the second member through the space.

With this configuration, even if part of the first component is covered by the second component, the wiring of the first component can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first member (e.g., the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 730 shown in FIG. 16 and 19), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member includes a first through hole (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member includes a plurality of third through holes (e.g., the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)). ), the first through hole is a through hole used to secure the first of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to secure both the first and second members to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, a convex portion (e.g., a screw hole protruding piece 723b shown in FIG. 17(b)) is formed near the third through hole in the second member, and a concave portion (e.g., a screw hole identification groove 722a shown in FIG. 17(b)) is formed in the convex portion near the third through hole.

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are arranged around the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through-hole, the first through-hole, and the second through-hole. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes located on both sides of the first through-hole. Additionally, a convex portion is formed near the third through hole in the second member, and a concave portion is formed in the convex portion near the third through hole (i.e., the third through hole is provided with an identifiable identification means), making it easy to distinguish whether the through hole is used to secure the member to the base, or whether it is used to secure both the first and second members to the base, thereby improving the efficiency of the member installation work.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first member (e.g., the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 730 shown in FIG. 16 and 19), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a first through hole (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member has a plurality of third through holes (e.g., the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), and the first is a through hole used to secure the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to secure both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, the second through hole, and the first through hole is configured so that when the first member and the second member are secured to the base, the first through hole of the first member is covered by a certain portion of the second member (for example, the protruding piece 723a of the rear cover 720 shown in Figure 19 (d)).

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are arranged around the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through-hole, the first through-hole, and the second through-hole. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes located on both sides of the first through-hole. Furthermore, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, the first through-hole of the first member is covered by a certain portion of the second member. This makes it possible to visually confirm that the first through-hole does not need to be used when fixing the second member, and it is easy to position the second member relative to the first member, ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

Furthermore, the first member and the second member may be configured to be fixable (or be fixed) to the base by a fixing means (e.g., screw 740 shown in Figures 16 and 19), and an accommodation space (e.g., screw accommodation space 723a1 shown in Figure 17(a)) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the fixing means may be formed in the certain portion.

With this configuration, a portion of the fixing means attached to the first through hole of the first member is housed in the accommodation space, preventing the fixing means from interfering with the second member and allowing the second member to be securely attached to the back surface of the first member. In particular, if a screw is used as the fixing means, if the screw is not tightened enough when the first member is fixed to the base, the screw head may protrude more than necessary from the first through hole. However, because the second member has an accommodation space capable of housing at least a portion of the fixing means, the risk of interference between the second member and the screw head is avoided.

Furthermore, after the first through hole of the first member is fixed to the base by the fixing means, the third through hole of the second member may be positioned relative to the second through hole of the first member, and the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member may be fixed (or may be fixed) to the base by the fixing means.

With this configuration, for example, if a screw is used as the fixing means, if the screw is not tightened enough when the first member is fixed to the base, the screw head may protrude more than necessary from the first through-hole. However, because the second member has a storage space that can accommodate at least part of the fixing means, the risk of interference between the second member and the screw head can be avoided.

Furthermore, the second member may be made of a material that allows the first member to be visible from the outside when the first member is housed inside.

With this configuration, the first member can be seen through the second member, making it possible to check the fixed position of the first member relative to the base, the relative positions of the first member and the second member, etc., thereby improving convenience when installing the members.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first member (e.g., the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 730 shown in FIG. 16 and 19), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a first through hole (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member has a plurality of third through holes (e.g., the screw hole 724), the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, and when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, the first through hole of the first member is configured to be covered by a certain portion of the second member (for example, protruding piece 723a of rear cover 720 shown in Figure 19 (d)).

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, since the first member can be secured to the base and positioned using the first through-hole, the second member can be secured to the base. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, since the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are alternately positioned around the outer periphery of the first member, the two first and second members can be stably secured together via the second through-holes located on either side of the first through-hole. Furthermore, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, the first through-hole of the first member is covered by a certain portion of the second member. This makes it possible to visually confirm that the first through-hole does not need to be used when fixing the second member, and it is easy to position the second member relative to the first member, ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first member (e.g., the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 730 shown in FIG. 16 and 19), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a first through hole (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member has a plurality of third through holes (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(b)). the first through hole is a through hole used to secure the first of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to secure both the first and second members to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, and the area where the third through hole is formed is configured as a thin-walled portion that is thinner than the surrounding area (for example, the screw hole identification recess 724a shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b)).

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are arranged around the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through-hole, the first through-hole, and the second through-hole. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes located on both sides of the first through-hole. Furthermore, because the area where the third through hole is formed is a thin-walled portion that is thinner than the surrounding area, the stroke amount of the fastening means (e.g., a screw) that fastens both the second through hole in the first member and the third through hole in the second member can be reduced, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, because part of the head of the fastening means can be accommodated in the thin-walled portion surrounding the third through hole, the fastening means is less likely to come loose, allowing the first member and second member to be stably fastened to the base. The thin-walled portion formed around the third through hole also functions as a positioning device when attaching the fastening means.

The second member may also have a protruding piece that protrudes outward from near the third through hole (for example, the protruding piece 723b with a screw hole shown in Figure 17(b)).

With this configuration, when the second member is positioned, the presence of the protruding piece makes it easy to identify the fixed position of the second member (third through hole), and it can also function as reinforcement for the thin-walled area around the third through hole.

Furthermore, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, the first through-hole of the first member may be configured to be covered by a certain portion of the second member (for example, the protruding piece 723a of the rear cover 720 shown in Figure 19(d)).

This configuration makes it possible to visually confirm that the first through-hole does not need to be used when fastening the second member, and also makes it easy to position the second member relative to the first member, ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first member (e.g., the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 730 shown in FIG. 16 and 19), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a first through hole (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member has a plurality of third through holes (e.g., screw hole 724 shown in Figure 17(b)), the first through hole is a through hole used to secure the first of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to secure both the first and second members to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, and the area where the third through hole is formed is configured as a thin-walled portion that is thinner than the surrounding area (e.g., screw hole identification recess 724a shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b)).

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, since the first member can be secured to the base and positioned using the first through-hole, the second member can be secured to the base. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, since the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are alternately positioned around the outer periphery of the first member, the two first and second members can be stably secured together via the second through-holes located on either side of the first through-hole. Furthermore, because the area where the third through hole is formed is a thin-walled portion that is thinner than the surrounding area, the stroke amount of the fastening means (e.g., a screw) that fastens both the second through hole in the first member and the third through hole in the second member can be reduced, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, because part of the head of the fastening means can be accommodated in the thin-walled portion surrounding the third through hole, the fastening means is less likely to come loose, allowing the first member and second member to be stably fastened to the base. The thin-walled portion formed around the third through hole also functions as a positioning device when attaching the fastening means.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine comprising a first member (e.g., the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 730 shown in FIG. 16 and 19), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 720 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member comprises a first through hole (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member comprises a plurality of third through holes (e.g., the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), and the first through hole The gaming machine is characterized in that the first through hole is a through hole used to secure the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to secure both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the following order: second through hole, first through hole, second through hole, and so on. When the first and second members are secured to the base, a portion of the second member abuts on a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base (for example, box-shaped space 722S shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b)).

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are arranged around the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through-hole, the first through-hole, and the second through-hole. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes located on both sides of the first through-hole. Furthermore, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, creating a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even when the first and second members are fixed to the base and a portion of the first member is covered by the second member, it is possible to pull out the wiring of the first member to the outside, for example, thereby increasing design freedom.

Furthermore, the first member may be a member including an electrical component (e.g., electromagnetic circuit 711 shown in Figure 19(b)) to which wiring (e.g., lead wire 717 shown in Figure 19(b)) is connected, and may be configured so that the wiring can be drawn out to the outside of the first member and the second member through the space.

With this configuration, even if part of the first component is covered by the second component, the wiring of the first component can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

The second member may also have a space portion having a predetermined space (e.g., a box-shaped space 722S shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b)), which is configured to accommodate at least a portion of the wiring, and which has a first space portion having a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape (e.g., a first space portion 722S1 shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b)) and a second space portion having a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape (e.g., a second space portion 722S2 shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b)). When the first member is covered with the second member, the space portion of the second member may be positioned between the first through hole and the second through hole of the first member.

With this configuration, when fixing the second member to the base, a wider area can be secured outside the contact point between the base and the second member (around the through hole), thereby preventing the wiring from becoming pinched between the base and the second member.

Furthermore, the first space and the second space may be located outside the third through hole in the second member (radially outside the second member).

With this configuration, the horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped second space portion ensures a large area for pulling out the wiring from between the second member and the base, and the vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped first space portion partially restricts the area for guiding the wiring, preventing the wiring from gathering near the through-hole when the second member is fixed and interfering with the installation process.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine comprising a first member (e.g., the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 730 shown in FIG. 16 and 19), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member comprises a first through hole (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member comprises a plurality of third through holes (e.g., the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), The first through hole is a through hole used to secure the first of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to secure both the first and second members to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes are arranged alternately around the outer periphery of the first member, and when the first and second members are secured to the base, a portion of the second member abuts on a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base (for example, box-shaped space 722S shown in Figures 17(a) and 17(b)).

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, since the first member can be secured to the base and positioned using the first through-hole, the second member can be secured to the base. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, since the first through-hole and multiple second through-holes are alternately positioned around the outer periphery of the first member, the two first and second members can be stably secured together via the second through-holes located on either side of the first through-hole. Furthermore, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, creating a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even when the first and second members are fixed to the base and a portion of the first member is covered by the second member, it is possible to pull out the wiring of the first member to the outside, for example, thereby increasing design freedom.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Speaker Unit Configuration>
Next, the configuration of a speaker unit 800 according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20(a) is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 800 according to Modification 2.

As shown in Figure 20(a), the speaker unit 800 of variant 2 is composed of a low-frequency output speaker 810 (first member) with a large diaphragm and a rear cover 820 (second member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 810, and is attached to a speaker pedestal 830 (base) formed below the rear surface of the front door 102 of the slot machine.

The slot machine (gaming machine) in this example has two speaker bases 830 arranged horizontally at a predetermined distance from each other on the back side of the front door 102, and each speaker base 830 is configured to allow a speaker unit 800 to be attached.

Figure 20(b) is an external perspective view showing two speaker units 800 attached to the back surface of the front door 102.

As shown in Figure 20(b), the lead wires 817 of the two left and right speakers 810 pass through the inner space of the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820, are pulled out from the space formed between the rear cover 820 and the speaker base 830, are wired along the back surface of the front door 102, and are electrically connected to a sound output control means (for example, the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using Figure 3, or the second sub-controller 500) arranged above the front door 102.

In this example, two speaker units 800 are arranged horizontally on the back surface of the front door 102, but three or more speaker units 800 may be arranged, or the speaker units 800 may be arranged vertically or diagonally on the back surface of the front door 102.

The speaker unit 800 can be oriented in two directions: one in which the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face upward, and the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is pulled out from above (the direction shown in Figure 20(b) ; hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "upward direction"); and one in which the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face right, and the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is pulled out from the right side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "rightward direction"). ), the speaker 810 can be attached in either a direction in which the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face downwards, with the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 drawn out from the bottom (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "downward direction"), or a direction in which the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face leftwards, with the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 drawn out from the left side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "leftward direction").

In this example, the speaker unit 800 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left relative to the speaker base 830, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in installing the speaker unit 800.

For example, in the mounting configuration of the speaker units 800 shown in Figure 20(b), the two speaker units 800 are both mounted facing upwards. This allows the lead wires 817 of the two speakers 810 to be pulled out from above and then bundled together above the speaker units 800, improving the efficiency and maintainability of wiring work. This is particularly suitable for gaming machines where space can be secured above the speaker units 800 (for example, medal-less slot machines that do not have a hopper or medal selector above the speaker units 800, or enclosed gaming machines that do not have a tray above the speaker units 800).

On the other hand, when applying this to a gaming machine where it is difficult to secure space above the speaker unit 800 (for example, a slot machine in which a hopper or medal selector is located above the speaker unit 800, or a pachinko machine in which a tray is located above the speaker unit 800), by mounting the two speaker units 800 facing downward, right, or left instead of upward, the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 can be routed to avoid other devices located above the speaker unit 800, thereby improving the efficiency of wiring work and making effective use of the limited space behind the front door 102.

Furthermore, by differing the orientation of the two speaker units 800, the direction in which the lead wires 817 of the speaker 810 are pulled out can be varied. For example, if the speaker unit 800 located on the left side of the front door 102 when viewed from the back is installed facing right, while the speaker unit 800 located on the right side of the front door 102 when viewed from the back is installed facing left, the lead wires 817 of the speaker 810 can be pulled out from the two speaker units 800 toward the center of the back of the front door 102, improving the efficiency and maintainability of wiring work.

Furthermore, the length of the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is not particularly limited, as long as it is long enough to allow electrical connection from the speaker 810 to the sound output control means (for example, the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using Figure 3, or the second sub-controller 500). However, for example, if the length is set to the minimum required when the speaker unit 800 is installed in an upward direction, and the lead wire 817 is configured so that if the speaker unit 800 is installed in a direction other than upward, the length of the lead wire 817 is insufficient to connect to the sound output control means, the installation orientation of the speaker unit 800 can be intentionally restricted, and the installation orientation of the speaker unit 800 on the gaming machine can be unified.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Speaker Base>
20(a), speaker pedestal 830 (base) is configured to include an annular diaphragm support portion 831 that supports outer edge 813a of diaphragm 813 of speaker 810 (see FIG. 22; the portion that supports the outer edge of the cone of diaphragm 813), four cylindrical mounting sleeves 832 for screwing speaker 810 and rear cover 820 to front door 102, and a horizontally elongated elliptical sound hole plate 834 that fits inside diaphragm support portion 831. The detailed configuration of speaker pedestal 830 (base) will be described later using FIG. 23.

In addition, one of multiple cylindrical bosses 835 for fixing the title panel 162 (see Figure 1) attached to the lower front surface of the front door 102 is disposed within the space formed by the diaphragm support portion 831 and the back surface of the front door 102.

In this example, other components unrelated to the speaker unit 800 or speaker base 830 (in this example, the boss 835 for fixing the title panel 162) can be accommodated within the space formed by the diaphragm support part 831 and the back surface of the front door 102, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited space behind the front door 102 and thereby saving space behind the front door 102.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Speaker, Rear Cover>
Next, the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 that constitute the speaker unit 800 according to the second modification will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.

Figure 21(a) is a side view of the rear cover 820, and Figure 21(b) is a top view of the rear cover 820. Figure 21(c) is a side view of the speaker 810, and Figure 21(d) is a top view of the speaker 810. Figure 22 is a plan view of the speaker 810 housed in the inner space of the rear cover 820, viewed from the underside of the speaker 810.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Speaker>
The speaker 810 (first component) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in FIG. 21( c), is generally composed of an electromagnetic circuit 811 (electrical component) consisting of a voice coil and a magnet, and vibrating a diaphragm 813 (described later) in response to an electric signal, a frame 812 supporting the electromagnetic circuit 811, the diaphragm 813 that vibrates to generate sound, a flat flange 814 to which the diaphragm 813 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a lead terminal 816 arranged on the upper side of the flange 814 when viewed from above, and a lead wire 817 (wiring) detachably connected to the lead terminal 816.

The frame 812 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 815 (see Figure 20) formed circumferentially on its side to allow air around the diaphragm 813 to escape. That is, multiple openings 815 are formed circumferentially on the side of the frame 812, and struts 812a (see Figure 20) are formed between the openings 815 in the front-to-rear direction. The diaphragm 813 is formed in a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

As shown in FIG. 21(d), dedicated oval screw holes 816a (first through holes) for screwing the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830 are formed in the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the flange 814. Also, shared oval screw holes 816b (second through holes) for screwing the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830 are formed in the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the flange 814.

The size and shape of the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. 22, the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) are larger than the circular screw hole 824 (third through hole) in the rear cover 820, but smaller than the circular through hole 825 (fourth through hole) in the rear cover 820.

In this example, two dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the flange 814, and two shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the flange 814. As a result, the dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) and shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the flange 818.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 21(d), when a plurality of dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) and the shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) on either side of these dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) are connected by imaginary straight lines VL, a virtual rectangle VQ is formed, and the dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) are arranged on a (first) diagonal line (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line) of the virtual rectangle VQ, and the shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) are arranged on a (second) diagonal line (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line) different from the first diagonal line of the virtual rectangle VQ.

Furthermore, when focusing on the distance between the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole), as shown in FIG. 21(d), the shortest distance L3 from the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to one of the two shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) (for example, the shared screw hole 816b located in the upper right corner) is substantially the same as the shortest distance L4 from the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to a second through hole of the two shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) other than the one (for example, the shared screw hole 816b located in the lower left corner).

According to this example, when the speaker 810 (first member) is fixed to the speaker pedestal 830 (base) using the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through-hole) for positioning, or when the rear cover 820 (second member) is removed from the speaker pedestal 830 (base), the speaker 810 (first member) can be stably fixed, improving safety and workability.

Furthermore, as described above, the speaker unit 800 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left relative to the speaker base 830, and the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in terms of installation of the speaker 810.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Rear Cover>
Next, the rear cover 820 (second member) will be described.

The rear cover 820 (second member) is a colored, transparent resin member capable of housing the speaker 810 inside, and is made of a material that allows the speaker 810 (first member) to be visible from the outside when the speaker 810 (first member) is housed inside.

In this example, at least a portion of the speaker 810 (first member) can be seen through the rear cover 820 (second member), making it possible to check the fixed position of the speaker 810 (first member) relative to the speaker base 830 (base) and the relative positions of the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member), thereby improving convenience when installing the members.

The rear cover 820 may be made of any transparent material, and its material is not limited to colored, transparent resin; it may be, for example, colorless, transparent (or translucent) plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, glass, metal, etc.

As shown in Figures 21(a) and (b), the rear cover 820 has a circular cover portion 821 formed on the rear side that covers part of the rear end of the speaker 810, and a cylindrical side wall portion 822 that widens slightly toward the rear, with this cover portion 821 as its base.

A predetermined marking 826 (in this example, a part number and material) is provided on the upper side of the cover portion 821 when viewed from the top. The display format of the predetermined marking 826 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a part number marking (in this example, the string "SPxxxx") indicating the part number of the rear cover 820 is engraved on the surface of the cover portion 821 to the left of the area where the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 are visible when the rear cover 820 is covering the speaker 810, and a material marking (in this example, the string "PC") indicating the material of the rear cover 820 is engraved on the right of the area where the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 are visible when the rear cover 820 is covering the speaker 810.

In other words, when the speaker 810 is viewed through the rear cover 820, the part number display (in this example, the string "SPxxxx") is visible to the left of the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810, and the material display (in this example, the string "PC") is visible to the right of the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810.

In this example, in addition to the predetermined markings 826 being applied to the rear cover 820, the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 are visible when the speaker 810 is viewed through the rear cover 820. Therefore, the correct orientation (installation direction) of the rear cover 820 can be easily identified based on the orientation of the predetermined markings 826 and whether the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 are visible in the center of the predetermined markings 826, thereby improving convenience when installing the rear cover 820, etc.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 21(b), the rear cover 820 has two protruding pieces 823a and two protruding pieces 823b with screw holes that protrude outward from the outer edge of the side wall portion 822.

In this example, two protrusions 823a are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the side wall portion 822, and two protrusions 823b with screw holes are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the side wall portion 822. As a result, the protrusions 823a and the protrusions 823b with screw holes are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the side wall portion 822.

In other words, as shown in Figure 21(b), when the vertices of the multiple protrusions 823a and the screw hole protrusions 823b on either side of the multiple protrusions 823a are connected by an imaginary straight line VL2, an imaginary rectangle VQ2 is formed, and the multiple protrusions 823a are arranged on a (first) diagonal line (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line) of the imaginary rectangle VQ2, and the multiple screw hole protrusions 823b are arranged on a (second) diagonal line (different from the first diagonal line) of the imaginary rectangle VQ2 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line).

The screw-hole protrusions 823b, located diagonally between the lower left and upper right corners (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal), have circular screw holes 824 (third through-holes) formed in them for screwing the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 together to the speaker base 730.

With this configuration, the speaker unit 800 is integrated and fixed to the speaker base 730 by fastening the common screw hole 816b (second through-hole) of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 (third through-hole) of the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830 (base) with a screw 840 (fixing means; see Figure 20). The method for attaching the speaker unit 800 will be described later.

Furthermore, a screw hole identification groove 822a consisting of a linear groove extending from the bottom to the top of the side wall portion 822 is formed near the screw hole 824 in the side wall portion 822. In other words, in this example, the screw hole identification groove 822a is formed near the screw hole 824, making it possible to identify the screw hole 824.

In this example, at least one of the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole), shared screw hole 816b (second through hole), and screw hole 824 (third through hole) (in this example, screw hole 824 (third through hole)) is configured to be identifiable. This makes it easy to determine whether each through hole is used to secure only the speaker 810 (first component) to the speaker base 830 (base), or whether it is used to secure both the speaker 810 (first component) and the rear cover 820 (second component) to the speaker base 830 (base), thereby improving the efficiency of component installation work. Furthermore, the screw hole identification groove 822a can be used as a clue to easily identify the correct orientation (installation direction) of the rear cover 820, improving convenience when installing the rear cover 820, etc.

In this example, a screw hole identification groove 822a is formed near the screw hole 824 (third through hole) as a configuration for making the screw hole 824 (third through hole) identifiable. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a part that makes the screw hole 824 (third through hole) identifiable may be formed on a member other than the rear cover 820 (second member) (for example, the speaker base 830 (base) or the speaker 810 (first member)), a sticker or the like that makes the screw hole 824 (third through hole) identifiable may be affixed, or the screw hole 824 (third through hole) may be marked, printed, engraved, or the like that makes it identifiable.

Furthermore, while a configuration that makes it possible to identify the screw hole 824 (third through-hole) of the rear cover 820 has been exemplified, a configuration that makes it possible to identify the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through-hole) and/or the shared screw hole 816b (second through-hole) of the speaker 810 (first member) may instead (or in addition) be employed.

Therefore, for example, a portion may be formed on mounting sleeve 832 of speaker base portion 830 (base) that allows at least one of the dedicated screw hole 816 a (first through hole), the common screw hole 816 b (second through hole), and the screw hole 84 (third through hole) to be identified, or a sticker or the like that allows at least one of the through holes to be affixed, or at least one of the through holes may be marked, printed, engraved, or the like that allows it to be identified, or flange 814 of speaker 810 (first member) may be formed with a portion that allows the dedicated screw hole 816 a (first through hole) and/or the common screw hole 816 b (second through hole) to be identified, or a sticker or the like that allows the dedicated screw hole 816 a (first through hole) and/or the common screw hole 816 b (second through hole) to be affixed, or the dedicated screw hole 816 a (first through hole) and/or the common screw hole 816 b (second through hole) may be marked, printed, engraved, or the like that allows it to be identified.

Furthermore, by making the shape of the screw hole protrusion 823b of the rear cover 820 different from the shape of the protrusion 823a, it may be possible to identify that the through hole formed in the screw hole protrusion 823b is a through hole used to secure both the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) to the speaker base 830 (base); conversely, by making the shape of the screw hole protrusion 823a of the rear cover 820 different from the shape of the screw hole protrusion 823b, it may be possible to identify that the through hole in the speaker 810 corresponding to the protrusion 823a is a through hole used to secure only the speaker 810 (first member) to the speaker base 830 (base).

This configuration makes it possible to visually identify the function of the through-holes based on the shape of the protruding pieces on the rear cover 820, thereby improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 21(b), protruding pieces 823a arranged diagonally at the upper left and lower right corners of the rear cover 820 have through holes 825 (fourth through holes) formed therein that have an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the screw hole 824 (third through hole).

As shown in FIG. 22, this through hole 825 (fourth through hole) has a larger inner diameter than the oval-shaped shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810, and as shown in FIG. 23(d), it has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the head of the screw 840.

With this configuration, even if the speaker 810 alone is fixed to the back surface of the front door 102 by fastening the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) of the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830 (base) with a screw 840 and then the rear cover 820 is positioned relative to the rear surface of the speaker 810, the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be accommodated without coming into contact with the through hole 825 and does not interfere with the rear cover 820. Therefore, it is possible to easily visually confirm that the rear cover 820 is attached in the correct position relative to the speaker 810 based on the positional relationship between the through hole 825 (fourth through hole) and the screw 840, and the rear cover 820 can be accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810.

Furthermore, when the rear cover 820 is accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810, the screws 840 are housed inside the through-holes 825, and the horizontal movement of the rear cover 820 is restricted by the screws 840, preventing the rear cover 820 from shifting or rattling when attached. Furthermore, because the through-holes 825 (fourth through-holes) have a larger inner diameter than the oval-shaped shared screw holes 816b (second through-holes) of the speaker 810, any assembly error (misalignment of the rear cover 820) of the rear cover 820 relative to the speaker 810 can be absorbed, simplifying the attachment process.

In this example, a through hole is formed in the protruding piece 823a of the rear cover 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of a through hole, a recess or notch, etc., may be formed in the protruding piece 823a so that the screw 840 does not interfere, or the protruding piece 823a itself may be removed from the rear cover 820. In other words, when the speaker 810 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102 with the screw 840, it is sufficient to configure it so that the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 does not interfere with the rear cover 820.

As shown in Figure 21(b), a box-shaped space 822S (space portion) protrudes from the upper outer edge of the rear cover 820 when viewed from above, for accommodating the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 and leading the lead wires 817 to the outside of the speaker unit 800.

With this configuration, as shown in Figure 22, when the speaker 810 (first member) is housed inside the rear cover 820 (second member), a space SP is formed between the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member), and the lead wire 817 (wiring) of the speaker 810 can be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) through this space SP.

In this example, even if the rear cover 820 (second component) covers part of the speaker 810 (first component), the lead wire 817 (wiring) of the speaker 810 (first component) can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

In addition, as shown in Figure 22, four protruding ribs 827 are formed on the inside bottom surface of the rear cover 820, which can come into contact with the four flange corners 814a of the flange 814 of the speaker 810, and the shape of the lower edge 820a of the rear cover 820 is molded into a curved shape that is approximately the same as the outer edge of one side of the flange 814 of the speaker 810.

In this example, the four ribs 827 of the rear cover 820 abut against one of the four flange corners 814a of the flange 814 of the speaker 810, and the lower edge 820a of the rear cover 820 abuts against the outer edge of one side of the flange 814 of the speaker 810. This makes it possible to easily and reliably position the speaker 810 relative to the rear cover 820, and to integrate the speaker 810 and rear cover 820. Therefore, by using installation method 2, described below, the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 can be attached to the speaker base 830 in an integrated state, simplifying the installation process of the speaker unit 800.

Furthermore, as described above, the speaker unit 800 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left relative to the speaker base 830, and the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in attaching the rear cover 820.

As mentioned above, the rear cover 820 is provided with a specified marking 826. Therefore, when attaching the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830, it is preferable to attach it with the side with the specified marking 826 facing up, so that the specified marking 826 is easily visible. However, even if the rear cover 820 is attached facing right, downward, or left, the specified marking 826 will be upside down, but it can still be attached to the speaker base 830.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Speaker Base>
Next, the speaker pedestal 830 (base) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figures 23(a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of how to install the speaker unit 800 in chronological order, with Figure 23(a) showing the speaker base 830 with the sound hole plate 834 removed.

As explained using Figure 20(a), the speaker base 830 (base) is composed of a circular diaphragm support part 831 that supports the outer edge 813a of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 (see Figure 22; the part that supports the outer edge of the cone of the diaphragm 813), four mounting sleeves 832 (832a, 832b) for screwing the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 to the front door 102, and a horizontally elongated sound hole plate 834 that fits inside the diaphragm support part 831.

The height of the frame support part 831 (height from the back of the front door 102) is designed to be higher than the maximum vibration amplitude of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 so as not to inhibit the vibration of the diaphragm 813, and a sound hole plate 834 is fitted inside it, as shown in Figure 23 (b).

As shown in Figure 23 (c), when the speaker 810 is attached to the speaker base 830, the outer edge 813a of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 abuts against the frame support part 831, and an enclosed space is formed by the speaker base 830 and the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810.

In this example, the periphery of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 can be supported by the frame support portion 831, and an enclosed space can be formed by the speaker base portion 830 and the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810. This allows the sound output from the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 to be efficiently output through the sound hole plate 834 toward the front of the front door 102, thereby improving the acoustic effect.

Of the four mounting sleeves 832, the first mounting sleeves 832a, located at the upper left and lower right corners when viewed from above, are mounting sleeves to which the dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) of the speaker 810 are fastened with screws 840, as shown in Figure 23(c).

On the other hand, of the four mounting sleeves 832, the second mounting sleeves 832b, located at the bottom left and top right corners when viewed from above, are mounting sleeves to which the shared screw hole 816b (second through-hole) of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 (third through-hole) of the rear cover 820 are fastened with screws 840, as shown in Figure 23(d).

In addition, two cylindrical ribs 838 are formed at a predetermined distance on the outer periphery of each of the four mounting sleeves 832 (832a, 832b), on which the four flange corners 814a (see Figure 22) of the flange 814 of the speaker 810 can be placed.

In this example, when attaching the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830, the flange corner 814a of the flange 814 of the speaker 810 is placed on the rib 838 of the mounting sleeve 832, which allows the speaker 810 to be positioned easily and reliably, preventing the speaker 810 from shifting or rattling when attached.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Mounting Method 1>
Next, a first method for mounting the speaker unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG.

When attaching the speaker unit 800 to the speaker base 830, first attach the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830 as shown in Figures 23(b) and (c), and then attach the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830 as shown in Figures 23(c) and (d).

More specifically, when attaching the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830, with the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 facing upward, the flange corners 814a of the flange 814 are placed on the ribs 838 of the mounting sleeve 832, and the dedicated screw holes 816a of the speaker 810 are aligned with the first mounting sleeve 832a, while the outer edge 813a of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 is brought into contact with the frame support portion 831, thereby positioning the speaker 810 relative to the speaker base 830.

Next, as shown in Figure 23(c), the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 is aligned with the hole in the first mounting sleeve 832a of the speaker base 830, and the speaker 810 is attached to the speaker base 830 by fastening with the screw 840.

In addition, because the lead terminal 816 and lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 are configured to be detachable, even if the wiring of the lead wire 817 to the speaker base 830 is complete, it is possible to rotate the speaker 810 by 90 degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees and attach it to the speaker base 830, and then connect the lead terminal 816 and lead wire 817 later. Even if the speaker 810 is attached to the speaker base 830, it is possible to change the wiring of the lead wire 817 and connect the lead terminal 816 and lead wire 817 later.

Next, when attaching the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830, align the position of the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 with the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810, turn it upward, align the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820 with the second mounting sleeve 832b, and cover the speaker 810 with the rear cover 820 to position the rear cover 820 relative to the speaker base 830.

Next, as shown in Figure 23(d), the rear cover 820 is attached to the speaker base 830 by aligning the screw holes 824 of the rear cover 820 with the shared screw holes 816b of the speaker 810 and the holes in the second mounting sleeve 832b of the speaker base 830 and fastening them with screws 840. This allows the speaker unit 800 to be integrated and fixed to the back surface of the front door 102.

In this example, when fixing the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830 with screws 840, they can be fixed at once with a single screw 840 via the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820, simplifying the work of attaching the components compared to conventional methods. Furthermore, once the speaker 810 has been fixed and positioned on the base using the dedicated screw hole 816a, the rear cover 820 can be fixed to the speaker base 830, eliminating the need to position the two components simultaneously and improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, when the speaker unit 800 is correctly installed and the speaker 810 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 820 (second member), as shown in FIG. 23(d), the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be accommodated without contacting the inside of the through hole 825 (fourth through hole), and the screw 840 does not interfere with the rear cover 820. Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the through hole 825 (fourth through hole) and the screw 840, the rear cover 820 can be attached to the speaker 810. It is easy to visually check that the rear cover 820 is attached in the correct position relative to the speaker 810, and the rear cover 820 can be accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810. Furthermore, when the rear cover 820 is accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810, the screws 840 are housed inside the through-holes 825, and the horizontal movement of the rear cover 820 is restricted by the screws 840, preventing the rear cover 820 from shifting or rattling when it is attached.

In particular, when screws are used as the fixing means, if the screws are not tightened enough when fixing the speaker 810 (first member) to the speaker base 830 (base), there is a possibility that the screw head may protrude more than necessary from the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through-hole). However, by forming through-hole 825 (fourth through-hole) in the rear cover 820, it is possible to avoid the risk of interference between the rear cover 820 (second member) and the screw head.

In other words, when the speaker unit 800 is correctly attached and the speaker 810 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 820 (second member), the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) of the speaker 810 (first member) is configured not to be covered by the rear cover 820 (second member), and the screw 840 is configured to contact only the speaker 810 (first member). Therefore, even when the rear cover 820 (second member) is positioned relative to the speaker base 830 (base), the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 (first member) a (first through hole) is not obscured by the rear cover 820 (second member), allowing for efficient installation. Furthermore, even if the speaker 810 (first member) and rear cover 820 (second member) are first secured to the speaker base 830 (base) using the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 (third through hole) of the rear cover 820, it is possible to subsequently secure the speaker 810 (first member) using the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole), making installation more convenient.

Furthermore, when attaching the speaker 810 and rear cover 820, a common screw 840 (screws of the same length and thickness) can be used, eliminating the need to use multiple types of screws, improving convenience and eliminating screw installation errors, ensuring reliable attachment of the components.

In order to use a common screw 840 when attaching the speaker 810 and rear cover 820, the length of the screw 840 must be at least as long as the combined thickness of the screw hole 824 in the rear cover 820 and the common screw hole 816b in the speaker 810.

For this reason, if a common screw 840 were used to fasten the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810, the screw would be excessively long by the thickness of the rear cover 820. However, in this example, the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be accommodated inside the through hole 825 (fourth through hole), so the screw 840 does not interfere with the rear cover 820.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 23 (d), when the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 are attached to the speaker base 830, the four attached screws 840 are visible. Therefore, even if a fraudster were to attempt to remove the speaker unit 800, this would make them think that it would take a long time to do so, thereby preventing fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, when the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 are attached to the speaker base 830, the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 are supported by the four mounting sleeves 832 of the speaker base 830, creating a predetermined space between the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 and the speaker base 830.

Furthermore, as explained using Figure 22, when the speaker 810 is covered with the rear cover 820, a space SP is also formed between the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820.

This configuration creates spaces between the speaker base 830 (base) and the rear cover 820 (second member), and between the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member), allowing the lead wires 817 (wiring) of the speaker 810 to be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) through these spaces.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 2)/Mounting Method 2>
Next, a second method for mounting the speaker unit 800 will be described.

In the speaker unit 800, even if the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 are first attached to the speaker base 830 using the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820, the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be fastened with a screw 840 later.

More specifically, when first assembling the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 and attaching them to the speaker base 830, the speaker 810 is covered and integrated with the rear cover 820 while aligning the position of the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 with the position of the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820, and the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 are then positioned relative to the speaker base 830 by aligning the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 with the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820 with the second mounting sleeve 832b.

Next, the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820 are aligned with the holes in the second mounting sleeve 832b and fastened with the screw 840, thereby attaching the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 together to the speaker base 830.

When the speaker 810 is completely attached to the speaker base 830, the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 is aligned with the first mounting sleeve 832a to position the speaker 810 relative to the speaker base 830.

Next, the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 is aligned with the hole in the first mounting sleeve 832a of the speaker base 830, and the speaker 810 is attached to the speaker base 830 by fastening with the screw 840. This allows the speaker unit 800 to be integrated and fixed to the back surface of the front door 102.

In this example, the worker's skill level allows them to select the appropriate installation method from multiple installation methods (Installation Methods 1 and 2), thereby improving work efficiency.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 810 shown in FIG. 20 and FIGS. 21(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (for example, the speaker base 830 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 23), and a second member (for example, the back cover 820 shown in FIG. 20 and FIGS. 21(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a part of the first member, wherein the first member includes a plurality of first through holes (for example, the dedicated screw hole 816a shown in FIG. 21(d)) and a plurality of second through holes (for example, the shared screw hole 816b shown in FIG. 21(d)) that are different from the first through holes, and the second member includes a plurality of third through holes (for example, the screw hole 824 shown in FIG. 21(b)), and the first through holes are fixed to the first member and the second member. the first through hole is a through hole used to fix the first member to the base, and the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used to fix both the first member and the second member to the base, the gaming machine is configured such that when the plurality of first through holes and the second through holes on both sides of the plurality of first through holes are connected by imaginary straight lines (for example, straight line VL shown in Figure 21(d)), a imaginary rectangle (for example, rectangle VQ shown in Figure 21(d)) is formed, the plurality of first through holes are configured to be positioned at the vertices of the ends of the imaginary rectangle, and the base has a frame portion (for example, diaphragm support portion 831 shown in Figure 20 or Figure 23(a)) formed to match the shape of the first member (for example, outer edge portion 813a of diaphragm 813 of speaker 810).

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-holes are positioned among multiple second through-holes, and virtual lines connecting the multiple first through-holes and the second through-holes adjacent to the multiple first through-holes form a virtual rectangle. The multiple first through-holes are positioned at the vertices of the virtual rectangle. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes on both sides of the first through-hole. Additionally, because the base is equipped with a frame portion formed to match the shape of the first member, the first member can be attached while being reliably positioned relative to the base, allowing for efficient attachment work and the frame portion to stably secure the first member to the base.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first member (e.g., the speaker 810 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 830 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 23), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 820 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a plurality of first through holes (e.g., the dedicated screw hole 816a shown in FIG. 21(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes (e.g., the shared screw hole 816b shown in FIG. 21(d)), and the second member has a plurality of third through holes (e.g., the screw hole 824 shown in FIG. 21(b)), and the first through holes are used to connect the first member to the second member. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member to the base, and the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, and is configured so that connecting the plurality of first through holes with the second through holes on both sides of the plurality of first through holes by imaginary straight lines (for example, straight line VL shown in FIG. 21(d)) forms an imaginary quadrangle (for example, quadrangle VQ shown in FIG. 21(d)), and the plurality of first through holes are configured to be positioned at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the imaginary quadrangle, and when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base.

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-holes are positioned among multiple second through-holes, and are configured such that connecting the multiple first through-holes with the second through-holes adjacent to the multiple first through-holes with imaginary straight lines forms an imaginary rectangle. The multiple first through-holes are configured to be positioned at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the imaginary rectangle. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes positioned on both sides of the first through-hole. Furthermore, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, creating a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even if the first member has wiring, the wiring can be routed to the outside through this space, allowing for greater design freedom.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first member (e.g., the speaker 810 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base 830 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 23), and a second member (e.g., the back cover 820 shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, and the first member has a plurality of first through holes (e.g., The second member has a plurality of third through holes (for example, screw holes 824 shown in FIG. 21(b)), the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, and the second through hole and the third through hole are a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base. the first through holes are through holes used to secure both the first member and the second member to the base, and are configured so that connecting the plurality of first through holes with the second through holes on both sides of the plurality of first through holes by imaginary straight lines (e.g., straight lines VL shown in FIG. 21(d)) forms an imaginary rectangle (e.g., rectangle VQ shown in FIG. 21(d)), and the plurality of first through holes are configured to be positioned at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the imaginary rectangle, and the base is configured to have a frame portion (e.g., diaphragm support portion 831 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 23(a)) formed to match the shape of the first member (e.g., outer edge portion 813a of diaphragm 813 of speaker 810), and when the first member and the second member are secured to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against the support portion provided on the base, thereby forming a space between the second member and the base.

With this gaming machine, the first and second members can be secured to the base in one step via the second through-hole in the first member and the third through-hole in the second member. This simplifies the installation process compared to conventional systems and allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members. Furthermore, the second member can be secured to the base after the first member has been secured and positioned on the base using the first through-hole. This eliminates the need to simultaneously position the two members, improving work efficiency. Furthermore, the first through-holes are positioned among multiple second through-holes, and are configured such that connecting the multiple first through-holes with the second through-holes adjacent to the multiple first through-holes with imaginary straight lines forms an imaginary rectangle. The multiple first through-holes are configured to be positioned at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the imaginary rectangle. This allows for stable fastening of the two first and second members via the second through-holes positioned on both sides of the first through-hole. Furthermore, because the base includes a frame portion shaped to match the shape of the first member, the first member can be attached while being reliably positioned relative to the base, allowing for efficient attachment work and the frame portion allows the first member to be stably fixed to the base. Furthermore, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, creating a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even if the first member has wiring or the like, the wiring or the like can be routed to the outside through the space, increasing design flexibility.

Furthermore, the first member may be configured to be fixable to the base by first fixing means (e.g., screw 840 shown in Figures 20(a) and 23(d)) and second fixing means (e.g., screw 840 shown in Figures 20(a) and 23(d)), and the second member may be configured to be fixable to the base by the second fixing means. When the first member and the second member are fixed to the base (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the first through-hole of the first member is not covered by the second member, and in the first state, the first fixing means may be configured to contact only the first member of the first and second members.

With this configuration, even when the second member is positioned relative to the base, the first through-hole of the first member is not obscured by the second member, allowing for efficient installation work. Furthermore, even if the first and second members are first secured to the base using the second and third through-holes, the first member can then be secured using the first through-hole, making installation more convenient.

The second member may also have a plurality of fourth through holes (for example, through holes 825 shown in Figures 21(b) and 23(d)), the third through holes being through holes that are located at positions corresponding to the second through holes of the first member in the first state, the fourth through holes being through holes that are located at positions corresponding to the first through holes of the first member in the first state, the fourth through holes being larger than the third through holes, and the second fixing means being visible through the fourth through holes in the first state.

With this configuration, when the first member or second member is properly attached to the base and the first member is covered with the second member, the fastening means attached to the first through hole of the first member can be received inside the fourth through hole. The fastening means does not interfere with the second member. Therefore, the relative positions of the fourth through hole and the fastening means make it easy to visually confirm that the second member is correctly attached to the first member. This allows for accurate positioning of the second member relative to the first member. Furthermore, when the second member is accurately positioned relative to the first member, the fastening means is received inside the fourth through hole, and the movement of the second member is restricted by the fastening means. Therefore, misalignment or rattle of the second member can be prevented when the second member is attached. Furthermore, because the fastening means are visible through the third and fourth through holes, even if a tamperer were to attempt to remove the first or second member, it would appear that the removal would take a long time, thereby preventing tampering and other such acts from occurring.

Furthermore, the device may be configured such that, after the first through hole of the first member is fixed to the base by the first fixing means, the third through hole of the second member is positioned relative to the second through hole of the first member, and the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member are fixed to the base by the second fixing means; and, with the third through hole of the second member positioned relative to the second through hole of the first member, the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member are fixed to the base by the second fixing means, and then the first through hole of the first member can be fixed to the base by the first fixing means.

This configuration allows the worker to select the appropriate installation method from multiple methods depending on their skill level, thereby improving work efficiency.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Speaker Unit Configuration>
Next, the configuration of a speaker unit 850 according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24(a) is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 850 according to Modification 3, and Fig. 24(b) is an external perspective view showing two speaker units 850 attached to the lower back surface of the front door 102.

As shown in Figure 24(a), the speaker unit 850 of variant 3 is composed of a low-frequency output speaker 860 (first member) with a large diaphragm and a rear cover 870 (second member) that covers the rear side of this speaker 860, and is attached to speaker bases 880 (left speaker base 880L, right speaker base 880R) arranged below the rear surface of the front door 102 (base) of the slot machine.

A left speaker base 880L and a right speaker base 880R are arranged horizontally at a predetermined distance below the rear surface of the front door 102, and a speaker unit 850 can be attached to each of the left speaker base 880L and the right speaker base 880R.

Specifically, the speaker unit 850 is attached to the left speaker base 880L (first area) located on the left side of the front door 102 in rear view, with the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 facing right in rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 being pulled out from the right side (first orientation, hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-facing direction").

On the other hand, the speaker unit 850 is attached to the right speaker base portion 880R (second area) located on the right side of the front door 102 when viewed from the rear, with the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 facing left when viewed from the rear, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 being pulled out from the left side (second orientation, hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-facing direction").

In other words, in this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be attached to the base (front door 102) in either a first orientation (right-facing) or a second orientation (left-facing) obtained by rotating the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) circumferentially 180 degrees relative to the first orientation, and the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be attached to the first region (left speaker base 880L) in the first orientation (right-facing), and can be attached to the second region (right speaker base 880R) in the second orientation (left-facing).

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be attached to the base (front door 102) in at least two orientations, which increases the degree of freedom in attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870), allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in this example, the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (right-facing) can be attached to the first area (left speaker base 880L) but cannot be attached to the second area (right speaker base 880R), and the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) in the second orientation can be attached to the second area (right speaker base 880R) but cannot be attached to the first area (left speaker base 880L).

This example allows for greater flexibility in the installation of the first component (speaker 860) and the second component (rear cover 870), allowing them to be installed in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine, while also preventing installation errors.

As shown in Figure 24(b), the lead wires 867 of the two left and right speakers 860 pass through the inner space of the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870, are pulled out through an opening formed in the front of the box-shaped space 872S, are wired along the rear surface of the front door 102, and are electrically connected to a sound output control means (for example, the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using Figure 3 or the second sub-controller 500) arranged above the front door 102.

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) attached to the first area (left speaker base 880L) are positioned opposite the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) attached to the second area (right speaker base 880R) (one speaker unit 850 is attached facing right, while the other speaker unit 850 is attached facing left so as to face the first speaker unit 850). As a result, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the lead wires 867 of each first member (speaker 860) can be pulled out toward the center of the rear of the base (front door 102), facilitating wiring management and improving wiring efficiency. Furthermore, the wiring can be neatly stored, improving maintainability.

Note that the manner in which the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn out is not limited to this example. For example, the lead wire 867 may pass through the inner space of the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870, be drawn out from the space formed between the rear cover 870 and the front door 102, be wired along the back surface of the front door 102, and be electrically connected to a sound output control means disposed above the front door 102.

Furthermore, for example, when applied to a gaming machine where it is difficult to secure space above the speaker unit 850 (for example, a slot machine in which a hopper, medal selector, etc. is arranged above the speaker unit 850, or a pachinko machine in which a tray, etc. is arranged above the speaker unit 850), the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 can be routed to avoid other devices arranged above the speaker unit 850, thereby improving the efficiency of wiring work and making effective use of the limited space behind the front door 102.

In this example, two speaker units 850 are arranged horizontally on the back surface of the front door 102, but three or more speaker units 850 may be arranged, or the speaker units 850 may be arranged vertically or diagonally on the back surface of the front door 102.

In addition, the length of the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is not particularly limited, as long as it is long enough to allow electrical connection from the speaker 860 to the sound output control means (for example, the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using Figure 3, or the second sub-controller 500). However, for example, the length may be the minimum required when the speaker unit 850 is installed facing left or right, and the lead wire 867 may be configured so that it is not long enough to connect to the sound output control means when the speaker unit 850 is installed facing downward (in an orientation in which the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 or the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces downward in rear view). This allows the installation orientation of the speaker unit 850 to be intentionally restricted, thereby preventing incorrect installation of the speaker unit 850 on the gaming machine.

The "first orientation" according to the present invention is not limited to the rightward orientation, but may be, for example, a downward orientation (in which the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminals 866 of the speaker 860 face downward in a rear view, and the lead wires 867 of the speaker 860 are drawn out from the bottom), an upward orientation (in which the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminals 866 of the speaker 860 face upward in a rear view, and the lead wires 867 of the speaker 860 are drawn out from the top), or another orientation. The "second orientation" according to the present invention is not limited to the leftward orientation, but may be the downward orientation or upward orientation described above, or another orientation.

The orientation (first orientation, second orientation) of the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 may be changed depending on the direction in which the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is pulled out. The positions of the mounting sleeves 882 of the left speaker base 880L and right speaker base 880R (described below) may be changed as appropriate depending on the orientation (first orientation, second orientation) of the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 and the positions of the holes provided in each.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Speaker Base>
As shown in Figure 24(a), the left speaker base 880L and the right speaker base 880R are configured to include a circular diaphragm support part 881 that supports the outer edge (the part that supports the outer edge of the cone of the diaphragm 863) of the diaphragm 863 of the speaker 860 (see Figure 25(c) etc.), a cylindrical mounting sleeve 882 for screwing the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 to the front door 102, and a circular sound hole plate 884 that fits inside the diaphragm support part 881.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Metal Plate>
A rectangular parallelepiped metal plate 885 (third member) is erected between the left speaker base 880L and the right speaker base 880R on the back surface of the front door 102. This metal plate 885 is a member that functions as a frame ground because it is disposed on the front door 102 (metal frame). For convenience of explanation, part of the metal plate 885 is shown in a see-through manner in FIG. 24(a) and is not shown in FIG. 24(b).

As shown in Figure 24(a), the metal plate 885 has a circular eighth through hole 885a8 (eighth hole) and a tenth through hole 885a10 (tenth hole).

The eighth through-hole 885a8 (eighth hole) is a through-hole for fixing the first member (speaker 860) in the first orientation (right-facing) to the metal plate 885, and the tenth through-hole 885a10 (tenth hole) is a through-hole for fixing the first member (speaker 860) in the second orientation (left-facing) to the metal plate 885 (details will be described later using Figures 25 to 28).

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Speaker, Rear Cover>
Next, a speaker 860 and a rear cover 870 that constitute a speaker unit 850 according to the third modification will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

Figure 25(a) is a side view of the rear cover 870, and Figure 25(b) is a top view of the rear cover 870. Also, Figure 25(c) is a side view of the speaker 860, and Figure 25(d) is a top view of the speaker 860.

Figure 26 is a rear view of the front door 102 from the rear side, showing the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 positioned relative to the front door 102, and Figure 27 is a rear view of the front door 102 from the rear side, showing the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 attached to the front door 102 with screws.

Also, Figure 28(a) is a side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, viewed from the left side when viewed from the rear, and Figure 28(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, viewed from the right side when viewed from the rear.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Speaker>
Next, the speaker 860 (first member) will be described.

The speaker 860 (first component) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in Figure 25 (c), is generally composed of an electromagnetic circuit 861 consisting of a voice coil and a magnet that vibrates a diaphragm 863 (described later) in response to an electrical signal, a frame 862 that supports the electromagnetic circuit 861, the diaphragm 863 that vibrates to generate sound, a flat flange 864 to which the diaphragm 863 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a lead terminal 866 arranged on the flange 864, and a lead wire 867 detachably connected to the lead terminal 866.

Frame 862 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 865 (see Figure 24) formed circumferentially on its side to allow air around diaphragm 863 to escape. That is, multiple openings 855 are formed circumferentially on the side of frame 862, and struts 862a (see Figure 24) are formed between openings 865 in the front-to-rear direction. Diaphragm 863 is formed in a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

The electromagnetic circuit 861 is provided with a predetermined marking 876 (in this example, a part number and material). The display format of the predetermined marking 876 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a part number marking indicating the part number of the speaker 860 (in this example, the character string "SPxxxx") and a material marking indicating the material of the speaker 860 (in this example, the character string "AL") are engraved on the surface of the electromagnetic circuit 861.

In this example, the speaker 860 is provided with a predetermined marking 876, which makes it easy to identify the orientation of the speaker 860 (the first orientation or the second orientation described above) based on the orientation of this marking 876, thereby improving convenience when installing the speaker 860, etc.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Speaker/First and Fourth Through Holes>
As shown in FIG. 25( d ), an oval-shaped first through-hole 864 a 1 (first hole) is formed in the lower left corner of the outer edge of the flange 864 of the speaker 860 .

As shown in FIG. 27, this first through-hole 864a1 (first hole) is a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in a first orientation (right-facing), and is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in a second orientation (left-facing).

In other words, the first through-hole 864a1 (first hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the first through-hole 864a1 (first hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102). This may simplify the installation work of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870), thereby improving work efficiency.

The first through-hole 864a1 (first hole) may be provided with an identifier (for example, by printing letters or symbols near the first hole, forming a protrusion or other portion near the first hole, or attaching a sticker near the first hole) that can identify whether it is a hole used when attaching the first member and/or second member to the base, or an unused hole. The member on which the identifier is provided may be any of the first member, second member, third member, and base, or may be another member. The same applies to the through-holes described below.

In this example, an identifier is provided that can determine whether a certain through-hole is a hole to be used when attaching a first member and/or a second member to a base, which prevents installation errors when attaching the first member and/or the second member to a base and improves work efficiency.

A fourth oval through-hole 864a4 (fourth hole) is formed in the upper left corner of the outer end of the flange 864 of the speaker 860.

As shown in FIG. 27, this fourth through-hole 864a4 (fourth hole) is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (right-facing), and is used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (left-facing).

In other words, the fourth through-hole 864a4 (fourth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the fourth through-hole 864a4 (fourth hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102). This may simplify the installation work of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870), thereby improving work efficiency.

In this example, the first hole (first through-hole 864a1) and the fourth hole (fourth through-hole 864a4) of the first member (speaker 860) are positioned at positions that are approximately symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL3 (see Figure 25(d)) that passes through the center of the first member (speaker 860) (positions at approximately the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL3).

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Speaker/Seventh and Ninth Through Holes>
An oval-shaped seventh through-hole 864a7 (seventh hole) is formed in the lower right corner of the outer edge of the flange 864 of the speaker 860.

This seventh through hole 864a7 (seventh hole) is a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the third member (metal plate 885) in the first orientation (right-facing), as shown in FIG. 27, and is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885) in the second orientation (left-facing).

In other words, the seventh through hole 864a7 (seventh hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885), and unlike the first through hole 864a1 and the fourth through hole 864a4, it is a hole that is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870).

The seventh through-hole 864a7 (seventh hole) may also be a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward).

A ninth elliptical through-hole 864a9 (ninth hole) is formed in the upper right corner of the outer end of the flange 864 of the speaker 860.

As shown in FIG. 27, this ninth through hole 864a9 (ninth hole) is a hole that is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885) in the first orientation (rightward), and is a hole that is used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the third member (metal plate 885) in the second orientation (leftward). Unlike the first through hole 864a1 and the fourth through hole 864a4, this hole is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870).

In other words, the ninth through-hole 864a9 (ninth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885).

The ninth through-hole 864a9 (ninth hole) may also be a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In this example, the seventh hole (seventh through-hole 864a7) and ninth hole (ninth through-hole 864a9) of the first member (speaker 860) are positioned at positions that are approximately symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL3 (see Figure 25(d)) that passes through the center of the first member (speaker 860) (positions at approximately the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL3).

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Speaker/First, Fourth, Seventh, and Ninth Through Holes>
As shown in Figure 25 (d), when the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are connected by a virtual straight line VL4, a virtual rectangle VQ4 is formed, and the first through hole 864a1 and the ninth through hole 864a9 are arranged on the (first) diagonal line (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line) of the virtual rectangle VQ, and the fourth through hole 864a4 and the seventh through hole 864a7 are arranged on the second diagonal line (different from the first diagonal line) of the virtual rectangle VQ4 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line).

The size and shape of the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are not particularly limited. However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 26, the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are elliptical holes with larger outer diameters than the circular second through hole 872a2 and the fifth through hole 872a5 of the rear cover 870.

In this example, the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are elliptical holes with larger outer diameters than the circular second through hole 872a2 and the fifth through hole 872a5 of the rear cover 870. This makes it possible to absorb any assembly error (misalignment of the rear cover 870) of the rear cover 870 relative to the speaker 860, simplifying the installation process.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Rear Cover>
Next, the rear cover 870 (second member) will be described.

The rear cover 870 (second member) is a colored, transparent resin member capable of housing the speaker 860 inside, and is made of a material that allows the speaker 860 to be seen from the outside when it is housed inside.

In this example, at least a portion of the speaker 860 can be seen through the rear cover 870, so when installing the speaker unit 850, the positional relationship between the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 can be checked while installation is being performed, improving the convenience of the installation work.

The rear cover 870 may be made of any transparent material, and its material is not limited to colored, transparent resin; it may be, for example, colorless, transparent (or translucent) plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, glass, metal, etc.

The shape of the rear cover 870 is not particularly limited, but at least a portion may be formed with a shape (for example, a lattice shape or a maze shape) that prevents foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering or adhering to the speaker 860. The rear cover 870 may also be formed with guide portions (hooks, etc.) for guiding the lead wires 867 (wiring) of the speaker 860 and the earth wire connecting the speaker 860 to the metal plate 885 (frame ground) to predetermined positions, or the guide portions may be configured to be retrofittable to the rear cover 870.

As shown in Figures 25(a) and (b), the rear cover 870 has an annular cover portion 871 formed on the rear side that covers part of the rear end of the speaker 860, and has a cylindrical side wall portion 872 that widens slightly toward the rear, with this cover portion 871 as its base.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Rear Cover/Second and Fifth Through Holes>
A circular second through-hole 872a2 (second hole) is formed in the lower left corner of the outer edge of the side wall portion 872 of the rear cover 870.

As shown in FIG. 27, this second through-hole 872a2 (second hole) is a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (right-facing), and is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (left-facing).

In other words, the second through-hole 872a2 (second hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the second through-hole 872a2 (second hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102). This may simplify the installation work of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870), thereby improving work efficiency.

A circular fifth through-hole 872a5 (fifth hole) is formed in the upper left corner of the outer edge of the side wall portion 872 of the rear cover 870.

As shown in FIG. 27, this fifth through-hole 872a5 (fifth hole) is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (right-facing), and is used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (left-facing).

In other words, the fifth through-hole 872a5 (fifth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the fifth through-hole 872a5 (fifth hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102). This may simplify the installation of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870), thereby improving work efficiency.

In this example, the second hole (second through-hole 872a2) and fifth hole (fifth through-hole 872a5) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned at positions that are approximately symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL5 (see Figure 25(b)) that passes through the center of the second member (rear cover 870) (positions at approximately the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL5).

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Rear Cover/Third and Sixth Through Holes>
As shown in Figure 25 (b), the rear cover 870 has a left protruding piece 873 that protrudes outward to the left from the outer edge of the side wall portion 872, and a right protruding piece 874 that protrudes outward to the right from the outer edge of the side wall portion 872.

A circular third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) is formed above each of the left protruding piece 873 and right protruding piece 874 of the rear cover 870.

This third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (right-facing), as shown in FIG. 27, and is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (left-facing).

In other words, the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102), which may simplify the installation work of the second member (rear cover 870) and improve work efficiency.

In addition, either of the two third through holes 873a3 (third holes) may be used as a hole for attachment to the third member (metal plate 885).

A circular sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is formed below each of the left protruding piece 873 and the right protruding piece 874 of the rear cover 870.

As shown in FIG. 27, this sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is a hole that is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (right-facing), and is a hole that is used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (left-facing).

In other words, the sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102), which may simplify the installation work of the second member (rear cover 870) and improve work efficiency.

In addition, either of the two sixth through holes 873a6 (sixth holes) may be used as the hole used when attaching to the third member (metal plate 885).

In this example, the third hole (third through-hole 873a3) and sixth hole (sixth through-hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned at positions that are approximately symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL5 (see Figure 25(b)) that passes through the center of the second member (rear cover 870) (positions that are approximately the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL5).

The cover portion 871 of the rear cover 870 is provided with a predetermined marking 877 (in this example, a part number and material). The display format of the predetermined marking 877 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a part number marking indicating the part number of the rear cover 870 (in this example, the character string "CVxxxx") and a material marking indicating the material of the rear cover 870 (in this example, the character string "PC") are engraved on the surface of the cover portion 871.

In this example, the rear cover 870 is provided with a predetermined marking 877, which makes it easy to identify the orientation of the rear cover 870 (the first orientation or the second orientation described above) based on the orientation of this marking 877, thereby improving convenience when attaching the rear cover 870, etc.

In particular, since the specified markings 877 are provided in an area of the cover portion 871 that is closer to the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) than to the sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) (an area above the imaginary line VL5 passing through the center of the rear cover 870), it is possible to use the specified markings 877 as a clue to recognize that the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) is the hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (rightward) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885), further enhancing convenience when attaching the rear cover 870, etc.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Rear Cover/Box-Shaped Space>
As shown in Figure 25 (b), a box-shaped space 872S (space portion) is protrudingly formed on the outer edge of the right side of the rear cover 870 when viewed from above, for accommodating the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 and leading the lead wire 867 to the outside of the speaker unit 850.

With this configuration, when the speaker 860 is housed inside the rear cover 870, a space is formed between the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870, and as shown in Figures 26 and 27, the lead wire 867 (wiring) of the speaker 860 can be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 through this space.

In this example, even if the rear cover 870 covers part of the speaker 860, the lead wire 867 (wiring) of the speaker 860 can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

In this example, the lead wire 867 passes through the inner space of the box-shaped space 872S in the rear cover 870 and is pulled out from an opening formed in the front of the box-shaped space 872S. However, for example, a space may be formed between the speaker 860 and the front door 102, and the lead wire 867 may be pulled out from the front of the speaker 860 toward the front door 102 through this space. In this case, the box-shaped space 872S does not need to be formed in the rear cover 870.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Mounting Method>
Next, a method for attaching the speaker unit 850 will be described.

As shown in Figures 27 and 28(a), the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) facing in a first direction (rightward) are attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through the first hole (first through-hole 864a1) of the first member (speaker 860) and the second hole (second through-hole 872a2) of the second member (rear cover 870).

According to this example, it is possible to fasten the first hole (first through-hole 864a1) of the first member (speaker 860) and the second hole (second through-hole 872a2) of the second member (rear cover 870) in one step, which simplifies the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods and also enables the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to be stably fastened together.

The second member (rear cover 870) facing in the first direction (to the right) is attached to the base (the mounting sleeve 882 of the left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through a third hole (third through-hole 873a3) in the second member (rear cover 870).

The first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) facing in a first direction (to the right) are attached vertically along the base (front door 102), and the first hole (first through-hole 864a1) of the first member (speaker 860) and the second hole (second through-hole 872a2) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned below an imaginary line VL6 (see Figure 27) passing through the center of the first member (speaker 860) or second member (rear cover 870) in the vertical direction of the base (front door 102).

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be fixed vertically downward to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102), allowing the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to be stably fixed.

Also, as shown in Figures 27 and 28(b), the second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (right-facing) is attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) by a fastening means (screw 890) that passes through the third hole (third through-hole 873a3) of the second member (rear cover 870), and the first member (speaker 860) in the first orientation (right-facing) is attached to the eighth through-hole 885a8 (eighth hole) of the third member (metal plate 885) by a fastening means (screw 890) that passes through the seventh hole (seventh through-hole 864a7) of the first member (speaker 860). As a result, the first member (speaker 860) in the first orientation (right-facing) is grounded.

When the right-facing speaker 860 and rear cover 870 are attached to the left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102, most of the speaker 860 is housed within the inner space of the rear cover 870, and the flange 864 of the speaker 860 and the inner wall of the side wall portion 872 of the rear cover 872 (at least part of the speaker 860 and rear cover 870) are configured to abut (or be close to) each other.

In this example, when the second member (rear cover 870) is attached to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of front door 102), at least a portion of the second member (rear cover 870) abuts (or is close to) the first member (speaker 860) and is fixed so as to cover at least a portion of the first member (speaker 860), thereby enabling the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to be stably fixed together.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) in the second orientation (left) are attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through the fourth hole (fourth through-hole 864a4) of the first member (speaker 860) and the fifth hole (fifth through-hole 872a5) of the second member (rear cover 870).

The second member (rear cover 870) facing the second direction (left) is attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through a sixth hole (sixth through-hole 873a6) in the second member (rear cover 870).

The first member (speaker 860) and second member (rear cover 870) facing in the second direction (left) are attached vertically along the base (front door 102), and the fourth hole (fourth through-hole 864a4) of the first member (speaker 860) and the fifth hole (fifth through-hole 872a5) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned below the imaginary line VL6 (see Figure 27) passing through the center of the first member (speaker 860) or second member (rear cover 870) in the vertical direction of the base (front door 102).

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be fixed vertically downward to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102), allowing the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to be stably fixed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 27 , the second member (rear cover 870) facing the second direction (left) is attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) by a fastening means (screw 890) that passes through the sixth hole (sixth through-hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870), and the first member (speaker 860) facing the second direction (left) is attached to the tenth through-hole 885a10 (tenth hole) of the third member (metal plate 885) by a fastening means (screw 890) that passes through the ninth hole (ninth through-hole 864a9) of the first member (speaker 860). This allows the first member (speaker 860) facing the second direction (left) to be grounded.

When the left-facing speaker 860 and rear cover 870 are attached to the right speaker base 880R of the front door 102, most of the speaker 860 is housed within the inner space of the rear cover 870, and the flange 864 of the speaker 860 and the inner wall of the side wall 872 of the rear cover 872 (at least part of the speaker 860 and rear cover 870) are configured to abut (or be close to) each other.

In this example, when the second member (rear cover 870) is attached to the base (right speaker base 880R of front door 102), at least a portion of the second member (rear cover 870) abuts (or is close to) the first member (speaker 860) and is fixed so as to cover at least a portion of the first member (speaker 860), thereby enabling the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to be stably fixed together.

In this example, both the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 are fixed to the front door 102 with screws, but the speaker 860 may be housed in the inner space of the rear cover 870 without being fixed to the front door 102 (without using the through-holes of the speaker 860), and the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 may be attached to the front door 102 using all (or some) of the through-holes of the rear cover 870.

In this example, there is no need to fix the speaker 860 to the front door 102, which simplifies the installation process for the speaker unit 850. In addition, by using all of the through-holes in the rear cover 870, the speaker unit 850 can be more firmly attached to the front door 102.

<Speaker Mounting Structure (Variation 3)/Variation of Metal Plate>
Next, a metal plate 915 according to a modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a rear view of the front door 102 after the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 have been attached to the front door 102 with screws, as seen from the rear of the front door 102.

In this example, a metal plate 915 (third member) smaller than the metal plate 885 described using Figures 25 to 28 is erected between the left speaker base portion 880L and the right speaker base portion 880R on the back surface of the front door 102.

For this reason, in this example, the rear cover 870 (second member) in the first orientation (rightward) is attached to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through the third hole (third through-hole 873a3) of the second member (rear cover 870), and is also attached to the third member (metal plate 915) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through the sixth hole (sixth through-hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870).

Furthermore, the rear cover 870 (second member) in the second orientation (leftward) is attached to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through a sixth hole (sixth through-hole 873a6) in the second member (rear cover 870), and is also attached to the third member (metal plate 915) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through a third hole (third through-hole 873a3) in the second member (rear cover 870).

In other words, the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 29, or when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the third member (metal plate 915) in the second orientation (leftward).

Furthermore, the sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the third member (metal plate 915) in the first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 29, and is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the third through hole 873a3 (third hole) and the sixth through hole 873a6 (sixth hole) are holes that are always used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885).

In this example, the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) and the sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) of the rear cover 870 can be effectively utilized, increasing the variety of installation procedures for the speaker unit 850 and accommodating third members (metal plates 915) of various sizes and shapes, thereby increasing convenience.

The "third member" according to the present invention is not limited to the metal plate 885 described using Figures 25 to 28 or the metal plate 915 described using Figure 29, but may be a member formed integrally with the front door 102, or a member separate from the front door 102. Also, although the left and right speaker base portions 880L and 880R are shaped symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line passing vertically (up and down) between them, the shape does not have to be symmetrical.

In addition, an example has been shown in which metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915) is disposed on the rear side of front door 102, speaker 860 is disposed on the rear side of this metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915), and the through-hole of speaker 860 is positioned above the through-hole of metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, speaker 860 may be disposed on the rear side of front door 102, metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915) is disposed on the rear side of this speaker 860, and the through-hole of metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915) may be positioned above the through-hole of speaker 860.

Furthermore, the "third component" according to the present invention does not have to function as a frame ground; it may be a component directly connected to the earth, or a component indirectly connected to the earth by contacting another component connected to the earth.

Also, the "third member" of the present invention may not be present, in which case the "third member" may be read as the "base." For example, the hole used when attaching the "third member" may be used as the hole used when attaching the "base" (e.g., the left speaker base 880L or right speaker base 880R of the front door 102), or the speaker 860 may be directly connected to earth.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, and a second member (for example, the back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, wherein the first member has a first hole (for example, the first through-hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) through which a fixing means (for example, the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) can pass, the second member has a third hole (for example, the third through-hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28) through which the fixing means can pass, the fixing means passing through the third hole does not pass through the first hole, and the second member is fixed by the fixing means passing through the third hole and abuts against (or is close to) at least a portion of the first member to fix the first member.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when attached to the base, the second member is fixed so that at least a portion of it abuts (or is close to) the first member and covers at least a portion of the first member, thereby enabling the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

The second member may also have a second hole (e.g., second through hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28) through which the fixing means can pass, and the base may have a first mounting portion (e.g., one of the multiple mounting sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, or the metal plate shown in FIG. 28) and a second mounting portion (e.g., one of the multiple mounting sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, or the metal plate shown in FIG. 28), and may be attached to the first mounting portion by fixing means that passes through the first hole in the first member and the second hole in the second member, and may be attached to the second mounting portion by fixing means that passes through the third hole in the second member.

This configuration makes it possible to fasten the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member in one step, simplifying the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods and enabling the two first and second members to be stably fastened together.

Furthermore, the first member and the second member may be configured to be attached vertically along the base, and the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be positioned below an imaginary line (e.g., imaginary line VL6 shown in Figure 28) passing through the center of the first member or the second member in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, the first and second members can be fixed to the base vertically downward, allowing the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

The first member may also have a fourth hole (for example, the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), which may not be used when attaching the first member to the base.

This configuration simplifies the installation process for the first member and improves work efficiency.

The second member also has a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), and the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member are arranged at positions that are line-symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the first member (e.g., the virtual line VL3 shown in FIG. 25(d)), and the second hole and the fifth hole of the second member are arranged at positions that are line-symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the second member (e.g., the virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)). The first member and the second member are arranged at positions that are line-symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the second member (e.g., the virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)). The first member and the second member are arranged at positions that are line-symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the second member (e.g., the virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)). The speaker 860 can be attached to the base in either of the first and second orientations (the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces left in rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is pulled out from the left side), and the second orientation is an orientation in which the first member and the second member are rotated 180 degrees circumferentially with respect to the first orientation. The first member and the second member in the first orientation may be attached to the base by fastening means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member, and the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the base by fastening means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member.

This configuration allows the first and second members to be attached to the base in at least two different orientations, increasing the degree of freedom in attaching the first and second members and allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The second member may also have a sixth hole (e.g., sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), the third hole and the sixth hole of the second member may be arranged at positions that are symmetrical with respect to an imaginary line passing through the center of the second member (e.g., imaginary line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)), and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the sixth hole of the second member.

This configuration allows for greater flexibility in attaching the first and second members, allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first member (for example, the speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, and a second member (for example, the back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, and the second member is a member that covers at least a portion of the first member when attached to the base, and the base is provided with a first attachment portion (for example, one of the multiple attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, 28 ) and a second mounting portion (for example, one of the plurality of mounting sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24 , the metal plate shown in FIG. 28 ), the first member has a first hole (for example, a first through hole 864 a 1 shown in FIG. 28 ) through which a fixing means (for example, a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28 ) can pass, the second member has a second hole (for example, a second through hole 872 a 2 shown in FIG. 28 ) and a third hole (for example, a third through hole 872 a 3 shown in FIG. 28 ) through which the fixing means can pass, and the fixing means that passes through the third hole is The first member is attached to the first mounting portion by a fastening means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member without penetrating the first hole, and the second member is fixed to the second mounting portion by the fastening means that passes through the third hole, and abuts (or is close to) at least a part of the first member to fix the first member, and the first member is in a first orientation (e.g., a box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 or a spindle 872S of the rear cover 870). The gaming machine can be attached to the base in either a first orientation (where the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces to the right when viewed from behind, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn out from the right side) or a second orientation (where, for example, the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 or the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces to the left when viewed from behind, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn out from the left side), and the second orientation is an orientation in which the first member is rotated 180 degrees circumferentially relative to the first orientation.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first member can be attached to the base in at least two different orientations, allowing for greater flexibility in attaching the first member and enabling it to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first member may have a fourth hole (e.g., fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), the second member may have a fifth hole (e.g., fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member being holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base in the first orientation, the first member and the second member in the second orientation being attached to the base by fastening means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, and the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member being holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the first mounting portion in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first and second members to the base, which can simplify the installation process for the first and second members and potentially improve work efficiency.

Furthermore, the first member and the second member may be configured to be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be positioned lower in the vertical direction than the third hole of the second member, and the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member may be positioned in line symmetry with respect to an imaginary line passing through the center of the first member (for example, imaginary line VL3 shown in Figure 25(d)).

With this configuration, the first and second members can be fixed to the base vertically downward, allowing the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

The second member may also have a sixth hole (e.g., sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), which is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the second mounting portion by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the sixth hole of the second member, and the third hole may also be a hole that is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the second member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the second member and potentially improve work efficiency.

Furthermore, the third hole and the sixth hole of the second member may be arranged at positions that are symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the second member (for example, virtual line VL5 shown in Figure 25(b)).

This configuration allows for greater flexibility in attaching the second component, allowing it to be installed in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the base may have a first region (e.g., the left speaker base portion 880L shown in FIG. 28) and a second region (e.g., the right speaker base portion 880R shown in FIG. 28) as regions to which the first member and the second member can be attached, and the first member and the second member in the first orientation may be attachable to the first region but not attachable to the second region, and the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attachable to the second region but not attachable to the first region.

This configuration allows for greater flexibility in attaching the first and second components, allowing them to be installed in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine, while also preventing installation errors.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first member (e.g., the speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, and a second member (e.g., the back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, wherein the second member is a member that covers at least a portion of the first member when attached to the base, the base has a first attachment portion (e.g., one of the multiple attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, the metal plate shown in FIG. 28) and a second attachment portion (e.g., one of the multiple attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, the metal plate shown in FIG. 28), the first member has a first hole (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) through which a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) can pass, and the second member has a first through hole (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) through which the fixing means can pass. the fixing means passing through the third hole does not pass through the first hole; the first member is attached to the first mounting portion by fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) passing through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member; the second member is fixed to the second mounting portion by fixing means passing through the third hole, abutting (or adjacent to) at least a portion of the first member to fix the first member; the second member can be attached to the base in either a first orientation or a second orientation, and the second orientation is an orientation in which the second member is rotated 180 degrees circumferentially relative to the first orientation.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second member can be attached to the base in at least two different orientations, allowing for greater flexibility in attaching the second member and enabling it to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The second member may also have a sixth hole (e.g., sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), which is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the sixth hole of the second member, and the third hole may also be a hole that is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the second member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the second member and potentially improve work efficiency.

Furthermore, the third hole and the sixth hole of the second member may be arranged at positions that are symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the second member (for example, virtual line VL5 shown in Figure 25(b)).

This configuration allows for greater flexibility in attaching the second component, allowing it to be installed in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first member may have a fourth hole (e.g., fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), the second member may have a fifth hole (e.g., fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member being holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base in the first orientation, the first member and the second member in the second orientation being attached to the base by fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, and the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member being holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first and second members to the base, which can simplify the installation process for the first and second members and potentially improve work efficiency.

Furthermore, the first member and the second member may be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be positioned lower than the third hole of the second member in the vertical direction, and the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member may be positioned symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line passing through the center of the first member (for example, imaginary line VL3 shown in Figure 25(d)).

With this configuration, the first and second members can be fixed to the base vertically downward, allowing the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

Furthermore, the base may have a first region (e.g., the left speaker base portion 880L shown in FIG. 28) and a second region (e.g., the right speaker base portion 880R shown in FIG. 28) as regions to which the first member and the second member can be attached, and the first member and the second member in the first orientation may be attachable to the first region but not attachable to the second region, and the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attachable to the second region but not attachable to the first region.

This configuration allows for greater flexibility in attaching the first and second components, allowing them to be installed in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine, while also preventing installation errors.

Furthermore, a gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, a speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, a second member (for example, a back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, and a third member (for example, a metal plate 885 shown in FIG. 28) that is provided on the base, wherein the second member is a member that covers at least a part of the first member when attached to the base, the base includes a first attachment portion (for example, any one of the plurality of attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, the metal plate shown in FIG. 28) and a second attachment portion (for example, any one of the plurality of attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, the metal plate shown in FIG. 28), and the first member includes a first hole (for example, a first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) and a seventh hole (for example, a seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28). The second member has a second hole (for example, a second through-hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28) and a third hole (for example, a third through-hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28), the third member has an eighth hole (for example, an eighth through-hole 885a8 shown in FIG. 24(a) or FIG. 26), and the first member is fixed to the first mounting portion by a fixing means (for example, a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member. the first member is attached to the first mounting portion by a fastening means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28 ) passing through the seventh hole of the first member and the eighth hole of the third member, and the second member is fixed to the second mounting portion by a fastening means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28 ) passing through the third hole, and abuts (or is adjacent to) at least a portion of the first member to fasten the first member;
This is a gaming machine characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when attached to the base, the second member is fixed so that at least a portion of it abuts (or is close to) the first member and covers at least a portion of the first member, thereby stably fixing the two first and second members. Furthermore, the first member is attached to the base by fixing means that penetrates the seventh hole in the first member and the eighth hole in the third member, allowing the two first and second members to be fixed to the base more firmly.

Furthermore, the first member and the second member may be configured to be attached vertically along the base, and the third member may be a member integrally formed with the base. When the first member and the second member are attached to the base, the first hole and the seventh hole of the first member, the second hole of the second member, and the eighth hole of the third member may be positioned lower in the vertical direction than the third hole of the second member.

With this configuration, the first and second members can be fixed to the base vertically downward, allowing the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

The first member may also have a fourth hole (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28) and a ninth hole (e.g., the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28), and the first member and the second member may be attachable to the base in either a first orientation or a second orientation, and the fourth hole and the ninth hole may be holes that may not be used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first and second members to the base, which can simplify the installation process for the first and second members and potentially improve work efficiency.

The second member has a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), the third member has a tenth hole (e.g., the tenth through hole 885a10 shown in FIG. 24(a) and FIG. 26), the second orientation is an orientation in which the first member and the second member are rotated 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the first orientation, the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member are arranged in positions that are line-symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the first member (e.g., the virtual line VL3 shown in FIG. 25(d)), and the second hole and the fifth hole of the second member are arranged in positions that are line-symmetrical with respect to the center of the second member. The first and second members in the second orientation may be attached to the first mounting portion by fastening means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, and the first and second members in the second orientation may be attached to the first mounting portion by fastening means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the ninth hole of the first member and the tenth hole of the third member.

This configuration allows the first and second members to be attached to the base in at least two different orientations, increasing the degree of freedom in attaching the first and second members and allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first member (e.g., the speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, and a second member (e.g., the rear cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, and the base has a first region (e.g., the left speaker base portion 880L shown in FIG. 28) and a second region (e.g., the right speaker base portion 880R shown in FIG. 28) as regions where the first member and the second member can be attached, and the first member and the second member are oriented in a first direction (e.g., the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 face rightward in a rear view). The gaming machine is capable of being attached to the base in either a first orientation (for example, a direction in which the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 face left in a rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is pulled out from the right side) or a second orientation (for example, a direction in which the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 face left in a rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is pulled out from the left side), the second orientation being an orientation in which the first member and the second member are rotated 180 degrees circumferentially with respect to the first orientation, and the first member and the second member can be attached to the first area in the first orientation, and the first member and the second member can be attached to the second area in the second orientation.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first and second members can be attached to the base in at least two different orientations, allowing for greater flexibility in attaching the first and second members and allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first member may have a plurality of holes (e.g., the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28), and some of the plurality of holes in the first member (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 and the seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation, and some of the plurality of holes in the first member excluding these holes (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes not used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation, and some of the plurality of holes in the first member (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the second orientation.

In other words, the first member has a plurality of holes (e.g., the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28), some of the plurality of holes of the first member (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 and the seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation, and the remaining holes of the plurality of holes of the first member excluding the some of the holes (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation. Some of the plurality of holes in the first member (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) are holes that are not used when attaching the first member to the base in the second orientation, and some of the plurality of holes in the first member excluding these holes (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 and the seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28) may not be holes that are used when attaching the first member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the first member and potentially improve work efficiency.

The second member may also have a plurality of holes (e.g., the second through hole 872a2, the third through hole 873a3, the fifth through hole 872a5, and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), and some of the plurality of holes in the second member (e.g., the second through hole 872a2 and the third through hole 873a3 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and some of the plurality of holes in the second member excluding these holes (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes not used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and some of the plurality of holes in the second member (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the second orientation.

In other words, the second member has a plurality of holes (e.g., the second through hole 872a2, the third through hole 873a3, the fifth through hole 872a5, and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), some of the plurality of holes in the second member (e.g., the second through hole 872a2 and the third through hole 873a3 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and some of the plurality of holes in the second member excluding the some of the holes (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation. Some of the plurality of holes in the second member (for example, the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) are holes that are not used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and some of the holes in the second member other than these holes (for example, the second through hole 872a2 and the third through hole 873a3 shown in FIG. 28) may not be used when attaching the second member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the second member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the second member and potentially improve work efficiency.

Furthermore, some of the plurality of holes in the first member (for example, the seventh through hole 864a7 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching only the first member to the base, and the remaining holes of the plurality of holes in the first member excluding the aforementioned some of the holes (for example, the first through hole 864a1 and the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching both the first member and the second member to the base.

This configuration makes it possible to fasten both the first and second members at the same time using some of the holes, simplifying the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods and enabling the two first and second members to be stably fastened together.

The first member has a first hole (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28), the second member has a second hole (e.g., the second through hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28) and a third hole (e.g., the third through hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28), the first member is attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member, and the second member is attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the third hole of the second member. The first member and the second member may be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the first hole in the first member and the second hole in the second member may be positioned below the third hole in the second member in the vertical direction, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the second orientation, the first hole in the first member and the second hole in the second member may be positioned above the third hole in the second member in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, the first and second members can be fixed to the base vertically downward, allowing the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

Furthermore, the first member has a fourth hole (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), the second member has a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28) and a sixth hole (e.g., the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), the first member is attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, and the second member is attached to the base by a fixing means that passes through the sixth hole of the second member, and the first member and The second member may be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member may be positioned above the sixth hole of the second member in the vertical direction; and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the second orientation, the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member may be positioned below the sixth hole of the second member in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, the first and second members can be fixed to the base vertically downward, allowing the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

Note that the "hole" according to the present invention is not limited to a through-hole, but may also be a notch or the like. In other words, it may be any part that can be fixed (e.g., fastened) by a fixing means (e.g., a screw), and its shape is not limited to a circular or elliptical shape.

<Power relay board unit and reel relay board unit>
Next, the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figure 30(a) is a plan view showing the reel relay board unit 700 attached to the power relay board unit 600, Figure 30(b) is a side view showing the reel relay board unit 700 attached to the power relay board unit 600, and Figure 30(c) is a side view showing the reel relay board unit 700 removed from the power relay board unit 600.

As explained using Figure 2, the power relay board unit 600 is fixed with screws to the back panel 242 of the main body 101 above the three reels 110-112. Details will be described later, but the power relay board unit 600 is equipped with a main-side power relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector), which is a male connector, and a sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector), which is also a male connector.

On the other hand, the reel relay board unit 700 is equipped with a female main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (second connector) having a complementary shape to the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector), and a female sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (second connector) having a complementary shape to the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector).

The main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the reel relay board unit 700 can be directly attached and detached to the main-side power relay board first connector MVC1 of the power relay board unit 600, and the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 of the reel relay board unit 700 can be directly attached and detached to the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 of the power relay board unit 600.

As explained using Figure 2, in this example, by attaching the reel relay board unit 700 to a predetermined position inside the main body 101 (for example, by attaching the right end of the sheet metal member 710 of the reel relay board unit 700 to the mounting portion 101a of the main body 101), the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 of the reel relay board unit 700 are configured to be connected to the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 and sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 of the power supply relay board unit 600.

In this example, the connector of the reel relay board unit 700 is manually connected to the connector of the power relay board unit 600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 may be fixed to a first member (e.g., the main body 101), and the other of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 may be fixed to a second member (e.g., the front door 102). When the second member (front door 102) is opened from the first member (main body 101), the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are disconnected, and when the second member (front door 102) is closed from the first member (main body 101), the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are connected.

Furthermore, gaming machines are not limited to slot machines. For example, in a pachinko machine equipped with a gaming frame and an inner frame, a power relay board unit may be fixed to one of the gaming frame and the inner frame, and the connector of the reel relay board unit may be manually connected to this power relay board unit connector. Alternatively, a power relay board unit may be fixed to one of the gaming frame and the inner frame, and a reel relay board unit may be fixed to the other of the gaming frame and the inner frame, so that when the gaming frame is attached to the inner frame, the connector of the reel relay board unit is automatically connected to the connector of the power relay board unit.

Furthermore, the power supply relay board unit 600 may be equipped with only one of the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector) and the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector), and the reel relay board unit 700 may be equipped with only a connector having a shape complementary to one of the connectors equipped in the power supply relay board unit 600. In other words, the number of "connectors" according to the present invention and the "boards" on which the "connectors" are arranged are not limited to two.

<Power relay board unit>
Next, the power supply relay board unit 600 will be described in detail.

Figure 31(a) is a front view of the power supply relay board unit 600, and Figure 31(b) is a rear view of the power supply relay board unit 600. Also, Figure 32 is an exploded view of the components that make up the power supply relay board unit 600 as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded view of the components that make up the power supply relay board unit 600 as seen from the rear.

The power supply relay board unit 600 is composed of a plate-shaped board support 610 (mounting portion), a main-side power supply relay board 640 housed in the area on the right side of the board support 610 when viewed from the front, and a sub-side power supply relay board 670 housed in the area on the left side of the board support 610 when viewed from the front.

<Power relay board unit/board support>
Next, the substrate support 610 will be described.

The board support 610 is a horizontally elongated rectangular plate-like member made of translucent resin, and is composed of a main-side board accommodating section 612 consisting of a rectangular area located on the right side when viewed from the front, a sub-side board accommodating section 614 consisting of a rectangular area located on the left side when viewed from the front, a connecting section 615 connecting the main-side board accommodating section 612 and the sub-side board accommodating section 614, a main-side cable support section 616 arranged below the main-side board accommodating section 612, and a sub-side cable support section 618 arranged below the sub-side board accommodating section 616.

Note that the sub-side board accommodating section 614 has a shape that is nearly linearly symmetrical to the main-side board accommodating section 612, with respect to an imaginary center line that passes vertically through the center of the connecting section 615. Therefore, its description will be omitted below, and only the main-side board accommodating section 612 will be described. Furthermore, the sub-side cable support section 618 has nearly the same shape as the main-side cable support section 616, so its description will be omitted.

<Power relay board unit/board support/main board housing section>
Next, the main-side substrate accommodating portion 612 of the substrate support body 610 will be described with further reference to Figure 34. Figure 34 is a partially enlarged view showing the main-side substrate accommodating portion 612 of the substrate support body 610 in an enlarged manner.

The main-side board accommodation section 612 is composed of a rectangular plate-shaped bottom surface 620, outer walls 622 extending along the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom surface 620, three board loose-fit bosses 624 extending from the upper left corner, the center left side, and the lower right corner of the bottom surface 620 when viewed from the front, five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) extending inward from the board loose-fit bosses 624 on the bottom surface 620, restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) that restrict movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640 in the thickness direction, and pressing portions 630 (630a-630d) that press the main-side power supply relay board 640 in a predetermined direction while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount.

<Power relay board unit/board support/bottom, outer wall>
The lengths of the bottom surface 620 in the longitudinal and lateral directions are designed to be longer than the lengths of the main side power supply relay board 640 in the longitudinal and lateral directions, respectively, and the main side power supply relay board 640 is configured to be movable (slidable) left and right in the longitudinal direction and up and down in the lateral direction within the space (board accommodating space) formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622 (details will be described later).

<Power relay board unit/board support/board loose-fit boss>
The board loose-fit boss 624 is a part that is loosely fitted (fitted with some play) into a through hole 642c (see Figures 32, 35, etc.; details will be described later) formed in the main side power supply relay board 640, and in this example is made up of a cylindrical member with a screw hole 624a (see Figures 34, 36(b), etc.) formed in the center.

The board loose-fit boss 624 has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640, and the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640 has a predetermined amount of "play" with respect to the board loose-fit boss 624.

With this configuration, even when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space (the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and outer wall 622) of the main board accommodation section 612 and loosely fitted into the board loose-fit boss 624, it is able to move (slide) left and right in the longitudinal direction and up and down in the lateral direction by the amount of play (gap) formed between the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the board loose-fit boss 624.

As shown in Figure 36(b), a mounting screw 646 having a head (flange) 646a can be attached to the screw hole 624a of the board loose-fit boss 624. The outer diameter of the head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646 is larger than the inner diameter of the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640.

In other words, in this example, the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is provided with a restriction section (board loose-fit boss 624 + mounting screw 646) that restricts at least a portion of the second board from moving out of the accommodation space of the mounting section (main board accommodation section 612), thereby preventing the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) from coming off the mounting section (main board accommodation section 612).

The number and location of the board loose-fit bosses 624 are not limited to this example and may be, for example, one, two, or four or more, and may be erected in locations other than those shown in the example, such as the lower left corner or upper right corner of the bottom surface 620.

<Power relay board unit/board support/board support boss>
The board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) is a member that comes into contact with the back surface of the main side power supply relay board 640 and supports the main side power supply relay board 640 from below, and in this example is composed of a cylindrical member with a through hole formed in the center.

When the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the back surface of the main-side power supply relay board 640 is supported by five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and multiple outer wall bosses 622a (see Figure 32 (b)) formed at predetermined intervals along the outer wall 622. When the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the main-side power supply relay board 640 is configured to slide (move slidably) on the board support bosses 626 and outer wall bosses 622a.

In this example, the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) has second protrusions (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a) that protrude from the bottom surface of the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), and the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is configured to be able to move while in contact with the second protrusions (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a). This reduces the contact area between the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), reducing friction when the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) moves and allowing the second board to move more smoothly.

Furthermore, because the board support boss 626 is a cylindrical member with a through hole formed in the center, the contact area between the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the main-side board accommodating portion 612 of the board support body 610 can be further reduced, allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move smoothly relative to the board support body 610.

In other words, because the second protrusion (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b)) has a portion that does not come into contact with the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640), the contact area between the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) can be reduced, allowing the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) to move smoothly relative to the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612).

In addition, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can hold the main power supply relay board 640 at a position higher than the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating section 612, and a space can be formed between the back surface 642b of the main side power supply relay board 640 and the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating section 612. This prevents components such as connector screws 644 (see Figure 33, etc.; details will be described later) attached to the back surface 642a of the main side power supply relay board 640 from interfering with the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating section 612.

In other words, a portion of the fixing means (connector screw 644) is configured to be able to be accommodated in the space formed between one surface (back surface 642b) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and the bottom surface (bottom surface 620) of the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612). Therefore, even when the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), contact between the fixing means (connector screw 644) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) can be avoided.

The board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can be divided into four first board support bosses 626a arranged at approximately equal intervals on the left side of the bottom surface 620 of the main board accommodating section 612 when viewed from above, and one second board support boss 626b arranged on the right side of the bottom surface 620 of the main board accommodating section 612 when viewed from above.

As shown in the rear view of Figure 31(b), the second board support boss 626b is positioned so that it can come into contact with the connector screw 644 of the main-side power supply relay board 640, and also functions as a member that restricts movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640.

As a result, when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right as viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the connector screw 644 of the main-side power supply relay board 640 comes into contact with the second board support boss 626b, thereby restricting (preventing) the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving further to the right.

In other words, the fixing means (connector screw 644) is configured to be able to come into contact with the second protrusion (board support boss 626b) when the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) moves relative to the mounting portion (main-side board accommodation portion 612). Therefore, even if a greater-than-expected force is applied to the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) due to, for example, forceful positioning of the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700, causing the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) to move significantly relative to the mounting portion (main-side board accommodation portion 612), the fixing means (connector screw 644) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) will come into contact with the second protrusion (board support boss 626b), restricting movement of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640), thereby protecting the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

The number and positions of the substrate support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) are not limited to those shown in this example; for example, there may be one to four, or six or more, and they may be erected in a location other than the illustrated location, such as the center of the bottom surface 620.

<Power relay board unit/board support/regulating piece>
The restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) are parts that restrict (prevent) the main side power supply relay board 640 from moving outside the board accommodation space (from coming out of the board accommodation space) when the main side power supply relay board 640 is moved within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612.

In this example, a first restricting piece 628a is formed at a position slightly to the right of the center of the upper outer wall 622 in a plan view, protruding inward from the bottom surface 620 with the outer wall 622 as its base end (protruding along the short direction of the main-side power supply relay board 640 (up and down direction when viewed from the front)). A second restricting piece 628b is formed at the lower end of the left outer wall 622 in a plan view, protruding inward from the bottom surface 620 with the outer wall 622 as its base end (protruding along the long direction of the main-side power supply relay board 640 (left and right direction when viewed from the front)).

When the main power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 is attached so that it is sandwiched below the restriction pieces 628 (628a, 628b) (details will be described later).

The protrusion amount of the first restricting piece 628a (the length of the protruding portion with the outer wall 622 as its base end) is designed to be longer than the maximum vertical movement amount (maximum vertical movement distance) of the main-side power supply relay board 640 within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved vertically within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the first restricting piece 628a can restrict (prevent) the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving outside the board accommodation space (from leaving the board accommodation space).

In addition, the protrusion amount of the second restricting piece 628b (the length of the protruding portion with the outer wall 622 as its base end) is designed to be longer than the maximum left-right movement amount (maximum distance that the main-side power supply relay board 640 can move left-right) within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved left-right within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the second restricting piece 628b can restrict (prevent) the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving outside the board accommodation space (from leaving the board accommodation space).

In this example, the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is provided with a restricting portion (restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b)) that restricts at least a portion of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) from moving out of the accommodation space of the mounting portion (main board accommodation portion 612), thereby preventing the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) from coming off the mounting portion (main board accommodation portion 612).

In addition, the restricting portion (restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b)) is a restricting piece that protrudes toward the storage space, and the protruding length of the restricting piece is longer than the distance that the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can move within the storage space. Therefore, no matter what position the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) from coming off the mounting portion.

<Power relay board unit/board support/pressure section>
The pressing portions 630 (630a to 630d) are portions that form part of the outer wall 620, and are elastically deformable portions (elastic portions) that press (force) the main side power supply relay board 640 in a predetermined direction while allowing the main side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount.

In this example, the pressing portion 630 (630a-630d) is configured as a cantilever beam with one end fixed to the outer wall 622 and the other end free, and is a tongue-shaped piece that is longer in the longitudinal direction than the first restricting piece 628a and the second restricting piece 628b.

In this example, the longitudinal length of the restricting pieces (restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b)) is shorter than the longitudinal length of the elastic portions (pressing portions 630 (630a-630d)). This prevents the restricting pieces (restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b)) from being too long, while the elastic portions (pressing portions 630 (630a-630d)) have an appropriate length, making it easier to accommodate the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) in the accommodation space. After accommodation, the restricting pieces (restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b)) and the elastic portions (pressing portions 630 (630a-630d)) can securely hold the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) in the accommodation space.

In this example, a first pressing portion 630a and a second pressing portion 630b are formed near the right and left ends of the lower outer wall 622 in a plan view, respectively. One end is fixed to the outer wall 622 and the other end is a free end. A third pressing portion 630c and a fourth pressing portion 630d are formed in the center of the right and left outer walls 622 in a plan view, respectively. One end is fixed to the outer wall 622 and the other end is a free end.

In this example, the elastic portion (pressing portion 630 (630a-630d)) constitutes part of the outer wall (outer wall 622) that forms the accommodation space. Therefore, even if a greater-than-expected force is applied to the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) due to, for example, forceful positioning of the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700, causing the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) to move significantly relative to the mounting portion (main board accommodation portion 612), part of the accommodation space will elastically deform, thereby mitigating the impact on the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

The first pressing portion 630a and the second pressing portion 630b are capable of swinging (elastically deforming) in the vertical direction when viewed from above. Therefore, even when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved in the vertical direction when viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the first pressing portion 630a and the second pressing portion 630b press (urge) the main-side power supply relay board 640 in the upward direction when viewed from the front, while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount in the downward direction when viewed from the front.

The third pressing portion 630c is a portion that can swing (elastically deform) left and right when viewed from above. Therefore, even when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the left when viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the third pressing portion 630c can press (bias) the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the right when viewed from the front, while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount to the left when viewed from the front.

The fourth pressing portion 630d is a portion that can swing (elastically deform) left and right when viewed from above. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right when viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the fourth pressing portion 630d can press (bias) the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the left when viewed from the front, while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount to the right when viewed from the front.

<Power supply relay board unit/main side power supply relay board>
Next, the main-side power supply relay board 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

The main power supply relay board 640 is composed of a base material 642 made of a rectangular plate, and a main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector), a main power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and a main power supply relay board third connector MVC3 arranged on one surface 642a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front surface" or "component surface") of this base material 642.

The main-side power supply relay board 640 is electrically connected to the connectors on the power supply board of the power supply unit 252 described using Figure 2 via the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and serves as a relay between the main control board 210a and the power supply board.

Three through-holes 642c are formed in the upper left corner, center left corner, and lower right corner of the base material 642 when viewed from the front, at positions corresponding to the three board loose-fit bosses 624 erected on the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board housing section 612.

The surface 642a of the substrate 642 is provided with the main power relay board first connector MVC1 to main power relay board third connector MVC3, as well as a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc. In this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 641 is formed around the through-hole 642c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 33, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface 642b of the substrate 642 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), and two connector screws 644 are attached to secure the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 from the back surface 642b side.

In this example, the second connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) is fixed to one surface (back surface 642b) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) using fixing means (connector screws 644). This makes it difficult for the second connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) to come off the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640), even when the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the second connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1), the fixing means (connector screws 644) can withstand the force applied from the first connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the second connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1), ensuring a reliable connection between the connectors.

In addition, multiple circular solid ground patterns 643 are formed on the back surface 642b of the base material 642 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) formed on the main-side board housing section 612.

The area of each ground pattern 643 is wider than the area where the back surface 642b of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can come into contact.

In this example, the area of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and preventing damage to wiring patterns other than the ground pattern of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

In particular, the second protrusion (board support boss 626 (626a, 626b)) is a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern 643 is circular, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

<Power relay board unit/Sub-side power relay board>
Next, the sub-side power supply relay board 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG.

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is composed of a base material 672 made of a rectangular plate, and a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector), a sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, a sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, and a sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 arranged on one side 672a of the base material 672 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front surface" or "component surface").

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is electrically connected to the connectors on the power supply board of the power supply unit 252 described using Figure 2 via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and serves as a relay between the sub-control board 220a and the power supply board.

Three through-holes 672c are formed in the upper right corner, the center right corner, and the lower left corner of the base material 672, at positions corresponding to the three board loose-fit bosses 674 (see Figure 32) erected on the bottom surface 620 of the sub-side board accommodating section 614.

The surface 672a of the substrate 672 is provided with the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, as well as a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc. In this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 671 is formed around the through-hole 672c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 33, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface 672b of the base material 672 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), and two screws 674 are attached to secure the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 from the back surface 672b side.

In addition, multiple circular solid ground patterns 673 are formed on the back surface 672b of the base material 672 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) formed on the sub-side board accommodating section 614.

The area of each ground pattern 673 is wider than the area where the back surface 672b of the sub-side power relay board 670 can come into contact with the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b).

In this example, the area of the second board (sub-side power supply relay board 670) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (sub-side power supply relay board 670) and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc., of the second board (sub-side power supply relay board 670).

In particular, the second protrusion (board support boss 676 (676a, 676b)) is a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern 673 is circular, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (sub-side power relay board 670).

<Main-side board housing section (modified example)>
Next, a modified example of the main-side board accommodating section 612 described using Fig. 34 etc. will be described using Fig. 34-2. Fig. 34-2(a) is a front view of a main-side board accommodating section 631 according to the modified example, Fig. 34-2(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z-Z in Fig. 34-2(a), and Fig. 34-2(c) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Fig. 34-2(b) showing a state in which a main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodating section 631.

The main-side board accommodating section 631 of this modified example differs in that it has four board support portions 633 instead of the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) that are provided in the main-side board accommodating section 612 described using Figure 34 etc.

To avoid redundant explanation, components identical or similar to those in the main-side board housing section 612 are given the same reference numerals in the figures and their description will be omitted. Also, while the main-side board housing section that houses the main-side power supply relay board 640 will be described here, the same or similar components can also be used for the sub-side board housing section that houses the sub-side power supply relay board 670.

The maximum length in both the longitudinal and lateral directions of the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board accommodating section 631 is designed to be longer than the maximum length in both the longitudinal and lateral directions of the main-side power relay board 640 that can be accommodated in the main-side board accommodating section 631.

As a result, the main-side power supply relay board 640 can move (slide) in the in-plane direction of the main-side power supply relay board 640 (directions perpendicular to the thickness direction of the main-side power supply relay board 640; the X direction shown in Figures 34-2(a) and (c) and the Y direction shown in Figure 34-2(a)) within the rectangular tray-shaped space (board accommodation space) formed by the bottom surface 620 and the four outer walls 622 of the main-side board accommodation section 631.

<Main-side board accommodation section (modified example)/board support section>
34-2(c), when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main-side board accommodation section 631, the board support section 633 is a section that comes into contact with the back surface 642b of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and is able to support the main-side power supply relay board 640 from below. The board support section 633 in this example is made up of a plate-like member that is rectangular in front view and is molded with the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board accommodation section 631 as its base end and protrudes towards one side in the thickness direction of the bottom surface 620.

When the main power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 631, the back surface 642b of the main power supply relay board 640 is supported by four board support sections 633 and four outer wall bosses 622a. When the main power supply relay board 640 is moved within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 631, the main power supply relay board 640 is configured to be able to slide (move smoothly) over the board support sections 633 and outer wall bosses 622a. In other words, the board support sections 633 and outer wall bosses 622a (support sections) are configured to be able to support the main power supply relay board 640 (second board) even when the main power supply relay board 640 (second board) moves within a predetermined range in the main board accommodation section 631 (mounting section).

In this example, the main board accommodating section 631 (mounting section) has a board support section 633 (support section) and outer wall bosses 622 (support sections) that can support the main power supply relay board 640 (second board), thereby reducing the contact area between the main power supply relay board 640 and the main board accommodating section 631, reducing friction when the main power supply relay board 640 moves, and allowing the main power supply relay board 640 to move smoothly.

In addition, the board support portion 633 and outer wall bosses 622 can hold the main power supply relay board 640 at a position higher than the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating portion 631, and a space can be formed between the back surface 642b of the main side power supply relay board 640 and the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating portion 631. This prevents components such as connector screws 644 (see Figure 33, etc.; details will be described later) attached to the back surface 642b of the main side power supply relay board 640 from interfering with the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating portion 631.

In other words, a portion of the connector screw 644 is configured to be able to be accommodated in the space formed between one surface (back surface 642b) of the main-side power supply relay board 640 (second board) and the bottom surface 620 of the main board accommodating section 631 (mounting section). Therefore, even when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved relative to the main board accommodating section 631, contact between the connector screw 644 and the main board accommodating section 631 can be avoided.

The number, placement location, shape, etc. of the board support portions 633 and outer wall bosses 622 are not limited to those in this example; for example, there may be one to three, or five or more, and they may be erected in a location other than the illustrated location, such as the center of the bottom surface 620. Furthermore, only one of the board support portions 633 and outer wall bosses 622 may be provided.

<How to install the power relay board unit/power relay board>
35(a) and 36, a method for attaching the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the board support body 610 will be described. Note that the method for attaching the sub-side power supply relay board 670 to the board support body 610 is almost the same as that for the main-side power supply relay board 640, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 35(a) is a front view showing the main-side power supply relay board 640 accommodated in the main-side board accommodation section 612 of the board support body 610, Figure 36(a) is a front view showing the main-side power supply relay board 640 accommodated in the main-side board accommodation section 612 of the board support body 610 and with the mounting screw 646 attached, and Figure 36(b) is a view from the direction of symbol A in Figure 36(a) and is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the mounting screw 646.

First, as shown in Figure 35(a), the main power supply relay board 640 is positioned relative to the board support 610 so that the three board loose-fit bosses 624 of the board support 610 are loosely fitted into the through-holes 642c at the upper left corner, center left side, and lower right corner of the main power supply relay board 640 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 when viewed from the front is inserted below the first restricting piece 628a of the board support 610, and the edge at the lower left corner of the main power supply relay board 640 when viewed from the front is inserted below the second restricting piece 628b of the board support 610.

Next, press the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 on the left side as viewed from the front against the third pressing portion 630c on the left side as viewed from the front of the board support 610, move the main power supply relay board 640 slightly to the left as viewed from the front, and fit the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 on the right side as viewed from the front into the fourth pressing portion 630d on the right side as viewed from the front of the board support 610.

Next, the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved slightly upward as viewed from the front, and the outer edge of the main-side power supply relay board 640 on the lower side as viewed from the front is fitted inside the first pressing portion 630a and second pressing portion 630b on the lower side as viewed from the front of the board support 610, thereby accommodating the main-side power supply relay board 640 in the board accommodation space (the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and outer wall 622) of the main-side board accommodation portion 612 of the board support 610.

In other words, in this example, one end of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is engaged with the restricting piece (restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b)), and the other end of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) elastically deforms the elastic portion (pressing portion 630 (630a-630d)), thereby accommodating the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) in the accommodation space.

This example makes it easier to accommodate the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) in the accommodation space, and once accommodated, the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be securely held in the accommodation space by the restricting pieces (restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b)) and the elastic portions (pressing portions 630 (630a-630d)).

Finally, as shown in Figures 36(a) and (b), fasten mounting screws 646 into the screw holes 624a of the three board loose-fit bosses 624 of the board support 610, and attach the main-side power supply relay board 640 in a state where it can move up, down, left, and right within the board storage space of the board support 610.

As shown enlarged in Figure 36(b), when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodation section 612 of the board support body 610, the tip of the board loose-fit boss 624 protrudes slightly above the surface 642a of the main-side power supply relay board 640. Therefore, even when the mounting screw 646 is fastened to the board loose-fit boss 624, the main-side power supply relay board 640 can be prevented from coming into contact with the mounting screw 646, and movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640 is not hindered.

In other words, in this example, when the opening (through-hole 642c) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is inserted through the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624) of the mounting portion (board support body 610) and a screw (mounting screw 646) is attached to the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624), a portion of the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624) and the head (head (flange) 646a) of the screw (mounting screw 646) are positioned above one surface (surface 642a) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640), and the head (head (flange) 646a) of the screw (mounting screw 646) is positioned above one surface (surface 642a) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) regardless of the position the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is moved to within the accommodation space of the mounting portion (board support body 610).

According to this example, even when the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (board support 610), contact between the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and the head of the screw (head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646) can be avoided, preventing deterioration and wear of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and allowing the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) to be moved smoothly.

In addition, the outer diameter of the head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646 is larger than the inner diameter of the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640, which reliably prevents the main-side power supply relay board 640 from falling off (detaching) from the board support 610 after installation.

Furthermore, when the opening (through hole 642c) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is inserted through the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624) of the mounting portion (board support 610) and a screw (mounting screw 646) is attached to the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624), and the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (board support 610), the second board is configured to be able to come into contact with the head (head (flange) 646a) of the screw, and a solid mark is provided in the area of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) that can come into contact with the head (head (flange) 646a). Because a ground pattern 641 (see Figures 32, 36(a), etc.) is formed, it is possible to prevent the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) from coming off the mounting portion (board support 610) while allowing the second board to move, and it is also possible to prevent damage to the wiring patterns, etc. formed on the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) even if the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is moved while the head of the screw (head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646) is in contact with the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

<Board loose-fit boss and mounting screw (modified version)>
Next, a modified example of the board loose-fit boss 624 and the mounting screw 646 described with reference to FIG. 36 etc. will be described with reference to FIG. 36-2.

Figure 36-2(a) is a partially enlarged view showing the state before the mounting screw 647 according to the modified example is attached to the board loose-fit boss 625, and Figure 36-2(b) is a partially enlarged view showing the state after the mounting screw 647 according to the modified example has been attached to the board loose-fit boss 625, and is a drawing corresponding to Figure 36(b).

The main-side board housing section 635 of this modified example differs in that it has a board loose-fit boss 625 and an attachment screw 647 instead of the board loose-fit boss 624 and attachment screw 646 that are provided in the main-side board housing section 612 described using Figure 36 etc.

To avoid redundant explanation, components identical or similar to those in the main-side board housing section 612 are given the same reference numerals in the figures and their description will be omitted. Also, while the main-side board housing section that houses the main-side power supply relay board 640 will be described here, the same or similar components can also be used for the sub-side board housing section that houses the sub-side power supply relay board 670.

<Board Loose-Fit Boss and Mounting Screw (Modified Example) / Board Loose-Fit Boss>
The board loose-fit boss 625 of the main side board accommodating portion 635 is a portion provided corresponding to the through hole 642c formed in the main side power supply relay board 640, and has a screw hole 625a into which the screw portion 647c of the mounting screw 647 can be screwed.

The board loose-fit boss 625 in this example is a cylindrical member that protrudes from the bottom surface 635a of the main-side board accommodation section 635 toward one side in the thickness direction of the bottom surface 635a, with the base end being the bottom surface 635a, and has a screw hole 625a formed in its center. The board loose-fit boss 625 is designed to be long enough so that it does not reach (come into contact with) the back surface 642b of the main-side power supply relay board 640 when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main-side board accommodation section 635.

<Board loose-fit boss and mounting screw (variant) / mounting screw>
The mounting screw 647 is composed of a head (flange) 647a, a cylindrical main body 647b that protrudes to one side from the head 647a as its base end, and a cylindrical screw portion 647c that is slightly thinner than the main body 647b and that protrudes to one side from the main body 647b as its base end.

The head 647a has an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the through-hole 642c in the main-side power supply relay board 640, and cannot be inserted into the through-hole 642c in the main-side power supply relay board 640 (it cannot pass through the through-hole 642c).

On the other hand, the main body 647b has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through-hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640, and can be inserted into (pass through) the through-hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the through-hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640 has a predetermined "play (gap)" relative to the outer diameter of the main body 647b.

With this configuration, even when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 635 and the mounting screw 647 is attached to the board loose-fit boss 625, it is able to move (slide) in-plane (longitudinally left and right and laterally up and down) by the amount of play (gap) formed between the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the main body 647b of the mounting screw 647.

The screw portion 647c also has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640, and can be inserted into (pass through) the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640. A thread groove is formed on the outer periphery of the screw portion 647c that can be threaded into the screw hole 625a of the board loose-fit boss 625, and the mounting screw 647 is configured to be able to be attached to the board loose-fit boss 625 through the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640.

As shown in Figure 36-2 (b), the threaded portion 647c and part of the main body portion 647b of the mounting screw 647 are inserted into the through-hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640, and then the threaded portion 647c of the mounting screw 647 is fastened to the screw hole 625a of the board loose-fit boss 625, thereby fixing the mounting screw 647 to the board loose-fit boss 625.

In this example, a restricting portion (mounting screw 647) is provided that restricts at least a portion of the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving outside the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation portion 635, thereby preventing the main-side power supply relay board 640 from coming off the main board accommodation portion 635.

The number and location of the board loose-fit bosses 625 are not limited to this example; for example, there may be one, two, four or more, and they may be erected in locations other than those shown in the example, such as the lower left corner or upper right corner of the bottom surface 635a of the main board housing section 635.

<How to move the power relay board unit/power relay board>
35(a) to 35(c), a method for moving the main-side power supply relay board 640 in the main-side board accommodation section 612 of the board support body 610 will be described. Note that the method for moving the sub-side power supply relay board 670 in the sub-side board accommodation section 614 of the board support body 610 is almost the same as that for the main-side power supply relay board 640, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 35(b) is a plan view showing the main power supply relay board 640 moved to the left as viewed from the front in the main board accommodation section 612, and Figure 35(c) is a plan view showing the main power supply relay board 640 moved downward as viewed from the front in the main board accommodation section 612. For ease of explanation, Figures 35(b) and 35(c) show the main power supply relay board 640 in the state before the mounting screws 646 are attached.

For example, as shown in FIG. 35(b), if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved leftward as viewed from the front against the pressing direction (biasing direction) of the third pressing portion 630c on the left side of the board support body 610 as viewed from the front, it can be moved (slid) leftward as viewed from the front within the range in which the third pressing portion 630c is movable (elastically deformable). Then, as the movement to the left continues as viewed from the front, eventually, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the through-hole 642c formed in the upper left corner and center left side of the main-side power supply relay board 640 as viewed from the front abuts against the inner edge on the right side as viewed from the front of the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support body 610, restricting movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the left as viewed from the front. In other words, the main-side power supply relay board 640 can move leftward as viewed from the front within the range in which it is not restricted by the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support body 610.

Although not shown in the figures, when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right as viewed from the front against the pressing direction (biasing direction) of the fourth pressing portion 630d on the right side as viewed from the front of the board support body 610, it can be moved (slid) to the right as viewed from the front within the movable (elastically deformable) range of the fourth pressing portion 630d. Continuing to move to the right as viewed from the front will eventually bring the through-holes 642c formed in the upper left corner and center left side of the main-side power supply relay board 640 as viewed from the front into contact with the inner edge on the left side as viewed from the front of the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support body 610, restricting movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the right as viewed from the front.

As explained using Figure 31(b), when the main power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right as viewed from the front, the connector screw 644 on the back surface of the main power supply relay board 640 abuts against the second board support boss 626b, restricting movement of the main power supply relay board 640 to the right as viewed from the front. In other words, the main power supply relay board 640 can move to the right as viewed from the front within a range that is not restricted by the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support body 610 or the second board support boss 626b.

As shown in FIG. 35(c), when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved downward (as viewed from the front) against the pressing direction (biasing direction) of the first pressing portion 630a and the second pressing portion 630b on the lower side of the board support body 610 (as viewed from the front), the main-side power supply relay board 640 can be moved (slid) downward (as viewed from the front) within the range in which the first pressing portion 630a and the second pressing portion 630b are movable (elastically deformable). Continuing downward movement (as viewed from the front) eventually causes the through-hole 642c formed in the lower right corner of the main-side power supply relay board 640 to abut against the inner edge of the lower side (as viewed from the front) of the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support body 610, thereby restricting downward movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640 (as viewed from the front). In other words, the main-side power supply relay board 640 can move downward (as viewed from the front) within a range that is not restricted by the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support body 610.

Because a predetermined gap is provided between the outer wall 622 on the upper side of the board support 610 as viewed from the front and the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 on the upper side as viewed from the front, the main power supply relay board 640 can be moved (slid) upward as viewed from the front. Continuing upward movement as viewed from the front eventually brings the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 on the upper side as viewed from the front into contact with the outer wall 622 on the upper side of the board support 610 as viewed from the front, restricting upward movement of the main power supply relay board 640 as viewed from the front. In other words, the main power supply relay board 640 can move upward as viewed from the front within a range that is not restricted by the outer wall 622 of the board support 610.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been the norm, and increasing the number of times the connector is plugged and unplugged can lead to connector wear. However, with this example, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector (main reel relay board first connector MRC1) on the first board (main reel relay board 742) and the second connector (main power supply relay board first connector MVC1) on the second board (main power supply relay board 640), the position can be adjusted by moving the second board (main power supply relay board 640). This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins.

In addition, the second connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) that is connected board-to-board on the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) tends to have a large number of pins, which makes the connector larger. Therefore, if only the large connector were to move, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board (main-side power supply relay board 640), a stable connection can be achieved.

In addition, the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be moved freely within the range in which the opening (through-hole 642c) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can move relative to the protrusion (board loose-fit boss 624) of the mounting section (main-side board accommodating section 612), allowing for smooth connection between the connectors.

In particular, the opening (through hole 642c) is a circular portion, the protrusion (board loose-fit boss 624) is composed of a cylindrical member, and the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is configured to be movable up, down, left, and right relative to the mounting portion (main-side board accommodating portion 612). This allows the size of the opening formed in the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) to be kept to a minimum, making effective use of the limited mounting surface of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

<Power relay board unit/cable support part>
The main side cable support part 616 has a harness insertion hole 616a through which a harness (wiring) can be inserted that connects the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 of the main side power supply relay board 640 to the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using Figure 2.

The sub-side cable support portion 618 has a harness insertion hole 618a through which the harness (wiring) can be inserted to connect the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 to the connector on the power supply board of the power supply unit 252 described with reference to Figure 2.

<Reel relay board unit>
Next, the reel relay board unit 700 will be described in detail.

Figure 37(a) is a front view of the reel relay board unit 700 as seen from the front side, Figure 37(b) is a side view of the reel relay board unit 700 as seen from the right side, and Figure 37(c) is an exploded side view of the components constituting the reel relay board unit 700 as seen from the right side.

The reel relay board unit 700 is composed of a plate-shaped sheet metal member 710, a main reel relay board unit 740 arranged on the right side of the sheet metal member 710 when viewed from the front, and a sub-reel relay board unit 770 arranged on the left side of the sheet metal member 710 when viewed from the front.

The main reel relay board unit 740 and the sub-reel relay board unit 770 are arranged at a predetermined distance on the sheet metal member 710, and a space 790 is formed between the main reel relay board unit 740 and the sub-reel relay board unit 770.

<Reel relay board unit/Main reel relay board unit>
Next, the main reel relay board unit 740 will be described.

The main reel side relay board unit 740 is composed of a main reel relay board 742, a main side housing body 744 that is L-shaped in side view and can house part of the main reel side relay board 742, and a main side cover body 746 that is positioned to cover the surface of the main side reel relay board 742.

<Reel relay board unit/Main side reel relay board unit relay board>
Next, the main side reel relay board 742 will be described using Figure 38. Figure 38(a) is a front view of the main side reel relay board 742 as seen from the front side, Figure 38(b) is a plan view of the main side reel relay board 742 as seen from above, and Figure 38(c) is a bottom view of the main side reel relay board 742 as seen from the bottom side.

The main reel relay board 742 is composed of a base material 748 made of a rectangular plate, and main reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 arranged on one surface 748a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front surface" or "component surface") of this base material 748.

Main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 are arranged on surface 748a of base material 748. Also, although not shown, various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc. are also formed.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the other surface 748b of the base material 748 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), where a solid ground pattern is formed, and two screws 750 are attached to secure the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 from the back surface 748b side.

The main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (second connector) is a female connector with a complementary shape to the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector; see Figure 30, etc.) of the main side power supply relay board 640, which is a male connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1. Note that the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is not limited to a female connector, and may also be a male connector or another type of connector.

As shown in Figure 38(a), screw holes 750 are formed on both the left and right ends of the main reel relay board first connector MRC1, into which screws 754 can be inserted to secure the main reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710.

The main reel relay board second connector MRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the main reel relay board third connector MRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the center reel 111 is connected, and the main reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2, main side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval on the surface 748a of the base material 748 along the longitudinal direction of the base material 748. The distance indicated by the symbol L1 in Figure 38(b) indicates the shortest distance from the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2, main side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 to the outer edge 748c on one side in the shorter direction of the base material 748.

<Reel relay board unit/main side reel relay board unit/main side housing>
Next, the main-side container 744 and the main-side cover 746 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 39(a) is a front view of the main housing 744 as seen from the front side, Figure 39(b) is a plan view of the main housing 744 as seen from above, and Figure 39(c) is a front perspective view of the main housing 744 as seen from diagonally above the front.

The main side housing 744 is a member arranged to cover the back surface 748b of the main side reel relay board 742 and part of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1. In this example, it is composed of a connector housing portion 744a consisting of a box-shaped body that can house part of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, and a board housing portion 744b consisting of a dish-shaped body that protrudes from the lower end of this connector housing portion 744a in a direction perpendicular to the connector housing portion 744a.

The front surface of the connector housing 744a is formed with one rod-shaped protrusion 744c on each side when viewed from the front, which can pass through the housing through-hole 716b (see Figure 41(a)) formed in the plate-like member 710; one screw hole 744d into which a screw 754 (see Figure 37(a) etc.) can be inserted to secure the main-side reel-side relay board 742 to the plate-like member 710; and one rod-shaped mounting protrusion 744e to which the main-side cover 746 is attached.

The board storage section 744b has a plate-shaped protruding piece 744f that protrudes downward from the bottom surface, and two lid engagement pieces 744g that protrude from the front surface of the board storage section 744b at a predetermined distance.

Figure 40(a) is a front view of the main side cover 746 as seen from the front side, Figure 40(b) is a plan view of the main side cover 746 as seen from above, and Figure 40(c) is a front perspective view of the main side cover 746 as seen from diagonally above the front.

The main-side cover 746 is a member arranged to cover the surface 748a of the main-side reel relay board 742. In this example, it is composed of a plate-shaped base portion 746a, housing attachment portions 746b that protrude upward on both longitudinal sides of the base portion 746a, two housing engagement claws 746c that protrude downward from one short side of the base portion 746a as a base end, and a harness holding portion 746d that protrudes outward in the longitudinal direction from one longitudinal end of the base portion 746a as a base end.

The base portion 746a is formed with multiple connector openings 746e that allow the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 to be exposed to the outside when the surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742 is covered by the main side cover 746.

The container attachment portion 746b is a box-shaped body with a space large enough to accommodate the attachment protrusion 744e of the main container 744, and has a screw hole 746f formed on its front surface through which a screw 756 (see Figures 37(a), 43(b), etc.) can be inserted to attach the main lid 746 to the main container 744. The container engagement claw 746c is a portion that can engage with the lid engagement piece 744g of the main container 744.

The lid engagement piece 744g of the main-side casing 744 is engaged with this casing engagement claw 746c, and the mounting protrusion 744e of the main-side casing 744 is accommodated in the casing mounting portion 746b. The casing mounting portion 746b and the mounting protrusion 744e are then fastened together with screws 756 (see Figures 37(a) and 43(b)), thereby securing the main-side lid 746 to the main-side casing 744.

<Reel relay board unit/sheet metal parts>
Next, the sheet metal member 710 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figure 41 (a) is a front view of the sheet metal member 710 as seen from the front side, Figure 41 (b) is a plan view of the sheet metal member 710 as seen from above, and Figure 41 (c) is a rear view of the sheet metal member 710 as seen from the rear side.

The sheet metal member 710 is composed of a base portion 712 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and an outer wall 714 erected on one side (back side) of the base portion 712 in the thickness direction, with the outer edges of the four sides of the base portion 712 serving as base ends.

On the right side of the base portion 712 when viewed from the front, there is provided a main unit mounting portion 716 to which the main reel relay board unit 740 can be attached, and on the left side of the base portion 712 when viewed from the front, there is provided a sub-unit mounting portion 718 to which the sub-reel relay board unit 770 can be attached. Note that the sub-unit mounting portion 718 has approximately the same shape as the main unit mounting portion 716, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

The main-side unit attachment portion 716 is configured to have an opening 716a through which the main-side reel relay board 742 of the main-side reel relay board unit 740 and part of the main-side housing 744 can be inserted, a housing through-hole 716b through which a protrusion 744c (see Figure 39(a) etc.) formed on the front surface of the main-side housing 744 can pass, a screw hole 716c through which a screw 754 (see Figure 37(a) etc.) for fixing the main-side reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 can be inserted, and a protruding piece 716d formed so as to protrude forward from the lower edge of the opening 716a as its base end.

<Positioning of the reel relay board unit/main side housing>
Next, a method for positioning the main-side housing 744 relative to the sheet metal member 710 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 42(a) is a front view showing the state in which the main housing 744 is fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as seen from the front side; Figure 42(b) is a rear view showing the state in which the main housing 744 is fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as seen from the rear side; and Figure 42(c) is a side view showing how the main housing 744 is attached to the sheet metal member 710.

First, insert the board accommodation portion 744b of the main-side accommodation body 744 from the rear side to the front side of the opening 716a of the main-side unit mounting portion 716 so that it slides over the upper surface of the protruding piece 716d of the main-side unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710.

In this example, a protrusion (protrusion piece 716d) is formed at the mounting position (main side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) with a portion of the mounting member as its base end and protruding in at least one direction (from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710) of the first direction (from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710) and the second direction (from the front side to the back side of the sheet metal member 710).This makes it easier to position the board case (main side housing 744) relative to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), and the protrusion (protrusion piece 716d) can support the board case (main side housing 744), thereby improving work efficiency when mounting the board case (main side housing 744) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710). Furthermore, the board case (main-side housing 744) can be smoothly guided to the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716), improving work efficiency when mounting the board case (main-side housing 744) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

Next, the protrusions 744c formed on both the left and right sides of the front surface of the main-side housing 744 are inserted through the housing through-holes 716b formed in the plate-shaped member 710 from the rear side of the plate-shaped member 710, and the front surface of the board housing portion 744b of the main-side housing 744 is brought into contact (surface contact) with the upper rear surface 716a1, right rear surface 716a2, and left rear surface 716a3 of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the front. Furthermore, the front surface of the protruding piece 744f of the main-side housing 744 is brought into contact (surface contact) with the lower rear surface 716a4 of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the front. This positions the main-side housing 744 relative to the sheet metal member 710.

In other words, the housing through-hole 716b of the plate-shaped member 710 and the outer edge of the opening 716a of the plate-shaped member 710 (the upper back surface 716a1 when viewed from the front, the right back surface 716a2 when viewed from the front, the left back surface 716a3 when viewed from the front, and the lower back surface 716a4 when viewed from the front) function as parts for positioning the main housing 744 relative to the sheet metal member 710.

In this example, when the convex portion (protrusion 744c) of the first member (main-side housing 744) is fitted into the hole (housing through-hole 716b) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the first member (main-side housing 744) is positioned relative to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710). This allows the first member to be positioned quickly and reliably, improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, when the first member (main-side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the protrusion (protrusion piece 744f) of the first member comes into contact with the mounting member, thereby restricting movement of the first member. Therefore, the protrusion (protrusion piece 744f) coming into contact with the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) makes it easier to position the first member (main-side housing 744) relative to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), and the board case (main-side housing 744) can be stably attached to the mounting member.

Furthermore, when the first member (main-side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), at least a portion of the first member is in surface contact with the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), thereby restricting movement of the first member in a first direction (from the rear side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710). Therefore, when the first member (main-side housing 744) is attached to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), movement of the first member (main-side housing 744) is restricted, facilitating attachment of the first member (main-side housing 744) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) and enabling stable attachment of the board case (main-side housing 744) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

When the main-side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the main-side housing 744 is supported by the housing through-hole 716b of the plate-shaped member 710 and is held at a position higher than the protruding piece 716d of the sheet metal member 710, so the main-side housing 744 and the protruding piece 716d of the sheet metal member 710 are not in contact with each other.

In this example, when the board case (main-side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the board case is configured not to come into contact with a part of the mounting member (the lower edge of the opening 716a of the main-side unit mounting portion 716) or the protruding portion (protruding piece 716d). This reduces the contact area between the board case (main-side housing 744) and the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), preventing damage or breakage to the board case (main-side housing 744) or the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main side housing 744 may be configured so that when attached to the sheet metal member 710, the main side housing 744 and the protruding piece 716d of the sheet metal member 710 are not in contact with each other.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the width w1 of the board accommodation portion 744b of the main-side accommodation body 744 in the left-right plane view is shorter than the width w2 of the lower side of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710 in the left-right plane view. Therefore, when the main-side accommodation body 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the outer edge of the main-side accommodation body 744 in the left-right plane view does not come into contact with the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710. This prevents the main-side accommodation body 744 from being scratched or damaged due to contact with the sheet metal member 710, etc.

When the main side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the screw holes 744d formed on both the left and right sides of the front of the main side housing 744 align with the screw holes 716c formed in the sheet metal member 710, allowing the screws 754 used to secure the main side reel side relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 to be inserted through both the sheet metal member 710 and the main side housing 744.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42(c), when the main-side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the tip end portion of the board housing portion 744b of the main-side housing 744 is located on the front side of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, and the mounting protrusions 744e formed on both the left and right sides of the front side of the connector housing portion 744a are located further forward than the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, and protrude (exposed) on the front side of the opening 716a.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the board accommodating portion 744b and the connector accommodating portion 744a cannot pass through the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, and are therefore located on the rear side of the sheet metal member 710.

In other words, in this example, when the board case (main-side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the first member (main-side housing 744) is configured to be restricted from moving in a first direction (from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710) by the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

<How to install the reel relay board unit/main side reel relay board>
Next, a method for attaching the main reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 43(a).

Figure 43 (a) is a side view showing the procedure for attaching the main-side housing 744 and the main-side reel-side relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710.

When the main side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710 and the main side reel relay board 742 is housed in the main side housing 744 (or when the main side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710 with the main side reel relay board 742 housed in the main side housing 744), both the main side housing 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 are positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710.

When the main side housing 744 and main side reel relay board 742 are positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the screw holes 750 formed on both the left and right sides of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 align with both the screw holes 744d of the main side housing 744 and the screw holes 716c of the sheet metal member 710, allowing the screws 754 used to secure the main side reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 to be inserted through all of the sheet metal member 710, main side housing 744, and main side reel relay board 742.

With the main side housing 744 and main side reel relay board 742 positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, screws 754 are inserted and tightened from the back side of the sheet metal member 710, in the following order: screw hole 750 in the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the main side reel relay board 742, screw hole 744d in the main side housing 744, and screw hole 716c in the sheet metal member 710. This fixes the main side housing 744 and main side reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710, as shown in Figures 43(a) and 37(a).

When the main side housing 744 and main side reel relay board 742 are attached to the sheet metal member 710, as shown in Figure 43 (b), the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 of the main side reel relay board 742 are located on the front side of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, while the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the main side reel relay board 742 is located on the back side of the sheet metal member 710.

In this example, by fixing the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) with screws 754, it is possible to prevent the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) from becoming disconnected from the second connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) when attaching or detaching the first connector and the second connector, and it is possible to maintain a stable connection between the first connector and the second connector.

Furthermore, in this example, when the board case (main-side housing body 744, main-side lid body 746) housing the first board (main-side reel-side relay board 742) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), first connectors (main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main-side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7) are arranged in the exposed portion of the first board on the other side of the mounting member (front side of sheet metal member 7100). This allows harnesses and the like to be easily attached and detached to the first connectors, improving convenience for the worker.

In addition, in this example, when the board case (main-side housing 744, main-side lid 746) housing the first board (main-side reel-side relay board 742) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), a second connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1) is disposed at a portion of the first board located on one side of the mounting member (the back side of the sheet metal member 710). The second connector is configured to be directly connectable to a third connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) provided on another board (main-side reel relay board 742) different from the first board when the mounting member is mounted in a predetermined position on the gaming machine. Therefore, by attaching and detaching the mounting member to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, the second This allows the second connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) to be attached and detached, facilitating attachment and detachment of the second connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1), improving convenience for the worker. Securing the mounting member also prevents the second connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) from coming loose, ensuring a stable connection between the second connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1).

<Installation of reel relay board unit/main side cover>
Next, a method for attaching the main-side cover 746 to the main-side container 744 will be described with reference to FIG. 43(b).

Figure 43(b) is a side view showing the procedure for attaching the main side cover 746 to the sheet metal member 710 to which the main side housing 744 and main side reel side relay board 742 are attached.

When the main-side housing 744 and main-side reel relay board 742 are positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710 (or when the main-side housing 744 and main-side reel relay board 742 are fixed to the sheet metal member 710 with screws 754), the housing engagement claw 746c of the main-side cover 746 is engaged with the cover engagement piece 744g of the main-side housing 744, and the mounting protrusion 744e of the main-side housing 744 is accommodated in the housing mounting portion 746b of the main-side cover 746. These housing mounting portions 746b and mounting protrusions 744e are then fastened together with screws 756, thereby fixing the main-side cover 746 to the main-side housing 744.

In other words, the main side lid body 746 is not fixed directly to the sheet metal member 710, but is configured to be fixed to the main side container 744 which is fixed to the sheet metal member 710, and is configured so that the main side lid body 746 is held by the main side container 744 (movement of the main side lid body 746 is restricted by the main side container 744).

In other words, in this example, when the board case (main-side housing 744, main-side lid 746) is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the second member (main-side lid 746) is configured to be restricted from moving in the second direction (from the front side to the back side of the sheet metal member 710) by the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

Conventional circuit board cases are made up of multiple components, and because these components are secured together using screws or similar, if a screw or similar component loosens, it affects all of the components, causing the entire circuit board case to become loose. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to restrict the first component of the circuit board case from moving in a first direction, and the second component of the circuit board case from moving in a second direction opposite the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the circuit board case, it is possible to prevent the malfunction from affecting all of the components that make up the circuit board case, and the circuit boards housed in the circuit board case can be reliably protected.

In this example, the container engagement claw 746c of the main side lid 746 is engaged with the container engagement piece 744g of the main side lid 744, and the container attachment portion 746b of the main side lid 746 is accommodated in the attachment protrusion 744e of the main side lid 744, thereby engaging the main side lid 746 with the main side lid 744. Therefore, even if the container attachment portion 746b and the attachment protrusion 744e are not fastened with the screw 756, the main side lid 746 can be prevented from coming off the main side lid 744, improving convenience.

<Reel relay board unit/Sub-reel relay board unit>
Next, the sub-reel relay board unit 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

The sub-side reel relay board unit 770 is composed of a sub-side reel relay board 772, a sub-side housing body 774 that is L-shaped in side view and can house part of the main-side reel relay board 772, and a sub-side cover body 776 that is positioned to cover the surface of the sub-side reel relay board 772.

The main structures of the sub-side housing 774 and the sub-side lid 776 are almost identical to those of the main-side housing 744 and the main-side lid 746, respectively, so a detailed explanation will be omitted and only the sub-side reel relay board 772 will be described below.

<Reel relay board unit/sub-side reel relay board unit relay board>
Next, the sub-reel relay board 772 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 44 is a plan view showing the main reel relay board 742 and the sub reel relay board 772 side by side. Note that a description of the same configuration as the main reel relay board 742 described using Figure 38 will be omitted.

The sub-side reel relay board 772 is composed of a base material 778 made of a rectangular plate, and sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 through sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 arranged on one side 778a of this base material 778 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front side" or "component side").

The surface 778a of the substrate 778 is provided with the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 through the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7, as well as various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the other surface of the base material 778 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), which has a solid ground pattern formed thereon, and two screws (not shown) attached to secure the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 from the back surface.

The sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (second connector) is a female connector with a complementary shape to the male connector, sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (see Figure 30, etc.) of the sub-side power supply relay board 670, and can be directly attached to and detached from the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1. Note that the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is not limited to a female connector, and may also be a male connector or another type of connector.

The sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the center reel 111 is connected, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 are arranged at a predetermined interval on the surface 778a of the base material 778 along the longitudinal direction of the base material 778. The distance indicated by the symbol L2 in Figure 44 indicates the shortest distance from the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 to the outer edge 778c on one side of the base material 778 in the shorter direction.

In this example, the shortest distance L2 from the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 to the outer edge 778c on one side of the short side of the substrate 778 is shorter than the shortest distance L1 from the main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2, the main-side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and the main-side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 to the outer edge 748c on one side of the short side of the substrate 748 (L1 > L2).

In other words, in this example, the first connectors (main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main-side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4) and the second connectors (sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4) are arranged so that they are offset from each other's longitudinal extensions. Therefore, even if the first wiring connected to the first connector and the second wiring connected to the second connector are guided into the same space (for example, space 790 shown in FIG. 45), the first wiring and the second wiring are prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, allowing the state of the first wiring and the second wiring to be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

<Reel relay board unit/Summary>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case (for example, the main-side housing 744 and the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 41) that can accommodate the first board, and the board case is configured to have at least a first member (for example, the main-side housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (for example, the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 40), and an attachment member (for example, the sheet metal part shown in FIG. 41) that can attach the board case. a mounting member 710), and when the base case is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (for example, a main unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41(a)), the mounting member is configured to restrict movement of the first member in a first direction (for example, from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second member is configured to be mountable to the first member from a second direction (for example, from the front side to the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

Conventional circuit board cases are made up of multiple components, and because these components are secured together using screws or similar, if a screw or similar component loosens, it affects all of the components, causing the entire circuit board case to become loose. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to restrict the first component of the circuit board case from moving in a first direction, and the second component of the circuit board case from moving in a second direction opposite the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the circuit board case, it is possible to prevent the malfunction from affecting all of the components that make up the circuit board case, and the circuit boards housed in the circuit board case can be reliably protected.

The gaming machine may also be configured so that a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32) is provided, the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the first connector and the second connector are detached when the board case is attached to the attachment member and the attachment member is attached or detached to or from a predetermined position on the gaming machine.

With this configuration, the first connector and second connector can be attached and detached by attaching and detaching the attachment member to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, making it easier to attach and detach the first connector and second connector, increasing convenience for the worker. Fastening the attachment member prevents the first connector and second connector from becoming disconnected, allowing the connection between the first connector and second connector to be maintained stably.

The first connector may also be fixed to the mounting member using fixing means (e.g., screws 754 shown in Figures 37 and 43(a)).

With this configuration, by fixing the first connector to the mounting member, it is possible to prevent the first connector and the second connector from coming loose when attaching or detaching the first connector and the second connector, and it is possible to maintain a stable connection between the first connector and the second connector.

Furthermore, the first member may be attached to the mounting member from one side thereof (e.g., the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second member may be attached to the first member on the other side thereof (e.g., the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction being the direction from the one side of the mounting member toward the other side, and the second direction being the direction from the other side of the mounting member toward the one side, and the first connector and the second connector being connected by attaching the mounting member to the predetermined position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is maintained stably and the board can be reliably protected.

Furthermore, the first member may have a convex portion (for example, protrusion 744c shown in FIG. 42(a) or a notch not shown), and the mounting member may have a hole into which the convex portion of the first member can fit (for example, container through-hole 716b shown in FIG. 42(a)), and when the convex portion of the first member is fitted into the hole of the mounting member, the first member may be positioned relative to the mounting member.

This configuration allows the first member to be positioned quickly and reliably, improving work efficiency.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (for example, the main-side housing 744 and the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 37), and the board case is configured to have at least a first member (for example, the main-side housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (for example, the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 40), and an attachment member to which the board case can be attached (for example, the board shown in FIG. 41) This gaming machine is characterized in that it has a first member (metal member 710) that covers at least a portion of one surface of the first board (for example, the back surface 748b of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and the first member has a protrusion (for example, the protruding piece 744f shown in FIG. 39), and when the first member is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (for example, the main side unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the protrusion of the first member comes into contact with the mounting member, thereby restricting movement of the first member.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the protrusion that contacts the mounting member makes it easy to position the first member relative to the mounting member, and the circuit board case can be stably attached to the mounting member.

Furthermore, when the board case is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the mounting member is configured to restrict movement of the first member in a first direction (for example, from the rear side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and in the first state, the second member is configured to be attachable to the first member from a second direction (for example, from the front side to the rear side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions.

Conventional board cases are made up of multiple components, and because these components are secured together using screws or other fasteners, if a screw or other fastener loosens, it affects all of the components, causing the entire board case to come loose. However, with this configuration, it is possible to restrict the first component of the board case from moving in a first direction, and also restrict the second component of the board case from moving in a second direction opposite the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the board case, it is possible to prevent the malfunction from affecting all of the components that make up the board case, and the boards housed in the board case can be reliably protected.

Furthermore, in the first state, the protruding portion of the first member (e.g., protruding piece 744f shown in FIG. 39) may be configured to be able to come into surface contact with the mounting member.

With this configuration, the protrusion that comes into surface contact with the mounting member makes it easier to position the first member relative to the mounting member, and the board case can be stably attached to the mounting member.

Furthermore, in the first state, the first member may be configured not to come into contact with a portion of the mounting member.

This configuration reduces the contact area between the board case and the mounting member, preventing the board case and mounting member from being scratched or damaged.

Furthermore, in the first state, at least a portion of the first member may be in surface contact with the mounting member (for example, the outer edge of the opening 716a of the plate-like member 710 shown in FIG. 42(a) (the upper back surface 716a1 when viewed from the front, the right back surface 716a2 when viewed from the front, the left back surface 716a3 when viewed from the front, and the lower back surface 716a4 when viewed from the front)), thereby restricting movement of the first member in the first direction.

With this configuration, movement of the first member is restricted when the first member is attached to the mounting member, making it easier to attach the first member to the mounting member and allowing the board case to be stably attached to the mounting member.

Also, a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32) is provided, the first board is provided with a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board is provided with a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the first member is provided on one side of the mounting member (for example, the The second member may be attached to the mounting member from one side (e.g., the rear side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41 ) of the mounting member, and the second member may be attached to the first member on the other side of the mounting member (e.g., the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41 ), the first direction being the direction from one side of the mounting member to the other side, and the second direction being the direction from the other side of the mounting member to the one side, and the first connector and the second connector may be connected by attaching the mounting member to a predetermined position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is maintained stably and the board can be reliably protected.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (for example, the main-side housing 744 and the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 37), and the board case is configured to have at least a first member (for example, the main-side housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (for example, the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 40), and is equipped with an attachment member to which the board case can be attached (for example, the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the board case is attached to the attachment position of the attachment member (for example, the main-side housing 744 and the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 41). This gaming machine is characterized in that, when positioned on the main unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710 (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the mounting member is configured to restrict movement of the first member in a first direction (for example, from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the second member is configured to be mountable to the first member from a second direction (for example, from the front side to the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, and the mounting member is formed with a protrusion that can guide the circuit board case (for example, protrusion piece 716d shown in FIG. 41(a)).

Conventional circuit board cases are made up of multiple components, and because these components are fastened together using screws or other fasteners, loosening the screws or other fasteners can affect all of the components and cause the entire circuit board case to loosen. However, the gaming machine of this embodiment can restrict the first component of the circuit board case from moving in a first direction, and restrict the second component of the circuit board case from moving in a second direction opposite the first direction. This prevents a malfunction in one of the components making up the circuit board case from affecting all of the components making up the circuit board case, ensuring the protection of the circuit board housed in the circuit board case. Furthermore, the mounting position of the mounting member is formed with a protrusion that protrudes in at least one of the first and second directions from a portion of the mounting member as its base end. This facilitates positioning of the circuit board case relative to the mounting member, and allows the circuit board case to be supported by the protrusion, improving work efficiency when attaching the circuit board case to the mounting member.

Furthermore, the protrusion may be a portion that protrudes in the first direction (for example, from the rear side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) with a portion of the mounting member as its base end, and the first state may be a state in which the board case is positioned at the mounting position by moving the board case in the first direction toward the mounting position of the mounting member.

This configuration allows the board case to be smoothly guided to the mounting position, improving work efficiency when attaching the board case to the mounting member.

Furthermore, when the board case is attached to the attachment position of the attachment member, the board case may be configured so that it does not come into contact with a part of the attachment member (for example, a part of the opening 716a of the main unit attachment portion 716 shown in Figure 41) and the protrusion.

This configuration reduces the contact area between the board case and the mounting member, preventing the board case and mounting member from being scratched or damaged.

The first member is provided with a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board is provided with a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board is provided with a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the first member is provided with one side of the mounting member (for example, the The second member may be attached to the mounting member from the other side of the mounting member (for example, the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction being the direction from one side of the mounting member to the other side, and the second direction being the direction from the other side of the mounting member to the one side, and the first connector and the second connector may be connected by attaching the mounting member to the predetermined position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is maintained stably and the board can be reliably protected.

Furthermore, the first member may have a convex portion (e.g., protrusion 744c shown in FIG. 42(a)), and the mounting member may have a hole (e.g., container through-hole 716b shown in FIG. 42(a)) into which the convex portion of the first member can fit, so that when the convex portion of the first member is fitted into the hole of the mounting member, the first member is positioned relative to the mounting member.

This configuration allows the first member to be positioned quickly and reliably, improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44), a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (for example, the main-side container 744 and the main-side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37), and the first board is connected to a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector MRC2 shown in FIG. 44). SRC1), the second board has a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and an attachment member (for example, the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) to which the board case can be attached, the attachment member being attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, and configured so that when the attachment member is removed from the predetermined position with the board case attached to the attachment member, the first connector and the second connector are removed.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first connector and second connector can be attached and detached by attaching and detaching the attachment member to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, making it easier to attach and detach the first connector and second connector, improving convenience for the worker. Securing the attachment member also prevents the first connector and second connector from becoming disconnected, allowing the connection between the first connector and second connector to be maintained stably.

The board case is configured to have at least a first member (e.g., the main-side container 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (e.g., the main-side cover 746 shown in FIG. 40). When the board case is positioned at the mounting position (e.g., the main-side unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) of the mounting member (e.g., the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the mounting member is configured to restrict movement of the first member in a first direction (e.g., from the rear side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41). In the first state, the second member can be attached to the first member from a second direction (e.g., from the front side to the rear side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41). The first and second directions may be opposite directions.

Conventional board cases are made up of multiple components, and because these components are secured together using screws or other fasteners, if a screw or other fastener loosens, it affects all of the components, causing the entire board case to come loose. However, with this configuration, it is possible to restrict the first component of the board case from moving in a first direction, and also restrict the second component of the board case from moving in a second direction opposite the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the board case, it is possible to prevent the malfunction from affecting all of the components that make up the board case, and the boards housed in the board case can be reliably protected.

The second board may also be movably mounted to a mounting portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and may be configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been the norm, and increasing the number of times they are inserted and removed can lead to connector wear. However, with this configuration, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins.

Furthermore, the first member may be attached to the mounting member from one side thereof (e.g., the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second member may be attached to the first member on the other side thereof (e.g., the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction being the direction from the one side of the mounting member toward the other side, and the second direction being the direction from the other side of the mounting member toward the one side, and the first connector and the second connector being connected by attaching the mounting member to the predetermined position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is maintained stably and the board can be reliably protected.

Furthermore, the first member may have a convex portion (e.g., protrusion 744c shown in FIG. 42(a)), and the mounting member may have a hole (e.g., container through-hole 716b shown in FIG. 42(a)) into which the convex portion of the first member can fit, so that when the convex portion of the first member is fitted into the hole of the mounting member, the first member is positioned relative to the mounting member.

This configuration allows the first member to be positioned quickly and reliably, improving work efficiency.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (for example, the main-side housing 744 and the main-side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37), and is equipped with an attachment member (for example, the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) to which the board case can be attached. When the board case is positioned at the attachment position of the attachment member (hereinafter, referred to as the "first state"), In this "state," at least a portion of the board case (for example, the main housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) comes into surface contact with the mounting member (for example, the outer edge of the opening 716a of the plate-like member 710 shown in FIG. 42(a) (the upper back surface 716a1 when viewed from the front, the right back surface 716a2 when viewed from the front, the left back surface 716a3 when viewed from the front, and the lower back surface 716a4 when viewed from the front)), and movement in a certain direction (for example, from the front to the back of the plate-like member 710 shown in FIG. 41) can be restricted.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment makes it easy to position the board case relative to the mounting member, and allows the board case to be stably attached to the mounting member. Furthermore, because at least a portion of the board case is in surface contact with the mounting member, it makes it easy to position the board case relative to the mounting member, and allows the board case to be stably attached to the mounting member.

The board case may be configured to have at least a first member (e.g., the main-side housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (e.g., the main-side cover 746 shown in FIG. 40), the first member covering at least a portion of one surface of the first board (e.g., the back surface 748b of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and the second member covering at least a portion of the other surface of the first board (e.g., the front surface 748a of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and be attachable to the first member, and in the first state, at least a portion of the first member may be in surface contact with the attachment member, thereby restricting movement of the first member in the certain direction.

With this configuration, movement of the first member is restricted, making it easier to position the board case relative to the mounting member and allowing the board case to be stably attached to the mounting member.

The first member may be configured to have a first portion (e.g., connector accommodating portion 744a shown in FIG. 39) covering at least a portion of one surface of the first board, and a second portion (e.g., board accommodating portion 744b shown in FIG. 39) extending vertically from the first portion as a base end. When the board case accommodating the first board is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), at least a portion of the second portion is in surface contact with one surface of the mounting member (e.g., the rear surface of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and at least a portion of the first portion and at least a portion of the first board are exposed on the other side of the mounting member (e.g., the front side of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41). The second member may be attachable to the first portion of the first member on the other side of the mounting member.

This configuration allows the second member to be easily attached and detached from the first member, improving operational efficiency.

Furthermore, a first connector (for example, main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 shown in FIG. 44) may be arranged in a portion of the first board exposed on the other side of the mounting member (for example, the front side of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) in the second state.

This configuration makes it easy to attach and detach harnesses and other devices to the first connector, improving convenience for workers.

Furthermore, a second connector (e.g., the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 44) is arranged in a portion of the first board located on one side of the mounting member (e.g., the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) in the second state, and the second connector may be configured to be directly connectable to a third connector (e.g., the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 32) provided on a board different from the first board when the mounting member is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine.

With this configuration, the second connector and the third connector can be attached and detached by attaching and detaching the attachment member to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, making it easier to attach and detach the second connector and the third connector, increasing convenience for the worker. Fastening the attachment member also prevents the second connector and the third connector from becoming disconnected, allowing the connection between the second connector and the third connector to be maintained stably.

<Summary of power relay board unit and reel relay board unit>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board includes a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44). and a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32) that can be connected to the connector of the first board, the second board being movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub side board accommodating portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board being configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board.

In the past, connectors were mainly movable, which posed the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were plugged and unplugged increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins.

In addition, the second connector that connects board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, which makes the connector larger. Therefore, if only the large connector were to move, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved.

Furthermore, the mounting portion may have an accommodation space capable of accommodating the second substrate (for example, the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 34), and the second substrate may be configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion within the accommodation space of the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the second board to move freely within the mounting portion's storage space, allowing for smooth connection between connectors.

The second substrate may have an opening (e.g., through-hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), and the attachment portion may have a protrusion (e.g., board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second substrate, the outer diameter of the protrusion being smaller than the inner diameter of the opening of the second substrate, and the opening of the second substrate may be configured not to come into contact with the protrusion within a range in which the second substrate can move relative to the attachment portion (e.g., a range in which movement is possible due to the gap formed between outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 34 and the second substrate; in other words, a range in which the second substrate can move without being elastically deformed by the pressing portions 630 (630a-630d) shown in FIG. 32 being pressed by the second substrate).

This configuration allows the second board to be moved freely within the range in which the protruding portion of the second board can move within the opening of the mounting portion, allowing for smooth connection between the connectors.

The second substrate may be configured so that the protruding portion of the second substrate does not come into contact with the opening of the mounting portion even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration prevents wear and damage to the opening of the second board and the protruding part of the mounting part, even when the second board is moved repeatedly.

Furthermore, the opening may be a circular portion, the protrusion may be composed of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up and down and left and right relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the size of the opening formed in the second substrate to be minimized, making effective use of the limited mounting surface of the second substrate.

The protrusion has a screw hole (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in Figure 36(b)) into which a screw can be attached, and when the opening of the second substrate is passed through the protrusion of the mounting portion and the screw is attached to the protrusion, and the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, the second substrate is configured to be able to come into contact with the head of the screw (e.g., head (flange) 646a shown in Figure 36(a)), and a solid ground pattern may be formed in the area of the second substrate that can come into contact with the head.

This configuration allows the second board to move while preventing it from coming off the mounting portion, and it also prevents damage to the wiring patterns formed on the second board even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector connectable to the first connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SRC2 shown in FIG. 32). The gaming machine has a connector SVC1, the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board housing portion 612 or the sub-side board housing portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the attachment portion has a restricting portion (for example, the restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) or the board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32), and the restricting portion is configured to restrict movement of the second board after it has been attached, which movement differs from the movement that occurs when the second board is attached.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves were the norm, and increasing the number of times they were plugged and unplugged posed the problem of connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, since the gaming machine is equipped with a restriction section that can restrict movement other than that which occurs when the second board is attached after it has been attached, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the attachment section.

The mounting portion may have a protrusion (e.g., board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second board, and the protrusion may have a screw hole into which a screw can be attached (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)), so that when the opening of the second board is passed through the protrusion of the mounting portion and the screw is attached to the protrusion, a portion of the protrusion and the head of the screw are located above one surface of the second board.

With this configuration, even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the second substrate and the head of the screw can be avoided, preventing deterioration and wear of the second substrate and allowing the second substrate to move smoothly.

Furthermore, the head of the screw may be configured to be positioned above the one surface of the second substrate regardless of the position the second substrate moves to inside the mounting portion's accommodation space (for example, the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and outer wall 622 as shown in Figure 34).

With this configuration, no matter what position the second substrate is moved to, contact between the second substrate and the screw head can be avoided, preventing deterioration and wear of the second substrate and allowing the second substrate to be moved smoothly.

Furthermore, the outer diameter of the protrusion may be smaller than the inner diameter of the opening in the second substrate, so that the opening in the second substrate does not come into contact with the protrusion within the range in which the second substrate can move relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the second board to be moved freely within the range in which the protruding portion of the second board can move within the opening of the mounting portion, allowing for smooth connection between the connectors.

Furthermore, the opening may be a circular portion, the protrusion may be made of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up and down and left and right relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the size of the opening formed in the second substrate to be minimized, making effective use of the limited mounting surface of the second substrate.

Furthermore, when the opening of the second substrate is passed through the protrusion of the mounting portion and the screw is attached to the protrusion, and the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, the second substrate can come into contact with the head of the screw (e.g., head (flange) 646a shown in Figure 36(b)), and a solid ground pattern can be formed in the area of the second substrate that can come into contact with the head.

This configuration allows the second board to move while preventing it from coming off the mounting portion, and it also prevents damage to the wiring patterns formed on the second board even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), wherein the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board has a second connector connectable to the first connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board has an attachment portion (for example, the board support 61 shown in FIG. 32). 30) and is movably mounted relative to the main board housing portion 612 and the sub-side board housing portion 614, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the mounting portion has a restricting portion (for example, restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) and board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32), and the restricting portion is configured to restrict movement after the second board is mounted that is different from the movement when the second board is mounted, and the restricting portion is a restricting piece that protrudes toward the housing space, and the protruding length of the restricting piece is longer than the distance the second board can move in the housing space in the protruding direction of the restricting piece.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves are the norm, and increasing the number of times the connector is plugged and unplugged can lead to connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, the gaming machine is equipped with a restricting portion that restricts at least a portion of the second board from moving out of the mounting portion's storage space, preventing the second board from becoming detached from the mounting portion. In particular, the restricting portion is a restricting piece that protrudes toward the storage space, and the protruding length of the restricting piece is longer than the distance the second board can move in the storage space. Therefore, no matter where the second board is moved, the second board can be reliably prevented from becoming detached from the mounting portion.

Furthermore, the mounting portion may have an accommodation space capable of accommodating the second substrate (for example, the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 34), and the second substrate may be configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion within the accommodation space of the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the second board to move freely within the mounting portion's storage space, allowing for smooth connection between connectors.

The mounting portion may have an elastic portion that can be elastically deformed (for example, pressing portion 630 (630a-630d) shown in FIG. 32), the mounting portion may have a first side and a second side facing the first side, the restricting piece may be formed on the first side, and the elastic portion may be formed on the second side, and one end of the second substrate may be engaged with the restricting piece, and the other end of the second substrate may be elastically deformed to accommodate the second substrate in the accommodation space.

This configuration makes it easier to store the second substrate in the storage space, and once stored, the second substrate can be held in the storage space by the restricting piece and elastic portion.

Furthermore, the longitudinal length of the restricting piece may be shorter than the longitudinal length of the elastic portion.

With this configuration, the restricting piece is not too long, while the elastic portion has an appropriate length, making it easier to store the second substrate in the storage space, and once stored, the restricting piece and elastic portion can hold the second substrate in the storage space.

The elastic portion may also constitute part of the outer wall (e.g., wall portion 622 shown in Figure 34) that forms the storage space.

With this configuration, even if a greater-than-expected force is applied to the second board due to forceful positioning of the first and second connectors, causing the second board to move significantly relative to the mounting portion, part of the housing space will elastically deform, thereby mitigating the impact on the second board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (for example, the main side power supply This gaming machine is equipped with a relay board first connector MVC1 and a sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1, and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board accommodation portion 612 or the sub-side board accommodation portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in Figure 326), the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using fixing means (for example, the connector screw 644 shown in Figure 33).

Conventionally, connectors have mainly been movable, which poses the problem of connector wear as the number of times they are inserted and removed increases. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, because the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a fixing means, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board even when the first connector and the second connector are repeatedly connected and removed. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector to the second connector, the fixing means can withstand the force applied from the first connector to the second connector, ensuring a secure connection between the connectors.

Furthermore, the mounting portion may have an accommodation space capable of accommodating the second substrate (for example, the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 34), and the second substrate may be configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion within the accommodation space of the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the second board to move freely within the mounting portion's storage space, allowing for smooth connection between connectors.

Furthermore, the mounting portion may have a second protrusion (for example, board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) shown in FIG. 34) protruding from the bottom surface of the mounting portion, the second board may be configured to be movable while in contact with the second protrusion, and a portion of the fixing means may be configured to be receivable in a space formed between one surface of the second board and the bottom surface of the mounting portion.

This configuration reduces the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion, reducing friction when the second substrate moves and allowing the second substrate to move smoothly. In addition, even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the fixing means and the mounting portion can be avoided.

Furthermore, the fixing means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the second protrusion when the second substrate moves relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, even if a greater-than-expected force is applied to the second board due to forceful positioning of the first and second connectors, causing the second board to move significantly relative to the mounting portion, the fixing means of the second board will come into contact with the second protrusion, restricting the movement of the second board, thereby protecting the second board.

Furthermore, the second substrate may have an opening (e.g., through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), and the mounting portion may have a protrusion (e.g., substrate loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second substrate, the outer diameter of the protrusion being smaller than the inner diameter of the opening of the second substrate, and the opening of the second substrate may be configured not to come into contact with the protrusion within the range in which the second substrate can move relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the second board to be moved freely within the range in which the protruding portion of the second board can move within the opening of the mounting portion, allowing for smooth connection between the connectors.

Furthermore, the opening may be a circular portion, the protrusion may be composed of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up and down and left and right relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the size of the opening formed in the second substrate to be minimized, making effective use of the limited mounting surface of the second substrate.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board This gaming machine is characterized in that it has a first board connector MVC1 and a sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1, the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board accommodation portion 612 or the sub-side board accommodation portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the attachment portion has a second protrusion protruding from the bottom surface of the attachment portion, and the second board is configured to be movable while in contact with the second protrusion.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves are the norm, and increasing the number of times the connector is plugged and unplugged can lead to connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, the mounting portion has a second protrusion that protrudes from the bottom surface of the mounting portion, and the second board is configured to be movable while in contact with the second protrusion. This reduces the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion, reducing friction when the second board moves and allowing it to move more smoothly.

Furthermore, the second protrusion may have a portion that does not contact the second substrate.

This configuration reduces the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly relative to the mounting portion.

Furthermore, a solid ground pattern may be formed on one surface of the second substrate at a position corresponding to the second protrusion, and the area of the ground pattern may be larger than the area in which the second substrate and the second protrusion can come into contact.

With this configuration, the area of the second board that comes into contact with the mounting portion can be used as a ground pattern, making effective use of the limited area of the second board and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc. on the second board.

Also, the second protrusion may be a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern may be circular.

This configuration allows for effective use of the limited area of the second substrate.

Furthermore, the second substrate may have an opening (e.g., through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), and the mounting portion may have a first protrusion (e.g., substrate loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second substrate, the outer diameter of the first protrusion being smaller than the inner diameter of the opening of the second substrate, and the opening of the second substrate may be configured not to come into contact with the protrusion within the range in which the second substrate can move relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the second board to be moved freely within the range in which the protruding portion of the second board can move within the opening of the mounting portion, allowing for smooth connection between the connectors.

Furthermore, the opening may be a circular portion, the first protrusion may be composed of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up and down and left and right relative to the mounting portion.

This configuration allows the size of the opening formed in the second substrate to be minimized, making effective use of the limited mounting surface of the second substrate.

The "second board" according to the present invention may also include a third connector that can be connected to a connector provided on a third board different from the "first board" according to the present invention. Also, there may only be one "second connector" that can be connected to the "second board" according to the present invention. With this configuration, aligning one connector on the second board may result in misalignment of the second and subsequent connectors. Therefore, connecting only one connector board-to-board makes it easier to connect the connectors to each other.

(1) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (for example, 32 ) and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second board has an opening (for example, a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), and the attachment portion is configured to fit the opening of the second board. The second substrate has a protrusion (for example, a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) corresponding to the second substrate, and the protrusion has a screw hole (for example, a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (for example, a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is passed through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second substrate has an area in which at least a part of the head of the screw (for example, a head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed, and the attachment portion is This gaming machine has a board support portion (for example, board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can come into contact with a plate, and when the second board is attached to the attachment portion, the board support portion forms a predetermined space between the second board and the attachment portion, and the second board has a second region (for example, ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) on which no wiring pattern is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second region can come into contact with the second board.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, while allowing the second board to move, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. Furthermore, even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring pattern formed on the second board. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc. on the second substrate.

(2) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (e.g., the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (e.g., 32 ) and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second board has an opening (for example, a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), and the attachment portion has a protrusion corresponding to the opening of the second board. The second substrate has a protruding portion (for example, a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or 36(b)), the protruding portion has a screw hole (for example, a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (for example, a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is passed through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second substrate has an area in which at least a part of the head of the screw (for example, a head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed, and the attachment portion is oriented in a first direction (for example, a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) This gaming machine has a restricting piece (e.g., first restricting piece 628a or second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) that protrudes from the outer wall 622 as its base end in a direction away from the outer wall 622, or in a direction from the outside to the inside of the main board housing portion 612 or the sub-board housing portion 614, and the restricting piece protrudes in the first direction, thereby restricting the second board from coming off, and the protruding length of the restricting piece (e.g., the length of the portion that protrudes from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as its base end) is longer than the distance the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, while allowing the second board to move, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. Furthermore, even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring pattern formed on the second board. Furthermore, no matter what position the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part, and the second board can be moved freely within the mounting part's accommodation space, allowing for smooth connection between connectors.

(3) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), wherein the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board has a second connector connectable to the first connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board has an attachment portion (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44). a first connector of the first board and a second connector of the second board, the first connector of the first board being movably mounted in the mounting portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614), the second board being configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board having an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), the mounting portion having a protrusion (e.g., a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) corresponding to the opening of the second board, the protrusion having a screw hole (e.g., a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (e.g., a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be mounted, and when the screw is passed through the opening and the screw is mounted in the screw hole, the head of the screw (e.g., a a head 646a shown in FIG. 32) that can come into contact with the second board, and an area where no wiring pattern is formed is formed in the area; the mounting portion has a restricting piece (e.g., a first restricting piece 628a or a second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) that protrudes in a first direction (e.g., a direction away from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as a base end, or a direction from the outside to the inside of the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion 614), and the restricting piece protrudes in the first direction, thereby restricting the second board from being removed; and a protruding length of the restricting piece (e.g., a length of a part that protrudes from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as a base end) is longer than a distance that the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion; The gaming machine is fixed to one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting portion has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, and part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space, and the second board has a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) where no wiring pattern is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second region and the second board can contact each other.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, while allowing the second board to move, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. Furthermore, even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring pattern formed on the second board. Furthermore, regardless of the position to which the second board is moved, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion, allowing the second board to move freely within the accommodation space of the mounting portion and enabling smooth connection between the connectors. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves and allowing the second board to move smoothly, and even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves and allowing the second board to move smoothly, and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc., of the second board.

(4) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MRC2 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC3 shown in FIG. 32) that can be connected to the first connector. The second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board has an opening (for example, a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), and the attachment portion has a protrusion (for example, a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36( b )) corresponding to the opening of the second board, and the protrusion The projection has a screw hole (for example, screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (for example, mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is passed through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area where at least a part of the head of the screw (for example, head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area where a wiring pattern is not formed is formed in the area, and the second connector is fixed from one surface of the second board using a screw (for example, connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), and the attachment portion is in contact with the second board. a board support portion (for example, board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that is not formed with a wiring pattern, and when the second board is attached to the attachment portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the attachment portion by the board support portion, and part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space; the second board has a second region (for example, ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) that is not formed with a wiring pattern at a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second region and the second board can come into contact.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, while allowing the second board to move, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. Furthermore, even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring pattern formed on the second board. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves and allowing for smooth movement of the second substrate. Even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves and allowing for smooth movement of the second substrate. Also, damage to the wiring pattern on the second substrate can be prevented.

(5) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 32) that can be connected to the first connector. The second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion, and the attachment portion is configured to be movably attached in a first direction (for example, a direction away from an outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 as a base end, or a direction from the outside of the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-side board accommodating portion 614 The second connector has a restricting piece (for example, a first restricting piece 628a or a second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) protruding in the first direction, and the restricting piece restricts the second board from being removed by protruding in the first direction, and the protruding length of the restricting piece (for example, the length of the part protruding from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as its base end) is longer than the distance by which the second board can move in the first direction relative to the attachment part, and the second connector is fixed from one surface of the second board using a screw (for example, a connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), and the attachment part is connected to a board support part ( For example, a gaming machine having a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2, wherein when the second board is attached to the attachment portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the attachment portion by the board support portion, and a portion of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space, and a second area (for example, ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) where no wiring pattern is formed is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second area is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second area and the second board can come into contact.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves were the norm, and frequent insertion and removal of connectors posed the problem of connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, and therefore the connectors are also larger. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the boards or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, regardless of the position of the second board, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. The second board can be freely moved within the mounting portion's accommodation space, allowing for smooth connection between the connectors. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves and allowing for smooth movement of the second substrate. Even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves and allowing for smooth movement of the second substrate. Also, damage to the wiring pattern on the second substrate can be prevented.

(6) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), wherein the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board has a second connector connectable to the first connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the first connector of the first board and The gaming machine is characterized in that the second board is configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when the second connector of the second board is connected, the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting portion has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, and part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space, the second board has a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) where no wiring pattern is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second region and the second board can contact each other.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction during movement of the second board and allowing for smooth movement of the second board. Even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screws and the mounting portion can be avoided. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc. on the second substrate.

(7) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a first connector The second board has a second connector (for example, a main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32) that can be connected to a connector of the first board, and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the attachment portion is configured to be movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32). 32) protruding in the first direction (a direction away from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as a base end, a direction from the outside of the main board accommodating section 612 or the sub-board accommodating section 614 toward the inside), the protruding length of the protruding piece (for example, the length of the part protruding from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as a base end) is set to a value that allows the second board to move in the first direction relative to the mounting section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a screw (for example, connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33) from a distance longer than the allowable distance, the mounting portion has a board support portion (for example, board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, and part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves were the norm, and frequent insertion and removal of connectors posed the problem of connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, and therefore the connectors are also larger. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the boards or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, regardless of the position of the second board, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. The second board can be freely moved within the mounting portion's accommodation space, allowing for smooth connection between the connectors. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves and allowing the second substrate to move smoothly. In addition, even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided.

(8) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board is connectable to the first connector. The second board has a second connector (for example, a main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second board has an opening (for example, a through-hole 642c shown in FIG. 32). The mounting portion has a protrusion (for example, a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) corresponding to the opening of the second board, and the protrusion has a screw hole (for example, a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (for example, a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is passed through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area where at least a part of the head of the screw (for example, a head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and a wiring pattern is formed in the area. an unconnected area is formed, the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting portion has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, and part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, while allowing the second board to move, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. Furthermore, even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring pattern formed on the second board. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves and allowing the second substrate to move smoothly. In addition, even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided.

(9) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), wherein the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board has a second connector connectable to the first connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board is attached a second board that is movably mounted on a portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ) so that the second board can move relative to the mounting portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board; the second board has an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), the mounting portion has a protrusion (e.g., a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36( b )) corresponding to the opening of the second board; the protrusion has a screw hole (e.g., a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36( b )) into which a screw (e.g., a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36( b )) can be attached; and the screw is passed through the opening and inserted into the screw hole. When the screw is attached, the second board has an area where at least a part of the head of the screw (for example, head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area where no wiring pattern is formed is formed in the area, and the attachment portion has a restricting piece (for example, first restricting piece 628a or second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) that protrudes in a first direction (for example, a direction away from outer wall 622 with outer wall 622 as a base end, a direction from the outside of main board accommodating portion 612 or sub-board accommodating portion 614 toward the inside), and the restricting piece protrudes in the first direction, so that the restricting piece restricts the second board from being removed, and the protruding length of the restricting piece (for example, a direction away from outer wall 622 with outer wall 622 as a base end) the length of the portion protruding from the mounting portion is longer than the distance the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion, the mounting portion has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, the board support portion forms a predetermined space between the second board and the mounting portion, a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) on the second board that does not have a wiring pattern formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second region can contact the second board.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, while allowing the second board to move, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. Furthermore, even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring pattern formed on the second board. Furthermore, no matter where the second board is moved, it can be reliably prevented from coming off the mounting portion, allowing it to move freely within the mounting portion's accommodation space and enabling smooth connection between connectors. It also reduces the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing for smooth movement of the second board and preventing damage to the wiring pattern on the second board.

(10) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a third connector that can be connected to the first connector. The second board has a second connector (for example, a main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the attachment portion is configured to be movable in a first direction (for example, an outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 as a base end and a connector extending from the outer wall 622 22, and a direction from the outside of the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion 614 toward the inside thereof), the restricting pieces restrict the second board from being removed by protruding in the first direction, and the protruding length of the restricting pieces (for example, the length of the part protruding from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as its base end) is longer than the distance the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion, and the mounting portion is configured to contact the second board. This gaming machine has a board support portion (for example, board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), and when the second board is attached to the attachment portion, the board support portion forms a predetermined space between the second board and the attachment portion, and the second board has a second region (for example, ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) on which no wiring pattern is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second region can come into contact with the second board.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves were the norm, and frequent insertion and removal of connectors posed the problem of connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, and therefore the connectors are also larger. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the boards or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, regardless of the position of the second board, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. The second board can be freely moved within the mounting portion's accommodation space, allowing for smooth connection between the connectors. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc. on the second substrate.

(11) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), wherein the first board has a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector connectable to the first connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), The second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and is configured so that the second board is movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board has an opening (for example, a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), the attachment portion has a protrusion (for example, a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) corresponding to the opening of the second board, and the protrusion has a screw hole (for example, a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (for example, a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and When the screw is inserted through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area where at least a part of the head of the screw (e.g., head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area where no wiring pattern is formed is formed in the area, and the attachment portion has a restricting piece (e.g., first restricting piece 628a or second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) protruding in a first direction (e.g., a direction away from outer wall 622 with outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 as a base end, or a direction from the outside to the inside of main board accommodating portion 612 or sub-board accommodating portion 614), and the restricting piece protruding in the first direction restricts removal of the second board, The protruding length of the restricting piece (for example, the length of the portion protruding from outer wall 622 with outer wall 622 as its base end) is longer than the distance the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion, the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a screw (for example, connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting portion has a board support portion (for example, board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is mounted to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, and part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, second connectors connected board-to-board on the second board tend to have a large number of pins, which increases the size of the connector. Therefore, moving only the large connector increases the risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact. However, by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. Furthermore, while allowing the second board to move, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. Furthermore, even if the second board is moved while the screw head is in contact with the second board, it is possible to prevent damage to the wiring pattern formed on the second board. Furthermore, no matter where the second board is moved, it is possible to reliably prevent it from coming off the mounting portion, allowing it to move freely within the mounting portion's accommodation space and enabling smooth connection between connectors. It is also possible to reduce the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion, reducing friction when the second board moves and allowing the second board to move smoothly. Furthermore, even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided.

Furthermore, in the gaming machines described in (1) to (11) above, the second board may be configured to be movable in an in-plane direction while attached to the attachment portion.

With this configuration, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved in the in-plane direction, allowing for fine adjustments to the connectors' positions and preventing the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connectors themselves and damage to the connector pins.

Furthermore, in the gaming machines described in (1) to (11) above, the second board may have multiple types of components in addition to the second connector (for example, the sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, main-side power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 shown in FIG. 32), and the second connector may be taller than the multiple types of components (having a higher maximum height from the component mounting surface of the board).

With this configuration, when the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board are plugged in or unplugged, other components mounted on the second board can be prevented from coming into contact with the first board, etc., and damage to other components mounted on the second board can be prevented in advance.

<Reel relay board unit/various harnesses, bundling parts>
Next, various harnesses connected to the reel relay board unit and the bundling section for bundling the harnesses will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 45 is a front view showing the interior of the main body 101, illustrating the connection relationship between the reel relay board unit 700 and reels 110-112.

As explained using Figure 2, the reel relay board unit 700 is connected to the power relay board unit 600 above the reels 110-112 arranged inside the main body 101. In other words, the three reels 110-112 are located on the back side (below) of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub-reel relay board 772 (second board) of the reel relay board unit 700.

In addition, in this example, the imaginary center line L3 passing through the horizontal center of the reels 110-112 (the center of the middle reel 110) is configured not to coincide with the imaginary center line L4 passing through the horizontal center of the space 790 formed between the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) (a position equidistant from the main reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772).

In other words, the positions of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub reel relay board 772 (second board) are configured to be slightly shifted to the left in the direction in which the reels 110-112 are arranged (horizontal direction).

In this example, compared to when the imaginary center line L3 of the reels 110-112 and the imaginary center line L4 of the space 790 are aligned, the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) formed on the main side cover 746 of the main side reel relay board unit 740 can be positioned closer to the imaginary center line L3 passing through the horizontal center of the reels 110-112 (the center of the middle reel 110). This makes it easier to handle the harnesses connecting the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the reels 110-112, allows the harnesses to be concentrated in the space, and prevents the harnesses from becoming disjointed, resulting in lower costs.

A first binding portion 781 and a second binding portion 782 capable of holding multiple harnesses are arranged at the top of the left reel housing 110a, in which the left reel 110 is rotatably housed, and a third binding portion 783 and a fourth binding portion 784 capable of holding multiple harnesses are arranged at the top of the middle reel housing 111a, in which the middle reel 111 is rotatably housed. It goes without saying that the number and arrangement of binding portions capable of holding harnesses are not limited to this example.

The first binding part 781 and the second binding part 782 are made up of stretchable cable ties, both ends of which are fixed to the top surface of the left reel housing 110a. The harness can be held in place by pulling the center part upward and passing the harness through the gap formed below. In this example, the first binding part 781 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the front-to-rear direction of the front door 102, while the second binding part 782 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the left-to-right direction of the front door 102.

The third binding portion 783 and the fourth binding portion 784 are made up of stretchable cable ties, with both ends fixed to the top surface of the middle reel housing 111a. The harness can be held in place by pulling the center portion upward and passing the harness through the gap formed below. In this example, the third binding portion 783 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the front-to-rear direction of the front door 102, while the fourth binding portion 784 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the left-to-right direction of the front door 102.

The main side first harness MHN1 is a harness for connecting the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the motor, index, etc. of the left reel 110. This main side first harness MHN1 has the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 as its base end, passes through the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) formed on the main side cover 746 of the main side reel relay board unit 740, and is guided below the main side reel relay board unit 740. After being held by the fourth binding portion 784 above the middle reel 111 and the first binding portion 781 above the left reel 110, it passes through the left reel harness guide port 110b and is connected to the connector (not shown) of the left reel 110.

The main side second harness MHN1 is a harness for connecting the main side reel relay board third connector MRC3 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the motor, index, etc. of the middle reel 111. This main side second harness MHN2 has the main side reel relay board third connector MRC3 as its base end, passes through the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) of the main side cover 746, and is guided below the main side reel relay board unit 740. After being held by the fourth binding portion 784 above the middle reel 111, it passes through the middle reel harness guide port 111b and connects to the connector (not shown) of the middle reel 111.

The main side third harness MHN3 is a harness for connecting the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the motor, index, etc. of the right reel 112. This main side third harness MHN3 has the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 as its base end, passes through the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) of the main side cover 746, and is guided below the main side reel relay board unit 740. After being held by the fourth bundling portion 784 above the middle reel 111, it passes through the right reel harness guide port 112b and connects to the connector (not shown) of the right reel 112.

The sub-side first harness SHN1 is a harness for connecting the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the motor, index, etc. of the left reel 110. This sub-side first harness SHN1 has the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 as its base end, passes through the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) of the main-side cover 746, and is guided below the main-side reel relay board unit 740. After being held by the second binding portion 782 above the left reel 110, it passes through the left reel harness guide port 110b and connects to the left reel 110 (not shown).

The sub-side second harness SHN1 is a harness for connecting the sub-side reel relay board third connector MRC3 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the motor, index, etc. of the middle reel 111. This sub-side second harness SHN2 has the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3 as its base end, passes through the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) of the main-side cover 746, and is guided below the main-side reel relay board unit 740. After being held by the second binding portion 782 above the left reel 110, it passes through the middle reel harness guide port 111b and is connected to the middle reel 111 (not shown).

The sub-side third harness SHN3 is a harness for connecting the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the motor, index, etc. of the right reel 112. This sub-side third harness SHN3 has the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 as its base end, passes through the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) of the main-side cover 746, and is guided below the main-side reel relay board unit 740. After being held by the second binding portion 782 above the left reel 110 and the third binding portion 783 above the center reel 111, it passes through the right reel harness guide port 112b and is connected to the right reel 112 (not shown).

As mentioned above, in this example, the positions of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) are configured to be slightly offset to the left in the direction in which the reels 110-112 are arranged (horizontal direction), and therefore the left reel harness guide port 110b, middle reel harness guide port 111b, and right reel harness guide port 112b are also slightly offset to the left relative to the positions of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board).

In this example, compared to when the imaginary center line L3 of the reels 110-112 and the imaginary center line L4 of the space 790 are aligned, it is possible to change the routing of the harness connecting the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub-reel relay board 772 (second board) to the reels 110-112, which may make it easier to route the harness.

In addition, in this example, the maximum width of the gap formed between the harness holding portion 746d (restriction portion) of the main-side cover 746 and the sub-side cover 776 is shorter than the longitudinal length of the smallest connector of the main-side reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board).

According to this example, even if the harness unexpectedly becomes detached from the connector, it may be possible to prevent the harness connector from falling downward through the gap formed between the harness holding portion 746d (restraint portion) and the sub-side cover body 776, thereby preventing problems such as those caused by the harness becoming detached.

The main side fourth harness MHN4 is a harness for connecting the main side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the main control board 210a (see Figure 2).

The sub-side fourth harness SHN4 to the sub-side sixth harness SHN6 are harnesses that connect the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the sub-control board 220a (see Figure 2), respectively.

In this example, the other side (the back side of the main reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772) of the first board (main-side reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub-side reel relay board 772) is provided with portions (first bundling portion 781 to fourth bundling portion 784) that bundle the first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3) and the second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3). The first wiring and second wiring that have been guided to the other side (the back side of the main reel relay board 742 or the sub-side reel relay board 772) of the first board (main reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub-side reel relay board 772) can be bundled downstream (near the reels 110-112 to which they are connected), preventing the first wiring and second wiring from becoming disorganized and allowing the state of the first wiring and second wiring to be reliably visually confirmed.

In addition, the device includes a restriction portion (harness holding portion 746d) that restricts the first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3) and the second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3) from being positioned in an area other than the space formed between the first board (main-side reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub-side reel relay board 772). This allows the first wiring and the second wiring to be concentrated in the space 790 (the space formed between the main-side reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772), making it easy and reliable to visually check the status of the first wiring and the second wiring. Furthermore, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board is minimized, creating space for other wiring, etc., and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring and the second wiring, thereby preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring and the second wiring.

In addition, because the restricting portion (harness holding portion 746d) is provided on the board case (main side lid 746), the restricting portion can be positioned near the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring that protrudes to one side of the first board or the second board, and creating space for other wiring, etc.

In addition, the restricting portion (harness holding portion 746d) is provided on the board case (main side lid body 746) and is a portion that protrudes toward the space portion (space portion 790). Therefore, even if the restricting portion is provided, the board case does not become larger than necessary, thereby enabling space saving. In addition, the restricting portion can be positioned near the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring that protrudes to one side of the first board and the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

In addition, the first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3) and the second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3) are connected to electronic components (motors and indexes for reels 110-112) on the other side (the back side of the main-side reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772) of the first board (main-side reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub-side reel relay board 772). This allows the first wiring and second wiring to be connected to electronic components located on the other side of the first board and the second board, and allows the first wiring and second wiring to be connected to electronic components via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the first wiring and second wiring.

Furthermore, first reel wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3) connected to each of the multiple reels is connected as the first wiring to one side of the first board (front surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742), and second reel wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3) connected to each of the multiple reels is connected as the second wiring to one side of the second board (front surface 778a of the sub side reel relay board 772), and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring pass through the space to the first board Because the wiring is guided to the other side (the back side of the main reel relay board 742 or sub-side reel relay board 772) of the first board and the second board (main reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub-side reel relay board 772), the first wiring and second wiring can be connected to reels placed on the other side of the first board and the second board. This allows the first wiring and second wiring to be connected to reels, which are often placed on the front side of the gaming machine, via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the reel wiring and making it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

The first board (main-side reel relay board 742) is connected to the first control unit (main control board 210a) via a connector (main-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5) located on one end of the first board, and is connected to the first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3) via connectors (main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main-side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4) located on the other end of the first board. The second board (sub-side reel relay board 772) is connected to the first control unit (main control board 210a) via connectors (sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to sub-side The reels are connected to the second control unit (sub-control board 220a) via the seventh reel relay board connector SRC7, and to the second wiring (first sub-side harness SHN1 to third sub-side harness SHN3) via connectors located on the other end of the second board (second sub-reel relay board connector SRC2 to fourth sub-reel relay board connector SRC4). This makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for workers. In addition, the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the reel wiring.

<Reel relay board unit/various harnesses, binding parts/assembly>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the main reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), a second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a board case (for example, the main housing 744 and the main lid 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), or the sub housing 774 and the sub-lid 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)). In the gaming machine equipped with the above-mentioned first board, at least first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the first board (for example, the surface 748a on the front side of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and second wiring (sub-side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the above-mentioned second board (for example, the surface 778a on the front side of the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44). a harness SHN1 to a sub-side third harness SHN3) are connected to each other, the first board and the second board are arranged with a space (for example, the space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 45) between them, the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the face of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main-side reel relay board 742), the second wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the face of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-side reel relay board 772), and is guided through the space to the other side of the first board and the second board, and the gaming machine is provided with a restricting part (for example, the harness holding part 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space from being positioned in an area other than the space.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is equipped with a restricting section that can restrict the first wiring and second wiring from being positioned in an area other than the space formed between the first board and the second board. This allows the first wiring and second wiring to be concentrated in the space, making it easy and reliable to visually check the state of the first wiring and second wiring. It also minimizes the amount of wiring that protrudes to one side of the first board and the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc., and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring or second wiring, thereby preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring or second wiring.

The restricting portion may also be provided on the circuit board case.

With this configuration, the restricting portion can be positioned close to the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring that protrudes to one side of the first board or the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

Furthermore, the first wiring and the second wiring may be connected to electronic components (e.g., motors and indexes of reels 110-112 shown in Figures 2 and 45) on the opposite side of the first substrate and the second substrate.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to electronic components arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the electronic components via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the first wiring and the second wiring.

Furthermore, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in Figures 2 and 45), and first reel wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the first board as the first wiring, and second reel wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the second board as the second wiring, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided into the space may pass through the space and be guided to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and second wiring can be connected to the reels located on the other side of the first board and second board, and the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

The system also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel. The first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is also connected to a connector arranged on the other end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second wiring via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for workers. It also allows the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the reel wiring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), a second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a board case (for example, the main side housing 744 and main side lid body 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), or the sub-side housing 774 and sub-side lid body 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)), and one side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44) At least first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the second board (for example, the surface 778a of the front side of the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) via a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 shown in FIG. 44 or 45). At least the second wiring (the sub-side first harness SHN1 to the sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected via the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7, the first board and the second board are arranged with a space (for example, the space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) and FIG. 45) between them, the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main-side reel relay board 742), and the second wiring A portion of the wire passes through the space and is guided to the opposite side of the surface of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-side reel relay board 772), and the outer shape of the first connector is rectangular, the outer shape of the second connector is rectangular, and the positions on the extension lines of the long sides of the first connector and the second connector are offset from each other (the first connector and the second connector are arranged offset from each other's positions on the extension lines of their longitudinal directions).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first connector and the second connector are positioned offset from each other's longitudinal extensions. This prevents the first wiring and the second wiring from overlapping in the space, even when the first wiring and the second wiring are guided into the same space. This allows the first wiring and the second wiring to be concentrated in the space, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

Furthermore, the longitudinal direction of the first connector may be the direction from the connection position of the first connector toward the space, and the longitudinal direction of the second connector may be the direction from the connection position of the second connector toward the space.

With this configuration, even when the first wiring and the second wiring are guided into the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, making it possible to easily and reliably visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring.

It may also be provided with a restricting portion (for example, the harness holding portion 746d shown in Figures 40 and 45) that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided into the space from being positioned in an area other than the space.

This configuration provides a restriction section that can restrict the first wiring and second wiring from being positioned in areas other than the space formed between the first and second substrates, allowing the first wiring and second wiring to be concentrated in the space and the state of the first wiring and second wiring to be easily and reliably visually confirmed. It also minimizes the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first and second substrates, creating space for other wiring, etc., and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring or second wiring, thereby preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring or second wiring.

The restricting portion may also be provided on the circuit board case.

With this configuration, the restricting portion can be positioned close to the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring that protrudes to one side of the first board or the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

Furthermore, the first wiring and the second wiring may be connected to electronic components (e.g., motors and indexes of reels 110-112 shown in Figures 2 and 45) on the opposite sides of the first substrate and the second substrate.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to electronic components arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the electronic components via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the first wiring and the second wiring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIGS. 44 and 45) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (for example, the main-side container 744 and the main-side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37), and at least a plurality of first wirings (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) are connected to one side of the first board (for example, the front surface 748a of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), The wiring passes over a certain side of the first board and is guided to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main reel relay board 742), and is equipped with a restricting section (for example, the harness holding section 746d shown in Figures 40 and 45) that can restrict the movement of the first wiring that is guided over the certain side of the first board, and a section (for example, the first bundling section 781 and fourth bundling section 784 shown in Figure 45) that can bundle the first wiring is provided at a predetermined position on the opposite side of the surface of the first board.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is equipped with a restricting portion that can restrict the first wiring from being positioned outside both ends of a certain side of the first board. This allows the first wiring to be concentrated near a certain side of the first board, making it easy and reliable to visually check the state of the first wiring. Furthermore, the amount of wiring protruding from one side of the first board can be minimized, creating space for other wiring, and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring, preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring. Furthermore, a portion for bundling the first wiring is provided on the other side of the first board. This allows the first wiring guided to the other side of the first board to be bundled downstream, preventing the first wiring from becoming disorganized and allowing for reliable visual check of the state of the first wiring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), a second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a board case (for example, the main-side housing body 744 and the main-side cover body 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), and the sub-side housing body 774 and the sub-side cover body 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)), and one of the first boards At least first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to a surface on one side of the second board (for example, the surface 748a on the front side of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and at least second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to a surface on one side of the second board (for example, the surface 778a on the front side of the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44), The gaming machine is characterized in that the first board and the second board are arranged with a space (for example, space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 45) between them, the first wiring passes through the space and is guided to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main reel relay board 742), and the second wiring passes through the space and is guided to the opposite side of the surface of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-reel relay board 772), the gaming machine is equipped with a restricting portion (for example, harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space from being positioned in an area other than the space, and portions (for example, first bundling portion 781 to fourth bundling portion 784 shown in FIG. 45) that can bundle the first wiring and the second wiring are provided at predetermined positions on the opposite sides of the surfaces of the first board and the second board.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is equipped with a restricting portion that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring from being positioned in an area other than the space formed between the first board and the second board. This allows the first wiring and the second wiring to be concentrated in the space, making it easy and reliable to visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring. Furthermore, the amount of wiring protruding from one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, creating space for other wiring, and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring and the second wiring, thereby preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring and the second wiring. Furthermore, a portion for bundling the first wiring and the second wiring is provided on the other side of the first board and the second board. This allows the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the other side of the first board and the second board to be bundled downstream, preventing the first wiring and the second wiring from becoming disorganized and allowing the state of the first wiring and the second wiring to be visually checked with ease.

The restricting portion may also be provided on the circuit board case.

With this configuration, the restricting portion can be positioned close to the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring that protrudes to one side of the first board or the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

In addition, a space (for example, a gap formed between the harness holding portion 746d of the main-side cover 746 and the sub-side cover 776, as shown in Figure 45) may be provided that does not restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided into the space from being positioned in an area other than the space.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring or second wiring extends into an area other than the space, the first wiring or second wiring can be accommodated in the space without having to be reconnected.

Furthermore, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in Figures 2 and 45), and first reel wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the first board as the first wiring, and second reel wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the second board as the second wiring, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided into the space may pass through the space and be guided to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and second wiring can be connected to the reels located on the other side of the first board and second board, and the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

The system also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel. The first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is also connected to a connector arranged on the other end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second wiring via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for workers. It also allows the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the reel wiring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or 451), a second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a board case (for example, the main-side housing body 744 and the main-side cover body 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), and the sub-side housing body 774 and the sub-side cover body 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)). At least first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the first board (for example, the surface 748a on the front side of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the second board (for example, the surface 778a on the front side of the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44). a third harness SHN3) is connected to the first board and the second board; the first board and the second board are arranged with a space (for example, the space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 45) between them; a portion of the first wiring passes through the space and is guided to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main reel relay board 742); and a portion of the second wiring passes through the space and is guided to the opposite side of the surface of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-reel relay board 772); the gaming machine is equipped with a restricting portion (for example, the harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space from being positioned in an area other than the space; the restricting portion is provided on the board case and protrudes toward the space.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is equipped with a restricting portion that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring from being positioned in an area other than the space formed between the first board and the second board. This allows the first wiring and the second wiring to be concentrated in the space, making it easy and reliable to visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring. Furthermore, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, creating space for other wiring, etc., and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring or the second wiring, thereby preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring or the second wiring. Furthermore, because the restricting portion is provided on the board case and protrudes toward the space, the board case does not become larger than necessary even when the restricting portion is provided, thereby saving space. Furthermore, the restricting portion can be positioned near the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

Furthermore, at least a first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the first board (for example, the front surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44) via a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 shown in FIGS. 44 and 45), and a second wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the second board (for example, the front surface 778a of the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 45) via a second connector (for example, the sub side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in FIGS. 44 and 45). At least two wires (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) are connected, the outer shape of the first connector is rectangular, the outer shape of the second connector is rectangular, the positions on the extensions of the long sides of the first connector and the positions on the extensions of the long sides of the second connector are offset from each other, the shortest distance from the second connector to the outer edge of the second board on the extensions of the short sides of the second connector (for example, shortest distance L2 shown in FIG. 44) is shorter than the shortest distance from the first connector to the outer edge of the first board on the extensions of the short sides of the first connector (for example, shortest distance L1 shown in FIG. 44), and the restricting portion may be provided on the first board.

With this configuration, even when the first wiring and the second wiring are guided into the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, making it possible to easily and reliably visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring.

Furthermore, the longitudinal direction of the first connector may be the direction from the connection position of the first connector toward the space, and the longitudinal direction of the second connector may be the direction from the connection position of the second connector toward the space.

With this configuration, even when the first wiring and the second wiring are guided into the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, making it possible to easily and reliably visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring.

Furthermore, a space may be provided that does not restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided into the space from being positioned in an area other than the space.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring or second wiring extends into an area other than the space, the first wiring or second wiring can be accommodated in the space without having to be reconnected.

Furthermore, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in Figures 2 and 45), and first reel wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the first board as the first wiring, and second reel wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the second board as the second wiring, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided into the space may pass through the space and be guided to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and second wiring can be connected to the reels located on the other side of the first board and second board, and the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

The system also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel. The first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is also connected to a connector arranged on the other end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second wiring via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for workers. It also allows the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the reel wiring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), a second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a board case (for example, the main side housing 744 and the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), and the sub-side housing 774 and the sub-side cover 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)), and the first At least first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the board (for example, the surface 748a on the front side of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the second board (for example, the surface 778a on the front side of the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44). the first and second boards are at least connected, the first and second boards are arranged with a space (e.g., space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 45) between them, at least a portion of the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (e.g., the back side of the main reel relay board 742), and at least a portion of the second wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (e.g., the back side of the sub-reel relay board 772), and a restricting portion (e.g., harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) is provided that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided through the space from being positioned in an area other than the space, and when the restricting portion is in place, the first wiring and the second wiring can be pulled out of the space adjacent to the restricting portion.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is equipped with a restricting portion that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring from being positioned in an area other than the space formed between the first board and the second board. This allows the first wiring and the second wiring to be concentrated in the space, making it easy and reliable to visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring. Furthermore, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, creating space for other wiring, and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring or the second wiring, thereby preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring or the second wiring. Furthermore, because a space is provided next to the restricting portion at the location where the restricting portion is located, even if the first wiring or the second wiring protrudes into an area other than the space, the first wiring or the second wiring can be accommodated in the space without having to be reconnected.

Furthermore, at least a first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the first board (for example, the front surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44) via a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 shown in FIGS. 44 and 45), and a second wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the second board (for example, the front surface 778a of the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) via a second connector (for example, the sub side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in FIGS. 44 and 45). At least two wires (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) are connected, the outer shape of the first connector is rectangular, the outer shape of the second connector is rectangular, the positions on the extensions of the long sides of the first connector and the positions on the extensions of the long sides of the second connector are offset from each other, the shortest distance from the second connector to the outer edge of the second board on the extensions of the short sides of the second connector (for example, shortest distance L2 shown in FIG. 44) is shorter than the shortest distance from the first connector to the outer edge of the first board on the extensions of the short sides of the first connector (for example, shortest distance L1 shown in FIG. 44), and the restricting portion may be provided on the first board.

With this configuration, even when the first wiring and the second wiring are guided into the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, making it possible to easily and reliably visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring.

Furthermore, portions capable of bundling the first wiring and the second wiring (for example, first bundling portion 781 to fourth bundling portion 784 shown in FIG. 45) may be provided at predetermined positions on the opposite sides of the surfaces of the first substrate and the second substrate.

With this configuration, the first wiring and second wiring guided to the other side of the first board and second board can be bundled downstream, preventing the first wiring and second wiring from becoming disorganized and allowing the state of the first wiring and second wiring to be reliably visually confirmed.

Furthermore, the longitudinal direction of the first connector may be the direction from the connection position of the first connector toward the space, and the longitudinal direction of the second connector may be the direction from the connection position of the second connector toward the space.

With this configuration, even when the first wiring and the second wiring are guided into the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, making it possible to easily and reliably visually check the state of the first wiring and the second wiring.

Furthermore, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in Figures 2 and 45), and first reel wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the first board as the first wiring, and second reel wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in Figure 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels may be connected to one surface of the second board as the second wiring, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided into the space may pass through the space and be guided to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and second wiring can be connected to the reels located on the other side of the first board and second board, and the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

The system also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel. The first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is also connected to a connector arranged on the other end of the first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second wiring via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for workers. It also allows the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the reel wiring.

The "first board" and "second board" according to the present invention may be boards provided on the door side (for example, the back side of the front door 102) or on the cabinet side (for example, the inside of the main body 101). The "first board" and "second board" according to the present invention may be arranged perpendicular to the gaming machine (vertically, up and down), or may be arranged stacked in the front-to-back direction of the gaming machine, and both boards may be configured to be electrically connected to each other via a connector and wiring.

The "first substrate" and "second substrate" according to the present invention may each be housed in a separate substrate case, or both substrates may be housed in a single substrate case, with a recess formed between the two substrates in the substrate case, and this recess serving as the "space" according to the present invention. In other words, the "space" according to the present invention may simply be the space formed between the "first substrate" and the "second substrate."

The "restriction portion" according to the present invention may also be formed by a boss or hook that can be attached to a base or the like that faces between the board cases. In other words, there are no restrictions on the shape, etc., as long as it can come into contact with the wiring and has the function of restricting the movement of the wiring, and the movement of the wiring is more easily restricted than if there was no restriction portion.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows an example in which the "restriction portion" according to the present invention is formed on the side surface of one of the board cases, they may be arranged alternately on the sides of both board cases, or may be arranged at the same position in the front-to-back direction of the board cases. Furthermore, the number of restriction portions formed on the side surface of each board case may be one or more, and the number of restriction portions on each side may be the same or different.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows an example in which the longitudinal direction of the connector is oriented along the wiring guided from the connector into the space, the lateral direction of the connector may also be oriented along the wiring guided from the connector into the space. In this case, by increasing the amount of misalignment between the positions of the first and second connectors on their respective longitudinal extension lines, it is possible to avoid the thickness of the wiring in the longitudinal direction and prevent the wiring from becoming too concentrated (too concentrated in one place).

The wiring of each connector may also be bundled around the "restriction portion" of the present invention. In this case, the wiring can be concentrated without shifting the position of the connector on the "first board" of the present invention, which may prevent the wiring of multiple connectors from becoming too concentrated in one place in the space. Furthermore, even if the short side of the connector is oriented along the wiring that is guided from the connector into the space, it may not be necessary to make significant differences in the relative positions of the connectors.

In addition, the "board case" of the present invention includes not only those that can accommodate the entire board, but also those that only have a base on which the backside of the board is placed, and those that can accommodate only part of the board.

In addition, while the above embodiment shows an example of the wiring of the reel unit, the wiring may be guided from an appropriate position relative to the guide port on the reel side for the three reels (left, center, and right). For example, some of the wiring connected to the "first board" and "second board" of the present invention may be guided to the reel without passing through the space. In other words, wiring other than the "first wiring" and "second wiring" of the present invention may be provided.

Furthermore, although a door has been exemplified as a movable object that can come into contact with the wiring, this is not limiting. Even without a movable object, there is also the effect of preventing the wiring from getting in the way during maintenance, etc.

<Connection status between power supply board and reel board>
Next, the connection state between the power supply board (second board) and the reel board (first board) will be described with reference to Figures 46 and 47.

Here, "power supply board (second board)" is a general term for the main-side power supply relay board 640 and sub-side power supply relay board 670 of the power supply relay board unit 600 described using Figure 32 etc. In this specification, the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 may be abbreviated to "power supply main board 640" and "power supply sub-board 670", respectively.

Figure 46 (a-1) is a front view of the power supply main board 640 and power supply sub-board 670, and Figure 46 (a-2) is a bottom view of the power supply main board 640 and power supply sub-board 670, viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol D (bottom side) in the front view of Figure 46 (a-1).

<Connection status between power relay board and reel relay board/power main board>
Next, the power supply main board 640 (second board) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2).

The power supply main board 640 (second board) is composed of a base material 642 made of a rectangular plate, and a resin main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector), main power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and main power supply relay board third connector MVC3 mounted (disposed) on the component side (surface) 642a of this base material 642.

The power supply main board 640 is electrically connected to the connectors on the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using Figure 2 via the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the main control board 210a and the power supply board.

Threaded holes 648 are formed on both the left and right ends of the main power relay board first connector MVC1, into which connector screws 644 and nuts 645 can be inserted to secure the main power relay board first connector MVC1 to the base material 642. Note that all connectors other than the main power relay board first connector MVC1 are soldered to the base material 642, and the main power relay board first connector MVC1 is the only component secured to the base material 642 with screws.

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 649 (resin members) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 are formed on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1, located inward (inside) of the two screw holes 648. These fixing pins 649 are used to position the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 relative to the power supply main board 640 when fixing the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to the power supply main board 640 with connector screws 644 and nuts 645.

The fixing pin 649 can penetrate the base material 642 through a through-hole formed in the base material 642. When the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is fixed to the power supply main board 640, a portion 649a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 649 protrudes from the surface (solder surface 642b) opposite the surface (component surface 642a) on which the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is mounted. In this example, the length of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 649 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 642b) is L21.

As shown in Figure 46 (a-1), three through holes 642c are formed in the upper left corner, center left corner, and lower right corner of the base material 642 when viewed from the front, at positions corresponding to the three board loose-fit bosses 624 (protrusions) (see Figure 32) erected on the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board accommodating section 612 (mounting section).

The component surface 642a of the base material 642 is provided with the main power relay board first connector MVC1 to main power relay board third connector MVC3, as well as a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc. In this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 641 is formed around the through-hole 642c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 46(a-2) and 33, no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 642b of the substrate 642, but a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed. In addition, the tips of the lead terminals MVLD of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 mounted on the component surface 642a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of these lead terminals MVLD to the wiring patterns, etc. on the solder surface 642b.

In addition, two connector screws 644 (second screws) are attached to the solder surface 642b to secure the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 from the solder surface 642b side.

The connector screw 644 is inserted from the solder surface 642b side of the base material 642 through the screw hole 648 toward the component surface 642a side, with its tip exposed on the component surface 642a side, and a nut 645 is fastened to the exposed tip. In this way, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector) is fixed to the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 by two sets of connector screws 644 (second screws) and nuts 645.

In this example, the second connector (main-side power relay board first connector MVC1) is fixed to one surface (solder surface 642b) of the second board (power main board 640) using fixing means (connector screws 644 and nuts 645). This makes it difficult for the second connector (main-side power relay board first connector MVC1) to come off the second board (power main board 640), even when the connectors of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the second connector (main-side power relay board first connector MVC1), the force applied from the first connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the second connector (main-side power relay board first connector MVC1) can be absorbed by the fixing means (connector screws 644 and nuts 645), ensuring a reliable connection between the connectors.

As shown in Figure 46 (a-2), on the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640, the lead terminal MVLD of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is located approximately in the center, with fixing pins 649 located on both outside sides of it, and connector screws 644 located on both outside sides of those.

In this example, the connector screws 644 are positioned further outward than the fixing pins 649 on the power supply main board 640, so the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 can be securely fixed to the power supply main board 640, making it difficult for the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to come off the power supply main board 640 even when the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached.

Also, as shown in Figure 33, multiple circular solid ground patterns 643 (areas without wiring patterns) are formed on the solder surface 642b of the substrate 642 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) formed on the main-side board accommodating section 612.

Each area of the ground pattern 643 includes the area where the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can come into contact, and is wider than the area where the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640 can come into contact with the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b).

In this example, the area of the second board (power supply main board 640) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern (area without wiring patterns), making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (power supply main board 640) and preventing damage to wiring patterns other than the ground pattern on the second board (power supply main board 640).

In particular, the convex portions (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b)) are cylindrical, and the ground pattern 643 is circular, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (power supply main board 640).

As described above, when the power supply main board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640 is supported by the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and the multiple outer wall bosses 622a formed at predetermined intervals along the outer wall 622. When the power supply main board 640 is moved within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the power supply main board 640 is configured to be able to slide (move slidably) on the board support bosses 626 and outer wall bosses 622a.

In this example, the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) has convex portions (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a) protruding from the bottom surface of the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), and the second board (power supply main board 640) is configured to be able to move while in contact with the convex portions (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a). This reduces the contact area between the second board (power supply main board 640) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), reduces friction when the second board (power supply main board 640) moves, and allows the second board (power supply main board 640) to move smoothly.

Furthermore, because the board support boss 626 is a cylindrical member with a through hole formed in the center, the contact area between the power supply main board 640 and the main-side board accommodating portion 612 of the board support body 610 can be further reduced, allowing the power supply main board 640 to move smoothly relative to the board support body 610.

In other words, because the convex portions (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b)) have portions that do not come into contact with the second board (main power board 640), the contact area between the second board (main power board 640) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) can be reduced, allowing the second board (main power board 640) to move smoothly relative to the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612).

In addition, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) allow the power supply main board 640 to be held at a position higher than the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board housing portion 612, and a space can be formed between the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640 and the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board housing portion 612. This prevents components such as connector screws 644 attached to the solder surface 642a of the power supply main board 640 from interfering with the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board housing portion 612.

In other words, a portion of the fixing means (connector screw 644) is configured to be able to be accommodated in the space formed between one surface (solder surface 642b) of the second board (power supply main board 640) and the bottom surface (bottom surface 620) of the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612). Therefore, even when the second board (power supply main board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), contact between the fixing means (connector screw 644 and nut 645) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) can be avoided.

<Connection status of power relay board and reel relay board/power sub-board>
Next, the power supply sub-board 670 (second board) will be described with reference to Figures 46(a-1) and (a-2).

The power supply sub-board 670 (second board) is composed of a base material 672 made of a rectangular plate, and a resin sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector), sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, and sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 mounted (disposed) on the component surface 672a of this base material 672.

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is electrically connected to the connectors on the power supply board of the power supply unit 252 described using Figure 2 via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and serves as a relay between the sub-control board 220a and the power supply board.

Threaded holes 678 are formed on both the left and right ends of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1, into which connector screws 674 and nuts 675 can be inserted to secure the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the base material 672. Note that all connectors other than the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 are soldered to the base material 672, and the only component secured to the base material 672 with screws is the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1.

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 679 (made of resin) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 are formed on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1, located inward (inside) of the two screw holes 678. These fixing pins 679 are used to position the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 relative to the power supply sub-board 670 when fixing the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the power supply sub-board 670 with connector screws 674 and nuts 675.

The fixing pin 679 can penetrate the base material 672 through a through-hole formed in the base material 672. When the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 is fixed to the power supply sub-board 670, a portion 679a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 679 protrudes from the surface (solder surface 672b) opposite the surface (component surface 672a) on which the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 is mounted. In this example, the length of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 679 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 672b) is L21.

As shown in Figure 46 (a-1), three through holes 672c are formed in the upper right corner, center right side, and lower left corner of the base material 672 when viewed from the front, at positions corresponding to three board loose-fit bosses 674 (protrusions) (see Figure 32) erected on the bottom surface 620 of the sub-side board accommodating section 614 (mounting section).

The component surface 672a of the base material 672 is provided with the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, as well as a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc. In this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 671 is formed around the through-hole 672c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 46(a-2) and 33, no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface 672b of the substrate 672, but a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed. In addition, the tips of the lead terminals SVLD of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 mounted on the component surface 672a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of these lead terminals SVLD to the wiring patterns, etc. on the solder surface 672b.

In addition, two connector screws 674 (second screws) are attached to the solder surface 672b to secure the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 from the solder surface 672b side.

The connector screw 674 is inserted from the solder surface 672b side of the power supply sub-board 670 through the screw hole 678 toward the component surface 672a side, with its tip exposed on the component surface 672a side, and a nut 675 is fastened to the exposed tip. In this way, the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector) is fixed to the base material 672 of the power supply sub-board 670 by two sets of connector screws 674 (second screws) and nuts 675.

As shown in Figure 46 (a-2), on the solder surface 672b of the power supply sub-board 670, the lead terminal SVLD of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 is located approximately in the center, with fixing pins 679 located on both outside sides of it, and connector screws 674 located on both outside sides of those.

In this example, the connector screws 674 are positioned further outward than the fixing pins 679 on the power supply sub-board 670, so the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 can be securely fixed to the power supply sub-board 670, making it difficult for the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to come off the power supply sub-board 670 even when the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached.

Also, as shown in Figure 33, multiple circular solid ground patterns 673 (areas without wiring patterns) are formed on the solder surface 672b of the base material 672 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) formed on the sub-side board accommodating section 614.

Each area of the ground pattern 673 includes the area where the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) can come into contact, and is wider than the area where the solder surface 672b of the power supply sub-board 670 can come into contact with the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b).

In this example, the area of the second board (power supply sub-board 670) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern (area without wiring patterns), making effective use of the limited area of the second board (power supply sub-board 670) and preventing damage to the wiring patterns, etc., of the second board (power supply sub-board 670).

In particular, the convex portions (board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b)) are cylindrical, and the ground pattern 673 is circular, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (power supply sub-board 670).

The relationship between the power supply sub-board 670 and the sub-side board housing portion 614 is substantially the same as the relationship between the power supply main board 640 and the main board housing portion 612, and when the power supply sub-board 670 is moved within the board housing space of the sub-board housing portion 614, the power supply sub-board 670 is configured to be able to slide (move slidably) on the board support bosses and outer wall bosses. As the structures of the two are the same or similar, a description of this will be omitted.

<Connection status between power relay board and reel relay board/reel board>
Next, the reel substrate (first substrate) will be described.

Here, "reel board (first board)" is a general term for the main-side reel relay board 742 and sub-side reel relay board 772 of the reel relay board unit 700 described using Figure 37 etc., and in this specification, the main-side reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772 may be abbreviated to "reel main board 742" and "reel sub board 772", respectively.

Figure 46 (b-1) is a front view of the reel main board 742 and reel sub board 772, and Figure 46 (b-2) is a plan view of the reel main board 742 and reel sub board 772, viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol U (top) in the front view of Figure 46 (b-1).

<Connection status between power relay board and reel relay board/reel main board>
Next, the reel main board 742 (first board) will be described with reference to Figures 46(b-1) and (b-2).

The reel main board 742 is composed of a base material 748 made of a rectangular plate, and main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 arranged on the component surface 748a of this base material 748.

Main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 through main-side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 are arranged on the component surface 748a of the base material 748. Also, although not shown, various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc. are also formed.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 748b of the base material 748, and a solid ground pattern is formed. Additionally, the tips of the lead terminals MRLD of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 mounted on the component surface 748a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of these lead terminals MRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., on the solder surface 748b.

In addition, the solder surface 748b has screw holes 749 into which screws 750 (third screws) and nuts 755 can be inserted to secure the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the base material 748 (first board) from the solder surface 748b side of the base material 748. Note that all connectors other than the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 are soldered to the base material 748, and the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is the only component secured to the base material 748 with screws.

The main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (first connector) is a male connector with a complementary shape to the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector) of the power supply main board 640, which is a female connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1. Note that the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is not limited to a male connector, and may also be a female connector or another type of connector.

As shown in Figure 46 (b-1), screw holes 751 are formed on both the left and right ends of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, into which screws 754 (first screws; see Figures 37, 43 (a), (b), etc.) can be inserted to secure the reel main board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion; see Figure 37, etc.).

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 753 (resin members) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 are formed on the bottom surface of the main reel relay board first connector MRC1, located outward (outside) of the two screw holes 749. These fixing pins 753 are used to position the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 relative to the reel main board 742 when fixing the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the reel main board 742 with screws 750 and nuts 755.

The fixing pin 753 can penetrate the base material 748 through a through-hole formed in the base material 748, and when the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is fixed to the reel main board 742, a portion 753a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 753 protrudes from the surface (solder surface 748b) opposite the surface (component surface 748a) on which the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is mounted.

In this example, a portion of the resin member of the first connector (reel main board 742) (protruding portion 753a of the fixing pin 753) protrudes from the surface (solder surface 748b) opposite to the surface (component surface 748a) on which the first connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1) of the first board (reel main board 742) is mounted. This improves the ease of assembly between the board and connector and prevents the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering.

In this example, the length of the protrusion 753a of the fixing pin 753 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 753 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 748b) is L22, which is shorter than the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 and the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670 (L22 < L21).

In this example, for the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 (second board), the length of the protruding portion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively long, allowing the connector to be firmly fixed to the board; for the reel main board 742 (first board), the length of the protruding portion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively short, preventing the protruding portion from coming into contact with other components and causing impact to the connector.

In addition, the length L22 of a portion (protrusion 753a of fixing pin 753, protrusion 783a of fixing pin 783) of the resin member of the first connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1) is different from the length L21 of a portion (protrusion 649a of fixing pin 649, protrusion 679a of fixing pin 679) of the second connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1). This improves assembly of the boards and connectors, prevents connector detachment even in the event of deterioration over time or poor soldering, and makes it easier to distinguish between boards having the first connector and boards having the second connector, improving maintainability.

The length of the protrusion 753a of the fixing pin 753 of the reel main board 742 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 753 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 748b) may be the same length L21 as the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 or the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670.

As shown in Figure 46 (b-1), on the solder surface 748b of the reel main board 742, the lead terminals MRLD of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 are located approximately in the center, with screws 750 located on both sides of the outside of the lead terminals MRLD, and fixing pins 753 located on both sides of the outside of the screws 750.

In this example, the screw 750 is located more inward than the fixing pin 753 on the reel main board 742, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the reel main board 742.

The main reel relay board second connector MRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the main reel relay board third connector MRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the center reel 111 is connected, and the main reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2, main side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 are arranged at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction of the base material 748 on the component surface 748a of the base material 748.

<Connection status between power relay board and reel relay board/reel sub-board>
Next, the reel sub-substrate 772 (first substrate) will be described with reference to Figures 46(b-1) and (b-2).

The reel sub-board 772 is composed of a base material 778 made of a rectangular plate, and sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 arranged on the component surface 778a of this base material 778.

The component surface 778a of the base material 778 is provided with the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 through the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7, as well as various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 778b of the base material 778, and a solid ground pattern is formed. Additionally, the tips of the lead terminals SRLD of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 mounted on the component surface 778a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of these lead terminals SRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., on the solder surface 778b.

In addition, screw holes 779 are formed on the solder surface 778b, into which screws 780 (third screws) and nuts 785 can be inserted to secure the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the base material 778 (first board) from the solder surface 778b side of the base material 778. Note that all connectors other than the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 are soldered to the base material 778, and the only component secured to the base material 778 with screws is the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1.

The sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (first connector) is a male connector with a complementary shape to the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector) of the power supply sub-board 670, which is a female connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1. Note that the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is not limited to a male connector, and may also be a female connector or another type of connector.

As shown in Figure 46 (b-1), screw holes 787 are formed on both the left and right ends of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1, into which screws 754 (first screws; see Figures 37, 43 (a), (b), etc.) can be inserted to secure the reel sub-board 772 to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion; see Figure 37, etc.).

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 783 (resin members) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 are formed on the bottom surface of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1, located outward (outside) from the two screw holes 779. These fixing pins 783 are used to position the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 relative to the reel sub board 772 when fixing the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the reel sub board 772 with screws 780 and nuts 785.

The fixing pin 783 can penetrate the base material 778 through a through-hole formed in the base material 778, and when the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is fixed to the reel sub-board 772, a portion 783a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 783 protrudes from the surface (solder surface 778b) opposite the surface (component surface 778a) on which the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is mounted.

In this example, a portion of the resin member of the first connector (reel sub-board 772) (protruding portion 783a of the fixing pin 783) protrudes from the surface (solder surface 778b) opposite to the surface (component surface 778a) on which the first connector (sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1) of the first board (reel sub-board 772) is mounted. This improves the ease of assembly between the board and connector and prevents the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering.

In this example, the length of the protrusion 783a of the fixing pin 783 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 753 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 778b) is L22, which is shorter than the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 and the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670 (L22 < L21).

In this example, for the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 (second board), the length of the protruding portion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively long, allowing the connector to be firmly fixed to the board; for the reel sub-board 772 (first board), the length of the protruding portion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively short, preventing the protruding portion from coming into contact with other components and causing impact to the connector.

The length of the protrusion 783a of the fixing pin 783 of the reel sub-board 772 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 783 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 788b) may be the same length L21 as the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 or the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670.

As shown in Figure 46 (b-1), on the solder surface 778b of the reel sub-board 772, the lead terminals MRLD of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 are located approximately in the center, with screws 780 located on both sides of the outside of the MRLD, and fixing pins 783 located on both sides of the outside of the screws 780.

In this example, the screw 780 is located more inward than the fixing pin 783 on the reel sub-board 772, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the reel sub-board 772.

The sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the center reel 111 is connected, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 are arranged at a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the base material 778 on the component surface 778a of the base material 778.

<Connection status/screws between power relay board and reel relay board>
Next, the screws used in the reel relay board unit 700 and the power supply relay board unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 47(a) is a side view showing the state before the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600, and Figure 47(b) is a side view showing the state after the reel relay board unit 700 has been attached to the power supply relay board unit 600.

As explained using Figures 46(a-1) and (a-2), the connector screw 644 (second screw) of the power supply main board 640 of the power supply relay board unit 600 is a screw for fixing the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector) to the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 (second board). Furthermore, the connector screw 674 (second screw) of the power supply sub-board 670 of the power supply relay board unit 600 is a screw for fixing the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector) to the base material 672 of the power supply sub-board 670 (second board). As shown in Figure 47(b), the length of the connector screw 644 and the connector screw 674 in this example is L2.

On the other hand, as explained using Figures 46 (b-1) and (b-2), the screw 750 (third screw) of the reel main board 742 of the reel relay board unit 700 is a screw for fixing the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (first connector) to the base material 748 of the reel main board 742 (first board). Furthermore, the screw 780 (third screw) of the reel sub-board 772 of the reel relay board unit 700 is a screw for fixing the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (first connector) to the base material 778 of the reel sub-board 772 (first board). As shown in Figure 47 (b), the length of the screws 750 and 780 in this example is L2, which is the same length L2 as the connector screws 644 and 674 of the power relay board unit 600.

Furthermore, as explained using Figures 43, 46 (b-1), and (b-2), the screw 754 (first screw) on the reel main board 742 of the reel relay board unit 700 is a screw for fixing the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (first connector) of the reel main board 742 (first board) to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion), or for fixing the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (first connector) of the reel sub-board 772 (first board) of the reel relay board unit 700 to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion).

In this example, the first connectors (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1) are fixed to the first mounting portion (sheet metal member 710) using first screws (screws 754), so no load is applied to the board when the connectors are inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board.

As shown in Figure 47 (b), the length of the screw 754 in this example is L1, which is longer than the length L2 of the connector screws 644 and 674 of the power relay board unit 600 and the length L2 of the screws 750 and 780 of the reel relay board unit 700 (L1 > L2).

Furthermore, according to this example, the first connectors (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1) are fixed to the first boards (reel main board 742, reel sub board 772) using third screws (screws 750, screws 780). Because the lengths of the first and third screws L1 and L2 are different, no load is applied to the boards when the connectors are inserted or removed, preventing damage to the boards. Furthermore, incorrect screw installation is easily noticed when reinstalling the boards after they have been removed for maintenance or cleaning, improving maintainability.

The length of the screw 754 may be the same length L2 as the length L2 of the connector screws 644 and 674 of the power relay board unit 600 and the length L2 of the screws 750 and 780 of the reel relay board unit 700, or it may be longer than the length L2 of the connector screws 644 and 674 of the power relay board unit 600 and the length L2 of the screws 750 and 780 of the reel relay board unit 700.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the screw 754 (first screw) of the reel relay board unit 700 and the connector screw 644 (second screw) or connector screw 674 (second screw) of the power supply relay board unit 600 are arranged approximately coaxially along the imaginary axis A1, and the shortest distance from the screw 754 (first screw) to the connector screw 644 (or connector screw 674) is L3, which is shorter than the length L1 of the screw 754 (L3<L1).

For this reason, even if the screw 754 (first screw) of the reel relay board unit 700 becomes loose due to repeated connection and disconnection of the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700, the screw 754 can move to the position indicated by reference symbol 754' in the figure, i.e., the position (maximum movement position) where the head of the screw 754 abuts the connector screw 644 (or connector screw 674) or its surrounding components, but is configured to be unable to move to the position indicated by reference symbol 754'' in the figure, i.e., the position where the screw 754 falls out (falls out) of the screw hole 751 (or screw hole 787) of the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (or sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1).

In this example, when the first connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1) and the second connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1) are connected, the length L3 from the part facing the head of the first screw (screw 754) to the head is shorter than the length L1 of the first screw (screw 754). Therefore, no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board. Furthermore, even if the screws of the first connectors (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1) loosen due to vibrations caused by transporting the gaming machine or player operation, they will not fall off, which may prevent the screws from being lost.

<Summary of connection between power relay board and reel relay board>
As explained above, (1) the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board a second board (for example, the power supply main board 640 or the power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2)) having a first connector MVC1 or a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1; and a second mounting portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, or the board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can come into contact with the second board. a connector support portion 614), wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second attachment portion, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second attachment portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, a space is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion by the board support portion when the second board is attached to the second attachment portion, the second connector is fixed from the surface of the second board facing the space using second screws (for example, connector screws 644 and 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)), a portion of the second screw is configured to be receivable in the space, and the first connector is fixed to a first attachment portion (for example, sheet metal member 710 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and (b)) using first screws (for example, screws 754 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and (b)).

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, because the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a second screw, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board even when the first and second connectors are repeatedly connected and removed. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be absorbed by the second screw, ensuring a secure connection between the connectors. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction during movement of the second board and allowing for smooth movement of the second board. Furthermore, even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the second screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. Additionally, because the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using the first screw, no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board.

(2) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SRC2 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)). VC1) and a second mounting portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, the board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector. The second board is movably attached to the second attachment portion, and is configured to be movable relative to the second attachment portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector. When the second board is attached to the second attachment portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion by the board support portion. The second connector is configured to be inserted into the second board by inserting a second screw (for example, a connector screw 644 or a connector screw shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) from a surface of the second board facing the space. a connector screw 674), a portion of the second screw is configured to be receivable in the space, the first connector is fixed to a first mounting portion (e.g., sheet metal member 710 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)), the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw (e.g., screw 750 or screw 780 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)), and the lengths of the first screw and the third screw are different.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, because the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a second screw, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board even when the first and second connectors are repeatedly connected and removed. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be absorbed by the second screw, ensuring a secure connection between the connectors. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction during movement of the second board and allowing for smooth movement of the second board. Furthermore, even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the second screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. Furthermore, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw, and because the lengths of the first and third screws are different, no load is placed on the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board. In addition, it is easier to notice if the screws are installed incorrectly when reinstalling the board after it has been removed for maintenance or cleaning, improving maintainability.

(3) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)). A gaming machine including a second board (for example, a power supply main board 640 or a power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)), and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion that can contact the second board (for example, board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, and the second board is connected to the second The second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, and when the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion, and the second connector is fixed using a second screw (for example, a connector screw 644 or a connector screw 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2)) from the surface of the second board facing the space, and the second screw a portion of the resin member of the first connector (for example, fixing pin 753 and fixing pin 783 shown in Figures 46(b-1) and (b-2)) is configured to be receivable in the space, and a portion of the resin member (for example, protrusion 753a and protrusion 783a shown in Figure 46(b-2)) of the first connector protrudes from the surface (for example, solder surface 748b and solder surface 778b shown in Figures 46(b-1) and (b-2)) opposite to the surface of the first board on which the first connector is mounted (for example, component surface 748a and component surface 778a shown in Figures 46(b-1) and (b-2)).

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, because the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a second screw, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board even when the first and second connectors are repeatedly connected and removed. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be absorbed by the second screw, ensuring a secure connection between the connectors. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction during movement of the second board and allowing for smooth movement of the second board. Furthermore, even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the second screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. Furthermore, because a portion of the resin member of the first connector protrudes from the surface of the first board opposite the surface where the first connector is inserted and mounted, the ease of assembly between the board and connector is improved, and the connector can be prevented from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering.

(4) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub-board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), a second board (for example, the power supply main board 640 or the power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)), and a board that can contact the second board. and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, or a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably mounted on the second mounting portion, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, and when the second board is mounted on the second mounting portion, there is a gap between the second board and the second mounting portion. A space is formed by the board support portion, and the second connector is fixed using second screws (for example, connector screws 644 and 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2)) from the surface of the second board facing the space, and a part of the second screw is configured to be able to be housed in the space. A part of a resin member (for example, fixing pins 753 and 783 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and 46(b-2)) of the first connector (for example, fixing pins 753 and 783 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and 46(b-2)) is fixed on a surface (for example, solder surface 748b and solder surface 778b shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and 46(b-2)) opposite to a surface of the first board on which the first connector is mounted (for example, component surface 748a and component surface 778a shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and 46(b-2)). For example, protrusion 753a or protrusion 783a shown in FIG. 46(b-1) protrudes, and a portion of the resin member of the second connector (for example, fixing pin 649 or fixing pin 679 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) protrudes from the surface (for example, solder surface 642b or solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) opposite to the surface on which the second connector of the second board is mounted (for example, component surface 642a or component surface 672a shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)), and the length of a portion of the resin member of the first connector (for example, protrusion 649a or protrusion 679a shown in FIG. 46(a-2)) is different from the length of a portion of the resin member of the second connector.

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, because the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a second screw, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board even when the first and second connectors are repeatedly connected and removed. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be absorbed by the second screw, ensuring a secure connection between the connectors. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction during movement of the second board and allowing for smooth movement of the second board. Furthermore, even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the second screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. Furthermore, a portion of the resin member of the first connector protrudes from the surface of the first board opposite the surface where the first connector is inserted and mounted, and a portion of the resin member of the second connector protrudes from the surface of the second board opposite the surface where the second connector is inserted and mounted. The lengths of the portions of the resin member of the first connector and the second connector are different, which improves assembly between the boards and connectors, prevents the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering, and makes it easy to distinguish between boards with the first connector and boards with the second connector, improving maintainability.

(5) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)). and a second mounting portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, or the board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, and the second board is connected to a front The second board is movably attached to the second attachment portion, and is configured to be movable relative to the second attachment portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, and in a state in which the second board is attached to the second attachment portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion by the board support portion, and the second connector is fixed using a second screw (for example, a connector screw 644 or a connector screw 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2)) from a surface of the second board facing the space, A portion of the second screw is configured to be receivable in the space, the first connector is fixed to a first mounting portion (e.g., sheet metal member 710 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)), and when the first connector and the second connector are connected, the length from the portion facing the head of the first screw to the head (e.g., length L3 shown in Figure 47(b)) is shorter than the length of the first screw (e.g., length L1 shown in Figure 47(b)).

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, because the second connector is fixed to one side of the second board using a second screw, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board even when the first and second connectors are repeatedly connected and removed. Furthermore, when connecting the first connector to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be absorbed by the second screw, ensuring a secure connection between the connectors. Furthermore, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction during movement of the second board and allowing for smooth movement of the second board. Furthermore, even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the second screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. Furthermore, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the distance from the part facing the head of the first screw to the head when the first and second connectors are connected is shorter than the length of the first screw. This means that no load is placed on the circuit board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the circuit board. In addition, even if the screw of the first connector loosens due to vibrations caused by transporting the gaming machine or player operation, it will not fall off, potentially preventing the screw from being lost.

(6) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SRC2 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)). 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a second board (for example, a power supply main board 640 or a power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a connecting board first connector SVC1, and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, The second board is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second attachment portion, and is configured to be movable relative to the second attachment portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, and in a state where the second board is attached to the second attachment portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion by the board support portion, and a surface of the second board facing the space (for example, a solder surface 642b or a solder surface 642c shown in FIG. 33) is formed. 672b) has an area without a wiring pattern (for example, ground pattern 643 or ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33), the area includes an area that can be contacted by the board support part, the area is wider than the area that can be contacted by the board support part, and the first connector is fixed to a first mounting part (for example, sheet metal member 710 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (for example, screw 754 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and (b)).

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, the surface of the second board facing the space has an area without a wiring pattern, and this area is larger than the area where the protrusion can contact. This allows the area of the second board that comes into contact with the mounting portion to be an area without a wiring pattern, making effective use of the limited space on the second board and preventing damage to the wiring pattern on the second board. Furthermore, because the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, the board is not subjected to stress when the connector is inserted and removed, preventing damage to the board.

(7) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a second connector. a second mounting portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, or the board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, and the second board is moved to the second mounting portion. The second board is movably attached to the second mounting portion, and is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector. When the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion. A surface of the second board facing the space (for example, solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33) has a certain area without a wiring pattern (for example, ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33). is an area that includes an area that can be contacted by the board support portion, and the certain area is an area that is wider than the area that can be contacted by the board support portion, and the first connector is fixed to a first mounting portion (e.g., sheet metal member 710 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)), and the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw (e.g., screw 750 or screw 780 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)), and the first screw and the third screw are different in length.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves are the norm, and frequent plugging and unplugging of connectors can lead to connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, the surface of the second board facing the space has certain areas that are free of wiring patterns, and these areas are larger than the areas that the protrusions can contact. This allows the area of the second board that comes into contact with the mounting portion to be free of wiring patterns, making effective use of the limited space on the second board and preventing damage to the wiring patterns on the second board. Furthermore, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw, and because the lengths of the first and third screws are different, no load is placed on the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board. In addition, it is easier to notice if the screws are installed incorrectly when reinstalling the board after it has been removed for maintenance or cleaning, improving maintainability.

(8) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)). 34-1 and 34-2), and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, or a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second mounting portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting one connector and the second connector, and when the second board is mounted on the second mounting portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion, and a surface of the second board facing the space (e.g., solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33) has a certain area (e.g., ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33) that is free of a wiring pattern, and the certain area is an area that includes an area that can be contacted by the board support portion, The certain area is an area wider than the area that can be contacted by the board support portion, and a portion (e.g., protrusion 753a and protrusion 783a shown in FIG. 46(b-2)) of the resin member of the first connector (e.g., fixing pin 753 and fixing pin 783 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) protrudes from the surface (e.g., component surface 748a and component surface 778a shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) opposite the surface on which the first connector of the first board is mounted (e.g., component surface 748b and solder surface 778b shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)).

Conventionally, connectors were mainly movable, posing the problem of connector wear as the number of times they were inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, the surface of the second board facing the space has an area without a wiring pattern, and this area is larger than the area where the protrusion can contact. This allows the area of the second board that comes into contact with the mounting portion to be an area without a wiring pattern, making effective use of the limited space on the second board and preventing damage to the wiring pattern on the second board. Furthermore, a portion of the resin member of the first connector protrudes from the surface of the first board opposite the surface where the first connector is inserted and mounted, improving the assembly of the board and connector and preventing the connector from coming off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering.

(9) Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), a second board (for example, the power supply main board 640 or the power supply sub board 670 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)), and a board support portion (for example, the 32-2), and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32-2, and a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably mounted to the second mounting portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, and when the second board is mounted to the second mounting portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion, and the second connector is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, and The surface of the substrate facing the space (for example, solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33) has a certain area without a wiring pattern (for example, ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33), the certain area is an area including an area that can be contacted by the substrate support portion, the certain area is an area that is wider than the area that can be contacted by the substrate support portion, and a resin member of the first connector (for example, fixing pin 753 and fixing pin 763 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) is mounted on a surface (for example, solder surface 748b and solder surface 778b shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) opposite to a surface of the first substrate on which the first connector is mounted (for example, component surface 748a and component surface 778a shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)). a portion of the resin member of the second connector (for example, fixing pin 649 or fixing pin 679 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) protrudes from the surface (for example, solder surface 642b or solder surface 672b shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) opposite to the surface of the second board on which the second connector is mounted (for example, component surface 642a or component surface 672a shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) or (a-2)); and the length of the portion of the resin member of the first connector (for example, protrusion 649a or protrusion 679a shown in FIG. 46(a-2)) differs from the length of the portion of the resin member of the second connector.

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves are the norm, and frequent plugging and unplugging of connectors can lead to connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, the surface of the second board facing the space has certain areas that are free of wiring patterns, and these areas are larger than the areas that the protrusions can contact. This allows the area of the second board that comes into contact with the mounting portion to be free of wiring patterns, making effective use of the limited space on the second board and preventing damage to the wiring patterns on the second board. Furthermore, a portion of the resin member of the first connector protrudes from the surface of the first board opposite the surface where the first connector is inserted and mounted, and a portion of the resin member of the second connector protrudes from the surface of the second board opposite the surface where the second connector is inserted and mounted. The lengths of the portions of the resin member of the first connector and the second connector are different, which improves assembly between the boards and connectors, prevents the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering, and makes it easy to distinguish between boards with the first connector and boards with the second connector, improving maintainability.

(10) Furthermore, a gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)), and a second board (for example, the power supply main board 64 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a second connector (for example, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)). 32) having a board support portion (for example, board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can come into contact with the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second attachment portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second attachment portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector. When the second board is attached to the second attachment portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion by the board support portion, and a surface of the second board facing the space (for example, solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33) has a certain area without a wiring pattern (for example, ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33), the certain area is an area including an area that can be contacted by the board support portion, and the certain area is an area that is wider than the area that can be contacted by the board support portion, and the first connector is connected to the first attachment portion (for example, sheet metal member 7 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 47(b)). 10) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Figures 47(a) and (b)), and the length from the portion facing the head of the first screw (e.g., connector screw 644 or connector screw 674 of the power supply relay board unit 600 shown in Figure 47(b), or the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 of the power supply relay board unit 600) to the head of the first screw when the first connector and the second connector are connected (e.g., length L3 shown in Figure 47(b)) is shorter than the length of the first screw (e.g., length L1 shown in Figure 47(b)).

Conventionally, connectors that move themselves are the norm, and frequent plugging and unplugging of connectors can lead to connector wear. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved to adjust the position. This prevents the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. Furthermore, the surface of the second board facing the space has certain areas that are free of wiring patterns, and these areas are larger than the areas that the protrusions can contact. This allows the area of the second board that comes into contact with the mounting portion to be free of wiring patterns, making effective use of the limited space on the second board and preventing damage to the wiring patterns on the second board. Furthermore, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the distance from the part facing the head of the first screw to the head when the first and second connectors are connected is shorter than the length of the first screw. This means that no load is placed on the circuit board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the circuit board. In addition, even if the screw of the first connector loosens due to vibrations caused by transporting the gaming machine or player operation, it will not fall off, potentially preventing the screw from being lost.

Furthermore, in the gaming machines described in (1) to (10) above, the second board may be configured to be movable in an in-plane direction while attached to the attachment portion.

With this configuration, even if the connectors become misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the second board can be moved in the in-plane direction, making it possible to fine-tune the positions of the connectors and prevent the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connectors themselves and damage to the connector pins.

Furthermore, in the gaming machines described in (1) to (10) above, the second board may have multiple types of components in addition to the second connector (for example, the sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, main-side power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 shown in FIG. 32), and the second connector may be taller than the multiple types of components (having a higher maximum height from the component mounting surface of the board).

With this configuration, when the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board are plugged in or unplugged, other components mounted on the second board can be prevented from coming into contact with the first board, etc., and damage to other components mounted on the second board can be prevented in advance.

<Holding components with speakers>
Next, the holding of components by the speaker will be described, but prior to this description, the speaker unit 900 of this example will be described using Figures 48(a) and 48(b). In order to avoid redundant explanations, only the configuration that differs from the speaker unit 600 of the above embodiment will be described below.

<Holding components by speakers/speaker unit>
48(a) is a side view of the speaker 910, and FIG. 48(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screw 930 is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

As shown in Figure 48 (b), the speaker unit 900 is composed of a speaker 910 (a certain speaker) and a speaker cover (rear cover) 920 (a resin member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 910. With the speaker 910 housed in the inner space of the speaker cover 920, the speaker unit 900 is attached with screws to a speaker base 630 (see Figure 11) formed on the inside of the front door 102 (door body).

The location of the "certain speaker" according to the present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the inside (back) of the front door 102, but may be, for example, the lower right side or center of the inside (back) of the front door 102, or either the upper right or upper left side of the inside (back) of the front door 102 where the upper speaker 272 described using Figure 10 is located, or it may be located on the outside (front) of the front door 102, or it may be located on the main body 101.

Speaker 910 is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in Figure 48(a), it is composed of a diaphragm (cone paper) 911 that vibrates to generate sound, a flange 912 to which this diaphragm 911 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a frame 913 that supports this flange 912, and an electromagnetic circuit 914 (914a-914c) that vibrates the diaphragm 911. It has almost the same structure as speaker 610 described using Figures 12(c) and (d).

The diaphragm 911 is made of a flexible material such as paper and is formed into a cone shape that opens forward. The frame 913 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings formed along the circumferential direction on the side to allow air around the diaphragm 911 to escape.

The electromagnetic circuit 914 is composed of a magnet 914a, a voice coil 914b that is driven by the magnet 914a to vibrate the diaphragm 911, and a yoke 914c that serves as the base of the electromagnetic circuit 914 and transmits the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to the voice coil 914b.

Yoke 914c is disposed in contact with magnet 914a, allows the magnetic flux of magnet 912a to pass through, and is magnetized by magnet 914a. There are no particular restrictions on the material of yoke 914c, but a material with high magnetic permeability (e.g., pure iron or low-carbon steel) is preferred.

The location of the "magnet" according to the present invention is not limited to the speaker; for example, the magnet may be disposed alone on the inside (back) of the front door 102, or on a component or device other than the speaker that is disposed on the inside (back) of the front door 102, or on the outside (front) of the front door 102, or on the main body 101.

The speaker cover 920 is a resin component that houses most of the speaker 910 inside. As shown in Figure 48(b), it has a circular opening 920a on the rear side that exposes the rear end of the speaker 910 (part of the yoke 914c), and a stepped cylindrical side wall 920b that widens slightly toward the front. It has a structure that is nearly identical to the rear cover 620 described using Figures 12(a) and (b).

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 1>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 1) will be described with reference to FIG.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in Figure 48(b), an iron screw 930 (a certain screw) removed from a slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c.

The screw 930 is one of four screws used to attach the speaker cover 920 to the front door 102, and is composed of a threaded portion 930a with a threaded groove, a head portion 930b with a screw hole formed at one end of the threaded portion 930a, and a tip portion 930c, which is the end of the threaded portion 930a opposite the head portion 930b.

In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 930, only the head 930b comes into contact with the yoke 914c, and the tip 930c faces away from the yoke 914c, so that the screw 930 is held upright on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c by the yoke 914c.

In this example, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

Here, maintenance of gaming machines includes checking for any fraudulent activity while shining an LED light on them, cleaning each part, replacing each part, and checking the operation of each part. During the maintenance process, screws, circuit boards, sheet metal components, and plastic components may be removed or temporarily placed.

The material of the "certain screw" according to the present invention is not limited to iron, but may be, for example, a ferromagnetic material such as cobalt or nickel, or a paramagnetic material such as stainless steel containing iron.

Furthermore, the use of the "certain screw" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a screw for attaching speaker 910 to front door 102, a screw for fixing the main control board (board constituting main control unit 300) described using FIG. 10 to main control board storage case 210, a screw for fixing the sub-control board (board constituting sub-control unit 400) to sub-control board storage case 220, a screw for fixing a power supply board to power supply unit 252, or a screw for fixing the performance control board (board constituting second sub-control unit 500) to front door 102.

The screw may also be a screw for fixing the main-side power supply relay board 640 or the sub-side power supply relay board 670 described using FIG. 33 to the board support body 610, or a screw for fixing the lid and housing of various board cases (main control board storage case 210, sub-control board storage case 220, etc.), or a screw 646 for attaching the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the board support body 610 as shown in FIGS. 36(a) and (b), or a screw 754 for fixing the main-side reel-side relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 as shown in FIGS. 43(a) and (b), or a screw for fixing a connector to a board. In other words, the "certain screw" according to the present invention may be used for at least one of fixing a board, fixing a board case, fixing a resin member, or fixing a sheet metal member.

Furthermore, the type of "certain screw" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be a male screw (bolt, screw), a female screw (nut), a pan head screw, a flat head screw, a binding screw, a tapping screw, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain screw (e.g., screw 930 shown in FIG. 48(b)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 48(b)), and is characterized in that it is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from getting lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff and others.

The device may also be configured to be able to hold the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet using the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration prevents screws from being lost by holding onto them if they slip out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in Figure 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in Figure 48(b)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 2>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 2) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 48(c) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screw 931 is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910 through the speaker cover 920.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and the magnetic flux of the magnet 914a and yoke 914c flows to the outside through the speaker cover 920, so the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold magnetic materials through the speaker cover 920.

In this example, as shown in Figure 48 (c), an iron screw 931 (a certain screw) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is attracted to and held by the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920 without coming into contact with the magnet 914a or yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The screw 931 is used to attach the speaker cover 920 to the front door 102. In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 931, only the head 931b comes into contact with the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920, and the tip 931c faces in the opposite direction from the side wall portion 920b, so that the screw 931 is held in an upright position on the side wall portion 920b.

In this example, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from getting lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff. Furthermore, the magnetic force can be weakened compared to when the speaker cover 920 (plastic component) is not present (when attached by magnet 914a or yoke 914c), allowing the screws to be removed with less force and improving workability.

In the example described using Figure 48(b), of the parts constituting the screw 930, only the head 930b is in contact with the yoke 914c, the tip 930c faces away from the yoke 914c, and the screw 930 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple screws may be held by the yoke 914c.

Therefore, for example, as shown in Figure 48(c), when multiple screws 932-934 are held by a yoke 914c, of the parts constituting the screw 932, only the tip 932c may be in contact with the yoke 914c, the head 932b may be facing away from the yoke 914c, and the screw 932 may be held by the yoke 914c in an upright position on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

Furthermore, when multiple screws 932-934 are held by the yoke 914c, only the head 933b of each screw 933 may be in contact with the yoke 914c, with the tip 933c facing away from the yoke 914c, and the screw 933 may be held by the yoke 914c in an upright position on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

Furthermore, when multiple screws 932-934 are held by the yoke 914c, the head 934b and tip 934c of the screw 934 may be in contact with the yoke 914c, and the screw 934 may be held by the yoke 914c in a state where it is lying sideways on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain screw (for example, the screw 931 shown in FIG. 48(c)) and a magnet (for example, the magnet 914a shown in FIG. 48(c)), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine using the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw through a resin member (for example, the speaker cover 920 shown in FIG. 48(c)) using the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from getting lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff. Furthermore, the magnetic force can be weakened compared to when no plastic parts are used (when screws are directly attached by a magnet), allowing screws to be removed with less force and improving workability.

The device may also be configured to be able to hold the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet using the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration prevents screws from being lost by holding onto them if they slip out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in Figure 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in Figure 48(c)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 3>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 3) will be described with reference to Figure 49(a).

Figure 49(a) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the sheet metal member 710 is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in Figure 49(a), an iron sheet metal member 710 (a certain sheet metal) removed from a slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is adsorbed and held by a yoke 914c.

As explained using Figures 37 and 41, the sheet metal member 710 is a member for mounting the main reel relay board unit 740 and the sub reel relay board unit 770, and is composed of a base portion 712 made of a rectangular plate, and an outer wall 714 erected on one side in the thickness direction of the base portion 712 (the back side), with the outer edges of the four sides of the base portion 712 as base ends.

In this example, the sheet metal member 710 is held directly by the magnetic force of the yoke 914c, but the sheet metal member 710 may also be held indirectly by the magnetic force of a screw attracted to the yoke 914c. Also, both the screw and the sheet metal member 710 may be held separately by the magnetic force of the yoke 914c.

In this example, screws and metal plates removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making them easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The longitudinal length of the sheet metal member 710 is longer than the maximum width of the magnet 914a and the yoke 914c, and the sheet metal member 710 is held by the yoke 914c with one longitudinal side extending downward beyond the bottom plate 102a of the front door 102 and the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 (see Figure 10).

In this example, a portion of the sheet metal member 710 held by the yoke 914c is exposed further out than the lower edges of the main body 101 and the front door 102, so the sheet metal member 710 can restrict the closure of the front door 102, and the sheet metal member 710 functions as a door stopper, improving convenience for workers when performing maintenance with the front door 102 open.

The material of the "certain metal plate" according to the present invention is not limited to iron, but may be, for example, a ferromagnetic material such as cobalt or nickel, or a paramagnetic material such as stainless steel containing iron.

Furthermore, the use of the "certain metal plate" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a metal plate on which a board unit other than the main reel relay board unit 740 or the sub-reel relay board unit 770 is arranged, or a metal plate arranged on the front door 102 (for example, an iron frame supporting the performance image display device 157), or a metal plate arranged on the main body 101 (for example, an iron reel frame supporting the reels 110-112).

Furthermore, a "certain screw" according to the present invention may be held by a certain metal plate magnetized by a magnet, or a "certain metal plate" according to the present invention may be held by a certain screw magnetized by a magnet, or by a certain member magnetized by a magnet, or may be held by a certain member magnetized by a magnet via a non-magnetic material (e.g., a resin member) between it and the certain member magnetized by a magnet.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a screw (for example, the screw 930 shown in FIG. 48(b)) and a magnet (for example, the magnet 914a shown in FIG. 49(a)), and is configured to be able to hold the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold a metal plate (for example, the metal plate member 710 shown in FIG. 49(a)) that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws and metal plates removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the screws and metal plates easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff and others.

The device may also be configured to be able to hold the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet using the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration prevents screws from being lost by holding onto them if they slip out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in Figure 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in Figure 49(a)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 4>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 4) will be described with reference to Figure 49(b).

Figure 49(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screw 935 and washer 936 are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in Figure 49(b), an iron screw 935 (a certain screw) and an iron washer 936 (a certain metal plate) removed from a slot machine 100 (a gaming machine) are adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c.

In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 935, only the head 935b comes into contact with the yoke 914c, and the tip 935c faces away from the yoke 914c, with the screw 935 held upright on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. Furthermore, the annular washer 936 is inserted through the threaded portion 935a of the screw 935 and is held to the yoke 914c via the magnetized head 935b of the screw 935.

In this example, screws and metal plates removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making them easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

Note that the "certain metal plate" in this invention is not limited to a flat washer, but may also be a spring washer, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a screw (for example, the screw 935 shown in FIG. 49(b)) and a magnet (for example, the magnet 914a shown in FIG. 49(b)), and is configured to be able to hold the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold a metal plate (for example, the washer 936 shown in FIG. 49(b)) by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws and metal plates removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the screws and metal plates easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff and others.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 5>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 5) will be described with reference to FIG. 50(a).

Figure 50(a) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screw 937 onto which the setting key 938 is hooked is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

On the other hand, the setting key 938 and the door key (not shown) (which is inserted into the door key 140 described using Figure 1 and used to unlock the front door 102) are made of a non-magnetic material and are configured so as not to be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a.

This example prevents the setting key or door key from being held in an unintended location due to the magnetic force of the magnet, and prevents the setting key or door key from being lost.

The material of the setting key 938 and the door key is not limited to non-magnetic materials, and may be, for example, a material that is not attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a but is attracted by the magnetic force of a strong magnet such as a neodymium magnet, or a paramagnetic material with a low iron content (weak magnetic properties). In this example, as shown in Figure 50 (a), an iron screw 937 (a certain screw) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is attracted and held by the yoke 914c, and a non-magnetic setting key 938 is hooked (hanging) on this screw 937.

The setting key 938 is a key used to rotate (turn on/off) the setting key switch located inside the front door 102. It is composed of a grip 938a for operation and a key ridge 938b formed on one side of the grip 938a as its base end. A through-hole 938c is formed in the center of the grip 938a for hanging the setting key 938 on a key hook or the like.

In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 937, only the head 937b comes into contact with the yoke 914c, and the tip 937c faces away from the yoke 914c, with the screw 937 held upright on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. Furthermore, the setting key 938 has a through-hole 938c formed in the grip 938a that is inserted into the threaded portion 937a of the screw 937, and is hooked (hanging) on the threaded portion 937a.

In this example, the screw onto which the setting key is hooked can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the setting key and screw easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for game parlor staff, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a screw (for example, the screw 937 shown in FIG. 50(a)) and a magnet (for example, the magnet 914a shown in FIG. 50(a)), and is configured to be able to hold the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine using the magnetic force of the magnet, but is configured not to hold a door key using the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff. Furthermore, the magnetic force of the magnet can be prevented from holding the door key in an unintended location, preventing it from being lost.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain screw (for example, the screw 937 shown in FIG. 50(a)) and a magnet (for example, the magnet 914a shown in FIG. 50(a)), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, but is configured not to hold a setting key (for example, the setting key 938 shown in FIG. 50(a)) by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff. Furthermore, the magnetic force of the magnet can prevent the setting key from being held in an unintended location, preventing the setting key from being lost.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a screw (for example, screw 937 shown in FIG. 50(a)) and a magnet (for example, magnet 914a shown in FIG. 50(a)), and is configured to be able to hold the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold the screw to which a setting key (for example, setting key 938 shown in FIG. 50(a)) is hooked by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the screw onto which the setting key is hooked can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the setting key and screw easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff, etc.

The device may also be configured to be able to hold the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet using the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration prevents screws from being lost by holding onto them if they slip out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in Figure 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in Figure 50(a)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 6>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 6) will be described with reference to FIG. 50(b).

Figure 50(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing several examples in which the screws 940-942, onto which the setting key 938 is hooked, are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

On the other hand, the setting key 938 and the door key (not shown) (which is inserted into the door key 140 described using Figure 1 and used to unlock the front door 102) are made of a non-magnetic material and are configured so as not to be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a.

In this example, as shown in Figure 50(b), iron screws 940-942 (certain screws) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) are attracted to and held by the yoke 914c, and non-magnetic setting keys 938 are hooked (hanging) on these screws 940-942.

For example, with regard to the screw 940, of the parts that make up the screw 940, only the head 940b contacts the yoke 914c, and the tip 940c faces away from the yoke 914c, with the screw 940 being held upright on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c by the yoke 914c. Furthermore, the setting key 938 has a through-hole 938c formed in the gripping portion 938a that is hooked (hangs) onto the tip 940c of the screw 940.

In this example, the inner diameter of the through-hole 938c of the setting key 938 is larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion 940a of the screw 940, and the through-hole 938c of the setting key 938 cannot be inserted into the threaded portion 940a of the screw 940. However, it is configured to hook onto the tip 940c of the screw 940, and even a setting key with a small through-hole can be hooked onto the screw.

Furthermore, of the parts constituting the screw 941, only the tip 941c comes into contact with the yoke 914c, while the head 941b faces away from the yoke 914c, and the screw 941 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright position on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. Furthermore, the setting key 938 has a through-hole 938c formed in the gripping portion 938a that is inserted into the threaded portion 941a of the screw 941, and is hooked (hanging) on the threaded portion 941a. In other words, the setting key 938 is held between the yoke 914c and the head 941b of the screw 941, preventing the setting key 938 from falling off the screw 941.

Furthermore, of the parts constituting the screw 942, only the threaded portion 942a comes into contact with the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920, and the screw 942 is held in the side wall portion 920b with the head 942b facing toward the rear of the front door 102 and aligned with the side wall portion 920b. Furthermore, the setting key 938 has a through-hole 938c formed in the grip portion 938a that is inserted into the threaded portion 942a of the screw 942, and is hooked (hanging) from the threaded portion 942a. In other words, the setting key 938 is held between the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920 and the head 942b of the screw 942, preventing the setting key 938 from falling off the screw 942.

In this example, the screw onto which the setting key is hooked can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the setting key and screw easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for game parlor staff, etc.

On the other hand, the magnetic force of the magnet 914a is designed not to hold the setting key or door key in place, preventing the setting key or door key from being held in an unintended location by the magnetic force of the magnet, and preventing the setting key or door key from being lost.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 7>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 7) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 51 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the yoke 914c of the speaker 910 holds the screws of the circuit board.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in Figure 51, a connector screw 674 (a certain screw) of the sub-side power supply relay board 670 removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is attracted to and held by the yoke 914c.

As explained using Figure 46 and other figures, the sub-side power supply relay board 670 is composed of a rectangular plate-shaped base material 672 and a resin sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 mounted (disposed) on the component side of this base material 672.

Two connector screws 674 are attached to the solder surface of the base material 672 to secure the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 from the solder surface side. These connector screws 674 are inserted from the solder surface side through the screw holes toward the component surface side, with their tips exposed on the component surface side and nuts (not shown) fastened to the exposed tips.

In this example, the circuit board removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the circuit board easier to handle and preventing it from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The sub-side power relay board 670 is held by the yoke 914c with one longitudinal side extending downward beyond the bottom plate 102a of the front door 102 and the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 (see Figure 10).

In this example, a portion of the sub-side power supply relay board 670 held by the yoke 914c is exposed further out than the lower edges of the main body 101 and front door 102, so the sub-side power supply relay board 670 can restrict the closure of the front door 102, and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 functions as a door stopper, improving convenience for workers when performing maintenance with the front door 102 open.

In this example, the screw for attaching the connector to the board is attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, but the present invention is not limited to this. A certain screw may be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, and a certain board may be hooked onto the certain screw to hold the certain board.

Furthermore, the board held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a main control board (board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain screw (for example, the connector screw 674 shown in FIG. 51) and a magnet (for example, the magnet 914a shown in FIG. 51), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine using the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold a board (for example, the sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 51) via the certain screw using the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the magnetic force of the magnet can be used to hold the board in place via a certain screw, making the board easier to handle and preventing it from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff and others.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 8>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Embodiment 8) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 52 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which two boards connected by a connector are held in place by screws using the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in Figure 51, the connector screw 674 (a certain screw) of the sub-side power supply relay board 670, which has been removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) while connected board-to-board to the sub-side reel relay board unit 770, is adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c. Note that the sub-side power supply relay board 670 has been explained using Figure 51, so its explanation will be omitted.

The sub-side reel relay board unit 770 is equipped with a female sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 that has a complementary shape to the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 of the sub-side power supply relay board 670, and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 are configured to enable board-to-board connection via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 and the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1.

In this example, multiple circuit boards removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnets, making the multiple circuit boards easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

Furthermore, when connected board-to-board with a connector, the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 are held by the yoke 914c in a state in which they protrude below the bottom plate 102a of the front door 102 and the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 (see FIG. 10). According to this example, portions of the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 held by the yoke 914c are exposed below the bottom edges of the main body 101 and the front door 102. This allows the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 to restrict the closure of the front door 102, and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 function as door stoppers, improving convenience for workers when performing maintenance with the front door 102 open.

In this example, the screw for attaching the connector to the board is attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, but the present invention is not limited to this. A certain screw may be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, and multiple certain boards may be hooked onto the certain screw to hold the multiple certain boards.

Furthermore, the second board connected by a connector to the first board held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a main control board (board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc.

Furthermore, the first board held by the magnetic force of a magnet and the second board indirectly held by this first board are not limited to boards connected by a connector, but may be, for example, a first board and a second board housed in the same board case (whether or not they are electrically connected), or a first board and a second board connected by a cable or harness, or there may be multiple second boards indirectly held by a first board held by the magnetic force of a magnet.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain screw (for example, the connector screw 674 shown in FIG. 52) and a magnet (for example, the magnet 914a shown in FIG. 52), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine using the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold a board (for example, the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 shown in FIG. 52) via the certain screw using the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, multiple boards can be held in place via certain screws using the magnetic force of a magnet, making the multiple boards easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff and others.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 9>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 9) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 53 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the yoke 914c of the speaker 910 holds the screw 944 that falls from its predetermined position.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920. This allows the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to attract and hold magnetic materials in the yoke 914c.

In this example, for example, if an amusement store employee or the like during maintenance accidentally drops an iron screw 944 removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) from the predetermined position indicated by the symbol X in Figure 53(a), and the screw 944 falls vertically without changing its position, as shown in Figure 53(b), the screw 944 will be attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a and yoke 914c and will be held by the yoke 914c.

Here, the "predetermined position" in this example refers to a position based on the position of the tip 944c of the screw 944, and is, for example, a position that is away from the magnet 914a toward the rear of the front door 102 by the length L1 of the screw 944, and a position that is away from the yoke 914c toward the top of the front door 102 by the length L2/2 of the radius of the magnet 914a (half the length of the diameter L2).

In this example, when the screw 944 is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a and the yoke 914c and held by the yoke 914c, only the head 944b of the screw 944 comes into contact with the yoke 914c, and the tip 944c faces away from the yoke 914c, so that the screw 944 is held upright on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

In this example, screws that are removed and accidentally dropped during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

Note that the "predetermined position" in this example is not limited to the position shown in the example, and may be any position that is far enough away from the magnet 914a toward the rear of the front door 102 that the screw 944 will not come into contact with the yoke 914c if it falls. For example, it may be a position that is farther away from the magnet 914a toward the rear of the front door 102 than the diameter L3 of the head 944b of the screw 944. Furthermore, it is not limited to a "screw that fell from a predetermined position," and may be, for example, a screw that an amusement arcade employee or the like throws toward the yoke 914c, or a screw that falls on the underside of the front door 102 or main body 101 and bounces off.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 10>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 10) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 54(a) is a plan view of the speaker unit 950, and Figure 54(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 950, showing an example in which the screws 945 to 948 are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The speaker unit 950 in this example is composed of a speaker 910 (a certain speaker) and a speaker cover (rear cover) 970 (a resin member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 910. Note that the speaker 910 has been explained using Figure 48 (a), so its explanation will be omitted.

The speaker cover 970 is a resin component that houses most of the speaker 910 inside. As shown in Figure 54(b), it has a cylindrical housing portion 970a that can house the speaker 910's magnet 914a, yoke 914c, etc., and a stepped cylindrical side wall portion 970b that widens slightly forward from the housing portion 970a as its base end.

As shown in Figure 54(a), the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a is positioned so as to cover the yoke 914c of the speaker 910, and multiple ventilation holes 970a2 consisting of circular holes are formed on the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a.

The inner diameter of this vent 970a2 is larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portions 945a to 948a of the screws 945 to 948, but smaller than the outer diameter of the head portions 945b to 948b. In other words, the vent 970a2 is configured so that the threaded portions 945a to 948a of the screws 945 to 948 can pass through it, but the head portions 945b to 948b cannot.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and the magnetic flux of the magnet 914a and yoke 914c flows to the outside through the speaker cover 970, so the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold magnetic material through the speaker cover 970.

In this example, as shown in Figure 54(b), iron screws 945-948 (certain screws) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) are attracted to and held on the side of the housing 970a of the speaker cover 970 without coming into contact with the magnet 914a or yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The screw 948 is used to attach the speaker cover 970 to the front door 102. In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 948, only the head 948b comes into contact with the side of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970, and the tip 948c faces in the opposite direction from the side of the housing portion 970a, so that the screw 948 is held in the housing portion 970a in an upright position on the side of the housing portion 970a.

In this example, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming store staff. Furthermore, the magnetic force can be weakened compared to when the speaker cover 970 (plastic component) is not present, allowing screws to be removed with less force and improving workability.

Furthermore, with regard to the screw 945, of the parts constituting the screw 945, only the head 945b contacts the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970, and the tip 945c faces in the direction opposite the upper surface 970a1, so that the screw 945 is held in the speaker cover 970 in an upright position on the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970.

Furthermore, with regard to the screw 946, the tip 946c and threaded portion 946a of the screw 946 enter the interior of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970 through the ventilation hole 970a2 of the housing portion 970a, and the head 946b is hooked onto the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a, thereby holding the screw 946 in the speaker cover 970. Note that in this example, the tip 946c of the screw 946 does not contact the yoke 914c, but it may also contact it.

Furthermore, of the parts that make up the screw 947, the head 947b and tip 947c come into contact with the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970, and the screw 947 is held by the speaker cover 970 in a state where it is lying sideways on the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain screw (for example, screws 945-948 shown in FIG. 54(b)) and a magnet (for example, magnet 914a shown in FIG. 54(b)), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine using the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw through a plastic member using the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from getting lost, improving maintenance and increasing convenience for gaming parlor staff. Furthermore, the magnetic force can be weakened compared to when no plastic components are used, allowing screws to be removed with less force, improving workability.

<Freestanding board>
Next, the freestanding substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

<Freestanding substrate/substrate placed horizontally>
FIG. 55( a ) is a diagram showing the state in which the power supply main board 640 is placed horizontally on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 .

As explained using Figure 46 etc., the power supply main board 640 (a certain board) is composed of a base material 642 made of a rectangular plate, and a main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (a certain circuit component), main side power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 made of resin, which are mounted (disposed) on the component surface 642a of this base material 642.

The power supply main board 640 is electrically connected to the connectors on the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using Figure 2 via the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the main control board 210a (main board) and the power supply board.

The component surface 642a of the base material 642 is provided with the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main power supply relay board third connector MVC3, as well as a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc.

On the other hand, no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface 642b of the base material 642, but a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed. In addition, the tips of the lead terminals MVLD of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 mounted on the component surface 642a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of these lead terminals MVLD to the wiring patterns, etc. on the solder surface 642b.

In addition, two connector screws 644 are attached to the solder surface 642b to secure the main-side power relay board first connector MVC1 from the solder surface 642b side.

The connector screws 644 are inserted from the solder surface 642b side of the base material 642 through the screw holes toward the component surface 642a side, with their tips exposed on the component surface 642a side, and nuts are fastened to the exposed tips. In this way, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is fixed to the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 by two sets of connector screws 644 and nuts.

As described above, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to the main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 are all disposed on the component surface 642a, which is on one side in the thickness direction of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640. The maximum height h1 of the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 from the component surface 642a is greater than the maximum height h2 of the main-side power supply relay board second connector MVC2 to the main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 from the component surface 642a (h1 > h2). Of the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to the main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3, the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is the connector with the highest height from the component surface 642a.

Furthermore, no components mounted on the component surface 642a of the power supply main board 640 are taller from the component surface 642a than the main-side power relay board first connector MVC1, and of all the components mounted on the component surface 642a of the power supply main board 640, the main-side power relay board first connector MVC1 is the component that is tallest from the component surface 642a.

With this configuration, as shown in Figure 55(a), when the power supply main board 640 (a certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) with the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (a certain circuit component) facing downwards, the power supply main board 640 (a certain board) will stand on its own parallel to the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin portion of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (a certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

This example prevents damage due to short circuits to a board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. It also allows a board to be placed stably on a horizontal surface, improving maintenance work efficiency.

The "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the power supply main board 640, but may also be a main control board (board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc. It may also be the power supply sub-board 670, which will be described next.

As explained using Figure 46 etc., the power supply sub-board 670 (a certain board) is composed of a base material 672 made of a rectangular plate, and a resin sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (a certain circuit component), sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, and sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, which are mounted (disposed) on the component surface 672a of this base material 672.

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is electrically connected to the connectors on the power supply board of the power supply unit 252 described using Figure 2 via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and serves as a relay between the sub-control board 220a (sub-board) and the power supply board.

As described above, the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 are all disposed on the component surface 672a, which is on one side in the thickness direction of the base material 672 of the power supply sub-board 670. Although not shown in the figure, the maximum height of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 from the component surface 672a is greater than the maximum height of the sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 from the component surface 672a, and of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 is the connector with the highest height from the component surface 672a.

Furthermore, no components mounted on the component surface 672a of the power supply sub-board 670 are taller from the component surface 672a than the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1, and of all the components mounted on the component surface 672a of the power supply sub-board 670, the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 is the component that is tallest from the component surface 672a.

With this configuration, when the power supply sub-board 670 (a certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) with the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (a certain circuit component) facing downwards, the power supply sub-board 670 (a certain board) will stand on its own parallel to the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin portion of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (a certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

This example prevents damage due to short circuits to a board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. It also allows a board to be placed stably on a horizontal surface, improving maintenance work efficiency.

The "horizontal surface" according to the present invention is not limited to the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101, but may be the top panel 261 of the main body 101 (see Figure 10), a workbench, etc. The member constituting the "horizontal surface" may also be a wooden, resin, or metal member, or a metal member coated with a non-conductive paint, etc.

<Freestanding board/horizontally placing boards/assembly>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (for example, the power supply main board 640 shown in FIG. 55(a)) having a certain circuit component (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 55(a)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (for example, the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(a)) with at least the certain circuit component facing downwards (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits to a circuit board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain board (e.g., the power supply main board 640 shown in FIG. 55(a)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 55(a)), and when the certain board is removed from the gaming machine and placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(a)) with at least the certain circuit component facing downwards (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface, and in the first case, the certain board is configured to stand on its own parallel to the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits to a circuit board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. It also allows a circuit board to be placed stably on a horizontal surface, improving the efficiency of maintenance work.

Furthermore, in the first case, certain circuits on the certain board (for example, connector terminals provided on the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 shown in FIG. 55(a), and electronic components, wiring patterns, pads, lands, and interlayer conductive parts (vias, through-holes) mounted on the component surface 642a and solder surface 642b of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640) may be configured so as not to be conductive to the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent damage to certain circuits and improve maintainability.

Furthermore, in the first case, the certain substrate may be configured to stand on its own with only the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent wear and deterioration of components other than certain circuit components, improving maintainability.

Furthermore, the certain board may be a board that is electrically connected to a main board (e.g., main control board 210a) or a sub-board (e.g., sub-control board 220a).

<Freestanding substrate/substrate placed vertically>
FIG. 55(b) is a diagram showing the state in which the reel main board 742 is placed vertically on the lower panel 264 of the main body 101.

As explained using Figure 46 etc., the reel main board 742 (a certain board) is composed of a base material 748 made of a rectangular plate, a main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (a certain circuit component) made of resin arranged on the component surface 748a of this base material 748, and main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7.

Main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 through main-side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 are arranged on the component surface 748a of the base material 748. Also, although not shown, various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc. are also formed.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 748b of the base material 748, and a solid ground pattern is formed. Additionally, the tips of the lead terminals MRLD of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 mounted on the component surface 748a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of these lead terminals MRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., on the solder surface 748b.

In addition, the solder surface 748b has screw holes into which screws 750 and nuts can be inserted to secure the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the base material 748 from the solder surface 748b side of the base material 748. Note that all connectors other than the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 are soldered to the base material 748, and the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is the only component secured to the base material 748 with screws.

As shown in Figure 55(b), this main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is arranged on the component surface 748a, which is on one side in the thickness direction of the base material 748 of the reel main board 742, with a portion of it protruding from one side in the plate surface direction of the base material 748, and the protruding length from the side of the base material 748 is h3.

With this configuration, when the reel main board 742 (a certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) with the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 (a certain circuit component) facing downwards, the reel main board 742 (a certain board) stands vertically and independently on the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin portion of the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 (a certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

This example prevents damage due to short circuits on a board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. Furthermore, when placing multiple components on a horizontal surface, the amount of space they occupy on that surface can be reduced, improving maintenance work efficiency.

The main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the reel main board 742 is a male connector with a complementary shape to the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 of the power supply main board 640, which is a female connector. It can be directly attached to and detached from the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, and the reel main board 742 is electrically connected to the main control board 210a (main board) via this main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, the power supply main board 640, and a harness (wiring) not shown.

Note that the "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the reel main board 742, but may also be the reel sub-board 772, which will be described next.

As explained using Figure 46 etc., the reel sub-board 772 (a certain board) is composed of a base material 778 made of a rectangular plate, a resin sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (a certain circuit component) arranged on the component surface 778a of this base material 778, and sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7.

The component surface 778a of the base material 778 is provided with the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 through the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7, as well as various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction sections (vias, through-holes), silk printing, etc.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 778b of the base material 778, and a solid ground pattern is formed. Additionally, the tips of the lead terminals SRLD of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 mounted on the component surface 778a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of these lead terminals SRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., on the solder surface 778b.

In addition, screw holes 779 are formed on the solder surface 778b, into which screws 780 (third screws) and nuts 785 can be inserted to secure the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the base material 778 (first board) from the solder surface 778b side of the base material 778. Note that all connectors other than the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 are soldered to the base material 778, and the only component secured to the base material 778 with screws is the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1.

Although not shown in the figures, this sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is arranged on the component surface 778a, which is on one side in the thickness direction of the base material 778 of the reel sub-board 772, with a portion of it protruding from one side in the board surface direction of the base material 778, and the length of protrusion from the side of the base material 778 is the same as that of the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1, h3.

With this configuration, when the reel sub-board 772 (a certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (gaming machine) with the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (a certain circuit component) facing downwards, the reel sub-board 772 (a certain board) stands vertically and independently on the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin portion of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (a certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

This example prevents damage due to short circuits on a board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. Furthermore, when placing multiple components on a horizontal surface, the amount of space they occupy on that surface can be reduced, improving maintenance work efficiency.

The sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 of the reel sub-board 772 is a male connector with a complementary shape to the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 of the power supply sub-board 670, which is a female connector. It can be directly attached to and detached from the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1, and the reel sub-board 772 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 220a (sub-board) via this sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1, the power supply sub-board 670, and a harness (wiring) not shown.

<Freestanding substrate/vertical placement of substrate/assembly>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (for example, the reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 55(b)) having a certain circuit component (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 55(b)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (for example, the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(b)) with at least the certain circuit component facing downwards (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits to a circuit board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain board (e.g., the reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 55(b)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 in FIG. 55(b)), and when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(b)) with at least the certain circuit component facing downwards (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface, and in the first case, the certain board is configured to stand on its own perpendicularly to the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits to a circuit board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. Furthermore, when placing multiple components on a horizontal surface, the amount of space they occupy on that surface can be reduced, improving maintenance work efficiency.

Furthermore, in the first case, certain circuits on the certain board (for example, connector terminals provided on the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 shown in Figure 55(b), and electronic components, wiring patterns, pads, lands, and interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes) mounted on the component surface 748a and solder surface 748b of the base material 748 of the reel main board 742) may be configured so as not to be conductive to the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent damage to certain circuits and improve maintainability.

Furthermore, in the first case, the certain substrate may be configured to stand on its own with only the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent wear and deterioration of components other than certain circuit components, improving maintainability.

Furthermore, the certain board may be a board that is electrically connected to a main board (e.g., main control board 210a) or a sub-board (e.g., sub-control board 220a).

<Freestanding Substrate/Modification 1>
Next, a first modification of the freestanding substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 56 (a) shows the power supply main board 640 placed at an angle on the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101.

In this example, the power supply main board 640 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 so that two points abut against the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101: the end of the side surface (the surface that is neither the component surface 642a nor the solder surface 642b) of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640, and the end of the resin main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1.

The material of the substrate 642 is glass cloth epoxy resin (glass cloth impregnated with a resin material (epoxy resin)), but it may also be glass cloth phenolic resin (glass cloth impregnated with a resin material (phenolic resin)) or paper impregnated with a resin material (epoxy resin or phenolic resin).

In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain board (e.g., the main power supply board 640 shown in FIG. 56(a)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 56(a)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 56(a)) with at least the certain circuit component (e.g., the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 and base material 642 shown in FIG. 56(a)) facing downwards, the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits to a circuit board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

The "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the main power supply board 640, but may also be the sub-power supply board 670, the main control board (the board that constitutes the main control unit 300), the sub-control board (the board that constitutes the sub-control unit 400), the payout control board, the power supply board, the performance control board (the board that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500), the main relay board, the sub-relay board, the lighting board, the light-emitting board, the reel relay board, the sensor board, etc.

<Freestanding Substrate/Modification 2>
Next, a second modification of the freestanding substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 56 (b) shows the reel main board 742 placed at an angle on the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101.

In this example, the reel main board 742 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 so that two points, the end of the resin main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the end of the resin main side reel relay board sixth connector MRC6, abut against the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101.

In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (e.g., the reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 56(b)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 56(b)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 56(b)) with at least the certain circuit component (e.g., the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the main reel relay board sixth connector MRC6 shown in FIG. 56(b)) facing downwards, the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits to a circuit board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

The "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the reel main board 742, but may also be a reel sub-board 772, a main control board (a board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (a board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (a board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc.

In addition, while this example shows a substrate being made to stand on its own using two resin members, a substrate may also be made to stand on its own using three or more resin members.

<Freestanding Substrate/Modification 3>
Next, a third modification of the freestanding substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 57 shows the power supply main board 640 and reel main board 742, which are connected board-to-board, placed at an angle on the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101.

As described above, the power supply main board 640 and reel main board 742 are connected board-to-board via the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 and the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1.

In this example, with the power supply main board 640 and the reel main board 742 connected board-to-board, the power supply main board 640 and the reel main board 742 are placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 so that three points abut against the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101: the end of the side surface (the surface that is neither the component surface 642a nor the solder surface 642b) of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640, the end of the resin main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, and the end of the resin main side reel relay board sixth connector MRC6.

In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a certain board (e.g., the reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 57) having a certain circuit component (e.g., the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 57), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 57) with at least the certain circuit component (e.g., the base 642 of the power supply main board 640 shown in FIG. 57, the main reel relay board first connector MRC1, and the main reel relay board sixth connector MRC6) facing downwards, the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by a short circuit to a board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. Furthermore, because the board can be supported in three places, the load (reaction force) on the board can be reduced. Furthermore, because the connector used for board-to-board connection can be brought into contact with a horizontal surface, the load on the connector can be reduced, preventing situations in which the boards connected to each other become disconnected.

<Light-transmitting substrate>
Next, the light-transmitting substrate will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Light-Transmitting Substrate/Substrate Configuration>
First, the configuration of the substrate according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 58(a), which is a cross-sectional view showing a part of the cross section of the substrate according to this embodiment.

The substrate (certain substrate) 980 according to this embodiment is composed of a substrate 982 that serves as a base member, a front surface 984 (first surface) that is a wiring pattern arranged on one side of the substrate 982, and a back surface 986 (second surface) that is a wiring pattern arranged on the other side of the substrate 982.

The type of board (certain board) 980 is not particularly limited, and can be, for example, a main control board (board that constitutes the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (board that constitutes the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (board that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc. Any board that has been moved from its mounting position can be used.

The substrate 982 is a transparent member that allows light to pass through. The material of the substrate 982 is not particularly limited, but examples include CEM-3, FR-4, FR-5, aluminum, metal, PTFE, polyimide, glass cloth, glass cloth epoxy resin, and glass nonwoven fabric substrate epoxy resin. The thickness of the substrate 982 is also not particularly limited, but in this example, a substrate with a thickness of approximately 1.6 mm is used.

The front surface 984 is composed of copper foil 984a (third region) and resist 984b (first region) laminated on the copper foil 984a or the substrate 982, and the back surface 986 is composed of copper foil 986a (fourth region) and resist 986b (second region) laminated on the copper foil 986a or the substrate 982.

The copper foils 984a and 986a are components that make up the circuit pattern (conductor layer) of the board and are not light-transmitting. There are no particular limitations on the thickness of the copper foils 984a and 986a, but in this example, copper foil with a thickness of approximately 18 μm is used.

The resists 984b and 986b are members (protective layers) that protect the base material 982 and copper foils 984a and 986a, and are transparent members that allow light to pass through. There are no particular limitations on the thickness of the resists 984b and 986b, but in this example, a resist with a thickness of approximately 20 μm is used.

The substrate 980 can be classified into three types: Area A, Area B, and Area C, depending on the combination of materials laminated on the base material 928. Area A is an area where the surface 984 is composed of copper foil 984a and resist 984b, and the back surface 986 is composed of copper foil 986a and resist 986b, and may hereinafter be referred to as "Area A (with copper foil on the surface, with copper foil on the back surface)."

Area B is an area where the front surface 984 is made up of only resist 984b and the back surface 986 is made up of only resist 986b, and may hereinafter be referred to as "Area B (no front surface copper foil, no back surface copper foil)."

Area C (a certain area) is an area where the surface 984 is composed only of resist 984b and the back surface 986 is composed of copper foil 986a and resist 986b, and may hereinafter be referred to as "area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface)."

<Light-transmitting substrate/substrate brightness (no light source)>
Next, the brightness of the substrate when there is no light source will be described with reference to Fig. 58(b), which is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Fig. 58(a).

When there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and the brightness of area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface) are almost the same, but the brightness of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface) are lower than area A (copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B ≒ area C < area A).

Here, the term "light source" in this example refers to a source that emits light, and includes, for example, sunlight, light from indoor lamps, light emitted by various vending machines installed in an amusement facility, and light emitted by light-emitting means. Light-emitting means may be, for example, an LED light carried by an amusement facility employee, or a lamp on an amusement facility machine (various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.)). In the case of a lamp on an amusement facility machine, if the lamp on that machine continues to emit light even when a certain board is removed from the machine, then that lamp constitutes a light-emitting means, and lamps on other amusement facilities in the amusement facility also constitute light-emitting means.

This example allows for circuit board maintenance to be performed using means that can be implemented in gaming establishments, thereby increasing convenience. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is equipped with a light-emitting means, circuit board maintenance can be performed without the need for any equipment or tools other than the gaming machine, thereby increasing convenience.

Maintenance of gaming machines includes checking for any fraudulent activity while shining an LED light on the machine, cleaning each part, replacing each part, and checking the operation of each part. During the maintenance process, screws, circuit boards, sheet metal components, and plastic components may be removed or temporarily placed.

In addition, "brightness" in this example refers to the degree of brightness, and in this example indicates the brightness of each of areas A, B, and C when viewing the substrate 980 from the surface 984 side of the substrate 980.

In this example, the brightness of area B is lower than the brightness of area A (area B < area A), and the brightness of area A and the brightness of area B are different, so as shown in Figure 58 (b), the boundary between area A and area B can be visually confirmed, but the brightness of area B and the brightness of area C are almost the same, so the boundary between area B and area C cannot be visually confirmed.

<Light-Transmitting Substrate/Substrate Brightness (with light source of first light intensity)>
Next, the brightness of the substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of the substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the state in which light from a light source with a first light intensity is transmitted, and Fig. 59(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Fig. 59(a).

When a light source with a first light intensity (e.g., 100 lumens (lm)) is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, a portion of the light LT1 emitted from the light source cannot pass through the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 in area A (with copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface) or area C (without copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface), and is blocked by the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986.

Meanwhile, a portion of the light LT2 emitted from the light source passes through resist 986b on the back surface 986 of area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and reaches the substrate 982. This light LT2 that reaches the substrate 982 travels straight through the substrate 982 and is split into light LT21 that passes through resist 984b on the front surface 984 of area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and is emitted to the outside, and light LT22 that is refracted or reflected at the boundary between resist 986b and the substrate 982, and the refracted or reflected light interferes with each other, weakening its intensity and preventing it from reaching the surface 984.

For this reason, when a light source with a first light intensity is located on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area A (copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area A > area C).

In this example, because areas A, B, and C have different brightness levels, the boundaries between areas A, B, and C can be visually confirmed, as shown in Figure 59 (b). Furthermore, for area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), the outline of the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 can be confirmed from the front surface 984 of the substrate 980, improving maintainability.

<Light-transmitting substrate/substrate brightness (with light source of second light intensity)>
Next, the brightness of the substrate when a light source with a second light intensity is present will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of the substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the state in which light from the light source with a second light intensity is transmitted, and Fig. 60(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Fig. 60(a).

If a light source with a second light intensity (e.g., 300 lumens (lm)) greater than the first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 of the substrate 980, a portion of the light LT3 emitted from the light source cannot pass through the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 in area A (with copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface) or area C (without copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface), and is blocked by the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986.

On the other hand, a portion of the light emitted from the light source, LT4, passes through resist 986b on the back surface 986 of region B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and reaches the substrate 982. This light LT4 that reaches the substrate 982 travels straight through the substrate 982 and is separated into light LT41b that passes through resist 984b on the front surface 984 of region B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and is emitted to the outside, light LT41c that is refracted or reflected at the boundary between resist 986b and the substrate 982 and then passes through resist 984b on the front surface 984 of region C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) and is emitted to the outside, and light LT42 that is refracted or reflected at the boundary between resist 986b and the substrate 982, and the refracted or reflected light interferes with each other, weakening its intensity and preventing it from reaching the surface 984.

For this reason, when a light source with a second light intensity greater than the first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area A (copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area C > area A).

In this example, because areas A, B, and C have different brightness levels, the boundaries between areas A, B, and C can be visually confirmed, as shown in Figure 60(b). Furthermore, for area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), the outline of the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 can be confirmed from the front surface 984 of the substrate 980, improving maintainability.

<Appearance of a light-transmitting substrate/a substrate with dust attached (no light source)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, how a substrate appears when dust adheres to the substrate in the absence of a light source will be described.

Figure 61(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram that schematically illustrates the state in which dust adheres to the substrate when there is no light source, and Figure 61(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 61(a).

This example assumes that dust 988 has adhered to resist 984b on the surface 984 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), resist 986b on the back 986 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), and resist 984b on the surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back).

As explained using Figure 58(b), if there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) will be lower than that of area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B ≒ area C < area A).

For this reason, if there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980 and the brightness of the dust 988 is approximately the same as the brightness of area C when there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, it will be difficult to detect the dust 988 attached to areas B and C, as shown in Figure 61 (b).

<Appearance of a light-transmitting substrate/a substrate with dust attached (with a light source of the first light intensity)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the appearance of the substrate when dust adheres to the substrate in the presence of a light source with the first light intensity will be described.

Figure 62(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram that schematically illustrates the state of dust adhering to the substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present, and Figure 62(b) is a side view viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 62(a).

This example assumes that dust 988 has adhered to resist 984b on the surface 984 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), resist 986b on the back 986 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), and resist 984b on the surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back).

As explained using Figures 59(a) and (b), when a light source with a first light intensity is located on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area A (copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area A > area C).

For this reason, if a light source with a first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980 and the brightness of the dust 988 is similar to the brightness of area C when there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, it will be difficult to find the dust 988 attached to area C. However, in area B, which is brighter than area C, the outline of the dust 988 can be clearly seen, so it is possible to find the dust 988 attached to the surface 984 or back surface 986 of area B from the front surface 984 side of the substrate 980, thereby improving maintainability.

<Appearance of a light-transmitting substrate/a substrate with dust attached (with a light source of a second intensity)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the appearance of the substrate when dust adheres to the substrate in the presence of a light source with the second light intensity will be described.

Figure 63(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram that schematically illustrates the state of dust adhering to the substrate when a light source with a second light intensity is present, and Figure 63(b) is a side view viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 63(a).

This example assumes that dust 988 has adhered to resist 984b on the surface 984 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), resist 986b on the back 986 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), and resist 984b on the surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back).

As explained using Figures 60(a) and (b), when a light source with a second light intensity greater than the first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area C > area A).

For this reason, if a light source with a second light intensity greater than the first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, and the brightness of the dust 988 is approximately the same as the brightness of area C when there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the outline of the dust 988 can be clearly seen from the front surface 984 side of the substrate 980 in area B due to refracted light LT41b from the back surface 986, and in area C due to refracted light LT41c from the back surface 986. This makes it possible to find the dust 988 attached to areas B and C, improving maintainability.

<Appearance of a substrate that transmits light/a substrate with scratches (with a light source of the first light intensity)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the appearance of a scratched substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present will be described.

Figure 64(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram that schematically illustrates the appearance of a scratched substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present, and Figure 64(b) is a side view viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 64(a).

This example assumes that the copper foil 986a and resist 986b on the back surface 986 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) have come into contact with a protrusion or the like and been damaged.

As explained using Figures 59(a) and (b), when a light source with a first light intensity is located on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, a portion of the light LT1 emitted from the light source cannot pass through the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 in area A (with copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface) or area C (without copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface), and is blocked by the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986.

However, in this example, scratches 989 have occurred in the copper foil 986a and resist 986b on the back surface 986 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), allowing light to pass through the copper foil 986a. As a result, a portion of the light LT5 emitted from the light source passes through the copper foil 986a and resist 986b on the back surface 986 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), travels straight through the substrate 982, and passes through the resist 984b on the front surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) to be emitted to the outside as direct light.

As a result, in area C, the outline of the scratch 989 can be clearly seen from the surface 984 side of the substrate 980, making it easy to detect that area C has been damaged, allowing the substrate to be quickly repaired or replaced, improving maintainability.

<Light-transmitting substrate/Summary>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain substrate having a first surface (for example, the front surface 984 shown in FIG. 60(a)) and a second surface (for example, the back surface 986 shown in FIG. 60(a)), the second surface being the back surface of the first surface, the first surface having a first region where no wiring pattern is formed (for example, the resist 984b shown in FIG. 60(a)) and a third region where the first wiring pattern is formed (for example, the copper foil 984a shown in FIG. 60(a)), the second surface having a second region where no wiring pattern is formed (for example, the resist 986b shown in FIG. 60(a)) and a third region where the first wiring pattern is formed (for example, the copper foil 984a shown in FIG. 60(a)). This gaming machine has a fourth region (for example, copper foil 986a shown in Figure 60(a)) on which a wiring pattern is formed, the first region is capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light directed toward the second surface, the second region is capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light directed toward the second surface, the third region is not capable of transmitting light directed toward the second surface, and the fourth region is not capable of transmitting light directed toward the second surface, and in the first case, a region of the first region that overlaps with the second region (for example, region B shown in Figure 58 (a9 (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface)) is capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light directed toward the second surface).

The gaming machine according to this embodiment makes it easy to check for dust or dirt adhering to the first or second area of a certain board, improving maintenance. Furthermore, if there is a light-transmitting area on a certain board, even though the third or fourth area of the board is opaque to light, gaming staff can recognize that some kind of protrusion has come into contact with the board and damaged the wiring pattern. It can also be confirmed whether a certain board is a double-sided wiring board. Furthermore, gaming staff may be able to notice if an unauthorized person has added unauthorized components or wiring patterns to a certain board.

The first case may also be a case where the second surface of the certain board that has been moved from its mounting position is illuminated with sunlight, light from a room lamp, or light from a light-emitting device (for example, an LED light carried by a gaming parlor staff member, or a lamp on an gaming machine (various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.))).

This configuration allows board maintenance to be performed using methods that are feasible in gaming parlors, increasing convenience.

The gaming machine may also be equipped with the light-emitting means.

This configuration allows maintenance of the board to be performed without any equipment or tools other than the gaming machine, increasing convenience.

Furthermore, in the first case, a certain region of the first region that overlaps with the fourth region (for example, region C shown in Figure 58 (a9) (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface)) may be capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light incident from the second region toward the second surface.

With this configuration, it is easy to check for dust or dirt adhering to a certain area, improving maintainability.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a certain substrate having a first surface and a second surface, the base material of the certain substrate is light transmissive, the second surface is the surface opposite to the first surface with the base material sandwiched therebetween, the first surface has a first region where a wiring pattern is not formed and a third region where the wiring pattern is formed, the second surface has a second region where a wiring pattern is not formed and a fourth region where the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is not light transmissive, and in the first case, a certain region of the first region that overlaps with the second region when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the second surface and the first surface (hereinafter In a certain region (hereinafter referred to as the "fifth region") of the first region that overlaps with the fourth region when viewed from the second surface and a direction perpendicular to the first surface, at least a portion of the light that travels from the second surface toward the second surface is visible when viewed from the first surface side; in the first case, in a region (hereinafter referred to as the "sixth region") of the first region that overlaps with the fourth region when viewed from the second surface and a direction perpendicular to the first surface, at least a portion of the light that travels from the second surface toward the second surface is visible when viewed from the first surface side; in the first case, the brightness of the fifth region is higher than the brightness of the sixth region; and when the certain substrate is installed, the brightness of the sixth region is lower than the brightness of the third region.

Below, using Figures 65 to 71, we will explain in detail gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied (for example, reel gaming machines such as slot machine 100 and pinball gaming machines such as pachinko machines). As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in Figures 65 to 71 will only be used in explanations using Figures 65 to 71, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 65 to 71 will take precedence in explanations using Figures 65 to 71.

Figure 65 is a front view of the slot machine 10 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 10 shown in Figure 65 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels, each bearing multiple types of symbols, begin to spin upon receiving a predetermined spin start command. Based on the reception of the spin start command, a lottery is held to determine whether multiple internal winning combinations have been achieved. Each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually upon receiving a predetermined spin stop command. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the lottery results and the symbol combination when the multiple reels stop meet the predetermined payout conditions, gaming media are paid out and the game ends. If they do not, the game ends without paying out any gaming media. The payout of gaming media is sometimes referred to as a profit. Furthermore, something that makes it easier to obtain this profit is sometimes referred to as a bonus.

This slot machine 10 comprises a main body and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body. The front door 102 is a door member that is rotatably attached to the main body. The front door has a locking function so that it cannot be opened by anyone other than amusement facility staff.

Three reels (left reel R1, center reel R2, and right reel R3) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries are housed inside the center of the main body (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 10. These reels R1 to R3 are rotated by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

Each symbol is printed in an appropriate number at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member, which is then attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each of the reels R1 to R3. When viewed by the player, the symbols on reels R1 to R3 are displayed in roughly three rows vertically from the symbol display window R0, for a total of nine symbols.

BET buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 10. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time BET button 130 is pressed, two medals are inserted when BET button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when BET button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, BET button 132 is also referred to as the MAX BET button.

The medal slot 141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (by inserting) into the medal slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The slot machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is designed for playing with a three-coin bet. However, it can also be played with a two-coin bet. For this reason, it is designed so that playing with a three-coin bet when a two-coin bet bonus internal win state is more advantageous for the player than playing with a two-coin bet bonus internal win state and betting two coins. The two-coin bet bonus internal win state is treated as the normal game state, and players are encouraged to play with a three-coin bet whenever possible.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 10. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during bonus play) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination. The stored number display 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch used to start the rotation of reels R1 to R3. That is, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels R1 to R3 begin to spin. Operating the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping reels R1 to R3 that began spinning when the start lever 135 was operated, and are associated with each reel R1 to R3. More specifically, the left reel R1 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel R2 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel R3 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 10 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155.

Below the stop buttons 137 to 139, there is a title panel 152 on which the model name is displayed and various certificate stamps are attached. This title panel 152 is illuminated from the back by a title panel lamp. Below the title panel 152, there is a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 151.

The top lamp unit 11 located at the top of the front door 102, the left side lamp 144L located on the left side of the front door 102, and the right side lamp 144R located on the right side are decorative lamps that add excitement to the game. The top lamp unit 11 will be described in more detail below. Speaker units 143 are provided on the left and right sides of the top lamp unit 11. Sound holes 145 are also provided on the left and right sides of reels R1 to R3. These sound holes 145 are holes for outputting sound from the bass speakers to the outside.

The front door 102 is also provided with a display device 16 located between the top lamp unit 11 and reels R1 to R3. The display device 16 includes a first movable display element 161 on the left side, a second movable display element 162 on the right side, and a display image display device 157 located behind these movable display elements. While the display image display element 157 is an LCD display, it can be any display device capable of displaying various display images and various game information. For example, it can be a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular, but it can also be square. Decorations (not shown) can be placed around the edges of the display screen, obscuring part of the edges, making the display screen appear irregular. The display screen is flat, but it can also be curved.

Figure 65 shows a background image being displayed on the performance image display device 157. The first movable performance body 161 on the left side is performing an opening operation, and the first sheet member 1610 having the first light-transmitting portion 161t overlaps part of the display screen of the performance image display device 157. In the part of the display screen where the first light-transmitting portion 161t overlaps, the background image appears blurred. The first movable performance body 161 and the second movable performance body 162 will be described in more detail below.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp up until now is an example of a light-emitting means, and in this specification, lamps will also refer to devices that use LEDs as light sources. Also, fluorescent lamps, cold cathode fluorescent lamps, and other devices that emit light may also be referred to as lamps, and any device that emits light is an example of a light-emitting means.

First, we will explain the top lamp unit 11 in detail.

Figure 66 is an oblique view of the top lamp unit 11 seen from diagonally above. The player's side (front side) is diagonally downward to the left of the figure.

The top lamp unit 11 has a central light-emitting portion 111, a canopy portion 112 that protrudes toward the player (forward) directly above the central light-emitting portion 111, an inner left reflecting portion 113 (area surrounded by a dotted line in Figure 65) located diagonally above and to the left of the central light-emitting portion 111, an inner right reflecting portion 114 located diagonally above and to the right of the central light-emitting portion 111, a left light-emitting portion 115 that extends along the left edge of the central light-emitting portion 111, and a right light-emitting portion 116 (area surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 65) that extends along the right edge of the central light-emitting portion 111. Also, as shown in Figure 65, an outer left reflecting member 12 (area surrounded by a dot-dash line) is provided between the left light-emitting portion 115 and the left speaker unit 143, and an outer right reflecting member 13 is provided between the right light-emitting portion 116 and the right speaker unit 143. Both the outer left reflective member 12 and the outer right reflective member 13 are attached to the top lamp unit 11. Although neither the outer left reflective member 12 nor the outer right reflective member 13 are shown in Figure 66, the top lamp unit 11 shown in Figure 66 has an attachment portion 1101 provided on the right light-emitting portion 116. The outer right reflective member 13 is attached to the top lamp unit 11 by screwing it into this attachment portion 1101. Hereinafter, the top lamp unit 11 with the outer left reflective member 12 and outer right reflective member 13 attached will be referred to as lamp unit RU. Note that the top lamp unit 11, the outer left reflective member 12, and the outer right reflective member 13 may be molded as a single unit.

Figure 66 also shows part of the mounting portion 1101 that attaches the top lamp unit 11 to the front door 102.

The central light-emitting section 111 displays the character "頂" (top), and the entire unit can emit light in multiple colors, including red, blue, and green.

At least a portion of the eaves portion 112 is made of a light-transmitting resin, and the light-transmitting portion can emit light in multiple colors. In the eaves portion 112 shown in Figures 65 and 66, part of the center is covered with an opaque decorative member 112p shown in gray, and the portion covered with this decorative member 112p does not transmit light and does not emit light. However, the decorative member 112p may be omitted, allowing the entire portion to emit light.

The inner left reflector 113 and inner right reflector 114 are three-dimensional structures made of resin with a portion that protrudes toward the player and also has a recessed portion on the rear side. Furthermore, the inner left reflector 113 and inner right reflector 114 have a reflective area that can reflect light in at least a portion. The upper end portions of the inner left reflector 113 and inner right reflector 114 shown in Figures 65 and 66 are covered with decorative members 113p and 114p, shown in gray.

The left light-emitting unit 115 and the right light-emitting unit 116 are also three-dimensional structures made of resin with a portion that protrudes toward the player and a recessed portion on the rear side. Furthermore, the left light-emitting unit 115 and the right light-emitting unit 116 each have at least a partially light-transmitting portion that can emit light in multiple colors.

Both the outer left reflective member 12 and the outer right reflective member 13 are three-dimensional structures made of resin with a portion that protrudes toward the player and also has a recessed portion on the rear side. Furthermore, both the outer left reflective member 12 and the outer right reflective member 13 have at least a reflective portion capable of reflecting light.

Figure 67 is a schematic diagram explaining the structure of a lamp unit. In Figure 67, the top of the figure is the player's side (front side). The right side of the figure is the inside, and the left side is the outside.

Figure 67 shows the left side of the lamp unit RU, and schematically illustrates the left light-emitting element 115, inner left reflecting element 113, and outer left reflecting member 12. The left light-emitting element 115 is sandwiched between the inner left reflecting element 113 and the outer left reflecting member 12. In other words, the left light-emitting element 115 is located adjacent to the inner left reflecting element 113, and also adjacent to the outer left reflecting member 12. Figure 67 shows a horizontal cross-section of the part of the left light-emitting element 115, inner left reflecting element 113, or outer left reflecting member 12 that protrudes most toward the player. The right side of the lamp unit RU, not shown, has a similar structure to the left side.

The top lamp unit 11 has a built-in light-emitting substrate 110B. This light-emitting substrate 110B has multiple surface-emitting chip LEDs 110L arranged in a discrete manner. The chip LEDs 110L are capable of emitting light in multiple colors. The light-emitting substrate 110B is covered from the rear side by a rear case 1103 and attached to a substrate mounting portion 1104.

As shown in Figure 67, the left light-emitting unit 115 has a double lens structure and includes an inner lens 1151 and an outer lens 1152. The inner lens 1151 is attached so as to straddle the front case 1105 and the rear case 1104. The inner left reflecting unit 113 is attached so as to straddle the front case 1105 and the outer lens 1152. The outer left reflecting member 12 is attached to the outer lens 1152. The location where the outer left reflecting member 12 is attached to the outer lens 1152 corresponds to the attachment portion 1101 shown in Figure 66. Furthermore, the attachment method for each optical member (113, 115, 12) is shown as an example, and other attachment methods may also be used.

The following explanation will use as an example the light emitted from the chip LED 110L shown at the far left of Figure 67. This chip LED 110L shown at the far left is the chip LED closest to the left light-emitting portion 115 and is the chip LED covered by the left light-emitting portion 115. In the figure, the solid arrows indicate the light path.

The inner lens 1151 is covered by the outer lens 1152 and is made entirely of optically transparent resin. The inner surface of this inner lens 1151 is provided with a lens cut surface RC that has a light distribution (light guiding) effect. In Figure 67, the lens cut surface RC is represented by a jagged, uneven surface, and light that has just been emitted from the chip LED 110L is distributed (guided) towards the player (front side) by this lens cut surface RC. At the tip of the lens cut surface RC on the player side, the light is divided into light that is distributed (guided) towards the player (straight-ahead direction) and light that is distributed (guided) horizontally (at a right angle to the straight-ahead direction).

Although the path of light is not indicated by solid arrows, this is not limited to the lens cut surface RC; for example, even at the tip of the outer lens 1152 facing the player, light can be distributed toward the player (straight ahead), horizontally (at right angles), or vertically.

The inner left reflector 113 has a reflective portion RF1 at the portion where light traveling to the right (inward) from the left light-emitting portion 115 is irradiated. That is, it has a reflective portion RF1 at the tip of its outer surface. The outer left reflector 12 has a reflective portion RF2 at the portion where light traveling to the left (outward) from the left light-emitting portion 115 is irradiated. That is, it has a reflective portion RF2 at the tip of its inner surface. In Figure 67, reflective portions RF1 and RF2 are shown in gray. The light reflected by reflective portions RF1 and RF2 travels toward the player (forward). As a result, to player H1, it appears that light is being emitted not only from the left light-emitting portion 115 but also from reflective portions RF1 and RF2. This allows for a wider area of the light-emitting effect visible to the player than when the light-emitting effect is performed using only the light-emitting portion, and the area of the light-emitting portion when viewed from the front can be made more compact than before. Furthermore, whether the chip LED 110L is emitting light or is off, the opposing lens cut surface RC is reflected in the reflective portions RF1 and RF2, which appears to the player H1 as a pattern, adding to the decorativeness. Furthermore, while the chip LED 110L is emitting light, the reflective portions RF1 and RF2 appear to be emitting light even more.

If a lens-cut surface RC is present between the chip LED 110L and the viewpoint, the light distribution effect of the lens-cut surface RC will make the chip LED 110L invisible. However, if the lens-cut surface RC is not present, the chip LED 110L will be visible due to its transparency. Having the chip LED 110L visible is undesirable from a design perspective, whether it is lit or not. The outer lens 1152 is made entirely of light-transmitting resin, but the inner surface, behind the tip facing the player, is provided with a concealing surface FG that has been blasted or otherwise treated to reduce light transmittance. The concealing surface FG is made of resin, not glass, but is treated to resemble frosted or frosted glass. In Figure 67, the concealing surface FG is represented by a continuous surface of black triangles, providing a concealing effect that prevents the chip LED 110L from being seen from the diagonally forward direction (see H1'). Furthermore, the area of the outer lens 1152 where the concealing surface FG is provided is a location where light from the chip LED 110L does not pass through and is not relevant to light distribution, so there is no problem with providing a lens cut surface RC instead of the concealing surface FG.

Figure 68 is a schematic diagram illustrating the structure of a modified lamp unit. Components with the same names as those described in Figure 67 will be described using the same reference numerals as those used in Figure 67. Also, descriptions of content that overlaps with that described using Figure 67 will be omitted. Furthermore, in Figure 68, the solid line representing the path of light emitted from the chip LED 110L shown on the far left has been omitted, but this is the same path of light as shown in Figure 67.

In this modified example, the concealing surface FG is provided on the inner lens 1151 rather than the outer lens 1152. That is, the concealing surface FG is provided on the surface of the inner lens 1151 facing the light emitting substrate 110B in a location that is approximately parallel to the light emitting substrate 110B. Like the concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 67, the concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 68 also has a concealing effect that prevents the chip LED 110L from being seen from the diagonally forward direction (see H1'). Note that although the location where the concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 68 is provided is a location that is hit by light from the chip LED 110L, it is not related to the light distribution effect, so there is no problem with providing a lens cut surface RC instead of the concealing surface FG. The outer lens 1152 shown in FIG. 68 has the function of protecting the inner lens 1151.

Whether it is the concealing surface FG shown in Figure 67 or the concealing surface FG shown in Figure 68, it is provided in a position away from the chip LED 110L and not exposed to the outside.

The same is true for the lamp unit structure shown in Figure 67, except that the player-side tip of the left light-emitting element 115 protrudes further toward the player than the player-side tip of the inner left reflecting element 113 and the player-side tip of the outer left reflecting member 12. As a result, the shortest distance from the light-emitting substrate 110B is longer for the portion 115t (L1) of the inner lens 1151 that is closer to the player than the inner left reflecting element 113, than for the portion 113t (L2) of the inner left reflecting element 113 that is closest to the player. Also, as shown in Figure 67, light distributed laterally (inward and outward) from the portion of the left light-emitting element 115 that is closer to the player than the inner left reflecting element 113 and the outer left reflecting member 12 travels in a straight line. That is, the light emitted from the chip LED 110L shown at the far left is directed in a predetermined direction (here, inward and outward) different from the player's direction, avoiding the inner left reflector 113 and outer left reflector 12, by the player-facing portion 115t of the left light-emitting portion 115. As a result, the light may reach store clerks or other players H2 looking at the slot machine 10 from the side, allowing these people H2 to recognize the light-emitting effects. In particular, light distributed outward is unobstructed, making it easier for these people H2 to recognize the light-emitting effects.

The above description describes a gaming machine that includes a first cover portion [e.g., inner lens 1151] that includes at least a transparent portion, a reflecting portion [e.g., inner left reflecting portion 113] that includes at least a reflective portion [e.g., RF1] that can reflect light, and a light-emitting means [e.g., chip LED 110L shown at the leftmost end of FIG. 67] that is covered by the first cover portion, and is configured so that light from the light-emitting means is directed at least toward the player by the first cover portion [e.g., the upward solid arrow in FIG. 67], and light from the light-emitting means is also directed at at least the reflecting portion by the first cover portion [e.g., the horizontal solid arrow in FIG. 67], and light that reaches the reflecting portion is reflected by the reflecting portion and directed at least toward the player.

With this gaming machine, the area of the light-emitting effect visible to the player can be made larger by the light reflected by the reflecting section than when the light-emitting effect is created using only the first cover section, and the area of the first cover section and the light-emitting means when viewed from the front can be made more compact than before.

The article also described a gaming machine characterized in that "the light-emitting means is disposed on a light-emitting substrate [e.g., light-emitting substrate 110B], the reflecting portion is provided adjacent to the first cover portion, the shortest distance [e.g., L1] from the light-emitting substrate to a first portion of the first cover portion is longer than the shortest distance [e.g., L2] from the light-emitting substrate to a second portion of the reflecting portion, the second portion being the portion of the reflecting portion closest to the player [e.g., portion 113t closest to the player], and the first portion being the portion of the transmissive portion closer to the player than the second portion [e.g., portion 115t closest to the player], and the light from the light-emitting means is directed by the first portion in a predetermined direction different from the player's direction, avoiding the reflecting portion."

In other words, the player-side tip of the first cover portion protrudes further toward the player than the player-side tip of the reflecting portion.

With this gaming machine, the first cover part, which is located farther away than the reflector, can produce a light-emitting effect, which may allow store staff and other players looking at the gaming machine from the side to recognize the effects of the gaming machine.

The predetermined direction may be a direction in which there are no gaming machine components that block the progression of light. Furthermore, the first portion may be configured to direct light from the light-emitting means toward the side of the gaming machine.

The article also explained that "the gaming machine is characterized in that the first cover portion has a lens-cut surface [e.g., lens-cut surface RC], and the reflecting portion is positioned so as to reflect at least a portion of the lens-cut surface."

This gaming machine gives the player the illusion that the reflecting portion is the first cover portion.

The article also described a gaming machine that is characterized by having a second cover portion [e.g., outer lens 1152] that covers the first cover portion, and the second cover portion also includes at least a transparent portion.

With this gaming machine, the second cover portion can prevent damage to the first cover portion.

In addition, a second reflecting portion [e.g., outer left reflecting member 12] may be provided that is separate from the reflecting portion [e.g., inner left reflecting portion 113] provided adjacent to the first cover portion, the second reflecting portion being provided on the opposite side of the first reflecting portion, and the second cover portion [e.g., outer lens 1152] being disposed between the first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion.

The article also explained that "a gaming machine is characterized by having optical action means [for example, a concealing surface FG] that prevents the light-emitting means from being seen through the transparent portion, and the optical action means is located away from the light-emitting means and in a position that is not exposed to the outside."

This gaming machine prevents people from looking directly at the light-emitting means.

The article also described a gaming machine that is "equipped with optical action means [e.g., a concealing surface FG] that prevents the light-emitting means from being seen through the transparent portion of the first cover portion, and the optical action means is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the second cover portion [e.g., the inner peripheral surface of the outer lens 1152 shown in Figure 67]."

This gaming machine prevents the light-emitting means from being viewed directly through the second cover portion.

Next, we will provide a detailed description of the first movable performance body 161 and the second movable performance body 162.

Figure 69 is a diagram showing the entire first movable performance element 161 and second movable performance element 162 shown in Figure 65. In Figure 69, the front side of the paper is the player side (front side), and the back side of the paper is the side where the performance image display device 157 (not shown) is located.

The first movable performance body 161 on the left side has a left winding section 1611 on the left side and a left drawer section 1612 on the opposite right side. Meanwhile, the second movable performance body 162 on the right side has a right winding section 1621 on the right side and a right drawer section 1622 on the opposite left side. The performance device 16 also has a rack 163 common to the first movable performance body 161 and the second movable performance body 162, an upper cable storage section 164, and a lower cable storage section 165.

The left winding section 1611 has a left winding panel LP1, a left winding motor LM1, a left winding connector LL1, and a left winding gear LG1. The left drawing section 1612 has a left drawing panel LP2, a left drawing motor LM2, a left drawing connector LL2, and a left drawing gear LG2. The rack 163, upper cable storage section 164, lower cable storage section 165, left winding motor LM1, left winding gear LG1, left drawing motor LM2, left drawing gear LG2, left winding connector LL1, and left drawing connector LL2 are hidden by the top lamp unit 11, outer left reflector 12, outer right reflector 13, and left and right speaker units 143 shown in Figure 65. The left drawing section 1612 also has a first sheet member 1610, one longitudinal end of which is connected to the left winding section 1611. The first sheet member 1610 is strip-shaped, with a first light-transmitting portion 161t provided between a first upper edge 1610u and a first lower edge 1610b. The first light-transmitting portion 161t has a higher light transmittance than the first upper edge 1610u and the first lower edge 1610b, but the background image appears blurred in the area of the display screen of the performance image display device 157 where the first light-transmitting portion 161t overlaps. In other words, the first light-transmitting portion 161t is translucent. However, the first light-transmitting portion 161t may be opaque. Alternatively, the first light-transmitting portion 161t may be transparent.

Figure 70(A) is a view from below of the first sheet member 1610 shown in Figure 69. In Figure 70, the bottom side of the figure is the player side (front side), and the top side of the figure is the side where the performance image display device 157 (display screen), not shown, is located. Also, in Figure 70(A), the components of the left winding section 1611 are shown in gray, and the components of the left drawer section 1612 are shown hatched. The left drawer section 1612 has a left base section LBB connected to the left drawer connector LL2. As shown in Figure 69, the left drawer connector LL2 is an L-shaped metal fitting that is screwed to the left drawer motor LM2 (strictly speaking, the left drawer motor case) from the side, and its bottom section is screwed to the left base section LBB. Because the left drawer connector LL2 is an L-shaped metal fitting, it has increased strength and durability. The bottom end of the left base portion LBB is free, and the left base portion LBB is suspended from above. The left drawer panel LP2 is arranged to cover the left base portion LBB from the player's side. The left base portion LBB also has a gripping portion LFX. The left drawer 1612 grips one longitudinal end (right side) of the strip-shaped first sheet member 1610 with the gripping portion LFX. The gripping portion LFX is made of a transparent material, allowing the clamped end of the first sheet member 1610 to be visually observed. Furthermore, if the base material of the first sheet member 1610 is a transparent sheet, the one longitudinal end may be colored by printing or the like, allowing visual confirmation of correct assembly even when the first sheet member 1610 is gripped by the gripping portion LFX. The left winding portion 1611 has a first sheet member storage portion LS connected to the left winding connector LL1. As shown in Figure 69, the left winding connector LL1 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, and is screwed from the side to the left winding motor LM1 (strictly speaking, the left winding motor case), and its bottom is screwed to the first sheet material storage section LS. The first sheet material storage section LS rotatably supports the upper and lower ends of the left winding shaft LAX. The left winding shaft LAX is rotatably supported at both ends by the first sheet material storage section LS, and is rotatable in both directions (see the arrows in Figure 70(A)). However, while the upper end of the left winding shaft LAX is connected to the left withdrawal connector LL2 via the top of the first sheet material storage section LS, the lower end of the left winding shaft LAX is free, and the left winding shaft LAX has a cantilever structure. The other longitudinal end (left side) of the first sheet member 1610 is inserted onto the left winding shaft LAX, and the first sheet member 1610 is connected to the left winding shaft LAX. The first sheet member 1610 is wound onto the left winding shaft LAX when the left winding shaft LAX rotates forward, and is unwound from the left winding shaft LAX when the left winding shaft LAX rotates reversely. Figure 70(A) shows the first sheet member 1610 completely unwound from the left winding shaft LAX. The first sheet member 1610 shown in Figure 70(A) extends from the notch LS1 of the first sheet member storage section LS, around the outer periphery of the first sheet member storage section LS, and toward the left drawer section 1612. The left winding panel LP1 covers the first sheet material storage section LS from the player's side, and the portion of the first sheet material 1610 that wraps around the outer periphery of the first sheet material storage section LS is not visible to the player. By providing the first sheet material storage section LS on the outside of the left winding shaft LAX and having the first sheet material 1610 wrap around the outer periphery of the first sheet material storage section LS, the portion of the first sheet material 1610 that covers the display screen of the effect image display device 157 can be kept parallel to the display screen regardless of the amount of the first sheet material 1610 wound around the left winding shaft LAX, ensuring a uniform blur of the background image.

The right winding section 1621 shown in Figure 69 has a right winding panel RP1, a right winding motor RM1, a right winding connector RL1, and a right winding gear RG1. The right drawing section 1622 has a right drawing panel RP2, a right drawing motor RM2, a right drawing connector RL2, and a right drawing gear RG2. The right winding motor RM1, right winding gear RG1, right drawing motor RM2, right drawing gear RG2, right winding connector RL1, and right drawing connector RL2 are also hidden by the top lamp unit 11, outer left reflector 12, outer right reflector 13, and left and right speaker units 143 shown in Figure 65. The right drawer section 1622 has a second sheet member 1620 whose longitudinal end is connected to the right winder section 1621. However, the right winder panel RP1 and right drawer panel RP2 shown in FIG. 69 are in contact with each other, and the second sheet member 1620 is not actually visible. Similar to the structure of the first sheet member 1610 described above, this second sheet member 1620 has a strip-like structure with a second light-transmitting portion between its second upper and lower edges. While the second light-transmitting portion also has a higher light transmittance than the second upper and lower edges, the background image appears blurred where the second light-transmitting portion overlaps the display screen of the performance image display device 157. In other words, the second light-transmitting portion is translucent. The second light-transmitting portion may be opaque or transparent.

Figure 70(B) is a view from below of the second sheet member 1620 shown in Figure 69. In Figure 70(B), the components of the right winding section 1621 are shown in gray, and the components of the right drawer section 1622 are shown hatched. The right drawer section 1622 has a right base section RBB connected to the right drawer connector RL2. As shown in Figure 69, the right drawer connector RL2 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, screwed to the right drawer motor RM2 (strictly speaking, the right drawer motor case) from the side and screwed to the right base section RBB at its bottom. Because the right drawer connector RL2 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, it has increased strength and durability. The bottom end of the right base section RBB is free, and the right base section RBB is suspended from above. The right drawer panel RP2 is arranged to cover the right base section RBB from the player's side. The right base portion RBB is also provided with a gripping portion RFX. The right drawer portion 1622 grips one longitudinal end (left side) of the strip-shaped second sheet member 1620 with its gripping portion RFX. The gripping portion RFX is made of a transparent material, allowing the clamped end of the second sheet member 1620 to be visually observed. Furthermore, if the base material of the second sheet member 1620 is a transparent sheet, the longitudinal end may be colored by printing or the like, allowing visual confirmation of correct assembly even when gripped by the gripping portion RFX. The right winding portion 1621 has a second sheet member storage portion RS connected to a right winding connector RL1. As shown in FIG. 69 , the right winding connector RL1 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, screwed from the side to the right winding motor RM1 (strictly speaking, the right winding motor case) and screwed at the bottom to the second sheet member storage portion RS. The second sheet member storage section RS rotatably supports the upper and lower ends of the right winding shaft RAX. Both ends of the right winding shaft RAX are rotatably supported by the second sheet member storage section RS, allowing it to rotate forward and backward. The upper end of the right winding shaft RAX is connected to the right drawer connector RL2 via the upper portion of the second sheet member storage section RS, while the lower end of the right winding shaft RAX is free, resulting in a cantilevered structure. The other longitudinal end (right side) of the second sheet member 1620 is inserted into the right winding shaft RAX, and the second sheet member 1620 is connected to the right winding shaft RAX. The second sheet member 1620 is wound onto the right winding shaft RAX by the reverse rotation of the right winding shaft RAX, and is unwound from the right winding shaft RAX by the forward rotation of the right winding shaft RAX. Figure 70(B) shows the second sheet material 1620 wound around the right winding shaft RAX inside the second sheet material storage section RS. In other words, in Figure 70(B) where the right winding panel RP1 and the right drawer panel RP2 are in contact, the second sheet material 1620 is wound around the right winding shaft RAX three times. The second sheet material 1620 extends from the cutout RS1 in the second sheet material storage section RS, around the outer periphery of the second sheet material storage section RS, and toward the right drawer section 1622. The right winding panel RP1 covers the second sheet material storage section RS from the player's side, so the portion of the second sheet material 1620 that wraps around the outer periphery of the second sheet material storage section RS is not visible to the player. In this way, by providing a second sheet material storage section RS on the outside of the right winding shaft RAX and having the second sheet material 1620 wrap around the outer periphery of the second sheet material storage section RS, the portion of the second sheet material 1620 that covers the display screen of the performance image display device 157 can be kept parallel to the display screen regardless of the amount of second sheet material 1620 wound onto the right winding shaft RAX, ensuring a uniform blur of the background image.

As explained above, in a pair of movable bodies (1611 and 1612, 1621 and 1622), the rotation axis (LAX, RAX) is only on one of the movable bodies (1611, 1621).

In addition, in the initial position, both the first sheet member 1610 and the second sheet member 1620 are wound around the winding shafts (LAX, RAX). The substrate (semi-transparent film, opaque film, or transparent film) of the sheet members has no adhesive surface on both sides (front and back), and instead has a transparent layer covering the entire surface of each side. This transparent layer may be applied by printing. By providing a transparent layer instead of an adhesive surface, it is possible to prevent overlapping portions from sticking together when wound.

The left winding motor LM1 shown in Figure 69 is driven by power supplied from the left winding flexible cable LC1, shown in black. This left winding flexible cable LC1 is stored in the upper cable storage section 164. A left winding gear LG1 is attached to the drive shaft of the left winding motor LM1, and this left winding gear LG1 meshes with the rack 163. The left winding motor LM1 is also connected to the left winding connector LL1, and the left winding motor LM1 is fixed so that it cannot rotate by this left winding connector LL1. When the left winding motor LM1 rotates in one direction, the left winding section 1611 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the left pull-out section 1612 (leftward in Figure 69). When the left winding motor LM1 rotates in the opposite direction, the left winding section 1611 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the left drawer section 1612 (to the right in Figure 69).

The left withdrawal motor LM2 shown in Figure 69 is driven by power supplied from the left withdrawal flexible cable LC2, shown in black. This left withdrawal flexible cable LC2 is stored in the lower cable storage section 165. A left withdrawal gear LG2 is attached to the drive shaft of the left withdrawal motor LM2, and this left withdrawal gear LG2 meshes with the rack 163. The left withdrawal motor LM2 is also connected to the left withdrawal connector LL2, and the left withdrawal motor LM2 is fixed so that it cannot rotate by this left withdrawal connector LL2. When the left withdrawal motor LM2 rotates in one direction, the left withdrawal section 1612 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the left retraction section 1611 (leftward in Figure 69). When the left withdrawal motor LM2 rotates in the opposite direction, the left withdrawal section 1612 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the left winding section 1611 (to the right in Figure 69).

The right winding motor RM1 shown in Figure 69 is driven by power supplied from the right winding flexible cable RC1, shown in gray. This right winding flexible cable RC1 is stored in the upper cable storage section 164. A right winding gear RG1 is attached to the drive shaft of the right winding motor RM1, and this right winding gear RG1 meshes with the rack 163. In addition, the right winding motor RM1 is connected to the right winding connector RL1, and the right winding motor RM1 is fixed so that it cannot rotate by this right winding connector RL1. When the right winding motor RM1 rotates in one direction, the right winding section 1621 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the right drawer section 1622 (leftward in Figure 69). When the right winding motor RM1 rotates in the opposite direction, the right winding section 1621 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the right drawer section 1622 (to the right in Figure 69).

The right-hand withdrawal motor RM2 shown in Figure 69 is driven by power supplied from the right-hand withdrawal flexible cable RC2, shown in gray. This right-hand withdrawal flexible cable RC2 is stored in the lower cable storage section 165.

The upper cable storage section 164 stores two cables that supply power to the drive sources of different movable bodies: the left-hand retraction flexible cable LC1 and the right-hand retraction flexible cable RC1. The lower cable storage section 165 stores two cables that also supply power to the drive sources of different movable bodies: the left-hand drawer flexible cable LC2 and the right-hand drawer flexible cable RC2. This allows for more space to be stored than if the cables were stored individually. Furthermore, not only is contact and tangling of the cables reduced compared to storing four cables together, but the way the cables are stored is also designed to further reduce contact and tangling of the cables. That is, when two cables are stored in the same storage section, the first is arc-shaped on one side (for example, a front horizontal arc or a left horizontal arc), and the second is arc-shaped on the other side (a rear horizontal arc or a right horizontal arc), and the cables are stored in each storage section so that the diameter of the arc (inner diameter in the horizontal direction) increases as the length of the cable protruding from the storage section decreases, and the diameter of the arc (inner diameter in the horizontal direction) decreases as the length of the cable protruding from the storage section increases.

A right withdrawal gear RG2 is attached to the drive shaft of the right withdrawal motor RM2, and this right withdrawal gear RG2 meshes with the rack 163. The right withdrawal motor RM2 is also connected to the right withdrawal connector RL2, and the right withdrawal motor RM2 is fixed so that it cannot rotate by this right withdrawal connector RL2. When the right withdrawal motor RM2 rotates in one direction, the right withdrawal section 1622 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the right reel section 1621 (leftward in Figure 69). When the right withdrawal motor RM2 rotates in the opposite direction, the right withdrawal section 1622 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the right reel section 1621 (rightward in Figure 69).

Figure 71 shows an example of a combination of performance movements of the first movable performance body 161 on the left and the second movable performance body 162 on the right.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (A) is a state in which the first movable performance body 161 on the left side and the second movable performance body 162 on the right side are each in their initial positions. In other words, at the left edge of the display screen of the performance image display device 157, the left winding panel LP1 and the left drawer panel LP2 of the first movable performance body 161 are in contact, and the first sheet member 1610 is not visible. Also, at the right edge of the display screen, the right winding panel RP1 and the right drawer panel RP2 of the second movable performance body 162 are in contact, and the second sheet member 1620 is not visible. The state shown on the right side of Figure 71 (A) is a state in which the second movable performance body 162 on the right side is stopped in its initial position, and only the left drawer section 1612 of the first movable performance body 161 on the left side has moved in a direction away from the left winding section 1611 (to the right in Figure 71). The strip-shaped first sheet member 1610 appears as if being pulled out from the left winding section 1611 and extends toward the right. As a result, the area where the first light-transmitting section 161t overlaps the display screen of the performance image display device 157 gradually increases, and the area where the background image appears blurred expands. The movement of the first movable performance body 161 shown in FIG. 71(A) corresponds to an example of a first movement in which the left drawer panel LP2 (corresponding to the first portion) and the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second portion) move in directions away from each other. Note that while the left winding section 1611 moves in a direction approaching the left drawer section 1612 (to the right in FIG. 71), the left drawer section 1612 may also move in a direction away from the left winding section 1611 (to the right in FIG. 71) at a speed faster than the movement speed of the left winding section 1611. Even in this case, the position of the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) moves to the right, but the left drawing panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left winding panel LP1 move away from each other. Also, if the left winding part 1611 is able to move leftward, the left winding part 1611 may move away from the left drawing part 1612 (to the right in Figure 71) while the left drawing part 1612 also moves away from the left winding part 1611 (to the right in Figure 71). Even in this case, the left drawing panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) move away from each other.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (B) shows the state in which the first movable performance body 161 has completed the first operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the state in which the left drawer section 1612 has now moved in a direction approaching the left winding section 1611 (to the left in Figure 71) and returned to its initial position. The first sheet member 1610 is pushed by the left drawer section 1612 and is wound up onto the left winding section 1611. As a result, the area in which the first light-transmitting section 161t overlaps with the display screen of the performance image display device 157 gradually becomes smaller, and the area in which the background image appears blurred becomes narrower. The operation of the first movable performance body 161 shown in Figure 71 (B) corresponds to an example of a third operation in which the left drawer panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) move in a direction approaching each other. Note that, if the left take-up unit 1611 is in a state where it can move leftward, the left take-up unit 1612 may move toward the left take-up unit 1611 (to the left in FIG. 71 ) at a speed faster than the movement speed of the left take-up unit 1611, while the left take-up unit 1611 moves away from the left drawer 1612 (to the left in FIG. 71 ). Even in this case, the position of the left take-up panel LP1 (corresponding to the second portion) moves to the left, but the left drawer panel LP2 (corresponding to the first portion) and the left take-up panel LP1 move toward each other. Furthermore, while the left take-up unit 1611 moves toward the left drawer 1612 (to the left in FIG. 71 ), the left drawer 1612 may also move toward the left take-up unit 1611 (to the right in FIG. 71 ). Even in this case, the left drawer panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) will move toward each other.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (C) shows the state in which the first movable performance body 161 has completed the first operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the left winding section 1611 moving in a direction approaching the left drawer section 1612 (to the right in Figure 71), so that the left winding section 1611 is in contact with the left drawer section 1612. The first sheet member 1610 is being wound around the left winding section 1611. As a result, the area in which the first light-transmitting section 161t overlaps with the display screen of the performance image display device 157 gradually becomes smaller, and the area in which the background image appears blurred becomes narrower. The operation of the first movable performance body 161 shown in Figure 71 (C) corresponds to an example of the fourth operation.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (D) shows the first movable performance body 161 after completing the fourth operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the left winding section 1611 moving in a direction away from the left pull-out section 1612 (to the left in Figure 71). The first sheet member 1610 emerges as if being sent out from the left winding section 1611 and extends toward the left. As a result, the first light-transmitting section 161t gradually overlaps the display screen of the performance image display device 157, and the area in which the background image appears blurred expands. The operation of the first movable performance body 161 shown in Figure 71 (D) corresponds to an example of the second operation.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (E) also shows the state when the first movable performance body 161 has completed the fourth operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the state in which the left winding section 1611 first moves in a direction away from the left pull-out section 1612 (leftward in Figure 71), as shown in Figure 71 (D), completing the second operation. Next, as shown in Figure 71 (B), the left pull-out section 1612 moves in a direction toward the left winding section 1611 (leftward in Figure 71) and returns to its initial position. In other words, the third operation is performed after the second operation, and the first movable performance body 161 returns to its initial position. During this time, the first sheet member 1610 first expands to the left, and then narrows to the left.

In addition, while each panel, such as the left reel panel LP1, left pull-out panel LP2, right reel panel RP1, and right pull-out panel RP2, is a panel that covers only the player side, each panel can be cylindrical, with the front half-circle portion visible to the player made opaque and the rear half-circle portion invisible to the player made transparent. By leaving the rear half-circle portion transparent, it is possible to check from the rear whether the assembly has been completed correctly. Furthermore, in the event of a malfunction, the inside can be checked without disassembly, allowing for early detection of internal problems.

In the above explanation, both the first movable presentation body 161 and the second movable presentation body 162 only move horizontally, but they may also be movable presentation bodies that perform rotational movements. For example, a first rotational presentation body that is long horizontally and a second rotational presentation body that is also long horizontally can rotate forward and backward around the position of their respective centers of gravity as the center of rotation. The first rotational presentation body has a member that is at least partially connected to the second rotational presentation body (for example, a single base member that supports the rotation axes of the first and second rotational presentation bodies). The initial position is when the first and second rotational presentation bodies are arranged side by side in a straight line, and they are arranged via the base member on the player's side of the display screen of the presentation image display device 157. In the initial position, the base member overlaps the display screen, but neither the first rotational presentation body nor the second rotational presentation body directly overlaps it. Also, in the initial position, a certain portion of the right end of the first rotational performance body (corresponding to the first part) and a certain portion of the left end of the second rotational performance body (corresponding to the second part) are close to each other. The action of the first rotational performance body rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise corresponds to an action (first action) in which a certain portion of the right end of the first rotational performance body (corresponding to the first part) moves away from a certain portion of the left end of the second rotational performance body (corresponding to the second part). When the first rotational performance body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, a certain portion of the right end of the first rotational performance body (corresponding to the first part) in a vertically elongated position overlaps the display screen of the performance image display device 157. In other words, when the first rotational performance body rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position, the area where a certain portion of the right end (corresponding to the first part) overlaps the display screen expands. The action of the first rotational performance body rotating 90 degrees clockwise and returning to its initial position after completing the first action corresponds to an action (third action) in which a certain part of the right end of the first rotational performance body (corresponding to the first part) approaches a certain part of the left end of the second rotational performance body (corresponding to the second part). When the first rotational performance body rotates 90 degrees clockwise and returns to its initial position after completing the first action, the area in which a certain part of the right end (corresponding to the first part) overlaps with the display screen is reduced. Furthermore, the action of the second rotational performance body rotating 90 degrees clockwise corresponds to an action (second action) in which a certain part of the left end of the second rotational performance body (corresponding to the second part) moves away from a certain part of the right end of the first rotational performance body (corresponding to the first part). When the second rotational performance body has rotated 90 degrees clockwise, a certain part of the left end (corresponding to the second part) of the second rotational performance body, which is in a vertically long position, overlaps with the display screen of the performance image display device 157. In other words, when the second rotational performance body rotates 90 degrees clockwise from its initial position, the area where a certain portion of its left edge (corresponding to the second part) overlaps with the display screen expands. The action of the second rotational performance body rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise and returning to its initial position after completing the second action corresponds to an action (fourth action) in which a certain portion of its left edge (corresponding to the second part) approaches a certain portion of its right edge (corresponding to the first part) of the first rotational performance body. When the second rotational performance body rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise and returns to its initial position after completing the second action, the area where a certain portion of its left edge (corresponding to the second part) overlaps with the display screen shrinks.

The above description describes a gaming machine that includes a first movable body [e.g., left drawer section 1612], a second movable body [e.g., left reel section 1611], a first drive unit [e.g., left drawer motor LM2], and a second drive unit [e.g., left reel motor LM1], wherein the first movable body is configured to be movable by drive of the first drive unit, the second movable body is configured to be movable by drive of the second drive unit, and the first movable body has a member [e.g., first sheet member 1610] at least partially connected to the second movable body.

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects to be created by the movement of two partially connected movable bodies, increasing the player's interest.

The article also described a gaming machine characterized in that "the first movable body [e.g., the left drawer section 1612] is configured to be capable of performing a first operation [e.g., the operation shown in Figure 71(A)] in which a first portion of the first movable body [e.g., the left drawer panel LP2] and a second portion of the second movable body [e.g., the left take-up panel LP1] move away from each other, and the first movable body [e.g., the left drawer section 1612] is configured to be capable of performing a third operation [e.g., the operation shown in Figure 71(B)] in which the first portion and the second portion move closer together."

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects to be created by changing the relative position of the first movable body with respect to the second movable body, enhancing player enjoyment.

The first motion may be a motion in which the first part moves away from the second part while the second part remains stationary, or a motion in which the first part moves away from the second part at a speed faster than the speed of the second part while the second part is moving towards the first part. Alternatively, the first part may move away from the second part while the second part is moving away from the first part.

The third motion may be a motion in which the first part moves toward the second part while the second part remains stationary, or a motion in which the first part moves toward the second part at a speed faster than the speed of the second part while the second part is moving away from the first part. Alternatively, the third motion may be a motion in which the second part moves toward the first part while the first part also moves toward the second part.

The article also described a gaming machine that includes a display means [e.g., a performance image display device 157], and is configured such that the area of the first movable body overlapping with the display means expands when the first action is performed, and the area of the first movable body overlapping with the display means contracts when the third action is performed.

This gaming machine allows for a novel effect in which the size of the area of the first movable body that overlaps with the display means changes, enhancing the player's interest.

The article also described a gaming machine in which "the first movable body is configured to include a certain member [e.g., a first sheet member 1610] that has optical transparency in at least a portion [e.g., a first optically transparent portion 161t], and the certain member is configured to expand the area overlapping with the display means when the first action is performed, and to shrink the area overlapping with the display means when the third action is performed."

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects in which the size of the area overlapping the display means of the certain component changes, increasing the player's interest.

The article also described a gaming machine characterized in that "the second movable body [e.g., left reel section 1611] is configured to be capable of performing a second action [e.g., the action shown in Figure 71 (D)] in which the first portion [e.g., left drawer panel LP2] and the second portion [e.g., left reel panel LP1] move away from each other, and the second movable body [e.g., left reel section 1611] is configured to be capable of performing a fourth action [e.g., the action shown in Figure 71 (C)] in which the first portion and the second portion move closer together."

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects to be created by changing the relative position of the second movable body with respect to the first movable body, increasing the player's interest.

The second movement may be a movement in which the second part moves away from the first part while the first part remains stationary, or a movement in which the second part moves away from the first part at a speed faster than the speed of the first part while the first part is moving towards the second part. Alternatively, the second movement may be a movement in which the first part moves away from the second part while the second part also moves away from the first part.

The fourth motion may be a motion in which the second part moves toward the first part while the first part remains stationary, or a motion in which the second part moves toward the first part at a speed faster than the speed of the first part while the first part is moving away from the second part. Alternatively, the fourth motion may be a motion in which the first part moves toward the second part while the second part also moves toward the first part.

We also explained that "the first movable body is operable while the second movable body is in operation, and the second movable body is operable while the first movable body is in operation."

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects in which the first and second movable bodies move simultaneously, enhancing player enjoyment.

In addition, the first movable body may be configured to be capable of performing a first movement in which a first portion of the first movable body moves away from a second portion of the second movable body, and may be configured to be capable of performing a third movement in which the first portion of the first movable body moves toward the second portion of the second movable body.

Furthermore, the second movable body may be configured to be capable of performing a second movement in which the second portion of the second movable body moves away from the first portion of the first movable body, and a fourth movement in which the second portion of the second movable body moves toward the first portion of the first movable body.

Furthermore, the fourth operation may be configured to be executable while the first operation is being executed, the second operation may be configured to be executable while the third operation is being executed, the second operation may be configured to be executable while the first operation is being executed, and the fourth operation may be configured to be executable while the third operation is being executed.

<Configuration Related to Sensor Unit SU of Performance Device 16> Next, the configuration related to the sensor unit SU of performance device 16 described in FIG. 69 will be described using FIG. 72 to FIG. 76. Note that in the following description, components already described in other embodiments (e.g., FIG. 17 to FIG. 32) will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Furthermore, for components that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the terms and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 72 is a perspective view showing the rear side of the performance device 16.

As explained in Figures 69 to 71, the performance device 16 is provided with a first movable performance body 161 and a second movable performance body 162. The left winding section 1611 and left drawer section 1612 of the first movable performance body 161 are each provided with a light-shielding piece, and a sensor unit is provided to detect whether these light-shielding pieces are in their initial positions (here, the positions where the film is stored at the left end, as shown in Figure 72). In addition, the right winding section 1621 and right drawer section 1622 of the second movable performance body 162 are each provided with a light-shielding piece, and a sensor unit is provided to detect whether these light-shielding pieces are in their initial positions (here, the positions where the film is stored at the right end, as shown in Figure 72). Sensor unit SU1 shown in Figure 72 is used to detect the initial position of the right winding section 1621.

Figure 73 shows an example of the positional relationship between sensor units SU1 and SU2 and light-shielding pieces C1 and C2.

In Figure 73, some parts of the performance device 16 are hidden to make it easier to understand the parts that are difficult to see from the outside, as shown in Figure 72. Figure 73 shows the state in which the sensor unit SU1 provided for the right winding section 1621 of the second movable performance body 162 detects the light-shielding piece C1 of this right winding section 1621 (both in their initial positions). Also shown is the state in which the sensor unit SU2 provided for the right drawer section 1622 of the second movable performance body 162 detects the light-shielding piece C2 of this right drawer section 1622 (both in their initial positions).

Figure 74 is a right side view of the performance device 16.

The effect device 16 is placed on the front door 102 of the slot machine 10, and behind it are also placed the effect image display device 157 and the circuit board that controls it. Because the internal space of the slot machine 10 is limited, these parts are placed as close together as possible, as shown in Figure 74. For this reason, during assembly, there is a risk that other parts may collide with the sensor unit on the back of the effect device 16, damaging the sensor unit. Also, in the example of Figure 74, the effect image display device 157 is slightly tilted to make it easier for players to see, but performing the assembly work while adjusting this tilt increases the risk of collisions.

Figure 75 is an enlarged view showing the area around sensor unit SU1 in Figure 72 (the area circled by a dotted line).

As shown in Figure 75, the performance device 16 of this embodiment has a rib RB provided near the sensor unit SU1, which prevents collision with the sensor unit SU1. The rib RB will be described in detail below.

Figure 76 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a sensor unit SU1 and a rib RB.

The sensor unit SU1 shown in Figure 76 has a light-emitting unit SUE, an opposing light-receiving unit SUR, a screw hole SUH for fixing the sensor, and a connector SUC. A connector HAC attached to the end of the harness HA is connected to the connector SUC, and the sensor is configured to output a detection signal to an external circuit board. The sensor unit SU1 outputs a signal indicating whether the light-receiving unit SUR has detected light from the light-emitting unit SUE. This sensor unit SU1 is not attached to the circuit board to which the output signal is sent, but is attached to a member different from this circuit board.

The rib RB has portions that exceed the size of the sensor unit SU1 in both the front-to-back direction (the direction connecting the front and back) and the up-down direction. Specifically, in the harness connection direction (front-to-back direction in Figure 76), there is a portion that exceeds the sensor tip (x1 in Figure 76), a portion that exceeds the connector SUC of the sensor unit SU1 (x3 in Figure 76), and a portion that exceeds the connector HAC of the harness HA connected to the sensor unit SU1 (x4 in Figure 76). Furthermore, in the direction perpendicular to the harness connection direction (up-down direction in Figure 76), there are portions that exceed the sensor unit SU1, the connector SUC of the sensor unit SU1, and the connector HAC connected to it (x2, x5 in Figure 76). The edge RBS of the rib RB that faces the performance image display device 157 has a partially inclined shape (inclined from the front-to-back direction or the up-down direction). This inclined shape helps to disperse the force of the performance image display device 157 when it collides, and also allows the performance image display device 157 to be guided to its installation position by moving it along this side RBS.

In the above configuration, the rib RB provided near the sensor unit SU1 protects the sensor unit SU1 from collisions with other components, making the sensor unit SU1 less likely to be damaged.

In the above example, the rib RB has portions that exceed the size of the sensor unit SU1 in both the front-to-back and up-to-down directions, but it may also be configured to have portions that exceed the size of the sensor unit SU1 in at least one direction. In this case, the sensor unit SU1 can be protected in at least this one direction. Of course, by having portions that exceed the size of the sensor unit SU1 in two directions, as in the above example, it is possible to ensure better protection. The protective effect can be particularly enhanced when these two directions are perpendicular.

In addition, in the above example, the rib RB has a portion that exceeds the size of the sensor unit SU1 in both the front-to-back and up-to-down directions, but it may also be configured to have a portion that protrudes in either direction, such as having a portion that protrudes beyond the sensor unit SU1 only on the rear side in the front-to-back direction. In this case, the sensor unit SU1 can be protected on the side with the protruding portion.

Note that while the above example describes a configuration for protecting the sensor unit SU1 provided in the performance device 16, the object to be protected is not limited to the sensor unit SU1, and any circuit configuration means may be protected. For example, some circuit configuration means, such as connectors, cables, and sensor detection units, are prone to damage, and this configuration can protect such circuit configuration means from damage. For example, in the case of a configuration to protect a connector SUC, the rib RB should have a portion that exceeds the size of the connector SUC in at least one direction. Furthermore, a combination of multiple parts or components, such as the combination of connector SUC and connector HAC, may also be protected.

In addition, while the above example describes a configuration in which the sensor unit SU1 is protected by the rib RB, the same protective effect can be achieved with any component that has a portion larger than the sensor unit SU1, not just the rib RB.

Furthermore, when a sensor unit is to be protected, it may be, like sensor unit SU1, a circuit board (for example, a board inside sensor unit SU1) that includes at least a certain circuit configuration means (for example, a connector SUC) and a detection unit (for example, a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR). Alternatively, the sensor unit may be a circuit board (for example, a board inside sensor unit SU1) that includes only a certain circuit configuration means (for example, a connector SUC), a detection unit (for example, a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR), and a resistor.

In addition, while the above example describes a configuration in which the sensor unit SU1 does not have a light-shielding piece C1, the present invention can also be applied to a sensor unit that also has a light-shielding piece. In such a sensor unit, the light-shielding piece moves in response to an external force, making it possible to detect the presence or absence of an external force. In other words, the sensor unit may include at least a certain board (e.g., a board inside the sensor unit SU1), certain circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC), a detection unit (e.g., a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR), and a light-shielding piece.

Furthermore, when a sensor unit is to be protected, the sensor unit may have a certain circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC) on a first surface of a certain board (e.g., a board inside the sensor unit SU1) and a detection unit (e.g., a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR) on a second surface of the certain board. Alternatively, the sensor unit may have a certain circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC) and a detection unit (e.g., a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR) on a first surface of a certain board (e.g., a board inside the sensor unit SU1).

Furthermore, if the sensor unit to be protected is incorporated into other members or parts, such as the sensor unit SU1 provided in the performance device 16, part of the sensor unit may be exposed from these members or parts or may be visible.

Furthermore, the sensor unit to be protected is not limited to what it can detect; it may be capable of detecting that the movable body is in its initial position, as in the example above, or it may be capable of detecting the position of the door body. Furthermore, sensor unit SU1 may be provided on rib RB.

Furthermore, a certain unit (e.g., a performance image display device 157) may be configured to be detachable while the sensor unit or certain circuit configuration means to be protected is installed.

Furthermore, the side RBS of the rib RB on the side of the performance image display device 157 has a partially inclined shape (a shape tilted from the front-to-back or up-down direction). In this way, a certain component (for example, rib RB) that serves as a protective component may have an edge on the side of a certain unit (for example, performance image display device 157) that is inclined in a certain direction (for example, the direction of the connector SUC). Furthermore, depending on the mounting position of the sensor unit, the side RBS may have a partially inclined shape (a shape tilted from the left-to-right or up-down direction).

The technical concepts described in Figures 72 to 76 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

The above description describes a gaming machine equipped with a certain circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC) and a certain member (e.g., a rib RB), where the certain member is located near the certain circuit configuration means and has a portion that protrudes further than the certain circuit configuration means in a first direction (e.g., the rearward direction in the front-to-rear direction) (see, for example, Figure 76).

Furthermore, we have described the gaming machine described above, characterized in that the certain component has a portion that protrudes further than the certain circuit configuration means in a second direction different from the first direction (for example, the upward direction of the vertical direction) (see, for example, Figure 76).

Furthermore, we have described the gaming machine described above, characterized in that the second direction is a direction perpendicular to the first direction.

We also described the gaming machine described above, characterized in that the circuit configuration means is a connector to which a harness can be connected.

We have also described the gaming machine described above, which is characterized by being equipped with a sensor unit (e.g., sensor unit SU1), and the sensor unit including the certain circuit configuration means.

We have also described the gaming machine described above, characterized in that the sensor unit is attached to a member different from the circuit board to which the output signal of the sensor unit is sent.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a launching device that launches balls into a predetermined gaming area, a winning slot configured to accept balls launched from the launching device, detection means that detects balls that have entered the winning slot, payout means that pays out balls when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device that displays a variable predetermined pattern (identification information), and is suitable for pachinko machines and the like in which, when a gaming ball enters the winning slot and wins, the variable display device changes the pattern and then displays a still image to notify the progress of the gaming status.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, an "enclosed gaming machine" is one that circulates gaming balls enclosed within the gaming machine. The main control unit, first sub-control unit, and second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Furthermore, while two-way communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most favorable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to other configurations, the range of play may be further expanded.

<<Embodiment B>> <Embodiment 1> Below, we will explain in detail the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to embodiment 1 of the present invention using the drawings.

<Overall Configuration> First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described using Figure 77. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The external structure of the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on its front.

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) in an amusement machine installation store. The main body 104, called the inner frame, is a vertically rectangular member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is pivotally attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112, forming the base body of the amusement machine. The main body 104 is also formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. It also has an inner frame open sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 when it is opened.

The front frame door 106 is a door element that has a locking function and is attached via a hinge 112 to the front of the main body 104, which forms the front side of the pachinko machine 100, so that it can be opened and closed freely. It is frame-shaped and has an opening on the inside. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a lamp 122 for the game table frame are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a game area 124. A front frame door opening sensor (not shown) is also provided to detect the opening of the front frame door 106 when it is opened.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member with a locking function attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The ball storage tray door 108 comprises an upper tray 126 capable of storing multiple game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and having a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 operated by the player to eject the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128, a ball ejection lever 132 operated by the player to eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a cash box), and a lever 132 operated by the player to eject the game balls guided to the launching device 110. The game console is equipped with a ball launch handle 134 that launches balls into the game area 124 of the game board 200, a chance button 136 that changes the presentation of the various presentation devices 206 when operated by the player, a chance button lamp 138 that lights up the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade, a return operation button 142 that issues an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the status of the card unit, and a button unit 190. It also has a lower tray full sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is full.

The launching device 110 is attached to the bottom of the main body 104 and comprises a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the play area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Figure 78 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of Figure 77, viewed from the rear side. At the top of the rear of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upward, for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150, for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and inside it are a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown). The sprocket is rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains gaming balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152. By driving the payout motor and rotating it by a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained gaming balls are sent out one by one downwards from the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of gaming balls sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 when a gaming ball is passing, and the other high or low signal when a gaming ball is not passing. Furthermore, gaming balls that pass this payout sensor are configured to travel along a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 uses this configuration to pay out balls to players.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152 are a main control board case 158 that houses the main control board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that controls the overall game, a first sub-control board case 162 that houses the first sub-control board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that controls the presentation based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that controls the presentation based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, a liquid crystal control board case 682 that houses the liquid crystal control board 680 that constitutes the liquid crystal control unit 700 that controls the liquid crystal, and a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls and is operated by a gaming store clerk. The console is equipped with a payout control board case 172 housing a payout control board 170 equipped with an error reset switch 168 that resets an error when a ball is fired; a launch board case 176 housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the firing of gaming balls; a power board case 184 housing a power board 182 that constitutes a power management unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off when operated by an amusement facility clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on; and a CR interface unit 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 has a CR unit connection unit composed of, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector, and signals are sent and received between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via this.

In addition, when viewed from the rear, the pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 to the right of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154. The relay board 196 is used to electrically connect the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. When replacing the game board 200, there is no need to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer, so the game board 200 is replaced while the main body 104 and the hall computer remain connected via the relay board 196. However, depending on the model, it may be necessary to change the type of signal sent from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer, so the pachinko machine 100 may be configured so that the connection status of the relay board 196 can be checked from the front (near side) of the pachinko machine 100 when the game board 200 is removed.

In addition, a volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided in the upper left corner of the first sub-control board case 162 in the figure. The volume adjustment switch 192 is configured, for example, as a rotary switch.

In this way, the main control board 156, first sub-control board 160, second sub-control board 164, and LCD control board 680 are provided on the back of the gaming board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, while the payout control board 170, launch board 174, and power supply board 182 are provided on the outer frame 102 because they are commonly used by multiple models.

Figure 79 is a simplified front view of the game board 200. The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204, which define a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

A presentation device 206 is located approximately in the center of the play area 124. This presentation device 206 has a decorative symbol display device 208 and a movable display device 288 located approximately in the center, and is surrounded by a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reserve lamp 216, a first special symbol reserve lamp 218, a second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and a high probability lamp 222. Note that, hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols may be referred to as "special symbols."

The performance device 206 operates the performance movable body 224 to produce the performance, and details will be described later. The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various displays used in the performance, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a performance display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display a different decorative pattern, and the performance display area 208d displays an image used in the performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are capable of displaying various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The movable display device 288 is also a display device for displaying various images used in the performance, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display device, but like the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector. The movable display device 288 is equipped with a motor (not shown) and is configured to be movable up and down by the motor, and when lowered, covers at least a portion of the front of the decorative pattern display device 208.

The regular map display device 210 is a display device for displaying regular maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are configured with 7-segment LEDs.

The normal symbol pending lamp 216 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved normal symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., two) of normal symbol variable games. The first special symbol pending lamp 218 and the second special symbol pending lamp 220 are lamps that indicate the number of reserved special symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. The high probability lamp 222 is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or is about to enter a high probability state; it lights up when the game state changes from a low probability state where a jackpot is unlikely to occur to a high probability state, and it goes out when the game state changes from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In addition, around the periphery of this performance device 206, predetermined ball entry ports, such as a general winning port 226, a normal starting port 228, a first special starting port 230, a second special starting port 232, and a variable winning port 234, are arranged.

In this embodiment, multiple general winning openings 226 are arranged on the gaming board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering one of these general winning openings 226 (when a ball enters a general winning opening 226), the payout device 152 is activated and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) are discharged as prize balls onto the upper tray 126. The player can freely remove the balls discharged onto the upper tray 126, and this configuration allows prize balls to be paid out to players based on whether they win. Balls that enter the general winning openings 226 are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged onto the gaming island side. In this embodiment, balls paid out to players in exchange for winning are sometimes referred to as "prize balls," and balls loaned to players are sometimes referred to as "loan balls." Prize balls and loan balls are collectively referred to as "balls (game balls)."

The normal map start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker, which determines whether a ball has passed through a specified area of the play area 124, and in this embodiment, one is located on the left side of the play board 200. Unlike balls that enter the general winning port 226, balls that pass through the normal map start port 228 are not ejected to the play island side. When a specified ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 begins normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special symbol start hole 230 is provided, located in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering this first special symbol start hole 230, the payout device 152 (described below) is activated, a predetermined number of balls (e.g., three) are discharged as prize balls onto the upper tray 126, and a special symbol variable game is initiated by the first special symbol display device 212. Note that the ball that enters the first special symbol start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special symbol starting hole 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chute), and in this embodiment, only one is located directly below the first special symbol starting hole 230. This second special symbol starting hole 232 is equipped with blade members 232a that can be opened and closed left and right. Balls cannot enter the hole while the blade members 232a are closed. When a player wins the normal symbol variable play and the normal symbol display device 210 displays a winning symbol, the blade members 232a open and close at predetermined time intervals and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special symbol starting hole 232, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., four) are discharged as prize balls onto the upper tray 126, and the special symbol variable play is initiated by the second special symbol display device 214. Balls that enter the second special symbol starting hole 232 are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged toward the game island.

The variable prize opening 234 is called the big prize opening or attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is located below the center of the game board 200. This variable prize opening 234 is equipped with a door element 234a that can be opened and closed. Balls cannot enter the opening while the door element 234a is closed. When a player wins the special symbol variable game and the special symbol display device displays a stopped big win symbol, the door element 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (e.g., opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) a predetermined number of times (e.g., 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable prize opening 234, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15 balls) are discharged into the upper tray 126 as prize balls. Balls that enter the variable prize opening 234 are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged toward the game island.

In addition, disk-shaped ball direction changers 236 called windmills and multiple game nails 238 are installed near these winning holes and starting holes, and an outlet 240 is provided at the bottom of the inner rail 204 to guide balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharge them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper tray 126 to the launch position on the launch rail, which drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148 launch the ball through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 into the play area 124. Once the ball reaches the top of the play area 124, it falls downward, changing direction using the ball direction changing member 236 and play pin 238, etc., and either enters a winning slot (general winning slot 226, variable winning slot 234) or a starting slot (first special symbol starting slot 230, second special symbol starting slot 232), or reaches the outlet 240 without entering any winning slot or starting slot, or by simply passing through the normal symbol starting slot 228.

<Effective device 206> Next, we will explain the effective device 206 of the pachinko machine 100.

On the front side of this performance device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and a performance movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. Furthermore, on the back side of the performance device 206, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are arranged. In other words, in the performance device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, stage 244, performance movable body 224, and movable display device 288.

The warp device 242 ejects game balls that enter the warp entrance 242a located at the upper left of the presentation device 206 from the warp exit 242b onto the stage 244 located below the front of the presentation device 206. Balls ejected from the warp exit 242b and balls that have become stuck on nails on the game board 200 can roll on the stage 244, and a special route 244a is provided in the center of the stage 244, making it easier for balls that pass through to enter the first special chart starting hole 230.

In this embodiment, the performance movable body 224 consists of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that resemble the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and is equipped with an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position and a forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion 224b to the elbow position. The performance movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 by the upper arm motor and forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 consists of a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the top of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move left and right in response to the movement of the belt driven by a motor via the pulleys. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the inner edges of the shielding means overlap, shielding the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, the inner edges of the doors slightly overlap the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can still see the entire display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at any position, and can, for example, obscure only a portion of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern is displayed. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a portion of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the lattice holes, or the shoji portion of the lattice holes may be covered with a translucent lens body so that the player can vaguely see the display by the rear decorative pattern display device 208, or the shoji portion of the lattice holes may be completely covered (obscured) so that the rear decorative pattern display device 208 is completely invisible.

The movable display device 288 is used to display the effects and is movable. Therefore, in the following description, the decorative pattern display device 208 may be referred to as the first display device (main LCD display device), and the movable display device 288 may be referred to as the second display device (sub LCD display device). The movable display device 288, together with the shielding device 246 and the movable effect body 224 resembling a human arm, may also be referred to as a (performance) movable body.

<Control Unit> Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using Figure 80. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls various devices in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that mainly controls the presentation based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100, and a liquid crystal control unit 700.

<Main Control Unit> First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring program processing abnormalities. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

The basic circuit 302 also includes a counter circuit (random number generation circuit) 318 (which has two built-in counters) that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates between 0 and 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a, and a sensor circuit 320 that receives signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, as well as front frame door open sensors, inner frame open sensors, and bottom tray full sensors, and outputs the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302. 2, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the normal symbol display device 210, a drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status display units 328 (e.g., normal symbol hold lamp 216, first special symbol hold lamp 218, second special symbol hold lamp 220, high probability lamp 222, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close predetermined movable members, such as the blade member 232a of the second special symbol start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special symbol starting hole 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special symbol starting hole 230 at that timing and stores the latched value in an internal counter value storage register corresponding to the first special symbol starting hole 230. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special symbol starting hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special symbol starting hole 232 at that timing and stores the latched value in an internal counter value storage register corresponding to the second special symbol starting hole 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also has a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating a drop in voltage when the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing, which will be described later).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller> Next, we will explain the first sub-controller 400 of the pachinko machine 100. The first sub-controller 400 has a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-controller 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main controller 300. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various performance data, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as the system clock. Note that the control program and various performance data may be stored in separate ROMs in the ROM 406.

Also connected to the basic circuit 402 are a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the gaming table frame lamp 122), a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the chance button 136 and the moving parts of the button unit 190, a button detection sensor 426 and various sensors 430 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, and a sensor circuit 428 for outputting detection signals from the various sensors 430 and the button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402.

Next, we will explain the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and is equipped with a ROM 506 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The basic circuit 502 is also connected to a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the movable effect body 224, the shading device 246, and the movable parts of the movable display device 288; a movable effect body sensor 424 for detecting the current positions of the movable effect body 224, the shading device 246, etc.; a sensor circuit 518 for outputting the detection signal from the movable effect body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502; a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532; and a serial communication control circuit 520 for controlling lighting via serial communication between the basic circuit 502 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit> Next, we will explain the payout control unit 600, launch control unit 630, and power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604, and communicates with a card unit 608, which is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100, via an interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs whether to allow or stop launching, and a control signal output by the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 that instructs the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied externally to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300 and first sub-control unit 400, and each device, such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. However, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and device via another power supply path.

<LCD Control Unit> Next, the LCD control unit 700 will be described. The LCD control unit 700 receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and is equipped with a CPU 704 that controls the entire LCD control unit 700 based on these control commands, a RAM 708 for temporarily storing data, a ROM 506 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire LCD control unit 700, data for image display, etc., and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 710. The CPU 704 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 714B as a system clock, and reads image data stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 718, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

<Block diagram of gaming machine> The connection relationships of each board (control board) of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained with reference to Figure 81. The figure is a block diagram showing the connection relationships of each (control) board, etc. that make up the main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, payout control unit 600, and LCD control unit 700, and the like, with the display device, movable body, etc.

In the pachinko machine 100, on the game board 200 side, the main control board 156 is connected to the board relay board 722, external terminal board 720, and first sub-control board 160. The board relay board 722 is connected to various sensors 320, solenoids 332, and symbol display boards 212, 214, 210, and 328. When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a game ball has entered the general prize opening (prize opening) 226, the regular start opening (gate) 228, the first special start opening 230, or the second start opening 232, a switch signal is sent to the main control unit 300. In addition, a solenoid signal for opening and closing the second special start opening (regular electric device) 232 is sent from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. In addition, solenoid signals for opening and closing the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening) are sent from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. In addition, count signals for counting balls entering the game are sent to the main control unit 300 from the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening).

The first sub-control board 160 is also connected to a liquid crystal control board 680, which is connected to a decorative pattern display device (main liquid crystal display device) 208 and a movable display device (sub liquid crystal display device) 288. The first sub-control board 160 is also connected to a second sub-control board 164, which is connected to movable objects M on the board surface (such as the movable part 2441 of the movable display device 288, the performance movable body 244, the shading device 246, etc.) and a board surface side lighting board 724 on which the game board lamp 532 is mounted.

As a result, the first sub-control board 160 performs control in response to commands from the main control board 156, and the LCD control board 680 and second sub-control board 164 perform control in response to commands from the first sub-control board 160. Specifically, processing information (command signals) generated by the main control unit 300 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and this processing information or processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 is transmitted to the LCD control unit 700 and the second sub-control unit 500. For example, data for driving the performance movable body 224, data for emitting illumination for the performance movable body 224, data for driving the movable display device 288, etc. are transmitted from the first sub-control board 160 to the second sub-control board 164. In addition, data or a clock signal for emitting illumination on the gaming board 200 side is transmitted from the drive circuit 516 of the second sub-control unit 500 to the board side illumination board 724. In addition, each drive circuit 324, 326, 330 transmits display control signals for the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, and the various status display units 328. In addition, control data from the first sub-control board 160 is transmitted to the LCD control board 680, and image data is transmitted to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with board frame relay boards 726A, 726B, and 726C on the main body 104 side, which relay and connect the boards on the game board 200 side to the boards on the main body 104 side. Board frame relay board 726A connects the main control board 156 and the payout control board 170. This allows command signals related to payout control, for example (such as the number of payouts and information for communicating with the external terminal board 720) to be sent from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600, and discharge system error information, etc. to the main control unit 300. In addition, the panel frame relay board 726B connects the first sub-control board 160 to the power supply board 182, and the panel frame relay board 726C connects the first sub-control board 160 to the door-side lighting board 734 on which the chance button 136, button unit 190, various button lamps 138, 418, button movable part 246, and various lamps 418 are mounted, which are provided on the front door frame 106, and the speaker 120 via the door-side lighting board 734.

As a result, data and clock signals for illuminating the various lamps 418 are sent from the drive circuit 420 of the first sub-control unit 400 to the door-side lighting board 734. Audio data is also sent from the sound source IC 416 to the speaker 120. Detection results from the button detection sensor 426 and other devices operating the chance button 136 and button unit 190 are also sent to the first sub-control unit 400.

The payout control board 170 is connected to the payout sensor 604, payout motor 602, and game ball lending device connection board 728. The payout control board 170 is also connected to the power supply board 182, launch board 174, and receiving tray board 730. The launch board 174 is connected to the power supply board 182, launch motor 632, and ball feeder 634. The receiving tray board 730 is connected to the launch handle board 738 and degree display board 744 provided on the front frame door 106. The handle volume 736, full tank switch 740, and touch sensor 742 are connected to the launch handle board 738.

<Types of symbols> Next, using Figures 82(a) to (c), we will explain the types of special symbols and regular symbols that are displayed as stopped symbols by the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100. Figure 82(a) shows an example of a special symbol stopping symbol pattern.

Special symbol 1 variable play begins when the first start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special symbol start port 230, and special symbol 2 variable play begins when the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232. When special symbol 1 variable play begins, the first special symbol display device 212 performs a "special symbol 1 variable display" by repeatedly lighting up all seven segments and the single central segment. Furthermore, when special symbol 2 variable play begins, the second special symbol display device 214 performs a "special symbol 2 variable display" by repeatedly lighting up all seven segments and the single central segment. These "special symbol 1 variable displays" and "special symbol 2 variable displays" correspond to examples of the variable display of patterns referred to in this invention.

Then, once the change time determined before the start of special symbol 1's change (corresponding to the change time referred to in this invention) has elapsed, the first special symbol display device 212 will display a stopped display of the stopped symbol pattern of special symbol 1, and once the change time determined before the start of special symbol 2's change (which also corresponds to the change time referred to in this invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 will display a stopped display of the stopped symbol pattern of special symbol 2. Therefore, the period from the start of the "special symbol 1 change display" to the stopped display of the stopped symbol pattern of special symbol 1, or from the start of the "special symbol 2 change display" to the stopped display of the stopped symbol pattern of special symbol 2, corresponds to an example of a pattern change stopped display referred to in this invention, and hereinafter, the series of displays from the start of this "special symbol 1 or 2 change display" to the stopped display of the stopped symbol pattern of special symbol 1 or 2 will be referred to as the pattern change stopped display. As described below, the pattern change stopped display may be performed multiple times in succession. Figure (a) shows 10 types of special symbols, from "Special Symbol A" to "Special Symbol J," as stop symbol patterns in the symbol change stop display. The white areas in the figure indicate the locations of segments that will be turned off, and the black areas indicate the locations of segments that will be lit.

"Special symbol A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special symbol B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as described below, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred in special symbol variable play is made by a hardware random number lottery, and the determination of whether or not a special jackpot has occurred is made by a software random number lottery. The difference between a jackpot and a special jackpot is whether the probability of winning a jackpot in the next special symbol variable play is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning a jackpot will be referred to as a "special symbol high probability state," and a state with a low probability will be referred to as a "special symbol low probability state." Furthermore, after both the 15R special jackpot play and the 15R jackpot play end, the machine transitions to a time-saving state. Time-saving will be described in more detail below; a state in which the machine transitions to the time-saving state will be referred to as a "normal symbol high probability state," and a state in which the machine does not transition to the time-saving state will be referred to as a "normal symbol low probability state." The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special Symbol A" is in a state of high probability of special symbol and high probability of normal symbol, while the 15R jackpot symbol "Special Symbol B" is in a state of low probability of special symbol and high probability of normal symbol. These "Special Symbols A" and "Special Symbols B" are symbols that will award relatively large amounts of profit to the player.

"Special Chart C" is a 2R jackpot symbol known as a sudden probability change, and is in a state where the special chart has a high probability and the normal chart has a high probability. In other words, compared to "Special Chart A," which is 15R, "Special Chart C" is different in that it is 2R. "Special Chart D" is a 2R jackpot symbol known as a sudden time-saving symbol, and is in a state where the special chart has a low probability and the normal chart has a high probability. In other words, compared to "Special Chart B," which is 15R, "Special Chart D" is different in that it is 2R.

"Special Chart E" is a 2R jackpot symbol known as a hidden probability change, and is in a state where the special chart has a high probability and the normal chart has a low probability. "Special Chart F" is a 2R jackpot symbol known as a sudden normal chart, and is in a state where the special chart has a low probability and the normal chart has a low probability. Both "Special Chart E" and "Special Chart F" are 2R and do not transition to the time-saving state.

"Special symbol G" is the first small win symbol, and "Special symbol H" is the second small win symbol, and both are in a state of low probability for special symbols and low probability for normal symbols. The small win referred to here is equivalent to a jackpot without 2R time reduction. In other words, "Special symbol G" and "Special symbol H" are in the same state as "Special symbol F," but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different for the two. By intentionally providing "Special symbol G," "Special symbol H," and "Special symbol F" even in the same state, the excitement of the game is heightened. Furthermore, "Special symbol I" is the first losing symbol, and "Special symbol J" is the second losing symbol, and these symbols award the player with a relatively small amount of profit.

Note that the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is also provided with symbols other than "Special A" as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

Figure 82(b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns in this embodiment, "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 10." When a ball enters the first special pattern starting hole 230 or the second special pattern starting hole 232, i.e., when the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern starting hole 230, or when the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special pattern starting hole 232, a "decorative pattern changing display" is performed in each of the pattern display areas of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, switching the display in the following order: "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... When a 15R jackpot on "Special Chart B" is announced, a symbol combination of three identical decorative symbols lined up in a row (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2") corresponding to a 15R jackpot is displayed in a static fashion in symbol display areas 208a-208c. When a 15R special jackpot on "Special Chart A" is announced, a symbol combination of three identical odd-numbered decorative symbols lined up in a row (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") is displayed in a static fashion.

In addition, when announcing a 2R jackpot called a hidden probability change on "Special Chart E," a 2R jackpot called a sudden normal change on "Special Chart F," or the first small win on "Special Chart G," or the second small win on "Special Chart H," the display will stop displaying "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3." Furthermore, when announcing a 2R jackpot called a sudden probability change on "Special Chart C," or a 2R jackpot called a sudden time-saving change on "Special Chart D," the display will stop displaying "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5."

On the other hand, when announcing the first loss of "Special Chart I" or the second loss of "Special Chart J," a static display of a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a-208c.

Figure 82(c) shows an example of a normal symbol stop display pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal symbol stop display patterns: "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, and "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol. When the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start hole 228, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a "normal symbol change display" by alternately lighting all seven segments and lighting the single central segment. When a win in normal symbol change play is announced, "Normal Symbol A" is displayed as a stopped symbol, and when a loss in normal symbol change play is announced, "Normal Symbol B" is displayed as a stopped symbol. In Figure 82(c), the white areas in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that will be unlit, and the black areas indicate the locations of the segments that will be lit.

<Main control unit main processing> Next, we will explain the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 using Figure 83. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in Figure 83 in accordance with a control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. This initial setting 1 sets the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, sets the interrupt mask, initializes the I/O 310, initializes various variables stored in the RAM 308, and sets operation permissions and initial values for the WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value in the WDT 314. In step S103, the counter value of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, the process monitors whether the low voltage signal is ON, i.e., whether the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating a voltage drop when the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (CPU 304 has detected a power interruption), the process returns to step S103; if the low voltage signal is OFF (CPU 304 has not detected a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. This initial setting 2 includes the following: setting a value in counter timer 312 that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below; outputting a clear signal from a specified port of I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400); and setting to allow writing to RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether the state before the power was interrupted (before power was cut off) will be restored. If the state before power was cut off will not be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the initialization process (step S113) will be carried out.

Specifically, the process first determines whether the RAM clear signal, which is transmitted when an arcade staff member or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 on the power supply board, is on (indicating that an operation has been performed), i.e., whether a RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (if a RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to its initial state. On the other hand, if the RAM clear signal is off (if a RAM clear is not necessary), the process reads the power status information stored in the power status storage area of RAM 308 and determines whether this power status information indicates a suspend state. If the power status information does not indicate a suspend state, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to its initial state. If the power status information indicates a suspend state, the process calculates a checksum by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (e.g., all areas) of RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and determines whether the calculated checksum is a specific value (e.g., 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power was cut off, and if the checksum result is a value other than the specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to return the pachinko machine 100 to its initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than "suspended", the process also proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power restoration processing, the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. The values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage are also read and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. The CPU 304 then executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, resulting in the pachinko machine 100 returning to the state it was in at the time of power outage. That is, processing resumes with the command following the command (specified in step S115) executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described below) immediately before power outage. The RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 80 also has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command indicates that the state at the time of power outage has been restored, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. This initialization processing includes setting interrupt prohibition, setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), and initializing all storage areas in RAM 308. In addition, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization processing of the main control unit 300 (step S113) has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition setting is performed, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. This basic random number initial value update process updates two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter, respectively, and two random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value and the special timer random number value. For example, if the possible range of values for the normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal timer random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are also updated in the same way. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207, which will be described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing timer interrupt processing, which starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing> Next, we will explain the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 using Figure 84. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). This timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle. In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, the WDT is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT 314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from various sensors 320, including the front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, bottom tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310, and the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored. The presence or absence of detection signals is then stored in signal status memory areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Using ball detection sensor detection signals as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times before last (approximately 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308. Information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (approximately 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area. In addition, the detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the currently detected signal storage area mentioned above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area is compared to determine whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While a gaming ball passes through a ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeatedly activates at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the aforementioned step S205 checks for a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor are stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area. In other words, when a gaming ball begins to pass through a ball detection sensor, there will be no second-to-last detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this embodiment, taking into account erroneous detection and noise from the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal is detected, a win is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 80 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning slot 226, the variable winning slot 234, the first special starting slot 230, or the second special starting slot 232, or passed through the general starting slot 228. In other words, it is determined that a win has occurred in these winning slots 226, 234, or these starting slots 230, 232, and 228. For example, if the general winning opening sensor, which detects balls entering the general winning opening 226, detects the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times and the information matches the winning determination pattern information, it determines that a win has occurred at the general winning opening 226, and performs processing associated with subsequent wins at the general winning opening 226. However, if the information does not match the winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with subsequent wins at the general winning opening 226 is not performed and the processing branches to subsequent processing. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating a detection signal before last, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After determining that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times at each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information. If the information matches the winning determination clear pattern information, the processing then determines whether the information matches the winning determination clear pattern information.

Steps S207 and S209 perform a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process. These basic random number initial value update process and basic random number update process update the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value, as performed in step S115 above, and then update two random number counters used by the main control unit 300 to generate the normal winning random number value, the special 1 random number value, and the special 2 random number value, respectively. For example, if the possible range of values for the normal winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. If the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Furthermore, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle after adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the respective random number counter is obtained and set in the random number counter memory area. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value, which ranges from 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (e.g., 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value and set in the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value. At the same time, the newly set initial value is stored in the initial value storage area to determine when the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value has completed its next cycle. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining when the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value has completed its next cycle, RAM 308 also provides an initial value storage area for determining when the random number counter for generating a special winning random number has completed its next cycle. In this embodiment, separate counters are provided for obtaining the random number value for special number 1 and the random number value for special number 2, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. This process updates the random number counter used to generate random numbers for performances used by the main control unit 300.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. This timer update process updates various timers, including the normal symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, the special symbol 2 display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the second special symbol display device 214, and timers for timing the specified winning performance time, specified opening time, specified closing time, specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a winning slot counter update process is performed. In this winning slot counter update process, when a win occurs at winning slots 226, 234, 235 or starting slots 230, 232, 228, the value in the prize ball count memory area provided for each winning slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first special symbol start port 230, the second special symbol start port 232, the normal symbol start port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. Here, the determination is made using the result of whether or not there is a match with the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If a winning has occurred in the first special symbol start port 230 and the corresponding reserved number memory area in RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the winning counter value memory register of counter circuit 318 as the special symbol 1 winning random number value, and a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special symbol 1 random number value as the special symbol 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value memory area. If a win occurs at the second special symbol start port 232 and the corresponding reserved number memory area in RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the winning counter value memory register of counter circuit 318 as the special symbol 2 winning random number value, and a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special symbol 2 random number value as the special symbol 2 random number value, and these are stored in the corresponding random number value memory area. If a win occurs at the regular symbol start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number memory area in RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the regular symbol winning random number value as the regular symbol winning random number value, and these are stored in the corresponding random number value memory area. If a win occurs at the variable symbol start port 234, information indicating that the ball entered the variable symbol start port 234 is stored in the variable symbol start port winning memory area.

In step S219, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, one byte, with strobe information in bit 7 (when on, indicates that data is being set), power-on information in bit 6 (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), the current processing type for encryption in bits 4 and 5 (0 to 3), and the payout request count after encryption processing in bits 0 to 3.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process performs one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process during the normal map variation display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 displays the variations in the normal map (normal map variation play).

In addition, during the normal symbol status update process when the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a winning symbol, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode is a losing symbol. Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for various settings to be made in various processes, not just the normal symbol status update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting and turning-off control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal symbol is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms and displays either the winning symbol (normal symbol A shown in Figure 82(c)) or the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in Figure 82(c)). Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the regular symbol stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. This setting causes the confirmed symbol to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the regular symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Furthermore, if the result of the normal symbol variable play is a win, the normal symbol win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal symbol win flag is on, the normal symbol status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the normal symbol stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the normal symbol in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the second special symbol start port 232 to keep the blade member 232a in an open state for a specified opening period (e.g., 2 seconds), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, the normal state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid 332 that drives the blade members to open and close to keep the blade members in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 500 ms), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the blade closed time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that begins when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a miss, as described below, the normal map miss flag is turned on. If this normal map miss flag is on, the normal map status update process that occurs when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a regular map-related lottery process is performed. In this regular map-related lottery process, when the regular map variable play and the second special map start port 232 are not being controlled to open or close (the regular map state is inactive), and the number of reserved regular map variable play games is one or more, a win determination is made to determine whether the result of the regular map variable play is a win or a loss by random number lottery based on the regular map winning random number value stored in the random number value memory area described above. If a win is determined, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If a loss is determined, the win flag is set to OFF. Furthermore, regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of the random number counter used to generate the regular map timer random number value described above is next obtained as the regular map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the regular map variable on the regular map display device 210 is selected from multiple variable times based on the obtained regular map timer random number value, and this variable display time is stored as the regular map variable display time in the regular map variable time memory area provided in RAM 308. The number of reserved normal variable games is stored in a reserved normal game number storage area provided in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved normal variable games minus 1 is stored again in this reserved normal game number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, special symbol status update processing is performed for each of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. First, special symbol status update processing (special symbol 2 status update processing) is performed for special symbol 2 (step S225). This special symbol 2 status update processing performs one of the following eight processes depending on the state of special symbol 2. For example, in the special symbol 2 status update processing during special symbol 2 variable display (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the second special symbol display device 214. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs variable display of special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable play). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission processing is to be executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then processing ends.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags for a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small jackpot flag, a second small jackpot flag, a first loss flag, a second loss flag, a special symbol probability change flag, and a regular symbol probability change flag. In the special symbol 2 state update process, which starts when the special symbol 2 change display time has elapsed (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is on, and the regular symbol probability change flag is also on, the result is special symbol A shown in Figure 82(a); if the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is off, and the regular symbol probability change flag is on, the result is special symbol B; if the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is on, and the regular symbol probability change flag is also on, the result is special symbol C; if the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is off, and the regular symbol probability change flag is on, the result is special symbol D; The 7-segment LEDs constituting the second special pattern display device 214 are controlled to be turned on and off so that when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special pattern probability change flag is also on, and the normal pattern probability change flag is on, the display shows special pattern E; when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special pattern probability change flag is off, and the normal pattern probability change flag is also off, the display shows special pattern F; when the first small win flag is on, the display shows special pattern G; when the second small win flag is on, the display shows special pattern H; when the first miss flag is on, the display shows special pattern I; and when the second miss flag is on, the display shows special pattern I, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that special pattern 2 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 displays one of the following symbols: a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variable symbol (special symbol C), a sudden time-saving symbol (special symbol D), a hidden probability variable symbol (special symbol E), a sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), a first small win symbol (special symbol G), a second small win symbol (special symbol H), a first loss symbol (special symbol I), and a second loss symbol (special symbol J). Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of a special symbol 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. This setting causes the displayed special symbol 2 to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the results of the special symbol 2 variable game. Additionally, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving count memory unit provided in RAM 308 is 1 or greater, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off unless the special game probability is fluctuating (details will be described later). Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, before terminating the process.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 2 variable play is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on, as described below. When this jackpot flag is on, the special symbol 2 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the special symbol 2 in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and sets information indicating the winning presentation period in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot has begun by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special symbol 2 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 235a of the second variable symbol 235 (or the door element 234a of the first variable symbol 234 in the case of special symbol 1) to keep the door element 235a (or the door element 234a in the case of special symbol 1) in an open state for the specified opening period (e.g., 29 seconds, or until a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are detected in the second variable symbol 235 (or the first variable symbol 234 in the case of special symbol 1), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special symbol 2 opening setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special pattern 2 state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) used to drive the opening and closing of the door element 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 (the door element 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 in the case of special pattern 1) to keep the door element 235a (or the door element 234a in the case of special pattern 1) in a closed state for the specified closed period (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special winning opening close setting transmission process should be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, this door element opening/closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and when it ends, the special symbol 2 state update process begins. Information indicating the effect waiting period is set in the memory area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to set the device to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag is set on, simultaneously with the end of this jackpot game, 100 time-saving times are set in the time-saving count memory section provided in RAM 308, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag is set off, the time-saving count is not set in the time-saving count memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on. "Time-saving" here refers to shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special symbol fluctuation game and the start of the next jackpot, thereby putting the pachinko machine into a state advantageous to the player. When this time-saving flag is set to ON, the normal game is in a high probability state. In a normal game with a high probability, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the normal game with variable play than in the normal game with low probability. Furthermore, in a normal game with a high probability, the fluctuation time of the normal game with variable play and the special game with variable play are shorter than in the normal game with low probability. Furthermore, in a normal game with a high probability, the opening time of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the normal game with low probability. Additionally, in a normal game with a high probability, the pair of blade members 232a are likely to open more than once compared to the normal game with low probability. As mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to OFF during a jackpot game (special game state). Therefore, the normal game with low probability is maintained during a jackpot game. This is intended to solve the problem that if the normal probability state is high during a jackpot game, many game balls will enter the second special game start opening 232 before a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the tendency to gamble.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special chart 2 status update process, which begins when the specified end display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the display wait time changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 2 is set to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a loss, as described below, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process, which occurs when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 2 stop time changes from 1 to 0), also sets the special chart 2 to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special chart 2 status update process when the special chart 2 is inactive, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S227.

Next, special chart status update processing (special chart 1 status update processing) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update processing, the processes described in the special chart 2 status update processing described above are performed depending on the state of special chart 1. The processes performed in this special chart 1 status update processing are the same as the processes described in the special chart 2 status update processing described above, with "special chart 2" replaced with "special chart 1," so their explanation will be omitted. Note that the order of the special chart 2 status update processing and the special chart 1 status update processing may be reversed.

Once the special chart status update processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special chart-related lottery processing is then performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Here too, the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 2 (special chart 2-related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 1 (special chart 1-related lottery processing) is performed (step S231). For these special chart-related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special chart 2-related lottery processing before the special chart 1-related lottery processing, so that even if the start conditions for special chart 2 variable play and special chart 1 variable play are met simultaneously, special chart 2 variable play will be in the process of changing first, and special chart 1 variable play will not start changing. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination for special symbol variable play by the first sub-control unit 400, and notification of the lottery result based on winning at the second special symbol start port 232 takes priority over notification of the lottery result based on winning at the first special symbol start port 230.

In step S233, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this embodiment, information that can identify the type of command, such as basic command, pattern change start command, pattern change stop command, winning effect start command, ending effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the command transmission process described above. Furthermore, if the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability change flag, and the timer number selected in the special symbol-related lottery process; if the command type is a symbol change stop command, the command data includes the values of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag and the value of the special symbol probability change flag; if the command is a winning effect command or an ending effect start command, the command data includes the value of the special symbol probability change flag; and if the command is a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the value of the special symbol probability change flag and the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been won in the first special symbol start port 230, whether or not a prize has been won in the second special symbol start port 232, and whether or not a prize has been won in the variable prize port 234.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, information stored in RAM 308 indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol 1-related lottery process and the special symbol 2-related lottery process, the number of reserved first special symbol variable games or second special symbol variable games, etc. is set as the command data. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information stored in RAM 308 indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, etc. is set as the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the value of the special symbol probability fluctuation flag, the number of reserved first special symbol variable games or second special symbol variable games, etc. is set as the command data. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the value of the special symbol probability change flag, the number of reserved first special symbol variable games or second special symbol variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special symbol probability change flag, the number of reserved first special symbol variable games or second special symbol variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special symbol probability change flag, the number of reserved first special symbol variable games or second special symbol variable games, etc. In addition, in this step S233, a general command special symbol reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special chart reserve increase process, the command data is set with the special chart identification information (information indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can also determine the presentation control content based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

In step S237, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal status of various sensors stored in the signal status memory area in step S205 is read to monitor for the presence or absence of specified errors, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error. If a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special symbol start opening 232 and the first variable winning opening 234 (or second variable winning opening 235), and display data output via display circuits 324, 326, and 330 to the normal symbol display device 210, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243; if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. During this timer interrupt termination processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back into the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and so on, and then the processing returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in Figure 82.

On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for restoring the system to the state it was in when power was restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power-off processing such as initializing input/output ports is performed, and the system then returns to the main processing of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400> Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 85. Note that Figure (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of Figure 1(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. This initialization processing includes initializing the input/output ports and initializing the storage area in RAM 408. In step S303, it is determined whether the value of timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area is 33 (33 ms) or greater, and this processing is repeated until the value of timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the value of timer variable CNT becomes 33 or greater, processing proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to timer variable CNT. Note that the value of timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed, such as 33, 33, 34, each time processing proceeds from step S303 to step S305.

In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not it has received a command from the main control unit 300, a command from the second sub-control unit 500, and a return command from the LCD control unit 700, and processes them.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, effect lottery processing is performed based on commands from the main control unit 300, and LCD commands and box data setting processing (described below) for setting part data at specified positions are performed. In addition, if part data is present at a position after receiving a return command (described below), setting processing is performed for the part data to be sent to the speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, effect movable bodies 246, 224, etc.

In step S311, if a press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

In step S315, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. For example, if a notification condition is met, a command is output so that the speaker 120 will issue a notification (e.g., a performance). Also, if an abnormality notification condition related to the detection of fraudulent activity or a malfunction is met, a command is output so that the speaker 120 will issue a notification (e.g., a notification that an abnormality has occurred). In step S317, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the various lamps 418, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. For example, if the light emission conditions for the various lamps 418 are met, a command to emit light is output.

In step S319, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the shading device 246 or the movable body (rotating body) within the chance button 136, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 or a liquid crystal command to be sent to the liquid crystal control unit 700, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, using Figure 4(b), the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained. This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the first sub-control unit 400 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 408.

Next, using Figure 1(c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once per 1 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or greater every 33 ms.

In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, the control command set in step S319 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500> Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using Figure 86. Note that Figure (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of Figure 1(a), various initial settings are made. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S701. This initialization processing includes initializing the input/output ports and initializing the storage area in RAM 508. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable CNT is 33 or greater, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or greater. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or greater, processing proceeds to step S705. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed to 33, 33, 34, etc. each time processing proceeds from step S703 to step S707.

In step S705, the timer variable CNT is set to 0.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S707, processing such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 122, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the movable object M on the game board surface (such as the movable part 2441 of the movable display device 288, the performance movable body 224, or the shading device 246), this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

Next, using Figure 8(b), the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained. This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the second sub-control unit 500 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using Figure 1(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once per 1 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 86 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or greater every 33 ms.

Step S903 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing involves updating the random number values for effects, etc.

<Processing by the LCD control unit 700> Next, the processing by the LCD control unit 700 will be explained using Figure 87. Note that Figure (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 704 of the LCD control unit 700. Figure (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the LCD control unit 700. Figure (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the LCD control unit 700. Figure (d) is a flowchart of VDP image processing.

First, in step S1001 of Figure 10(a), various initial settings are made. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S1001. This initialization processing includes initializing the input/output ports and initializing the storage area in RAM 708. In step S1003, it is determined whether the timer variable CNT is 33 or greater, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or greater. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or greater, processing proceeds to step S1005. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed to 33, 33, 34, etc. each time processing proceeds from step S1003 to step S1005.

In step S1005, the timer variable CNT is assigned a value of 0.

In step S1007, command processing is performed. The CPU 704 of the LCD control unit 700 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S1009, a VDP command sending process is performed. For example, if an instruction to display an image is received from the first sub-control unit 400, a command is sent to the VDP 710 to cause the VDP 710 to perform image control processing.

In step S1011, a return command sending process is performed. If the LCD control unit 700 controls the decorative pattern display device 208 or the movable display device 288 to display the requested image, it sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 and returns to step S1003.

Next, using Figure 11(b), the command reception interrupt processing of the LCD control unit 700 will be explained. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the LCD control unit 700 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 708.

Next, using Figure 1(c), we will explain the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 704 of the LCD control unit 700. The LCD control unit 700 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once per 1 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S1201 of the LCD control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of RAM 708 described in step S1003 of the second sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 87 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or greater every 33 ms.

Step S1203 of the LCD control unit timer interrupt process involves updating the random number values used for presentation.

Next, using Figure 10(d), we will explain the image control processing of the VDP 710 that receives a command in the VDP command transmission processing of step S1009 in the LCD control unit main processing. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S1301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 704 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of display area A and display area B of VRAM 718. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and/or the movable display device 288. Next, the CPU 704 sets the ROM coordinates (source address of CGROM 716), VRAM coordinates (destination address of VRAM 718), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 710 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from CGROM 716 to VRAM 7186. The VDP 710 transfers the image data from CGROM 716 to VRAM 718 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 710 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 704.

In step S1303, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 710. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S1305; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input. In step S1305, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 718 on image data information constituting the display image (such as the coordinate axes of the VRAM 718, image size, and VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates)) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 718 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 710 in step S1301. The VDP 718 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S1307, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 710 to start drawing an image. The VDP 710 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 704.

In step S1309, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 710 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S1311; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S1311, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 708 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Wiring Structure> The wiring structure of the electronic components of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Here, the wiring structure of the speaker 120 will be described. As already explained, in this embodiment, the speaker 120 is connected to the frame relay board 726C via the door-side lighting board 734. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the frame relay board 726C is located on the lower side of the pachinko machine 100. In this configuration, if the frame relay board 726C and the speaker 120 were directly connected by a harness or the like, the required wiring length would be relatively long, and the wiring would need to be routed around the perimeter of the play area 124. In terms of playability and enjoyment, it is often desirable to ensure that the play area 124 is as large as possible. In this embodiment, by utilizing the door-side lighting board 734, wiring for the speaker 120 can be installed even in cases where it is difficult to secure space to install a harness.

Figure 88 shows the arrangement of lighting unit A equipped with a door-side lighting board 734, and is a schematic diagram seen through the front panel of the front door frame 106. Speakers 120 are located in two corners at the top of the front door frame 106. Lighting unit A is located adjacent to the play area 124, on both the left and right sides of the play area 124, in the narrow area between the play area 124 and the side of the front door frame 106. Although not shown, the frame relay board 726C is located near the ball storage tray door 108.

Figure 89 is a cross-sectional view of lighting unit A taken along line a-a in Figure 88. Lighting unit A comprises a door-side lighting board 734, a mounting member 1 that secures the door-side lighting board 734 to the front door frame 106, and a covering cover 2 that covers the door-side lighting board 734.

The covering cover 2 is made of a transparent or translucent material (e.g., acrylic or glass), allowing the door-side lighting board 734 to be seen from the outside. In this embodiment, the covering cover 2 is configured to cover the entire door-side lighting board 734, but it may also be configured to cover only a portion of it. Furthermore, all or part of the covering cover 2 may be lenticular.

A lamp 418 is mounted on the door-side lighting board 734 as a light-emitting element. In this embodiment, the lamp 418 is an LED. As already mentioned, lighting unit A is located on both the left and right sides of the play area 124. Therefore, when looking at the play area 124 from the front, the player can see the light emitted by the lamp 418, and the light emission pattern may add to the excitement of the game. Note that the location of lighting unit A (i.e., door-side lighting board 734) is not limited to this; it can also be located, for example, on the top of the front door frame 106 (between speakers 120, etc.) depending on the location of the wiring source and destination.

Figure 90 (a) shows an example of wiring between the panel frame relay board 726C and the speaker 120 via the door-side lighting board 734. In the example shown, a relay board 3 is interposed between the door-side lighting board 734 and the speaker 120, but a configuration in which the door-side lighting board 734 and the speaker 120 are directly connected can also be used.

The door-side lighting board 734 is strip-shaped overall (for example, with an aspect ratio in the range of 1:10 to 1:50), with connector CN1 provided at one end and connector CN2 provided at the other end. The door-side lighting board 734 is a rigid board, but may also be a flexible board. Six lamps 418 are mounted on it (LED1-6). The symbols CN1 and CN2 indicating the connectors and the symbols LED1-6 indicating the lamps 418 are also indications of the board components printed on the door-side lighting board 734, or displayed on the installation surface of the board components. This indication may also be displayed on the reverse side of the installation surface.

One end of harness H1 is connected to connector CN1, and the other end is connected to panel frame relay board 726C. One end of harness H2 is connected to connector CN2, and the other end is connected to relay board 3. One end of harness H3 is connected to relay board 3, and the other end is connected to speaker 120.

The door-side lighting board 734 has wiring (conductor pattern) that connects some of the terminals of connector CN1 and some of the terminals of connector CN2. This makes it possible to transmit audio signals from the panel frame relay board 726C to the speaker 120 via the door-side lighting board 734 and relay board 3.

In this embodiment, the relay board 3 is equipped with connectors and wiring for transmitting signals between the door-side lighting board 734 and the speaker 120, but the relay board 3 may also be configured similarly to the door-side lighting board 734 and equipped with light-emitting elements.

In addition, while this embodiment illustrates wiring to the speaker 120, the application is not limited to the speaker 120, and may also include light-emitting elements, actuators (e.g., motors and solenoids), etc. Figure 90(b) shows one example. In the example shown, instead of the speaker 120, a board 4 mounting LEDs 1 and 2 as the gaming table frame lamp 122 is connected to the door-side lighting board 734. It is possible to transmit a light-on/light-off signal from the board frame relay board 726C to the gaming table frame lamp 122 via the door-side lighting board 734. The gaming table frame lamp 122 is used for presentation purposes, and, like the speaker 120, can also be used to notify of abnormalities.

It is also possible to combine the configurations of Figures 90(a) and 90(b). In other words, the door-side lighting board 734 can be used as a relay board to connect multiple electronic components such as a speaker 120 and a game table frame lamp 122, or multiple boards such as relay board 3 and board 4, and transmit control signals from the board frame relay board 726C to these.

Next, we will explain the internal structure of the door-side lighting board 734. Figure 91(a) is a plan view of the door-side lighting board 734 (a view of the mounting surface for the lamp 418), and Figure 91(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line b-b in Figure 91(a).

In this embodiment, the door-side lighting board 734 is a multilayer board with three plate-shaped insulator layers 5a-5c, four wiring layers LY1-LY4, and holes Ha-Hh. Figure 91(c) shows the wiring patterns of the wiring layers LY2-LY4. There are no other wiring patterns on each wiring layer than those shown in the figure, but other wiring patterns are acceptable (the same applies to other examples described below).

The wiring layer LY1 is formed on the surface of the insulator 5a. The surface of the insulator 5a forms the mounting surface for board components (connectors, LEDs) and is covered with a resist film R. The wiring layer LY2 is formed between the insulators 5a and 5b. The wiring layer LY3 is formed between the insulators 5b and 5c. The wiring layer LY4 is formed on the back surface of the insulator 5c and is covered with a resist film R. The wiring layers LY1 and LY4 are sometimes called outer layers, and the wiring layers LY2 and LY3 are sometimes called inner layers. The inner layers are layers located further inside the door-side lighting board 734 than the outer layers. Holes Ha to Hh are through-holes that penetrate all three layers of the insulators 5a to 5c.

Connector CN1 is a multi-pin connector (6 pins in this case), and connector CN2 is a multi-pin connector (2 pins in this case). Wires W1 to W6 are connected to each pin of connector CN1 in that order. Wire W6 is connected to the first pin of connector CN2, and wire W1 is connected to the second pin. Wires W1 to W6 are patterns formed from a conductive film.

Wiring W2 to W4 are signal lines and are formed on wiring layer LY1. Wiring W2 connects LED1 and LED2 in series. By transmitting a signal to wiring W2, the light emission of these can be controlled simultaneously. Wiring W3 connects LED3 and LED4 in series. By transmitting a signal to wiring W3, the light emission of these can be controlled simultaneously. Wiring W4 connects LED5 and LED6 in series. By transmitting a signal to wiring W4, the light emission of these can be controlled simultaneously.

Wire W5 is a power supply line and is connected to one end (anode side) of LED2, LED4, and LED6. Wire W5 has a portion on wiring layer LY1, a portion on wiring layer LY4, and a portion on holes Ha-Hc and He. Wire W5 has different specifications on wiring layer LY1 and wiring layer LY4. Specifically, the width, area, distance (e.g., length in the longitudinal direction of the board) and other aspects differ. The majority of wire W5 is formed on wiring layer LY4, and is formed in a linear shape on wiring layer LY1 and in a strip shape (solid coating) on wiring layer LY4. Forming it in a strip shape on wiring layer LY4 may reduce electrical resistance when supplying power to each component.

Wires W1 and W6 are signal lines for the speaker 120. Wire W1 has a portion on wiring layer LY1, a portion on wiring layer LY3, and portions with holes Hf and Hg. Wire W1 has different specifications on the wiring layer LY1 and the wiring layer LY3. Specifically, the width, area, distance (e.g., length in the longitudinal direction of the board) and other aspects differ. The majority of wire W1 is formed on wiring layer LY3, and is formed in a linear shape on wiring layer LY1 and in a strip shape (solid coating) on wiring layer LY3. Forming it in a strip shape on wiring layer LY3 may reduce electrical resistance when transmitting signals to the speaker 120.

Wire W6 has a portion on wiring layer LY1, a portion on wiring layer LY2, and portions with holes Hd and Hh. Wire W6 has different specifications on wiring layer LY1 and wiring layer LY2. Specifically, the width, area, distance (e.g., length in the longitudinal direction of the board) and other aspects differ. The majority of wire W6 is formed on wiring layer LY2, and is formed in a linear shape on wiring layer LY1 and in a strip shape (solid coating) on wiring layer LY2. Forming it in a strip shape on wiring layer LY2 may reduce electrical resistance when transmitting signals to speaker 120.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the wiring W1 and W6 for the speaker 120 are routed through the inner layer of the door-side lighting board 734. This may make the wiring W1 and W6 less susceptible to external factors. Furthermore, because there is a solid painted portion like wiring W5, it may be possible to reduce the impact of noise generated by game balls even when the speaker is located adjacent to the play area 124. Furthermore, in the past, there was a risk that the harness would be cut to prevent the speaker 120 from sounding an alarm in the event of fraudulent activity by a cheater. However, in this embodiment, the wiring is relayed through the door-side lighting board 734, so the harness portion is shorter, making it less likely to cut the wiring and more likely to reliably alert users of fraudulent activity.

The wiring structure is not limited to the example shown in Figure 91, and various configurations can be used. These will be explained in order below.

<Variant Example 1> Figure 92 shows the wiring patterns of wiring layers LY1 to LY4 in variant example 1. In this example, the inner layers through which wires W1 and W6 for speaker 120 pass are the same inner layer. In other words, wiring layer LY2 is divided in half widthwise, with wire W1 on one side and wire W6 on the other, each formed in a strip shape. Wiring layer LY3 has no wires, but can also be used to pass other wires through.

<Variant Example 2> Figure 93 shows a variation 1 in which a ground (GND) line GP is formed on the wiring layer LY3. In this example, screw holes GH are formed. The holes GH are through holes that penetrate all three layers of insulators 5a to 5c. For example, screws for fixing the lighting unit A are inserted into the screw holes GH, and the ground wiring of the pachinko machine 100 is fastened together. The ground line GP is also formed in the holes GH, and is electrically connected to the ground wiring.

The ground line GP is formed in a strip shape (solid coating) on the wiring layer LY3. By forming it in a strip shape on the wiring layer LY3, it may be possible to suppress noise from entering the signal lines.

<Variant Example 3> For wiring having outer and inner layer portions, some or all of the specifications may be the same for the outer and inner layer portions. Figure 94 shows one such example. In the example shown in Figure 91, the wiring width is the same for the wiring layer LY1 portion of wiring W1 and the wiring layer LY3 portion. Similarly, the wiring width is the same for the wiring layer LY1 portion of wiring W6 and the wiring layer LY2 portion. Ground lines or other signal lines can also be formed in the empty space in wiring layers LY2 and LY3.

<Variant Example 4> The inner layer wiring can be used not only as relay wiring for external boards, but also for wiring between board components within the board. Figures 95(a) and (b) show an example, where Figure 95(a) is a plan view of the board 6 of this example, and Figure 95(b) is a cross-sectional view of the board 6 taken along line c-c in Figure 95(a). Of the components of the board 6, those that are the same as those in the door-side lighting board 734 are given the same reference numerals and will not be described again.

Board components P1 and P2 are mounted on the insulator 5a of the board 6. Board components P1 and P2 are assumed to be components other than connectors, but they may of course be connectors (the same applies to the other examples below). Board components P1 and P2 are, for example, circuit components. Specific examples include resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, and other components that can be mounted on a printed circuit board.

In the example of Figures 95(a) and (b), holes Ha and Hb are formed as through holes. Wiring W connects components P1 and P2. Wiring W has a portion on wiring layer LY1, a portion on wiring layer LY2, and holes Ha and Hb.

<Variant Example 5> The holes may not be through holes, but may be holes that penetrate only part of the insulator (called via holes to distinguish them from through holes). Figures 95(c) and (d) show one such example, which is a modified version of the substrate 6 of Figures 95(a) and (b). Figure 95(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 95(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line dd in Figure 95(c). Holes Ha and Hb penetrate only the insulator 5a. The wiring W has a portion for wiring layer LY1, a portion for wiring layer LY2, and portions for holes Ha and Hb.

<Variant Example 6> Wiring may be arranged on the outer layer only where it connects to board components. Figures 96(a) and (b) show one example, which is a modified version of the board 6 in Figures 95(c) and (d). Figure 96(a) is a plan view of the board 6 in this example, and Figure 96(b) is a cross-sectional view of the board 6 taken along line e-e in Figure 96(a). In the example shown, holes Ha and Hb are formed in the mounting areas of components P1 and P2. In wiring layer LY1, wiring W only extends to the ends of holes Ha and Hb (i.e., the connection sections with the components), and does not extend linearly or strip-like.

<Variant Example 7> Wiring may be formed across multiple inner layers. Figures 96(c) and (d) show one example, which is a modified version of the substrate 6 of Figures 96(a) and (b). Figure 96(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 96(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 along line f-f in Figure 96(c). In the example shown, holes Hc and Hd that penetrate the insulator 5b are formed as via holes. The wiring W has portions for wiring layers LY1, LY2, and LY3, as well as holes Ha-Hd. The portion of wiring layer LY1 is only the connection portion.

<Variant Example 8> All of the wiring may be placed on inner layers. Figures 97(a) and (b) show one example of this, which is a modified version of the substrate 6 of Figures 95(a) and (b). Figure 97(a) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 97(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line gg in Figure 97(a). In the example shown, components P1 and P2 are embedded in the insulator 5a and are not exposed to the outside. Wiring W is formed only on wiring layer LY2, and connects components P1 and P2.

<Variant Example 9> A portion of the component may be embedded in the insulator. Figures 97(c) and (d) show one example, which is a modified version of the substrate 6 of Figures 97(a) and (b). Figure 97(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 97(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line h-h in Figure 97(c). In the example shown, component P1 is mounted on the insulator 5a and exposed to the outside, while component P2 is embedded in the insulator 5a. Hole H is formed as a via hole that penetrates the insulator 5b. Wiring W has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY2, and a portion in hole H.

<Variant Example 10> Components may be mounted on different outer layers. Figure 98(a) is a cross-sectional view showing one such example, which is a modified version of the substrate 6 of Figures 95(a) and (b). In the example shown, component P1 is mounted on insulator 5a, and component P2 is mounted on insulator 5c (on the underside). Hole Ha is formed as a via hole that penetrates insulator 5a, and hole Hb is formed as a via hole that penetrates insulator 5c. Wiring W has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY2, a portion in wiring layer LY4, and portions in holes Ha and Hb. The portion in wiring layer LY2 can also be provided on wiring layer LY3, or it can be provided on both wiring layers LY2 and LY3.

<Variant Example 11> Wiring that is entirely arranged on an outer layer and wiring that is at least partially arranged on an inner layer may be mixed. This may improve the degree of freedom of wiring. Figures 98(b) and (c) show an example, which is a modification of the substrate 6 of Figures 95(a) and (b). Figure 98(b) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 98(c) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line i-i of Figure 98(b).

In the example shown in the figure, wires W1 and W2 connect components P1 and P2. Holes Ha and Hb are formed as via holes that penetrate insulator 5a. Wire W1 is formed entirely in wiring layer LY1. Wire W2 has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY2, and holes Ha and Hb.

Wires W1 and W2 may connect different terminals of components P1 and P2, or they may connect the same terminals. When connecting the same terminals, for example, even if wire W1 is connected, signal transmission is possible via wire W2. Wire W1 may also be a dummy wire that does not actually connect terminals. In either case, signal transmission may be possible even if wire W1 is cut due to fraudulent activity.

<Variant Example 12> A wiring layer on which a signal line is formed may be placed between multiple wiring layers on which ground lines are formed. This may improve resistance to noise. Figures 99(a) and (b) show one such example, which is a modified version of the substrate 6 of Figures 96(a) and (b). Figure 99(a) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 99(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line j-j in Figure 99(a). In the example shown in the figure, the multilayer substrate has a five-layer structure of insulators 5a to 5e and a six-layer structure of wiring layers LY1 to LY6.

In the example shown in the figure, holes Ha and Hb that penetrate insulators 5a and 5b are formed as via holes. The wiring W has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY3, and a portion in holes Ha and Hb. The portion in wiring layer LY1 is only the connection portion. Ground lines are formed in wiring layers LY2 and LY4. The ground lines can be formed in a strip shape (solid coating).

Figures 99(c) and (d) also show an example of this embodiment, which is a modified version of the substrate 6 of Figures 99(a) and (b). Figure 99(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this embodiment, and Figure 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line k-k in Figure 99(c).

In the example shown in the figure, holes Hb and Hc that penetrate insulators 5a and 5b are formed as via holes. Also, holes Ha and Hd that penetrate insulators 5a to 5c are formed as via holes.

Wiring W1 and W2 connect components P1 and P2. Wiring W1 has a portion on wiring layer LY1, a portion on wiring layer LY5, and holes Ha and Hd. The portion on wiring layer LY1 is the only connection portion. Wiring W2 has a portion on wiring layer LY1, a portion on wiring layer LY3, and holes Hb and Hc. The portion on wiring layer LY1 is the only connection portion.

Ground lines are formed on wiring layers LY1, LY4, and LY6. The ground lines can be formed in a strip shape (solid coating).

<Variant Example 13> Multiple components may be connected to one component. In other words, components with different numbers of wires may be connected. Figure 100 shows one example, and is a plan view of the board 6 in this example. A cross-sectional view is omitted, but a configuration similar to that of each board 6 described above can be used. In the example shown in the figure, components P1 to P3 are mounted on an insulator 5a. Note that at least some of the components may be embedded inside.

Wire W1 connects components P1 and P2, wire W2 branches into wire W2a and wire W2b, connecting components P1 with components P2 and P3, and wire W3 connects components P1 and P3. Component P1 has three wires, and components P2 and P3 have two.

Wiring W1 has an outer layer portion, an inner layer portion (dashed line portion), and holes Ha and Hd. Holes Ha and Hd are through holes or via holes. Wiring W2, W2a, and W2b have an outer layer portion, an inner layer portion (dashed line portion), and holes Hb, He, and Hf. Holes Hb, He, and Hf are through holes or via holes. Wiring W3 has an outer layer portion, an inner layer portion (dashed line portion), and holes Hc and Hg. Holes Hc and Hg are through holes or via holes.

The inner layer portions of each wiring may be on the same wiring layer or on different wiring layers. There may be no wiring, such as wiring W2, connecting one component P1 to multiple components P2 and P3, or there may be wiring connecting one component to three or more components.

<Example 14> The above examples can be combined as appropriate.

<Summary of wiring structure> A1. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with multiple circuit boards (e.g., 3, 4, 726C, 734) and multiple harnesses (e.g., H1-H3), at least one of the multiple circuit boards is a first circuit board (e.g., 726C), at least one of the multiple circuit boards is a second circuit board (e.g., 3, 4), at least one of the multiple circuit boards is a third circuit board (e.g., 734), at least one of the multiple harnesses is a first harness (e.g., H1), at least one of the multiple harnesses is a second harness (e.g., H2), the third circuit board is provided with multiple connectors (e.g., CN1, CN2), at least one of the multiple connectors is a first connector (e.g., CN1), at least one of the multiple connectors is a second connector (e.g., CN2), and one end of the first harness is connected to the first connector. the other end of the first harness is connected to the first board, one end of the second harness is connected to the second connector, the other end of the second harness is connected to the second board, the third board is composed of multiple layers (e.g., LY1 to LY4), at least one of the multiple layers is a first layer (e.g., LY1), at least one of the multiple layers is a second layer (e.g., LY3), the second layer is located more inward on the third board than the first layer, the third board is provided with multiple wirings (e.g., W1 to W6), at least one of the multiple wirings is a first wiring (e.g., W1), the first wiring is connected to the first connector, the first wiring is connected to the second connector, and the second layer is provided with at least a portion of the first wiring.

This configuration may reduce the impact on the first wiring of external factors such as noise, unauthorized radio waves, and unauthorized electromagnetic waves. It may also make it more difficult for unauthorized individuals to cut the wiring than when the wiring is a harness. Furthermore, because the first board and second board are connected via a third board, it may be possible to make more effective use of the space on the gaming machine than when connected by a harness.

The substrate may be a flexible substrate. The substrate may also be a substrate that is at least partially transparent. The substrate may also have indications relating to the substrate component means (e.g., LED1, LED2, CN1, etc.) displayed on the back side of the installation surface of the substrate component means.

A2. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the third board is provided with light-emitting means (e.g., LED1 to LED6), at least one of the plurality of wirings is second wiring (e.g., W2 to W5), the first layer is provided with at least a portion of the second wiring, the second wiring is connected to the light-emitting means, the second wiring is connected to the first connector, and the light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when a light-emitting condition is met.

With this configuration, the third board capable of emitting light relays between the first and second boards, which may allow for more effective use of the gaming machine's space than when connected by harness. Furthermore, by providing the second wiring on the first layer, external noise may be less likely to affect the first wiring.

The light-emitting means may be, for example, an LED (single color, two colors, three colors, or four or more colors), or a lamp other than an LED, and may be one, two, or three or more. Furthermore, the light-emitting conditions may include, as at least one of the following conditions: when the game starts, when the symbols change, when the symbols stop, when a reach effect occurs, when a jackpot starts, when an operation is performed on the operating means, when gaming media is inserted, when gaming media is dispensed, when a demo effect starts, when the power is turned on, when game settings are configured, or when the volume is set.

A3. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least a portion of the third substrate is covered with a covering means (e.g., 2), and the covering means is made of a transparent material.

This configuration may make it possible to determine whether or not tampering has occurred on the third board.

A4. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the third board is placed in a position (e.g., 106) where the light emitted by the light-emitting means is visible to the player.

This configuration may increase the enjoyment of the game.

A5. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it includes a gaming board (e.g., 200) that forms a gaming area (e.g., 124) in which gaming balls can roll, and the third substrate is positioned adjacent to the gaming area.

This configuration may reduce the impact on the first wiring of noise generated by the rolling of game balls. Regarding the manner in which the third board is adjacent to the play area, for example, there may or may not be another member interposed between the third board and the play area. There may be one or more other members. Furthermore, the third board may be located at the same position in the depth direction of the game machine as the play area, or it may be located on the front side (front face side) or rear side (back face side).

A6. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second board is connected to a notification means (e.g., 120), the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification when a notification condition is met, and the notification means is capable of issuing a second notification when an abnormality notification condition is met, and the second notification is a notification that an abnormality has occurred.

With this configuration, because the wiring of the notification means that notifies of an abnormality is relayed, it is more difficult for unauthorized persons to cut the wiring than when the wiring is a harness, and it may be possible to issue an abnormality notification based on the detection of unauthorized activity. Furthermore, because the impact of external factors on the first wiring is reduced, it may be possible to stably issue the first and second notifications by the notification means.

The notification means may be one or more of the following: a sound output means (speaker), a light-emitting means (LED (single color, two colors, three colors, four or more colors), lamp), a display means (liquid crystal, CRT, dot matrix display, segment display), a movable object, or a vibration device. The number of notification means may be one, two, or three or more.

The notification conditions may include, for example, at least one of the following occurrences: when game play starts, when symbols change, when symbols stop, when a reach effect occurs, when a jackpot starts, when an operation is made to the operating means, when gaming media is inserted, when gaming media is dispensed, when a demo effect starts, when the power is turned on, when game settings are set, or when the volume is set.The abnormality notification conditions may include, for example, at least one of the occurrences of an abnormality detected by at least one of the abnormality detection means (door open detection sensor, vibration detection sensor, magnetic force detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, electromagnetic wave detection sensor, ball tray full detection sensor, abnormality detection sensor).

A7. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it comprises a substrate (e.g., 5, 6) composed of multiple substrate component means (e.g., CN1, CN2, P1-P3), the substrate being composed of multiple layers (e.g., LY1-LY4, LY5, LY6), at least one of the multiple substrate component means being a first substrate component means (e.g., CN1, P1), at least one of the multiple substrate component means being a second substrate component means (e.g., CN2, P2), at least a portion of the first wiring (e.g., W1, W6, W) connecting the first substrate component means and the second substrate component means being arranged on an inner layer, and at least a portion of the first wiring connecting the first substrate component means and the second substrate component means being arranged on an outer layer.

This configuration may reduce the impact on the first wiring of external factors such as noise, unauthorized radio waves, and unauthorized electromagnetic waves. It may also make it more difficult for unauthorized individuals to cut the wiring than if the wiring were a harness.

A8. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g., W) is arranged on the outer layer only at the connection portion with the board configuration means (e.g., Figure 96).

This configuration may further enhance the protection against external factors affecting the first wiring or against breakage. Furthermore, since internal breakage or other damage makes repair impossible, it prevents players from playing the machine after rough handling by store staff, delivery personnel, etc., and only temporary measures are taken. This may encourage the manufacturer to take action, such as replacing parts, thereby preventing malfunctions caused by temporary measures and potentially improving the reliability of the gaming machine for players.

A9. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g., W1, W6, W) has different specifications for the inner layer and outer layer.

This configuration may enable improved wiring management in some areas, increased freedom in wiring design in some areas, enhanced protective functionality in some areas, and increased conductivity in some areas.

For example, the first wiring may have a longer distance between inner layers than between outer layers. Alternatively, the first wiring may have a shorter distance between inner layers than between outer layers. Alternatively, the first wiring may have a wider width between inner layers than between outer layers. Alternatively, the first wiring may have a narrower width between inner layers than between outer layers. Alternatively, the first wiring may have a larger area between inner layers than between outer layers. Alternatively, the first wiring may have a smaller area between inner layers than between outer layers.

A10. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g., W1, W6, W) has the same specifications for the inner layer and outer layer.

This configuration may simplify the design.

For example, the first wiring may have the same distance between the outer and inner layers. Alternatively, the first wiring may have the same width between the outer and inner layers. Alternatively, the first wiring may have the same area between the outer and inner layers.

A11. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g., W1, W6, W) is formed by connecting the inner layer portion and the outer layer portion via a hole.

This configuration may allow for relatively easy connection between the inner layer and outer layer. For example, the first wiring may connect the outer layer and inner layer with a through hole. Alternatively, the first wiring may connect the outer layer and inner layer with a via hole.

A12. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that at least one of the multiple board component means is a circuit component.

This configuration may improve the protection performance of the wiring of circuit components.

For example, the first board configuration means may be at least one of a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, and switch. Furthermore, the second board configuration means may be at least one of a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, and switch.

A13. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that a portion of the covering means is lenticular.

This configuration may further increase the enjoyment of the game and make it easier to check for fraudulent activity.

A14. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple board component means is a third board component means (e.g., P3), and the second wiring connected to the first board component means is connected to the third board component means.

This configuration may allow multiple wiring to be installed on a single substrate.

A15. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that one of the plurality of layers is a first layer, one of the plurality of layers is a second layer, the first layer is provided with at least a portion of the second wiring, and the second layer is provided with at least a portion of the second wiring.

This configuration may improve the protection function for multiple wiring.

A16. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first board component means (e.g., P1) has a different number of wires than the second board component means (e.g., P2).

This configuration may allow board component means with different numbers of wires to be installed on a single board.

A17. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the second layer is arranged with only the first wiring.

This configuration may simplify wiring design and improve the protection function of the first wiring.

A18. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple wirings is a third wiring (e.g., W6), the third wiring is connected to the first connector, the third wiring is connected to the second connector, and the first layer is provided with at least a portion of the third wiring.

This configuration may make it easier to secure space for installing the third wiring.

A19. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the first wiring and the third wiring are arranged on the second layer.

This configuration may simplify wiring design and increase the degree of freedom for other wiring.

A20. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that only the first wiring and the third wiring are arranged on the second layer.

This configuration may simplify wiring design and increase the degree of freedom for other wiring.

A21. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple layers is a third layer (e.g., LY2), the third layer is located inside the third substrate relative to the first layer, and at least a portion of the third wiring is provided on the third layer.

This configuration may improve short-circuit prevention performance between the first wiring and the third wiring.

A22. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that only the third wiring is arranged on the third layer.

This configuration may simplify wiring design and increase the degree of freedom for other wiring.

A23. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that at least one of the multiple layers has one or more of a signal line, a power line, and a ground line arranged thereon.

This configuration may improve the protection performance of various wiring.

For example, the first layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, or a ground line arranged thereon. Alternatively, the second layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, or a ground line arranged thereon. Alternatively, the third layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, or a ground line arranged thereon. Alternatively, one or two layers adjacent to the second layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, or a ground line arranged thereon. The number of inner layers may be one, two, or three or more. The first wiring may also be arranged on multiple inner layers.

<Confirmation Promotion Structure> This section describes a structure that encourages game arcade staff and others to check areas requiring confirmation. In this embodiment, the areas requiring confirmation are the board components on the LCD control board 680, but this is not limited to this.

As explained with reference to Figure 2, the LCD control board 680 is housed in an LCD control board case 682 and is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 100. The LCD control board case 682 is surrounded on all four sides by other components (tank rail 154, payout device 152, main control board case 158, and first sub-control board case 162). Therefore, while the interior of the LCD control board case 682 is relatively easy to see from the back to the front of the pachinko machine 100, visibility of the interior of the LCD control board case 682 from the top, bottom, left, and right sides is not necessarily good. Therefore, in this embodiment, visibility of the interior of the LCD control board case 682 is at least partially impaired from the back to the front of the pachinko machine 100, allowing the inspector to visually inspect it from multiple angles.

Figure 101 is an explanatory diagram of the LCD control board 680. The LCD control board 680 is composed of multiple boards. Specifically, the LCD control board 680 is broadly divided into a main board 10 and a ROM board 11, which are connected to each other. Figure 102(a) is a plan view showing the surface of the main board 10, and Figure 102(b) is a plan view showing the surface of the ROM board 11. Figure 103 is a cross-sectional view taken along line l-l in Figure 102(a), showing the main board 10 and ROM board 11 assembled together and housed in the LCD control board case 682.

The main board 10 is mounted with the CPU 704, ROM 706, VDP 710, and crystal oscillators 714A and 714B already described. RAM 708 and VRAM 718 are mounted on the backside. The main board 10 also has a connector 21 to which a harness from an external device is connected, and a connector 22 to which the ROM board 11 is connected. The connector 22 is fixed to the main board 10 and also functions to support the ROM board 11. The main board 10 is also mounted with resistors 25, 26, capacitors 23, 24, and light-emitting elements 31 to 34. In this example, the light-emitting elements 31 to 34 are LEDs.

Identification markings PI indicating the mounting position of each component are formed on the main board 10. The identification markings PI are formed, for example, by printing. The identification markings PI for the connector 21 are displayed as CN1, and the identification markings PI for the CPU 704 are displayed as IC1. By comparing the identification markings PI with the mounted components, it may be possible to confirm the consistency between the two. Note that the main board 10 and ROM board 11 may also be provided with a marking indicating the board's control number, which may make it possible to confirm the consistency between the two.

Light-emitting elements 31 to 34 emit light when certain lighting conditions are met. Here, the following lighting conditions are assumed. Light-emitting element 31 emits light each time a timer interrupt process is performed. From the outside, it appears to be constantly lit after power is turned on. In this embodiment, light-emitting element 31 is primarily considered to be the part requiring confirmation.

Light-emitting element 32 lights up during a software reset. Light-emitting element 33 lights up during a hardware reset. It lights up when a gaming parlor staff member performs a reset operation, etc. Light-emitting element 34 lights up during debugging. Therefore, it does not light up when the parlor is open for business. Note that while there are four light-emitting elements here, there is no limit to the number. Furthermore, the number of light-emitting elements that can light up during normal business hours (here, 31-33) may be more, less, or the same as the light-emitting element that does not light up (here, 34).

The ROM board 11 is mounted with the CGROM 716 already described. A connector or pin that can be detached from the connector 22 is provided on the back of the ROM board 11, allowing the ROM board 11 to be separated from the main board 10.

As shown in Figure 103, the main board 10 and ROM board 11 are fastened parallel to each other with bolts and nuts via multiple spacers 12. The main board 10 and ROM board 11 are spaced apart from each other in their normal direction, which coincides with the back-to-front direction of the pachinko machine 100.

When viewed in the normal direction of the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, the main board 10 partially overlaps with the ROM board 11. In this embodiment, only a portion of the main board 10 overlaps with the ROM board 11, but the entire overlap may also be present. Also, when viewed from the ROM board 11, the entire ROM board 11 overlaps with the main board 10, but only a portion may overlap.

The capacitor 24, crystal oscillator 714A, resistor 26, connector 22, light-emitting elements 31-34, and their identification marks PI are located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. Therefore, when looking from the back to the front of the pachinko machine 100, the ROM board 11 obstructs the visibility of these components, reducing their visibility. In other words, the ROM board 11 functions as a visibility-reducing device.

Focusing on the light-emitting element 31, which is a part that requires inspection, its visibility will be explained with reference to Figure 103. Here, the LCD control board 680 is housed in an LCD control board case 682 and fixed to a mounting portion 682a (e.g., the back of the game board) of the pachinko machine 100. The LCD control board case 682 houses both the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. The LCD control board case 682 is constructed by fixing an upper case 6821 and a lower case 6822 to each other, and the bottom of the main board 10 is attached to the case 6822 as a board mounting portion. The LCD control board case 682 is made of a translucent material such as a transparent or semi-transparent material (e.g., acrylic or glass), and the interior can be seen from the outside.

Referring to Figure 103, when the light-emitting element 31 is viewed from the normal direction (D1) of the main board 10 and ROM board 11, the ROM board 11 gets in the way, making it difficult to see the light-emitting element 31. Therefore, the inspector changes the viewing angle, for example, to an oblique direction, such as direction D2 or D3, to view the light-emitting element 31. While the light-emitting element 31 is still difficult to see from direction D2, the light emission itself can be confirmed due to light leakage. From direction D3, the light-emitting element 31 itself becomes visible. As already explained, the LCD control board case 682 is surrounded on all four sides by other components (tank rail 154, dispensing device 152, main control board case 158, first sub-control board case 162), making it structurally difficult to view the light-emitting element 31 from directly to the side, directly above, or directly below. However, a configuration that allows the light-emitting element 31 to be viewed from directly to the side, directly above, or directly below can also be adopted.

Now, since the light-emitting element 31 has poor visibility from direction D1, which is a common checking direction, the checker will naturally visually check the light-emitting element 31 from multiple directions, which will allow them to check more carefully whether the light-emitting element 31 is lit. Furthermore, by requiring visual checks from multiple angles, it may be possible to discover the presence of unauthorized devices, thereby improving security.

The light-emitting element 31 is difficult to see from the D1 direction, but components that are not located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, such as the CPU 704, and the identification markings PI are easily visible, for example, from the D4 direction (parallel to the D1 direction but from a different perspective). Furthermore, when the light-emitting element 31 emits light, the surrounding area becomes brighter. When checking the area around the light-emitting element 31 of a pachinko machine 100 installed in a relatively dark location, visibility may be improved if the CPU 704, VDP 710, etc. are included within the range of this light. Furthermore, while the area between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11 tends to be dark, the light from the light-emitting element 31 may improve the visibility of other components (such as the crystal oscillator 714A) and their identification markings PI between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11 when viewed from the D3 direction.

The confirmation prompting structure is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 101 to 103, and various configurations can be adopted. These will be explained in order below.

<Alternative Example 1> There is no direction in which the light-emitting element 31 itself can be seen, but the leaking light may be visible. Figures 104 and 105 show one example. Figure 104 is a plan view of the main board 10 in this example, and Figure 105 is a cross-sectional view taken along line mm in Figure 104. In this example, the positions of the light-emitting elements 31 to 34 have been moved slightly upward compared to the examples in Figures 101 to 103, and are now located behind the center of the ROM board 11 in the vertical direction. For this reason, as shown in Figure 105, it is difficult to see the light-emitting element 31 not only in direction D2 but also in direction D3.

However, it is possible to confirm the light emitted by the light-emitting element 31 from the leaking light. Furthermore, the CPU 704 and other components are visible from the D4 direction. As already mentioned, the light from the light-emitting element 31 brightens the surrounding area, improving visibility.

<Variant Example 2> The visibility of multiple different types of components may be reduced. Figures 106 and 107 show an example of this. Figure 106 is a plan view of the main board 10 in this example, and Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view taken along line n-n in Figure 106. In this example, the CPU 704 is also located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. The visibility of the light-emitting element 31 is the same as in the examples of Figures 101 to 103.

The CPU 704 is difficult to see in directions D1 and D3, but the CPU 704 itself can be seen in direction D2. The light from the light-emitting element 31 may be reflected by the surrounding area (for example, the back surface of the ROM board 11), brightening the area around the CPU 704 and making the CPU 704 and its identification marking PI easier to see.

<Variant Example 3> At least a portion of the area requiring inspection needs to be located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. Figure 108 shows one such example. Figure 108 is a plan view of the main board 10 in this example. When viewed in the normal direction of the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, only half of the light-emitting element 31 is located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. Even with this configuration, the light-emitting element 31 is difficult to see in its entirety from the front, but is easy to see in its entirety at an angle, which may encourage the inspector to visually inspect it from multiple angles.

It is also possible to employ a configuration in which some of the multiple light-emitting elements 31-34 are located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11, and the remainder are not located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11. The number of light-emitting elements located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11 and the number of light-emitting elements not located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11 may be the same or different, or one may be more than the other.

Figure 109 is a plan view of the main board 10 of this example, which is a different configuration. When viewed in the normal direction of the main board 10 and ROM board 11, not only the light-emitting element 31 but also only half of the CPU 704 is located between the main board 10 and ROM board 11.

<Alternative Example 4> In the above examples, the LCD control board 680 was composed of two boards, but it may also be composed of three or more boards. Figure 110 shows one such example. Figure 110 is a plan view of the main board 10 of this example. Board 13, shown by the dashed line, has been added. Board 13, like ROM board 11, is arranged parallel to main board 10 and is spaced apart from main board 10 in the normal direction. The normal separation distance between main board 10 and ROM board 11 and the normal separation distance between main board 10 and board 13 may be the same or different.

In this example, part of the CPU 704 is located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, and another part of the CPU 704 is located between the main board 10 and board 13. In other words, board 13 also functions as a visibility-reducing means. In this way, multiple boards may be used as visibility-reducing means.

<Variant Example 5> A component other than a board may also be used as visibility reducing means. Figure 111 is a cross-sectional view showing one such example. In the example shown in the figure, the main board 10 is turned upside down and attached to the lower case 6822 of the LCD control board case 682. Therefore, the attachment portion 682a functions as visibility reducing means. In the example shown in the figure, it is difficult to see the light emitting element 31 and CPU 704 themselves, but the light from the light emitting element 31 can be seen from the leaking light. In this example, it is also possible to construct the LCD control board 680 from a single board.

Figure 112 is a cross-sectional view of this alternative embodiment. A seal 14 is provided on the LCD control board case 682 as a means of reducing visibility.

Seal 14 is placed in a position opposite the area to be checked. In the example shown in the figure, it is placed in a position opposite the CPU 704 and light-emitting element 31. Any type of seal 14 may be used as long as it reduces the translucency of the LCD control board case 682 or makes the area to be checked difficult to see, and it may be a transparent seal, a semi-transparent seal, or an opaque seal.

In addition, instead of attaching a sticker 14, the LCD control board case 682 itself may be made opaque or uneven at the position facing the area to be checked, making the area to be checked difficult to see.

<Variant Example 6> The main board 10 and ROM board 11 may be housed in different board cases. Figure 113 is a cross-sectional view showing one such example. In the example shown in the figure, the main board 10 is housed in LCD control board case 682, and the ROM board 11 is housed in LCD control board case 15. The CPU 704 and light-emitting element 31 are located between the main board 10 and ROM board 11, and the ROM board 11 functions as a visibility reducing means.

The LCD control board case 15 is formed by fixing an upper case 15a and a lower case 15b together. The LCD control board case 15 is fixed onto the LCD control board case 682, but it can also be fixed to the mounting portion 682a. Like the LCD control board case 682, the LCD control board case 15 may be made of a light-transmitting material, or a non-light-transmitting material.

In this example, too, it may be possible to encourage the inspector to visually check from multiple angles. However, the LCD control board case 15 may have a low reflectivity for the light from the light-emitting element 31, and in terms of the function of illuminating the area around the light-emitting element 31, a configuration in which the ROM board 11 is also housed in the LCD control board case 682, as shown in Figure 103, etc., may be superior. Furthermore, if the LCD control board case 15 is removed from the LCD control board case 682 along with the ROM board 11, visual check from multiple angles may not be possible.

<Summary of confirmation promotion structure> B1. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., 10), the first board is attached to a board attachment portion (e.g., 682), the first board has a plurality of board component means (e.g., 21, 710, 704, 31-34, PI), at least one of the plurality of board component means is a first board component means (e.g., 31), the gaming machine has non-board component means (e.g., 11, 14, 682a) that is not included in the plurality of board component means, and the first board component means is located between the first board and the non-board component means.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The first board may be, for example, at least one of the following: a main control board, a first sub-control board, a second sub-control board, an LCD control board, a ROM board, a power supply board, a dispensing board, a firing board, an LED board, a relay board, and an external terminal board.

Furthermore, the first board configuration means may be, for example, at least one of a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, switch, a display relating to one of multiple board configuration means, or a display relating to the board's control number.

The non-substrate component may also be a visibility reducing means.

B2. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the plurality of boards is a second board (e.g., 11), and the non-board component means is formed from the second board.

This configuration may allow the board to be used to reduce the visibility of the first board component means, allowing the inspector to visually inspect it from multiple angles.

The second board may be, for example, at least one of the following: a main control board, a first sub-control board, a second sub-control board, an LCD control board, a ROM board, a power supply board, a dispensing board, a firing board, an LED board, a relay board, and an external terminal board.

The second substrate may be smaller than the first substrate, larger than the first substrate, or the same size as the first substrate. The second substrate may overlap the first substrate entirely, or only partially.

B3. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first board component means is a light-emitting means (e.g., 31), and the light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when a light-emitting condition is met.

This configuration may make it easier to visually check the light-emitting means and the area around the light-emitting means. Furthermore, a flashlight or other light-projecting means may not be required for visual inspection by the inspector. Furthermore, the inspector's hand will not be occupied with a flashlight or other light, which may improve the efficiency of the inspection process.

Note that the light emission conditions may include, for example, at least one of the following: an interrupt occurs, a Vsync interrupt occurs, a soft reset occurs, a hard reset occurs, an error occurs, or the light is constantly emitting light after power is turned on.

B4. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the plurality of board configuration means is a second board configuration means (e.g., 704), and the second board configuration means is located between the first board and the second board.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect multiple board components from multiple angles.

The second board configuration means may be, for example, at least one of a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, switch, a display relating to one of multiple board configuration means, or a display relating to the board's control number.

B5. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the second board component means is positioned at a position where light from the light-emitting means reaches.

This configuration may make it easier to visually inspect the second substrate configuration means.

B6. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second board configuration means is electronic circuit configuration means (e.g., 704).

This configuration may make it easier to visually inspect the electronic circuit configuration means.

B7. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second board component means is an identification mark (e.g., PI), and the identification mark is a mark related to at least one of the plurality of board component means.

This configuration may make it easier to visually confirm the identification markings.

B8. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple board configuration means is a third board configuration means (e.g., 21,710), and the third board configuration means is not located between the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, it may be possible to visually confirm the third substrate component means from a direction perpendicular to the first substrate.

The third board configuration means may be, for example, at least one of a connector, resistor, capacitor, LED, IC, LSI, CPU, ROM, RAM, switch, a display relating to one of multiple board configuration means, or a display relating to the board's control number.

B9. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the third board component means is positioned at a position where light from the light-emitting means reaches.

This configuration may make it easier to visually inspect the third substrate component means.

B10. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it includes a circuit board case (e.g., 682), which constitutes the circuit board mounting portion, which houses the first circuit board, and which houses the second circuit board.

With this configuration, the relative positions of the first and second boards do not change, which may allow the inspector to reliably perform visual inspection from multiple angles. In other words, if the second board is outside the board case, it may be possible to eliminate the possibility that the inspector will change the position of the second board and neglect to visually inspect it from multiple angles.

The board case may also be made of a translucent material, which may improve the visibility of the first and second boards.

B11. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least a portion of the first board component means is not visible from a first direction (e.g., D1).

Specifically, for example, the first substrate forming means may be invisible from the first direction, or may be partially visible from the first direction (e.g., Figure 32).

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The first direction is, for example, the normal direction of the board. In other words, it is, for example, a direction perpendicular to the placement surface of the first board component. The first direction may also be a direction that does not include as a component a direction from one side to the other in the left-right direction of the gaming machine. The first direction may also be a direction that does not include as a component a direction from one side to the other in the up-down direction of the gaming machine.

The light from the light-emitting means may be invisible from the first direction, or may be visible from the first direction.

B12. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first board component means is at least partially visible from a second direction (e.g., D3).

Specifically, for example, the first substrate component may be entirely visible from the second direction, or only a portion of it may be visible.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The second direction is, for example, a direction different from the first direction. For example, it is the surface direction of the board. The second direction may also be a direction that is not perpendicular to the surface of the first board on which the first board component means is installed. The second direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the left-right direction of the gaming machine. The second direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the up-down direction of the gaming machine.

The light from the light-emitting means may be invisible from the second direction, or may be visible from the second direction.

B13. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least a portion of the first board component means is not visible from a third direction (e.g., D2).

Specifically, for example, the first substrate forming means may be invisible from the third direction, or may be partially visible from the third direction (e.g., Figure 32).

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The third direction is, for example, a direction different from the first direction and the second direction. For example, the third direction may be a direction that is not perpendicular to the surface on which the first board component of the first board is installed. The third direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the left-right direction of the gaming machine. The third direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the up-down direction of the gaming machine.

The light from the light-emitting means may be invisible from a third direction, or may be visible from a third direction.

B14. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least a portion of the second board component is not visible from the first direction.

Specifically, for example, the second substrate component may be invisible from the first direction, or may be partially visible from the first direction.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect multiple board components from multiple angles.

The second board component means may or may not be a light-emitting means. If it is a light-emitting means, it may be for debugging purposes.

B15. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second board is connected to the first board by a connector (e.g., 22).

This configuration may allow the second board to be removed from the first board and visually inspected. By fixing the connector to the board, the connector may also have the function of supporting the second board. The second board may also be attached to the first board by a fastening means. This may make it difficult to remove the second board from the first board. The fastening means may be at least one of a screw, bolt, nut, or caulking.

B16. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the base case is composed of multiple case-forming means (6821, 6822).

With this configuration, it may be possible to remove the first and second boards from the board case and check them.

In addition, at least one of the multiple case constituent means may be a first case constituent means (e.g., upper case 6821), and at least one of the multiple case constituent means may be a second case constituent means (e.g., lower case 6822), and the first board may be attached to at least one of the multiple case constituent means by fastening means. This may make it difficult to remove the first board. The fastening means may be at least one of screws, bolts, nuts, and rivets.

The device may also be provided with an opening prevention means that prevents the first case component and the second case component from being opened. This may make fraudulent acts more difficult. The opening prevention means may be a sealing member. The sealing member may be attached across the first case component and the second case component.

The substrate case may also be installed on a substrate case installation section (e.g., 682a). The substrate case installation section may have an operation section that can be changed to either a substrate case installed state or a substrate case released state by operating the operation section. The substrate case released state may require destruction of the operation section or part of the substrate case.

The operating unit may be operated by a tool. The operating unit may be a fastening means. The fastening means may be at least one of a screw, a bolt, a nut, and a rivet.

The operating unit may be operable without the need for tools.

The fastening means may be capable of being changed between a fastened state and an unclamped state using a tool. Alternatively, the fastening means may be capable of being changed between a fastened state and an unclamped state without the need for a tool.

The first substrate may also have a generally rectangular shape, with multiple corners fastened to the substrate case by fastening means.

Furthermore, the first substrate may be positioned in the substrate case at one or more of its multiple corners by a positioning means.

Alternatively, the first substrate may be positioned and installed in the substrate case only by the positioning means, without being fastened by the fastening means.

B17. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it includes a first board case (e.g., 682) and a second board case (e.g., 15), the first board case housing the first board, and the second board case housing the second board.

This configuration may allow the first and second substrates to be protected individually.

The second substrate case may be composed of multiple case-constituting means, at least one of which may be a third case-constituting means (e.g., upper case 15a), and at least one of which may be a fourth case-constituting means (e.g., lower case 15b), and the second substrate may be attached to at least one of the multiple case-constituting means by fastening means.

Furthermore, the second substrate case may overlap at least partially with the first substrate case, or may overlap completely.

The second substrate case may be installed on a second substrate case installation section. The second substrate case installation section may have a second operating section and may be changeable between a substrate case installed state and a substrate case released state by operating the second operating section. The second operating section may be operated by a tool. The second operating section may be a fastening means. The second operating section may be operated without the need for a tool. The substrate case released state of the second substrate case may require destruction of the operating section or a part of the second substrate case.

<Embodiment 2> The present invention can be applied to various gaming machines, such as slot machines, in addition to the pachinko machine 100 of embodiment 1. Below, we will explain a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as an example.

The slot machine 1100 shown in Figure 114 comprises a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 attached to the front of the main body 1101 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1101. Three reels (left reel 1110, center reel 1111, right reel 1112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown) are housed inside the center of the main body 1101 and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 1100. These reels 1110 to 1112 are driven to rotate by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each reel 1110-1112. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1110-1112 are displayed vertically in approximately three columns through the symbol display window 1113, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each reel 1110-1112, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each reel 1110-1112 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. Furthermore, while three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1100 in this embodiment, the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 1110-1112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 1110-1112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection results of this sensor, the rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined, and the reels 1110-1112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 1120 indicates which paylines 1114 are active. The active paylines are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 1114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, the top horizontal payline and the bottom horizontal payline are active, adding three lines. If three medals are bet, the bottom horizontal payline and the top right-upward payline are active, adding five lines. The number of paylines 1114 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five active paylines may be the middle horizontal payline, the top horizontal payline, the bottom horizontal payline, the bottom right-upward payline, and the top right-upward payline. Alternatively, the same number of paylines may be uniformly set as active paylines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 1123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

BET buttons 1130 to 1132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1100. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time BET button 1130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when BET button 1131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when BET button 1132 is pressed. Hereinafter, BET button 1132 is also referred to as the MAX BET button. The game medal insertion lamp 1129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 1121 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1130 to 1132, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal insertion slot 1141; the term "inserting" encompasses both. The stored medal count display 1125 is a display that displays the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1100. The game information display 1126 is a display that displays various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during bonus play) in numerical form. The payout medal count display 1127 is a display that displays the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a winning combination. The stored medal count display 1125, game information display 1126, and payout medal count display 1127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1141 or when the bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are operated and the start lever 1135 is operated, the reels 1110 to 1112 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 1135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1136 is provided with stop buttons 1137 to 1139. The stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1110 to 1112 that have started spinning by operating the start lever 1135, and are associated with each reel 1110 to 1112. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each stop button 1137 to 1139, and when the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1133 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 1134 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 1155. The door key hole 1140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 1102 of the slot machine 1100.

Below the stop button unit 1136 is a title panel 1162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed. Below the title panel 1162 are a medal payout opening 1155 and a medal tray 1161.

Sound hole 1180 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker installed inside slot machine 1100 to the outside. Side lamps 1144 installed on each side of front door 1102 are decorative lamps to enhance gameplay. A performance device 1160 is installed above front door 1102, and sound hole 1143 is installed above performance device 1160. This performance device 1160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 1163 consisting of two shutters, right shutter 1163a and left shutter 1163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1157 (performance image display device) installed behind this shutter 1163. When right shutter 1163a and left shutter 1163b are opened horizontally outward in front of liquid crystal display device 1157, the display screen of liquid crystal display device 1157 appears on the front (player side) of slot machine 1100. Note that the display device does not have to be an LCD display, and any other display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen may be used. The display screen is rectangular and is configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Furthermore, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Figure 115 is a front view showing the slot machine 1100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 1101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by a top panel 1261, a left side panel 1260, a right side panel 1260, a bottom panel 1264, and a back panel 1242, and is open at the front. Inside the main body 1101, a main control board storage case 1210 containing a main control board is located in a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 1249 provided at the top of the back panel 1242, and three reels 1110 to 1112 are located below this main control board storage case 1210. To the side of the main control board storage case 1210 and reels 1110 to 1112, i.e., on the left side panel 1260 as viewed from the front, a sub-control board storage case 1220 containing a sub-control board is located. Additionally, the side panel 1260 on the right side is fitted with an external centralized terminal board 1248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information from the slot machine 1100 to an external device.

The medal payout device 1180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 1264, and above this medal payout device 1180, i.e., below the reels 1110 to 1112, is disposed a power supply device 1252 having a power board, with a power switch 1244 disposed on the front of the power supply device 1252. The power supply device 1252 converts AC power supplied externally to the slot machine 1100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 1300, sub-control units 1400, and 1500, which will be described later. It also has a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) that supplies power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

To the right of the medal payout device 1180 is located the auxiliary medal storage 1240, with an overflow terminal located behind it (not shown). The power supply device 1252 is provided with a power cord connection section for connecting the power cord 1265, which extends to the outside through a power cord hole 1262 opened in the back panel 1242 of the main body 1101.

The front door 1102 is hinged to the left side panel 1260 of the main body 1101 via a hinge device 1276, and above the pattern display window 1113 are provided the performance device 1160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls this performance device 1160, and an upper speaker 1272. Below the pattern display window 1113 are provided the medal selector 1170 for sorting inserted medals, and a passage 1266 through which medals pass when this medal selector 1170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 1161. Furthermore, a low-frequency speaker 1277 is provided in a position corresponding to the sound hole 1180.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of slot machine 1100 will be explained in detail using Figure 116. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The above-mentioned wiring structure and confirmation promotion structure can be adopted for the boards that make up the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 1100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 1400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 1300, and a second sub-control unit 1500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent from the first sub-control unit 1400.

<Main Control Unit> First, we will explain the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100. The main control unit 1300 is equipped with a basic circuit 1302 that controls the entire main control unit 1300. This basic circuit 1302 is equipped with a CPU 1304, a ROM 1306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during the internal lottery for winning combinations, reel stop positions, etc., a RAM 1308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 1310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 1312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) 1314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 1306 and RAM 1308; this also applies to the first sub-control unit 1400 and second sub-control unit 500 described below. The CPU 1304 of this basic circuit 1302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 1314 as the system clock. Furthermore, when power is applied, CPU 1304 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of ROM 1306 to counter timer 1312. Counter timer 1312 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to CPU 1304 at each interrupt time. This interrupt request triggers CPU 1304 to monitor sensors and send drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by crystal oscillator 1314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of counter timer 1312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data in ROM 1306 is set to 47, the reference time for the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 1300 is equipped with a random number generation circuit 1316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates between 0 and 65535, and a start-up signal output circuit 1338, which outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 1338, the CPU 1304 begins game control (starting the main control unit main processing, described below).

The main control unit 1300 also has a sensor circuit 1320, and the CPU 1304 monitors the status of various sensors 1318 (bet button 1130 sensor, bet button 1131 sensor, bet button 1132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal insertion slot 1141, start lever 1135 sensor, stop button 1137 sensor, stop button 1138 sensor, stop button 1139 sensor, settlement button 1134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 1180, reel 1110 index sensor, reel 1111 index sensor, reel 1112 index sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 1320 detects that the start lever sensor is at an H level, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 1316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 1316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 1141 and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 1135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 1135 and detect the start operation by the player. Stop button 1137 sensors, stop button 1138 sensors, and stop button 1139 sensors are installed on each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 1130 sensor, bet button 1131 sensor, and bet button 1132 sensor are installed on each of the medal insertion buttons 1130 to 1132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in RAM 1308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 1134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 1134. When the settlement button 1134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 1180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensors for reel 1110, reel 1111, and reel 1112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each reel 1110 to 1112, and go low every time a light-shielding piece attached to the reel frame passes by. When the CPU 1304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation and resets the reel rotational position information to zero.

The main control unit 1300 includes a drive circuit 1322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 1110 to 1112, a drive circuit 1324 that drives the solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 1326 that drives the motor provided in the medal payout device 1180, and a drive circuit 1328 that drives various lamps 1338 (winning line indicator lamp 1120, notification lamp 1123, medal insertion possible lamp 1124, replay lamp 1122, medal insertion lamp 1129, game start lamp 1121, stored medal number indicator 1125, game information indicator 1126, payout number indicator 1127).

In addition, an information output circuit 1334 (external centralized terminal board 1248) is connected to the basic circuit 1302, and the main control unit 1300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 1100 via this information output circuit 1334 to an information input circuit 1652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 1300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 1330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), the voltage monitoring circuit 1330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 1302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 1300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 1400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 1400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 1300 and the first sub-control unit 1400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 1300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 1400, but the first sub-control unit 1400 is configured not to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 1300.

<Sub-control unit> Next, we will explain the first sub-control unit 1400 of the slot machine 1100. The first sub-control unit 1400 is equipped with a basic circuit 1402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 1300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 1400 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 1402 is equipped with a CPU 1404, RAM 1408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 1410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 1412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 1404 of the basic circuit 1402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 1414 as the system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 1400, as well as data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

CPU 1404 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of ROM 1406 to counter timer 1412 via the data bus at a specified timing. Counter timer 1412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to CPU 1404 at each interrupt time. CPU 1404 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 1400 also has a sound source IC 1418, which is connected to speakers 1272 and 1277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 1418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 1272 and 1277 in response to commands from the CPU 1404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 1418, and the sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from speakers 1272 and 1277.

The first sub-control unit 1400 also has a drive circuit 1422, to which various lamps 1420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 1144, title panel 1162 lamp, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 1400 also has a drive circuit 1424 that drives the motor of the shutter 1163. This drive circuit 1424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 1163 in response to commands from the CPU 1404.

The first sub-control unit 1400 also has a sensor circuit 1426, which is connected to a shutter sensor 1428 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the status of the shutter sensor 1428 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 1404 also sends and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 1500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 1500 performs various controls of the performance device 1160, including display control of the performance image display device 1157. The second sub-control unit 1500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 1163).

The second sub-control unit 1500 is equipped with a basic circuit 1502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 1400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 1500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 1502 is equipped with a CPU 1504, RAM 1508 for temporarily storing data, I/O 1510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 1512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 1502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 1514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 1500, data for image display, etc.

CPU 1504 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of ROM 1506 to counter timer 1512 via the data bus at a specified timing. Counter timer 1512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to CPU 1404 for each interrupt time. CPU 1504 controls each IC and circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 1500 also has a VDP 1534 (video display processor), which is connected to ROM 1506 and VRAM 1536 via a bus. The VDP 1534 reads image data and other data stored in ROM 1506 based on signals from the CPU 1504, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 1536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 1157.

The arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 1110 to 1112 will be explained using Figure 117(a). Note that this figure shows the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 1110, center reel 1111, right reel 1112) expanded in a plane.

<Symbol Arrangement> Each reel 1110 to 1112 has a predetermined number of symbols (21 symbols numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of the types shown on the right side of the diagram arranged on it (eight symbols in this embodiment). The numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left side of the diagram indicate the position of the symbols on each reel 1110 to 1112. For example, in this embodiment, the "replay" symbol is arranged on the number 1 symbol on the left reel 1110, the "bell" symbol is arranged on the number 0 symbol on the center reel 1111, and the "watermelon" symbol is arranged on the number 2 symbol on the right reel 1112.

<Types of Winning Roles> Next, the types of winning roles for the slot machine 1100 will be explained using Figure 117(b). This figure also shows the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the activation or payout of each winning role. Among the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and regular bonus (RB) are roles that transition to bonus play, and the replay (replay) is a role that allows replay without inserting new medals. These roles are sometimes referred to as "activated roles" to distinguish them from winning roles. However, "winning roles" in this embodiment include the activated roles of the big bonus, regular bonus, and replay. Furthermore, "winning" in this embodiment also includes the case where a symbol combination of an activated role that does not result in a medal payout (does not result in a medal payout) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, winning the big bonus, regular bonus, and replay.

The winning combinations on the slot machine 1100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these and can be any combination.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "BB") is a special role (activating role) that, when won, initiates the special game, Big Bonus Game (BB Game). The corresponding symbol combinations are "White 7-White 7-White 7" for BB1 and "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" for BB2. Furthermore, flags are carried over for BB1 and BB2. That is, if BB1 or BB2 results in an internal win, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a specified area of RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300). However, even if BB1 or BB2 does not win in that game, the flag indicating the internal win remains set until a win occurs. Therefore, BB1 and BB2 remain internal wins in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1, "White 7-White 7-White 7," and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7," are both in a position to win.

A "Regular Bonus (RB)" is a special role (activating role) that, when won, initiates a regular bonus game (RB game). The corresponding symbol combination is "bonus-bonus-bonus." Note that, for RB, the flag is carried over in the same way as for BB described above. However, (details will be explained later), in big bonus game (BB game), the start condition is not necessarily an internal win in regular bonus game (RB game) or the symbol combination appearing on the winning line. Instead, regular bonus game can be set to start after big bonus game begins, and when one regular bonus game ends, the next regular bonus game can be started immediately, so that regular bonus game can be set to start automatically. "Small winning combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "cherry," "watermelon," and "bell") are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "cherry-any-any" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in the diagram. In the case of "cherry-any-any," the symbol on the left reel 1110 needs to be "cherry," and the symbols on the center reel 1111 and right reel 1112 can be any symbol.

A "replay" is a winning combination (operating combination) that allows a player to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media), and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for a replay is "replay-replay-replay." <Types of Game Status> Next, the types of game statuses of the slot machine 1100 will be explained. A game status is information for identifying the type of lottery data selected in a lottery or the like. In this embodiment, the game statuses of the slot machine 1100 are broadly divided into normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal win games of big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB). However, internal win games may be classified as part of normal game. <Normal Game> Winning combinations that are internally won in normal game include big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), replay, and small wins (cherry, watermelon, bell).

A "Big Bonus (BB)" is a special role (activating role) that, upon winning, initiates a special game, the Big Bonus Game (BB game). A "Regular Bonus (RB)" is a special role (activating role) that, upon winning, initiates a Regular Bonus Game (RB game). A "Replay" is a winning role (activating role) that, upon winning, allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals, and no medals are paid out. A "Small Role" is a winning role that, upon winning, pays out a predetermined number of medals. The internal winning probability of each role is calculated by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared for normal play by the numerical data within the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery (e.g., 65535). The lottery data prepared for normal play is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with a role or loss. The random number obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is determined to determine which lottery data corresponds to which role, and the internal lottery role is determined. This lottery data comes in settings 1 to 6, each with a different winning probability for at least one role, and arcade staff can select and set any of the settings.

Normal play is set so that the internal lottery results are generally a loss (no wins for the Big Bonus (BB), Regular Bonus (RB), replay, or small win), or so that the stop display results are generally a loss, meaning that the stop display results do not correspond to any winning combination, resulting in a game state in which the total number of medals acquired is less than the total number of medals inserted. This is therefore a game state that is unprofitable for the player. However, if predetermined conditions are met (for example, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed), a game state may be changed to increase the probability of an internal win in replay. In this case, the consumption of medals used in play is reduced, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out when a small win is won, resulting in a game state in which the total number of medals acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted, which may result in a game state that is profitable for the player. <BB Game> BB game is set to be a game state that is profitable for the player. In other words, the BB game is a game state in which the total number of medals acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, the BB game is initiated by winning a big bonus (BB), and RB games (described later) can be played repeatedly and terminated when a predetermined number of medals (e.g., 465 medals) are acquired during the game. However, the BB game may be played multiple times as long as a combination of symbols (e.g., replay-replay-replay) that initiates the RB game is set, and the RB game may be set to start when this combination is internally won or when a winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, the BB game may be terminated when the BB normal game, excluding the RB game during the BB game, has been played a predetermined number of times (e.g., 30 times), or when the number of RB games played during the BB game has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 3 times). <RB Game> RB game is designed to be a game state that is profitable for the player. In other words, RB game is a game state in which the total number of medals won exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, RB game is initiated by winning a regular bonus (RB). A predetermined winning combination increases the probability of an internal win (for example, the internal winning probability of "minor combination 1" set in "Setting 1" and "normal game" is increased from 1/15 to 1/1.2, which is a predetermined value of "one"). RB game ends when a predetermined number of winning combinations (for example, eight combinations) have occurred. RB game may also end when a predetermined number of winning combinations (at least two) have occurred (for example, eight combinations) or when the number of RB games executed during the RB game has reached a predetermined number (for example, eight combinations). The BB game described above allows multiple RB games to be played, so if one RB game is played, the player will end up winning fewer medals than the total number of medals obtained in the BB game. <Big Bonus (BB) and Regular Bonus (RB) Internal Win Games> The winning combinations that are internally won in the Big Bonus (BB) and Regular Bonus (RB) internal win games include replays and small combinations. The Big Bonus (BB) and Regular Bonus (RB) do not result in internal wins, and this is a gaming state in which it is possible to win with a symbol combination that corresponds to the Big Bonus (BB) or Regular Bonus (RB).

However, the probability of an internal win in a replay may be changed from the next play after an internal win in the Big Bonus (BB) or Regular Bonus (RB). For example, the probability of an internal win in a replay may be increased, and until a symbol combination corresponding to the Big Bonus (BB) or Regular Bonus (RB) is won, the game state may be such that the total number of medals won is approximately the same as the total number of medals inserted, making it a game state that is more profitable for the player than regular game. Note that because both BB game and RB game are game states that are profitable for the player, they may collectively be referred to as bonus game or special game.

<Main processing of the main control unit> Using Figure 118, we will explain the main processing of the main control unit executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As mentioned above, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 118 in accordance with a control program pre-stored in ROM 1306.

When the power is turned on, various initial settings are first made in step SA101. These initial settings include setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304, prohibiting interrupts, initializing the I/O 1310, initializing various variables stored in the RAM 1308, and setting operation permission and initial values for the WDT 1314. In step SA103, a medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, a check is made to see if a medal has been inserted, and the winning line indicator lamp 1120 is turned on in response to the insertion of a medal. Note that if a player wins in a replay from the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals. A check is also made to see if the start lever 1135 has been operated, and if so, the process proceeds to step SA104.

In step SA105, the number of inserted medals is determined, and valid winning lines are determined. In step SA107, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 1316 is obtained. In step SA109, the winning combination lottery table stored in ROM 1306 is read based on the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value obtained in step SA107. If the result of the internal lottery is an internal win for any winning combination (including an activated combination), the flag for that winning combination is turned ON. In step SA111, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal lottery.

In step SA113, all reels 1110 to 1112 begin to spin. In step SA115, stop buttons 1137 to 1139 become available for reception. When any stop button is pressed, one of the reels 1110 to 1112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped based on the reel stop control data selected in step SA111. When all reels 1110 to 1112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step SA117. In step SA117, a win determination is made. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on an activated winning line 1114, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is lined up on an activated winning line, it is determined that a Bell win has occurred. In step SA119, if a winning role with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to that winning role is paid out according to the number of winning lines. In step SA121, game status control processing is performed. The game state control process involves processing the transitions between normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal win game states, and the game state transitions when the start and end conditions for those states are met. This completes one game. After that, the process returns to step SA103 and the above-mentioned process is repeated to continue the game.

<Main control unit 1300 timer interrupt processing> Using Figure 119, we will explain the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 1300 is equipped with a counter timer 1312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step SB101, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 1304 to the stack area.

In step SB103, WDT1314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT1314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step SB105, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update processing, detection signals from the sensor circuits 1320 of the various sensors 1318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 1310, the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored, and the detection signals are stored in signal status storage areas in RAM 1308 partitioned for each of the various sensors 1318.

In step SB107, various game processes are performed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 1318), and processing is performed according to this status (for example, stop button acceptance processing is performed based on the acquired interrupt status of each stop button 1137 to 1139).

In step SB109, timer update processing is performed. Various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step SB111, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 1400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 1400 consists of 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (in this embodiment, basic commands, start lever acceptance commands, performance commands associated with performance lottery processing, rotation start commands associated with starting the rotation of reels 1110 to 1112, stop button acceptance commands associated with accepting operation of stop buttons 1137 to 1139, stop position information commands associated with stopping processing of reels 1110 to 1112, payout number commands and payout end commands associated with medal payout processing, commands indicating game status, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 1400 can determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 1300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can also determine the presentation control content based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step SB113, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 1308 is output via the information output circuit 1334 to an information input circuit 1652, which is separate from the slot machine 1100.

In step SB109, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal status of the various sensors 1318 stored in the signal status memory area in step SB105 is first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, the medal selector 1170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170), various lamps 1338, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game status.

In step SB117, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step SB121; if the low voltage signal is off (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB119.

In step SB119, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. This timer interrupt end process involves setting the values of each register that were temporarily saved in step SB101 back into the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in Figure 118.

On the other hand, in step SB121, specific variables and stack pointers for restoring the system to the state it was in when power was restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 1308, power failure processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the system then returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 118.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 1400> The processing of the first sub-control unit 1400 will be explained using Figure 120. Note that Figure 120(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400. Figure 120(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 1400. Figure 120(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 1400.

First, in step SC101 of Figure 120(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step SC101. This initialization processing includes initial settings for input/output ports and initialization processing for memory areas in RAM 1408.

In step SC103, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step SC105.

In step SC105, the timer variable is assigned 0.

In step SC107, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 1300.

In step SC109, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step SC107, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, reading performance data from ROM 1406, and updating the performance data if it needs to be updated.

In step SC111, sound control processing is performed based on the processing results of step C09. For example, if the performance data read in step SC109 contains a command to the sound source IC 1418, this command is output to the sound source IC 1418.

In step SC113, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing results of step C09. For example, if the performance data read in step SC109 contains commands for the various lamps 1420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 1422.

In step SC115, an information output process is performed to set up the transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step C09. For example, if the performance data read in step SC109 contains a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 1500, the process performs settings to output this control command, and then returns to step SC103.

Next, using Figure 120 (b), we will explain the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 1400. This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the first sub-control unit 1400 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 1300. In step SD101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 1300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 1408.

Next, using Figure 120 (c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400. The first sub-control unit 1400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step SE101, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 1408 described in step SC103 of the first sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 120 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SC103, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step SE103, control commands are sent to the second sub-control unit 1500 set in step SC115, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 1500> The processing of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be explained using Figure 121. Note that Figure 121 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500. Figure 121 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 1500. Figure 121 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 1500. Figure 121 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 1500.

First, in step SG01 of Figure 121(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step SF101. This initialization processing includes initial settings for input/output ports and initialization processing for memory areas in RAM 1508.

In step SF103, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step SF105.

In step SF105, the timer variable is assigned 0.

In step SF107, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400.

In step SF109, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step SF107, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, reading performance data from ROM 1506, and updating the performance data if it needs to be updated.

In step SF111, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step SF109. For example, if the performance data read in step SF109 contains a shutter control command, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step SF113, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step SF109. For example, if the performance data read in step SF109 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step SF103.

Next, using Figure 121 (b), we will explain the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 1500. This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the second sub-control unit 1500 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 1400. In step SG101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 1400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 1508.

Next, using Figure 121 (c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500. The second sub-control unit 1500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step SH101, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 1508 described in step SF103 of the second sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 121 (a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SF103, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step SH103, processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Next, we will explain the image control processing of step SF113 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 1500 using Figure 121 (d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step SI101, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 1504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of display area A and display area B of VRAM 1536. As a result, one frame of image stored in the display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 1157. Next, the CPU 1504 sets the ROM coordinates (source address in ROM 1506), VRAM coordinates (destination address in VRAM 1536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 1534 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from ROM 1506 to VRAM 1536. The VDP 1534 transfers the image data from ROM 1506 to VRAM 1536 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 1534 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 1504.

In step SI103, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 1534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step SI105; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input. In step SI105, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, CPU 1504 instructs VDP 1534 on image data information constituting the display image (VRAM 1536 coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of VRAM 1536 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 1536 in step SI101. VDP 1534 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step SI107, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 1504 instructs the VDP 1534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 1534 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 1504.

In step SI109, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 1534 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step SI111; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step SI111, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 1508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1) and the process ends.

<<Embodiment C>> An example of a circuit board that can be applied to various gaming machines will be described. Figure 122(A) is a plan view of the circuit board 1 of this embodiment, and Figure 122(B) is a bottom view of the circuit board 1. Figure 122(C) is a side view of the circuit board 1, viewed from the arrow A in Figure 122(A). Figure 123(A) is a side view of the circuit board 1, viewed from the arrow B in Figure 122(A). Figure 123(B) is a side view of the circuit board 1, viewed from the arrow C in Figure 122(C). In the figures, arrows X, Y, and Z indicate the longitudinal direction, width direction, and thickness direction (height direction) of the circuit board 1, respectively.

The circuit board 1 is a lighting board that can be used, for example, as the door-side lighting board 734 (Figure 88) of embodiment B. The circuit board 1 includes a board 10, a plurality of circuit components 11, circuit components 20, and circuit components 30. The board 10 is a rectangular board extending in a strip shape in the X direction, and has a board surface 10a and an opposite board surface 10b. The board 10 is a rigid board, but may also be a flexible board.

In this embodiment, the circuit components 11 are chip-type LEDs (light-emitting elements). The circuit components 11 are surface-mounted on the substrate surface 10a. In this embodiment, multiple circuit components 11 are arranged in a single row in the X direction. However, the circuit components 11 may also be arranged in two or more rows in the X direction.

Circuit components 20 and 30 are both connectors to which harnesses are connected, and are mounted on board surface 10b. Circuit components 20 and 30 are spaced apart in the X direction; in this embodiment, circuit component 20 is mounted on one end of board 10 in the X direction, and circuit component 30 is mounted on the other end of board 10 in the X direction.

The circuit component 20 has multiple leads 20a. Each lead 20a passes through a through-hole in the board 10 and protrudes from the board surface 10a. The circuit component 30 has multiple leads 30a. Each lead 30a passes through a through-hole in the board 10 and protrudes from the board surface 10a. The number of leads 30a of the circuit component 30 is greater than the number of leads 20a of the circuit component 20. The leads 20a are arranged in a line in the Y direction, and the leads 30a are also arranged in a line in the Y direction.

Electrode terminals 20b connected to leads 20a are provided within the case portion 20c of circuit component 20. Case portion 20c is made of resin. Case portion 20c of circuit component 20 is positioned within the outline of circuit board 10 when viewed from below. Electrode terminals 30b connected to leads 30a are provided within the case portion 30c of circuit component 30. Case portion 30c is made of resin. Case portion 30c of circuit component 30 is positioned within the outline of circuit board 10 when viewed from below.

The circuit component 11 is positioned in the X direction within region R between lead 20a and lead 20b. The length of region R in the X direction is, for example, within the range of 1/3 to 4/5 of the length of the substrate 10 in the X direction. The center position of region R in the X direction may coincide with the center position of the substrate 10 in the X direction. The center position of region R in the X direction may be offset from the center position of the substrate 10 in the X direction toward lead 20a, or conversely, it may be offset from the center position of the substrate 10 in the X direction toward lead 30a.

In the illustrated example, the Y-direction position of the circuit component 11 is the center position of the board 10 in the Y-direction. However, the Y-direction position of the circuit component 11 may be shifted from the center position of the board 10 in the Y-direction.

The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the circuit component 11 is length L1. The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 20a is length L2. The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 30a is length L3. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the case portion 20c of the circuit component 20 is length L4. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the case portion 30c of the circuit component 30 is length L5. The relationship between these lengths is L2 > L1, L3 > L1, L4 > L2, L5 > L3. Note that L2 = L3, or alternatively, L2 > L3, or L3 > L2 may also be true.

The base plate 10 may be fixed to the installation location of the gaming machine with screws from the base plate surface 10a side. In this case, the height from the base plate surface 10a to the screw head may be shorter, longer, or the same as L1, L2, or L3. The base plate 10 may also be fixed to the installation location with nails or the like rather than with screws.

In this embodiment, since L2, L3 > L1, leads 20a and 30a are also used as protective components for circuit component 11. Figure 124 (A) shows an example of this. In the example shown, circuit board 1 is provided behind gaming machine component 200, with board surface 10a facing gaming machine component 200. Gaming machine component 200 is, for example, a lens cover, which is an exterior component, and circuit board 1 is used as a component that irradiates light onto the front of the gaming machine through lens cover 200.

When a load indicated by arrow F acts on the gaming machine component 200, the gaming machine component 200 comes into contact with and presses against the circuit board 1. In this case, lead 20a or 30a abuts against the gaming machine component 200 before the circuit component 11, preventing the gaming machine component 200 from contacting the circuit component 11. This protects the circuit component 11. When the circuit component 11 is mounted on the board 10 by surface mounting, the bonding strength may be low, but even in such cases the circuit component 11 can be protected.

Next, the circuit board 1 may be temporarily placed on a flat portion (horizontal surface) of the gaming machine during component assembly or maintenance work. Figure 124 (B) shows an example of this. In the example shown, the circuit board 1 is placed on the flat surface of the bottom 210 of the gaming machine, with the board surface 10a facing the bottom 210. In this example, the bottom 210 is a plate-shaped member (bottom plate). In this case, because the leads 20a or 30a abut against the bottom 210, the circuit component 11 is spaced apart from the bottom 210, preventing the circuit component 11 from coming into contact with the bottom 210. This protects the circuit component 11.

Figures 125 and 126 show specific examples of the bottom 210 and examples of how a circuit component 11 is temporarily placed on the bottom 210. Figure 125 shows an example in which a circuit board 1 is temporarily placed on the flat surface of the bottom 210A of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. The bottom 210A is the bottom plate of the outer frame. Figure 126 shows an example in which a circuit board 1 is temporarily placed on the flat surface of the bottom 210B of the main body of a slot machine. The bottom 210B is the bottom plate of the main body. In such cases, the leads 20a or 30a can protect the circuit component 11.

The bottom 210 on which the circuit board 1 can be temporarily placed may be at least partially made of a non-metallic material. Such a material may be made of wood, resin, or a metal material with a non-conductive paint applied to the surface. Even if the leads 20a or 30a come into contact with the non-metallic portion of the bottom 210, static electricity will not be conducted, preventing electrical damage to the circuit components 20 and 30. The circuit board 1 may also be temporarily placed on a wooden work desk or the like outside the gaming machine. If the circuit board 1 is fixed to the gaming machine with nails, the circuit board 1 without screws will be temporarily placed on the bottom 210 or work desk. Even if the circuit board 1 is fixed with screws, the screws will be removed with a screwdriver before the circuit board 1 is placed on the bottom 210 or work desk.

<Relationship with Solder> Next, refer to Figure 127. The lead 20a is joined to the substrate 10 by solder 40. The solder 40 has a truncated cone shape centered on the lead 20a. The height from the substrate surface 10a to the tip of the solder 40 is length L2'. The relationship between lengths L2', L2, and L1 may be L2 > L2' > L1. In the state shown in Figures 124(A) and 124(B), the lead 20a abuts the gaming machine component 200 or the bottom 210 before the solder 40, thereby protecting the solder 40. Even if the tip of the lead 20a is bent or broken, the solder 40 comes into contact with the mounting surface, preventing damage to the circuit component 11. Although not shown, the same applies to the relationship between the lead 30a and its solder.

<Example of leads on one side> In the example of Figures 122(A) to 123(B), an example was described in which leads were provided on both sides of the board 10 in the X direction, but the circuit component 11 can also be protected if the leads are provided on one side. Figures 128(A) and 128(B) show an example of this. The circuit board 1 in this example does not have a circuit component 30. The rest of the configuration is the same as the example of Figures 122(A) to 123(B).

In the example of Figure 128(A), the circuit board 1 is provided behind the gaming machine component 200, with the board surface 10a facing the gaming machine component 200. As in the example of Figure 124(A), the gaming machine component 200 is, for example, a lens cover, which is an exterior component, and the circuit board 1 is used as a component that irradiates light onto the front of the gaming machine through the lens cover 200.

When a load indicated by arrow F acts on the gaming machine component 200, the gaming machine component 200 comes into contact with and presses against the circuit board 1. In this case, the lead 20a and the end of the board 10 (the right end in the figure) come into contact with the gaming machine component 200 before the circuit component 11 does, preventing the gaming machine component 200 from contacting the circuit component 11. This protects the circuit component 11. When the circuit component 11 is mounted on the board 10 by surface mounting, the bonding strength may be low, but even in such cases the circuit component 11 can be protected. In this way, the circuit component 11 can be protected even in a configuration in which the lead 20a is provided only on one end of the board 10.

The example in Figure 128 (B) shows an example in which the circuit board 1 is placed on the bottom 210 of the gaming table, with the board surface 10a facing the bottom 210, and shows an example in which the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed on the bottom 210, similar to the example in Figure 124 (B).

In this case, because the lead 20a and the end of the substrate 10 (the right end in the figure) are in contact with the bottom 210, the circuit component 11 is spaced apart from the bottom 210, preventing the circuit component 11 from coming into contact with the bottom 210. This protects the circuit component 11. In this way, even in a configuration in which the lead 20a is provided only on one end of the substrate 10, the circuit component 11 can be protected.

<Another example of circuit component> Another example of circuit board 1 will now be described. Figure 129(A) is a plan view of circuit board 1A of this embodiment, and Figure 129(B) is a bottom view of circuit board 1A. Figure 129(C) is a side view of circuit board 1A, viewed from arrow A in Figure 129(A). Figure 130 is a side view of circuit board 1, viewed from arrow B in Figure 129(A). Components that are substantially similar to those in circuit board 1 are given the same reference numerals and will not be described again.

Circuit components 12 are surface-mounted on the board surface 10a of the substrate 10. In this embodiment, the circuit components 12 are chip resistors. The circuit components 12 are positioned at the center of the board surface 10a in the X and Y directions.

Multiple circuit components 13 are mounted on the board surface 10b of the board 10. The circuit components 13 are bullet-shaped LEDs (light-emitting elements). Two circuit components 13 are spaced apart in the X direction. The circuit components 13 have leads 13a. The leads 13a pass through through holes in the board 10 and protrude from the board surface 10a. Note that the two circuit components 13 may be a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element of an optical sensor instead of bullet-shaped LEDs.

Circuit components 50 are mounted on the board surface 10b of the board 10. The circuit components 50 are connectors to which a harness is connected. The circuit components 50 are arranged at one end of the board 10. The circuit components 50 have multiple leads 50a. Each lead 50a passes through a through-hole in the board 10 and protrudes from the board surface 10a. The leads 50a are arranged in a row in the Y direction.

Electrode terminals 50b connected to leads 50a are provided within the case portion 50c of the circuit component 50. The case portion 50c is made of resin. The electrode terminals 50b may protrude outward from the edge of the substrate 10, or may be sized to fit within the edge of the substrate 10. The case portion 50c of the circuit component 50 has a size that extends beyond the outline of the substrate 10 in the X and Y directions when viewed from below the circuit board 1A. The substrate 10 may also be surrounded on at least two sides by a certain member having claws that engage with the circuit component 50, which is a connector that protrudes outward. This configuration may also be applied to the circuit board 1.

The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the circuit component 12 is length L1'. The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 50a is length L2". The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 13a is length L6. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the case portion 50c of the circuit component 50 is length L5'. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the circuit component 13 is length L7. The relationship between these lengths is L6 > L1', L2" > L1', L2" > L6, L7 > L5. Note that L2" = L6 or L2" < L6 may also be true.

In this embodiment, since the relationship of L2" and L6 > L1' holds, the leads 50a and 13a are also used as protective members for the circuit component 12. Figure 131 shows an example in which the circuit board 1A is placed on the bottom 210 of the gaming table, with the board surface 10a facing the bottom 210, and shows an example in which the circuit board 1A is temporarily placed on the bottom 210, similar to the example in Figure 124 (B).

In this case, lead 50a and one of the two leads 13a abut against the bottom 210. The other of the two leads 13a is spaced apart from the bottom 210. The circuit component 12 is spaced apart from the bottom 210, preventing the circuit component 12 from coming into contact with the bottom 210. This protects the circuit component 12.

Next, another example configuration in which a circuit component protrudes from the board 10, such as circuit component 50, will be described with reference to Figures 132(A) to 132(C). Figure 132(A) is a plan view of circuit board 1B of this embodiment, and Figure 132(B) is a bottom view of circuit board 1B. Figure 132(C) is a side view of circuit board 1B, viewed from arrow A in Figure 132(A). Components that are substantially similar to those in circuit board 1A are assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again.

In circuit board 1B, circuit component 50 is located at the center of the board 10 in the longitudinal direction (X direction) and at the end of the board 10 in the lateral direction (Y direction). The case portion 50c of circuit component 50 protrudes beyond the outline of the board 10 in the Y direction, and the circuit board 1B can stand on its own by placing the board surface 10b downward and the case portion 50c in contact with the mounting surface. Circuit component 13 is mounted on board surface 10a, and its leads 13a protrude from board surface 10b.

Because the tips of the leads 50a and circuit components 13 protrude further from the board surface 10a than the circuit components 12, the circuit components 12 can be protected from gaming machine components such as a lens cover that covers the board surface 10a side of the circuit board 1B.

In addition, as shown in Figure 133, the circuit board 1B can be placed with the board surface 10b facing downwards on the bottom 210. In this case, the case portion 50c is grounded to the bottom 210, allowing the circuit board 1B to stand on its own. Even if the bottom 210 is made of metal, the leads 13a do not come into contact with the bottom 210, so there is no risk of the circuit components 13 being damaged by static electricity. The same applies when temporarily placing the circuit board 1B on a metal workbench.

<Other embodiments> The circuit components mounted on the board 10 may be resistors, capacitors, LEDs, diodes, FETs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, 7-segment displays, switches, sensors, connectors, and other components that can be mounted on a printed circuit board.

The board surface 10a does not need to be provided with circuit components that are higher from the board surface 10a than the length of the leads 20a or 30a. If the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed somewhere with the board surface 10a side down, none of the circuit components on the board surface 10a will be damaged.

The imaginary line connecting any two of the multiple leads 20a and the imaginary line connecting any two of the multiple leads 30a may be parallel. In the above embodiment, these two imaginary lines are oriented in the Y direction and are parallel. This can improve the stability of the circuit board 1 when it is temporarily placed.

The length L4 from the board surface 10b to the tip of the circuit component 20 may be longer than the length L2. When temporarily placing the circuit board 1, this guides the worker to place it with the board surface 10a facing downwards.

As with circuit board 1A, when circuit board 1A is viewed from the board surface 10a side, part of the circuit components 50 may be visible. The circuit components 50 can be seen from the side opposite to board surface 10b, which is the mounting surface.

The substrate 10 may be surrounded on at least two sides by a certain member, and the certain member may be configured to contact a circuit component 20, 30, or 50 of the substrate 10. The certain member may be positioned by the circuit component. The certain member may have a claw portion, and the claw portion may be configured to engage with the circuit component. The certain member may be engaged with the circuit component.

<Summary of embodiment C>Embodiment C discloses at least the following gaming machines:

Item 1. A gaming machine equipped with a certain board (10), the certain board having a first surface (10a) and a second surface (10b) opposite the first surface, a first circuit component (11) mounted on the first surface, a second circuit component (20) mounted on the second surface, a second lead (20a) of the second circuit component protruding from the first surface, a first length (L1) representing the height from the first surface to the tip of the first circuit component, a second length (L2) representing the height from the first surface to the tip of the second lead, the second length (L2) being longer than the first length (L1). This embodiment provides a gaming machine with a distinctive board. When the certain board is attached to the gaming machine, even if an object approaches the first surface, the second lead will come into contact with the object first, preventing damage to the first circuit component. Furthermore, when a certain circuit board is removed from the gaming machine and placed with the first side facing down on a substantially horizontal part of the gaming machine or on a desk to check for fraud, clean, or perform maintenance, the second lead prevents the first circuit component from coming into contact with the desk, preventing damage to the first circuit component.

Item 2. The gaming machine described in Item 1, further comprising a bottom plate (210), configured so that when the certain board is removed and placed on the flat surface of the bottom plate with the first surface facing down, the first circuit component does not come into contact with the bottom plate. According to this embodiment, when checking for tampering, cleaning, maintenance, etc., the certain board can be removed from the gaming machine and placed on the bottom plate with the first surface facing down, preventing damage to the first circuit component.

Item 3. The gaming machine described in Item 2, wherein at least a portion of the base plate is non-metallic, and the certain board is a board that can be placed on the non-metallic portion of the bottom plate with the first surface facing down. According to this embodiment, even if the second lead comes into contact with the non-metallic portion of the bottom plate, static electricity is not conducted, and electrical damage to the second circuit component can be prevented.

Item 4. The gaming machine according to any one of Items 1 to 3, wherein a third circuit component (30) is mounted on the second surface, a third lead (30a) of the third circuit component protrudes from the first surface, the height from the first surface to the tip of the third lead is a third length (L3), the third length (L3) is longer than the first length (L1), the third lead (30a) is spaced apart from the second lead (20a) in a certain direction (X), and the position of the first circuit component (11) in the certain direction (X) is between the second lead (20a) and the third lead (30a). According to this embodiment, when a certain board is attached to the gaming machine, damage to the first circuit component sandwiched between the second lead and the third lead can be prevented. Furthermore, when a certain circuit board is removed from the gaming machine and placed on a substantially horizontal portion of the gaming machine or on a desk with the first surface facing down, the second and third leads make it easier to distance the first circuit component from that portion or the desk, preventing damage to the first circuit component.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments. Various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the spirit of the present invention, and such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), slot machines, enclosed gaming machines, and medal-less slot machines.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reels 113 Pattern display window 130-132 Bet buttons 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop buttons 156 Performance button 157 Performance image display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 Main control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit

Claims (3)

A gaming machine having a base plate having a first surface and a second surface,
a base material of the certain substrate is light transmissive;
the second surface is a surface opposite to the first surface across the substrate,
the first surface has a first region where no wiring pattern is formed and a third region where the wiring pattern is formed,
the second surface has a second region where no wiring pattern is formed and a fourth region where the wiring pattern is formed,
the wiring pattern is opaque to light,
In the first case, in a certain region (hereinafter referred to as a "fifth region") of the first region that overlaps with the second region when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the second surface and the first surface, at least a part of light traveling from the second surface toward the second surface is visible when viewed from the first surface side;
In the first case, in a region (hereinafter referred to as a "sixth region") of the first region that overlaps with the fourth region when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the second surface and the first surface, at least a part of light traveling from the second surface toward the second surface is visible when viewed from the first surface side;
In the first case, the brightness of the fifth region is higher than the brightness of the sixth region;
When the certain substrate is installed, the brightness of the sixth region is lower than the brightness of the third region.
A gaming machine characterized by the above. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The first case is a case where sunlight, light from an indoor lamp, or light from a light-emitting means is irradiated onto the second surface of the certain substrate that has been moved from its mounting position.
A gaming machine characterized by the above. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The gaming machine is equipped with the light emitting means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.